0% found this document useful (0 votes)
170 views545 pages

EPL C8000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

traminer
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
170 views545 pages

EPL C8000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

traminer
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 545

SERVICE MANUAL

Color Laser Printer


EPSON ColorPage EPL-C8000

®
4009762
Notice
o All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
o All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would
greatly appreciate being informed of them.
o The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
o All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would
greatly appreciate being informed of them.
o The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences
thereof.

EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.

Copyright © 1999 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION. Printed in Japan.


PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1)Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.

DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in
performing procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.

WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.

The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.

DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY
MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED
FOR ALL ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON
POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.

WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/
RATING PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT
CONNECT IT TO THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS
ANTI-STATIC WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF
SECOND-SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NONAPPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE
EPSON WARRANTY.
About this manual
This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of EPL-C8000. The
instructions and procedures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on
the preceding page.

Manual Configuration Symbols Used in This Manual


This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix. Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide
CHAPTER 1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger
Provides a general overview and specifications of the present during a procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when
product. they are used, and always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING
CHAPTER 2. OPERATING PRINCIPLES messages.
Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical
operations of the product. Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice
CHAPTER 3. DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY AND ADJUSTMENT or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in
Describes the step-by-step procedures for injury or loss of life.
disassembling/assembling and adjusting the product.
CHAPTER 4. DIAGNOSTICS Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice,
Provides Epson-approved methods for diagnostics. or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in
CHAPTER 5. TROUBLESHOOTING damage to, or destruction of, equipment.
Provides the step-by-step procedures for
May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure,
troubleshooting.
practice or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task
CHAPTER 6. MAINTENANCE
efficiently. It may also provide additional information that is
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the
related to a specific subject, or comment on the results
lists of Epson-approved lubricants and adhesives NOTE achieved through a previous action.
required for servicing the product.
APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for
reference:
• Connector pin assignments
• Electric circuit boards components layout
• Exploded diagram
• Electrical circuit boards schematics
Abbreviation
ADC = Automatic Density Control FDR = Feeder OPC = Organic Photo Conductor
AG = Analog Ground FG = Frame Ground P/H = Paper Handling
ASSY = Assembly FRU = Field Replaceable Unit P/R = Pressure Roll
AUX. = Auxiliary GND = Ground PCDC = Pixel Count Dispense Control
B/W = Black and White H/R = Heat Roll Pixel = Picture Cell
BCR = Bias Charge Roll Hex = Hexadecimal PPM = Prints Per Minute
Bk = Black HVPS = High Voltage Power Supply PV = Print Volume
BK = Black I/F = Interface PWB = Printed Wiring Board
BTR = Bias Transfer Roll IBT = Intermediate Belt Transfer R = Right
BUR = Back Up Roll ID = Image Density (or Identification) R/H = Right Hand
C = Cyan L = Left REGI. = Registration
CART. = Cartridge L/H = Left Hand ROS = Raster Output Scanner
CCW = Counterclockwise L/P = Low Paper RTN = Return
CL. = Clutch LD = Laser Diode SEF = Short Edge Feed
CLN = Cleaning (or Cleaner) LEF = Long Edge Feed SG = Signal Ground
CLK = Clock LVPS = Low Voltage Power Supply SNR = Sensor
CONT. = Controller M = Magenta SOL. = Solenoid
CR = Charge Roll MAG. = Magnetic SOS = Start Of Scan
CRU = Customer Replaceable Unit MCU = Machine Control Unit SPI = Scans Per Inch
CRUM = CRU Monitor MECH. = Mechanical SYNC. = Synchronous
CW = Clockwise MOT. = Motor TC = Toner Concentration
DB = Developing Bias MSI = Multi Sheet Inserter TEMP. = Temperature
DEVE. = Developer N/F = Normal Force TR = Transfer
DIAG. = Diagnostic N/P = No Paper TRANS. = Transport
dpi = dots per inch NVM = Non Volatile Memory WDD = Wide Range Dynamic Damper
DTS = Detach Saw O/H = Option Hinge XERO. = Xerographic
ELEC. = Electric OHP = Overhead Projector Y = Yellow
EP = Electrophotography (In this manual, OHP means OHP film) YMCBk = Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
Safety Information
To prevent accidents during a maintenance procedure, strictly observe Power Supply
the Warnings and Cautions. Do not do anything that is dangerous or not
within the scope of this document.
Before starting any service procedure, switch off the printer power and
Do not do anything that is dangerous even if not specifically described
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. If you must service the
in this manual. In addition to the descriptions below and those given in
printer when the power is applied, be aware of the potential for electrical
this manual, there are many situations and circumstances that are
shock and do all tasks by following the procedures in this manual.
dangerous. Be aware of these when you are working with the printer.

Do not touch any live part unless you are instructed to


do so by a service procedure. The LVPS power supply
switch/inlet part is live even when the power switch has
been turned off. Do not touch any live part.
Mechanical Components Safety Components
If you service a driving assembly (e.g., gears), first turn off the power The printer is equipped with safety components (e.g., interlock
and unplug the power cord. Then manually rotate the assembly. switches, fuses, thermostat) and safety switches for protecting users
and service personnel from injury and the equipment from damage.
Do not touch the driving part (e.g., gears) while the
assembly (printer) is being driven. The printer has two interlock switches, two safety switches and two
interlock connectors that serve as the main safety mechanism.
o Front Cover Switch R
This switch is turned off when the Front Cover Assembly is opened.
It cuts off the power supply (24VDC, 5VDC-LD) from the power
supply unit to stop all operations and disconnects the output (5VDC-
LD) circuit from the power supply and stops the laser beam
emission.
This switch consists of the following two switches:
n A switch that cuts off the power supply (24VDC, 5VDC-LD) to
the control circuits and related parts.
n A switch that directly cuts off the power supply circuit (5VDC-LD)
to the laser beam output circuit.
o Front Cover Switch L
This is a safety switch. This switch is turned off when the Front
Cover Assembly is opened, causing the printer without control units
to stop operating.
o Top Cover Switch
This is an interlock switch that directly cuts off the power supply
(5VDC-LD) circuit to the laser beam output circuit. This switch is
turned off when the Top Cover Assembly is removed, cutting off the
output (5VDC-LD) circuit from the power supply unit and stopping
the laser beam emission.
o Exit Chute Switch
This switch is a safety switch. This switch is turned off when the Exit
Upper Assembly (the cover on the upper left side of the printer) is
opened.
o P/J91 (Connector that connects the Main Harness Assembly and
Registration Harness Assembly)
This is an interlock connector that cuts off the power supply
(24VDC, 5VDC-LD) to the control circuit and related parts.
This connector is disconnected when the Main P/H Assembly (pull-
out type unit on the right side of the printer) is pulled out, cutting off
the output (24VDC, 5VDC-LD) from the power supply and stopping
the printer operation without control units.
o P/J71 (Connector that connects the Fuser Connector and Fuser
Harness Assembly)
This is an interlock connector that cuts off the power supply
(24VDC, 5VDC-LD) to the control circuit and related parts.
This connector is disconnected when the Fuser Assembly (pull-out
type unit on the left side of the printer) is pulled out, cutting off the
output (24VDC, 5VDC-LD) from the power supply and stopping the
printer operation without control units.
Laser Beam NOTE: The laser beam has a narrower frequency band and more
coherent phases than any other light (sunlight, electric light).
It has excellent monochromaticity and convergence. A thin
The printer has two interlock switches: the Front Cover Switch R and
laser beam reaches long distances. Because of its
the Top Cover Switch. The purpose of these switches is to turn off the
convergence characteristic, the laser beam converges into
laser beam emission if any of the printer covers have been opened; this
one point, causing high density and high temperature. A
protects the user or service personnel from exposure to the laser beam
laser beam is harmful to the human body.
from the ROS Assembly.
NOTE: The laser beam in this printer is invisible.
A laser beam may be emitted during a maintenance operation. Do not
turn on these interlock switches simultaneously under any
circumstances except in a normal operation.

n Do not expose yourself to the laser beam to prevent


injury (blindness).
n Do not open the cover that has the laser beam
warning label.
n If you disassemble or assemble the printer, turn off
the power.
n If you need to work on the printer with power applied,
strictly follow the instructions in this manual.
n If you have to activate the printer while pressing the
Front Cover Switch R by hand or with a tool, remove
the Top Cover. (Do not turn on these interlock
switches simultaneously under any circumstances
except in a normal operation.)
n Understand how the laser beam functions and take
maximum precautions not to injure yourself or anyone
around you.
High Temperature Assembly Parts
To prevent you from becoming injured or burned, do the following: To prevent you from becoming injured, keep the following in mind:
Before working with a high temperature Assembly (e.g., Fuser
o When handling heavy parts (including the printer itself), use good
Assembly), turn off the power, unplug the power cord and wait until it
posture to protect your back whenever you lift, move or place parts.
cools down.

Do not lift, move or place heavy parts in a body posture


The high temperature Assembly is very hot
that is likely to cause injury to yourself or cause the
immediately after any printer operations. Wait at least
part to drop.
40 minutes before you start working on the printer.

o Be careful not to injure yourself with the sharp edges of the parts.
o Do not work with wet or oily hands-you may drop a part or injure
yourself. Dry your hands first.
o When pulling out a part (including a harness), do not use too much
force. Pull out the part carefully and slowly step by step.
Consumables Improper Printer Use
Some parts may cause a particulate explosion or fire if handled Modifying, revising, tampering with the printer, especially to the safety
improperly. Do not handle these parts near fire or throw into a fire. mechanism, is strictly prohibited in all circumstances.
Some materials (e.g., Developer or Fuser Oil) may cause bodily injury.
Do not swallow or inhale these materials or allow them to come in
contact with the eyes.
Help to protect those around you and follow the prohibitions against
swallowing or inhaling those materials. Be careful to protect the eyes at
all times.
Place a sheet inside or under the printer so that the floor or workbench
is protected.
If the Developer or Fuser Oil gets on your clothing, dry it with a cloth and
wash with clean water.

NOTE: The printer has the following consumable parts:

•Drum Cartridge •Waste Toner Box


•Oil Roll Assembly •Toner Cartridge Y
•Toner Cartridge M •Toner Cartridge C
•Toner Cartridge Bk
Manual Contents

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS


Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Chapter 3 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY / ADJUSTMENT
Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS
Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING
Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE
Appendix
Revision Status

Revision Issued Date Description


Rev. 0 August 07, 1998
1st release
(Preliminary revision)
Rev. A September 28, 1998 2nd release
Rev. B August 23, 1999 The manual is mainly revised on the following points:
[Chapter 1]
• Page 1-4: Paper Out Sensor is added.
• Page 1-6: IBT Cleaner is eliminated from the regularly replaced parts.
• Page 1-30: NOTE is added to Section 1.5.4.
[Chapter 3]
• Page 3-2: Change in Table 3-1.
• Page 3-6: NOTE is added to Section 3.2.3.1 under “Preparation”.
• Page 3-96: Section 3.2.12.21 “FUSER IN SENSOR Removal” is added.
• Page 3-97: Section 3.2.12.22 “FUSER CHUTE FAN Removal” is added.
• Page 3-119: CHECK POINT box is added.
• Page 3-121: New adjustment item “DEVE. SPACER Selection” is added.
[Chapter 4]
• Page 4-1: Change in the procedure for Test Print my MCU PWB.
• Pages 4-3, 4-7, 4-61: DIAGNOSTIC DATA DISK is replaced by SELF
TRAINING KIT (#F728).
[Chapter 7:]
• Fuser relating exploded diagrams and controller are mainly replaced.
CHAPTER

1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

Contents
FEATURES .................................................................................................... 1 PANEL SETTING......................................................................................... 32
SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................... 3 Setting Methods ...................................................................................... 32
Basic Specifications .................................................................................. 3 SelecType Setting Menu List .................................................................. 35
Paper Specification ................................................................................... 8 Details of Menus and Settings ................................................................ 39
Reliability and Durability .......................................................................... 11
Operating Environment (including options) ............................................. 13
Environmental Conditions for Storage and Transportation ..................... 14
Electrical Specification ............................................................................ 15
Process Specifications ............................................................................ 16
Applicable Standards .............................................................................. 16
Consumables and Options ...................................................................... 17
Toner cartridge ................................................................................... 17
DRUM CARTRIDGE ........................................................................... 18
Fuser Oil Roll ...................................................................................... 19
Waste Toner Box ................................................................................ 19
Regularly Replaced Parts........................................................................ 19
Exterior Dimensions ................................................................................ 20
Controller Specification ........................................................................... 21
Controller Board Jumper Settings ........................................................... 21
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................. 22
Parallel Interface Specification ................................................................ 23
Option Interface....................................................................................... 25
CONTROL PANEL....................................................................................... 26
Appearance and Descriptions ................................................................. 26
LED Description ................................................................................. 27
Button Functions ..................................................................................... 28
SERVICE FUNCTIONS................................................................................ 30
Hex dump Mode ...................................................................................... 30
EEPROM Initialization ............................................................................. 30
Formatting the Flash ROM Module ......................................................... 30
Updating the Program ROM.................................................................... 30
ROM Module Copy.................................................................................. 30
Panel Setting Initialization ....................................................................... 31
Maintenance Mode.................................................................................. 31
Error Recovery Operation ....................................................................... 31
EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.1 Features 2. Color management technology


n AcuLaser Color Halftoning included
EPL-C8000 is a non-impact color page printer that makes the most use n RGB multivalue input processing (Controller carries out
of the semi-conductor laser and electrophotographic technology. binarization processing: color mapping, color correction, and
o Engine screening.)
n Enhanced ASIC (AcuLaser Color Halftoning, CCNV)
1. Designed for performance in true business environments. Supports
sizes from A5 to A3W. Printing speed (on A4/Letter) is 4ppm for 3. Data compression technology
color printing, 16ppm for monochrome printing. n Multivalue data compression: reduces RAM use and increses
host-I/F data transfer speed.
2. Supports high-resolution full color (True 600dpi).
4. Firmware Program is executed on the RAM.
3. Can generate high-quality prints on special (dedicated) paper.
At the power on, compressed ROM program data is expanded into
RAM by lPL in the MASK ROM.
4. Supports thick sheets and OHP (dedicated OHP sheets).
n RAM execution increases processing speed (fast access, 64-bit
5. Easy to maintain. processing instead of 32-bit)
n Program compression reduces usage of program memory in
6. 2 Standard paper feed bins= paper tray (150 sheets; A3W) and
ROM
standard universal cassette (250 sheets: A3).
When the optional Large Capacity Paper unit attached, total 5. Bi-directional I/F conforms to IEEE1284 ECP
capacity is up to 1150sheets with 5 bins.
n ECP-based high-speed data transfer (to/from host)
7. Standard paper ejection is face down (up to 250 sheets). Face-up n Printer can return status to host.
ejection is also available (up to 150 sheets).
6. Includes two Type-B interface slots.
o Controller features
7. installation of expansion RAM (DIMMs) provides improvements in
1. Newly developed high-speed controller the following.
n New 64-bit RISC CPU: R4700 - 133MHz n Drawing area for AcuLaser Color Halftoning, Enhanced Micro
n 64-bit high speed memory: SDRAM DIMM Gray.
n Print data processing speed
n 64MB RAM standard: expandable up to 256MB (2 expansion n Resolution
slots)
8. Includes toner-save mode (color, monochrome)

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-1


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

9. ROM update by flash-DIMM installation

10. Includes RIT and Enhanced Micro Gray monochrome technologies


o Software features

1. ESC/Page-Color
n Printer pages: High Speed priority. Color correction and color
adjustment can be set for each object. (But 1 resolution and
screen type [gradation=LPl] per page.)
n Driver page: Fast processing (on fast PC). Color correction and
color adjustment can be set for each object.
n Image: Full color (WYSIWYG).

2. Bidirectional EJL can retrieve printer status and monitor the printer
environment.

3. The following emulation modes are fully compatible with EPL-5700:


LJ4, GL2, ESCP2, FX, I239X, and ESC/Page (monochrome). Figure 1-1. Exterior View of EPL-C8000

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-2


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.2 Specifications Table 1-1. Speed Mode


Print mode Speed mode LT/A4 LEF 2UP (*1) B(LD)/A3 SEF (*2)
This section describes specifications for this printer. B/W Standard mode 16 PPM or more 8PPM or more
Half speed mode 2.7 PPM or more 1.3PPM or more

1.2.1 Basic Specifications Color Standard mode 4 PPM or more 2PPM or more
half speed mode 1.8 PPM or more 0.9PPM or more
o Method: Semi-conductive laser beam scanning and dry
electrophotographic process Notes:
*1. In this mode, the printer prints tow print images on the IBT belt and
o Resolution: 600 DPI the images are transferred in sequence onto two sheets of paper. It
o Print mode: is available for LT/A4 (LEF) or smaller.

n B/W mode: Standard monochrome print mode that supports *2. [LEF, or Long Edge Feed]
The longer edge of the paper is the top toward the paper feed direction.
the fastest speed.
[SEF, or Short Edge Feed]
n Color mode: Color mode which uses the color toner of Y, M, C, The shorter edge of the paper is the top toward the paper feed direction.
and BK. o First print*:
o Speed mode: - Face-up B/W: 20 seconds or less (LT/A4 LEF)
Color: 42.6 seconds or less (LT/A4 LEF)
n Standard mode: Transports paper at the highest speed - Face-down B/W: 24.9 seconds or less (LT/A4 LEF)
supported by the printer. Color: 47.6 seconds or less (LT/A4 LEF)
n Half speed mode: Low speed mode that enables better fusing NOTE:Fist print is defined as the duration taken after receiving the
for thick paper (over 105g/m2) envelopes, start command until outputting the first print. It is applicable
and OHP sheet. when a feeder is selected in the standard mode. (Not applied
o Print Speed: See Table 1-1. during the process control operation.)
o Warm-up time: Within 300 seconds
(at 22 degree Celsius, 58% Rh, rated voltage)

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-3


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o Paper Handling: See Table 1-2.


Table 1-2. Paper Feeding
Capacity
Paper source Available feeder (Thickness) Paper size Available paper thickness
Standard Tray (MSI) *1 *5 150 sheets (16mm) 90 x 139.7 - 330.2 x 457.2 mm 60 - 105g/m2 , 16 - 20 lb (Normal
paper, Recommended paper)
75 sheets 90 x 139.7 - 330.2 x 457.2 mm 105 - 220g/m2

OHP sheet/Labels/Thick paper (Thick paper, Special paper)
20 sheets Envelopes *4
Monarch, C10, DL, C6
Cassette Standard universal Standard feeder 250 sheets (28mm) B5 LEF, Letter LEF, A4 LEF, 60 - 105g/m2 (Normal paper,
Unit cassette B4, A3, Legal, Executive LEF, Recommended paper)
*2 *6 Ledger (B)
A3W cassette (option) Standard feeder 250 sheets (28mm) A3W (304.8 x 420 - 330.2 x 60 - 105g/m2 (Normal paper,
457.2 mm) Recommended paper)
Large capacity paper 250 x 3 feeder 250 sheets (28mm) Letter LEF, A4LEF, B4, A3, 60 - 105g/m2 (Normal paper,
cassette unit (option) (option) Legal LEF, Executive LEF, Recommended paper)
*3 Ledger (B)
Notes:
*1. Change the side guide in the MSI tray for the paper whose width is more than 304.8mm (12”).
*2. Each paper cassette is equipped with 2 separate paper guides, side guide and end guide, which also serves to detect paper size.
They are adjusted by users. Maximum of 4 cassette unit including one standard and optional paper cassettes (250 sheets x 3) can
be used. With these installed, the printer can hold up to 1150 sheets.
*3. Composed of 3 paper cassettes (each holds 250 sheets). This paper cassette unit is compatible with the standard universal
cassette, and either paper cassette can accommodate it.
*4. Note the following points when setting envelopes:
- Must be loaded with the longer edge first.
- Set envelopes with their flaps open and set to the rear end toward paper feeding direction.
- The minimum length with a flap open is 143mm.
- The minimum width is 90mm.
*5. Out of paper sensor installed.
*6. Out of paper sensor and near end sensor installed. Near end sensor is actuated when the remaining paper is 40 ± 30 sheets*.
* Applicable to paper of 64g/m2.

o Paper Size: See Table 1-3 in the next page.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-4


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 1-3. Paper Size Availability


Paper setting orientation
2UP mode
Paper Size Standard tray Notes
Standard cassette A3W cassette availability
(MSI)
Normal paper • LEF: Long edge is loaded first.
A3W 328 x 453mm SEF SEF Unavailable • SEF: Short edge is loaded first.
A3 297 x 420mm SEF SEF Unavailable • 2UP is available only for paper size of LT(LEF) or
smaller. For custom size paper, paper length along
A4 210 x 297mm LEF LEF Available
the loading direction must be 8.5 inch or shorter. As
A5 148 x 210mm LEF Available for envelopes, the total length including the opened
B4 257 x 364mm SEF SEF Unavailable flap part must be 8.5 inch or shorter.
B5 182 x 257mm LEF Available • The minimum size of paper set in the standard
I-B5 176 x 250 LEF Available universal paper cassette is EXE (LEF).
• The maximum size of paper set in the MSI tray is
8.5 x 11”
LT LEF LEF Available 330.2 x 457.2 mm (13” x 18”).
(215.9 x 279.4mm)
• When setting envelopes (LEF*), open their flaps and
5.5 x 8.5”
HLT LEF Available set the rear ends of the flaps toward paper feeding
(139.7X215.9mm)
direction.
8.5 x l4” • A3W cassette have capability for only A3W paper.
LG SEF SEF Unavailable
(215.9X355.6mm)
7.25 x 10.5”
EXE LEF LEF Available
(184.15X266.7mm)
8.5 x 13”
GLG SEF Unavailable
(215.9X330.2mm)
8 x 10.5”
GLT LEF Available
(203.2 x 266.7mm)
11 x 17”
B (LD) SEF SEF Unavailable
(279.4 x 431.8mm)
F4 210 x 330 SEF Unavailable
Special paper
8.5 x 11”
OHP Sheet LEF Available
(210 x 297mm)
3 7/8” x 71/2”
MON LEF* Available
(98.43 x 190.5mm)
41/8 x 91/2
C10 LEF* Available
(104.78 x 241.3mm)
DL 110 x 220mm LEF* Available
C6 114 x 162 LEF* Available

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-5


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o Paper aligning: Single side aligning (front side) for all sizes Notes:
(both standard tray (MSI) and each cassette) *1. The minimum size available for FD ejection is 182 mm toward paper
o Consumables: feeding direction.
*2. FU*2 means face-up ejection for OHP sheet, thick paper, and envelopes.
n TONER CARTRIDGE (Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow)
o Dimensions (without option):
n DRUM CARTRIDGE (including one WASTE TONER BOX)
728 (W)* mm x 641 (D)* mm x 490 (H) mm (tolerances: ± 1%)
n WASTE TONER BOX
* When the standard tray (MSI) and Output tray (FU) are stored.)
n OIL ROLL
o Weight: 68.4 kg ± 1% (without option)
o Regular replaced parts:
o Voltage: 110V/120V ± 10%, 50/60Hz ± 3Hz
n MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY
220V/240V ± 10%, 50/60Hz ± 3Hz
n Air filter (replaced with the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY
n 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY o Power consumption, Rated current: See Table 1-5.
o Paper Output:
Table 1-5. Power Consumption Specifications
n Face-down (FD):
Power consumption • Average: 400Wh or less
250 sheets (B5/EXE or larger, up to 105g/m2or 28lb Operating (color)
• Maximum: 1100W or less (Fuser: On)
n Face-up (FU):
• Average: 500Wh or less
150 sheets (smaller than A4), 50 sheets (A4 or larger) Operating (B/W)
• Maximum: 1100W or less (Fuser: On)
See Table 1-4 for the FD availability for each paper size. • Average: 250Wh or less
Standby mode • Maximum: 1000W or less (Fuser: On)
Table 1-4. Face-Down Output Availability 100W or less (Fuser: Off)
Paper Size FD Availability Paper Size FD Availability *1 • Average: 200Wh or less
Normal paper A3W Available HLT Unavailable Energy save mode
• Maximum: 1000W or less (Fuser: On)
*1
A3 Available LG Available 100W or less (Fuser: Off)
A4 Available EXE Available • Average: 45Wh or less
Energy save mode
A5 Unavailable GLG Available • Maximum: 1000W or less (Fuser: On)
*2
100W or less (Fuser: Off)
B4 Available GLT Available
Rated current • 100 V: 11A or less (at rated voltage)
B5 Available B(LD) Available
• 115V: 10A or less (at rated voltage)
LT Available F4 Available
• 240V: 5A or less (at rated voltage)
I-B5 Unavailable
Special paper OHP sheet FU *2 C10 FU *2 Notes:
Card stock FU *2 DL FU *2 *1. Saves more energy than in standby mode.Time required for warning up is
MON FU *2 C6 FU *2 shorter.
*2. Completely non-operating condition. Complies with the Energy Star.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-6


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o Product life
n Printer:
Approximately 180,000 printed pages on A4 LEF (450,000
images) or five years, whichever comes first.
n Standard tray (MSI): 72,000 sheets
n 250 sheets x 3 feeders: 135,000 sheets (45,000 sheets x 3)
o Acoostic Noise: Operating = 54.8dB (A) or less
Stand-by = 38.3dB (A) or less
Energy Save mode 1 = 38.3dB (A) or less
Energy Save mode 2 = 35.0dB (A) or less
o Ozone emission: 0.02 ppm (time waited average value) or less.
o Toxicity: Photo conductor, toner, carrier, plastic material
have no effect on human body.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-7


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.2.2 Paper Specification n Paper with labels that come off and stick easily.
o Paper specifications: See Table 1-6. n Paper with glue, staples, or paper clips attached.
n Special ink-jet paper (Super Fine Paper, glossy film, and so
Table 1-6. Paper Specifications on.)
Paper Type
n OHP sheets for other color laser printers, monochrome
Recommended paper 4024 paper (B/W), X-pression paper (color)
printers, and photocopiers.
Normal Paper Normal copier paper, Recycled paper,
60g/m 2 - 105g/m 2 (16lb - 28lb) n Paper that has gone through other color laser printers,
Special Paper OHP film, Card stock, Labels, Color paper, Thick monochrome printers, and photocopiers.
paper (105g/m2 - 220g/m2), DTP paper , Envelopes
n Pasted paper
NOTE: lb: Ream Weight = lb/500sheets/17” x 22”
1g/m2 = 0.2659763 lb
NOTE: Before purchasing a large amount of paper, try it out and check
that it is properly fed.
NOTE: Avoid using the types of paper listed below to prevent abnormal
printing, paper jam, and printer malfunction.
n Carbon paper, non-carbon paper, thermal paper,
impact paperm, acidic paper
n Paper that has gone through a thermal or an ink-jet printer.
n Paper that is too thick or thin.
n Wet (damp) paper
n Paper to which a special coating has been applied, or colored
paper that has gone through surface process.
n Paper that has been lubricated (too smooth or slippery).
n Paper whose texture is different on the front and back.
n Paper with holes for binders and perforations.
n Paper with irregular shape or not cut with right angles.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-8


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o Paper path classification: See Table 1-7.

Table 1-7. Paper Usability for Each Paper Path


Recom- Special paper
Normal
Paper path mended Thick Envelopes
paper OHP sheet Postcard Labels
paper paper*1 *2
Standard (MSI) tray RF P P P P P P
Standard universal cassette RF P N N N N N
A3W cassette *3 RF P N N N N N
Large capacity paper cassette *3 RF P N N N N N
Notes:
*1. 105 - 220g/m2
*2. MON, C10, DL, C6
*3. Option
*4. RF: Reliable feeding and good image quality
P: Possible, but limited to paper generally available
N: Not supported

o Guaranteed print area: See Figure 1-2. 4 m m 4 m m


n Maximum guaranteed print area:
Area with margins of 4 mm from each side 4 m m
Applied to a paper size up to 297mm (11.7”) width x 431.8mm
(17”) length.
o Maximum printable area:
320mm (12.6”) width x 449.2mm (17.7”) length
G u a ra n te e d
p r in t a r e a

4 m m

Figure 1-2. Guaranteed Print Area

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-9


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o Printable area: n When the standard universal cassette or large capacity paper
Paper whose width is 304.8mm (12”) or shorter: From the edge cassette unit is used.
Paper whose width is longer than 304.8mm (12”)*: From the point
with a margin of 5mm 3 0 4 .8 m m (1 2 ")
4 m m 2 9 6 .8 m m (1 1 .7 ") 4 m m

4 m m
* When loading paper whose width is more than 304.8 mm (12”), the
standard cassette (MSI) is shifted and print position starts with a
margin of 5 mm from the paper edge (a). This change is applied
to paper loaded from the A3W cassette.

n When the standard tray (MSI) or A3W cassette is used.

4 5 7 .2 m m

4 3 1 .8 m m
3 3 0 .2 m m (1 3 ")
P r in ta b le a r e a

3 2 0 m m (1 2 ,6 ")

(1 8 ")

(1 7 ")
P a p e r fe e d in g d ir e c tio n
4 m m

2 9 7 m m (1 1 .7 ")
4 5 7 .2 m m

P r in ta b le
(a ) a re a S id e g u id e p o s itio n fo r p a p e r w h o s e w id th is 3 0 4 .8 m m ( 1 2 " ) o r le s s
M a x im u m s iz e o f p a p e r : 3 0 4 .8 m m ( 1 2 " ) w id th x 4 5 7 .2 m m ( 1 8 " ) le n g th
(1 8 ")

P r in ta b le a r e a : 2 9 6 .8 m m ( 1 1 .7 " ) w id th x 4 4 9 .2 m m ( 1 7 .7 " ) le n g th
P a p e r fe e d in g d ir e c tio n
G u a r a n te e d p r in t a r e a : 2 9 6 .8 m m ( 1 1 .7 " ) w id th x 4 3 1 .8 m m ( 1 7 " ) le n g th
Figure 1-4. Printable Area 2

S id e g u id e p o s itio n fo r p a p e r w h o s e w id th is 3 0 4 .8 m m o r s h o rte r
S id e g u id e p o s itio n fo r p a p e r w h o s e w id th is m o r e th a n 3 0 4 .8 m m
L e n g th b e tw e e n th e g u id e s is 1 2 .6 m m
M a x im u m s iz e o f p a p e r : 3 3 0 .2 m m ( 1 3 " ) w id th x 4 5 7 .2 m m ( 1 8 " ) le n g th
P r in ta b le a r e a : 3 2 0 .0 m m ( 1 2 .6 " ) w id th x 4 4 9 .2 m m ( 1 7 .7 " ) le n g th
G u a r a n te e d p r in t a r e a : 2 9 7 m m ( 1 1 .7 " ) w id th x 4 3 1 .8 m m ( 1 7 " ) le n g th

Figure 1-3. Printable Area 1

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-10


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.2.3 Reliability and Durability o Print position accuracy:


o MPBF: n Main scan direction: Reference position (c) ± 2.5 mm
- Printer including standard tray (MSI):
n Sub scan direction: Reference position (a) ± 2.0 mm
38,000 pages or more (95,000 images or more*)
- Printer including optional 250 sheet x 3 feeders: See Figure 1-4.
32,000 pages or more (80,000 images or more*)
o Paper skew: See Figure 1-4 and Table 1-9.
NOTE:Figured out based on the MPBF in condition that the job ratio
of the color and monochrome prints is 1 : 1, since 1 page of
color print is formed with 4 images. a b
c
o Paper Feed Reliability: See Table 1-8.

P a p e r fe e d in g d ir e c tio n
Table 1-8. Paper Feed Reliability
Recommended
paper
Normal paper Special paper * P r in t a r e a f
o Standard paper tray
Paper jam rate 1/500 or less 1/100 or less 1/100
Multiple feeding rate 1/80 or less 1/50 or less 1/50
o Standard universal cassette/Large capacity paper cassette (option)
d
Paper jam rate 1/3,000 or less 1/2,000 or less
Multiple feeding rate 1/800 or less 1/500 or less
o A3W cassette (option) e
Paper jam rate 1/2,000 or less
Multiple feeding rate 1/500 or less
Figure 1-5. Paper Skew

* Do not feed envelopes at high temperature to avoid adhering.


Table 1-9. Paper Skew
* Statistics for envelopes only applies to front face feeding under normal
temperature. (back side feeding is not included.) Direction A4 (landscape) A3

NOTE:Paper jam or multiple feeding occurred to the top sheet of an Main scan direction (|c-d|) ±1.5mm(f=196mm) ±3.0mm(f=406mm)

added stack of paper is ignored. Sub scan direction (|a-b|) ±2.0mm(e=271mm) ±2.0mm(f=271mm)

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-11


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o Durability:
n Printer itself:
180,000 sheets (450,000 images) A4 LEF or 5 years, whichever
comes first. Parts regularly replaced by the service is ignored.
* 450,000 for monochrome print only. In color printing, one page is formed
with 4 images, and the value “180,000” sheets is figured out in the
condition that the job ratio of monochrome and color printings is 1:1.
n Standard tray (MSI): 72,000 sheets
n 250sheets x 3 feeders: 135,000 sheets (45,000 sheets x 3)
o MTTR: Within 30 minutes (average)
o Curl height at ejection:
Less than ± 15mm (Color printing with the image ratio of 5 % in non-
aligned condition, which varies depending on the image rate and
aligning pattern.)

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-12


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.2.4 Operating Environment (including options)


o Temperature: 10 to 32 °C
o Humidity: 15% to 85% RH (without condensation)
V e n tila tio n
o Air pressure(altitude): 760hPa or more (2500 meters or less) V e n tila tio n
o Levelness:
n Front- rear direction on the table: 5mm or less (within 641mm)
n Right - left direction on the table:10mm or less (within 560mm) T o p u ll o u t th e p a p e r
T o p u ll o u t th e F U S E R
U N IT to re m o v e p a th u n it to r e m o v e
o Luminosity: 3000 lux or less (not to exposed to direct ja m m e d p a p e r .
ja m m e d p a p e r .
sunlight)
o Surrounding environment:
See Figure 1-6.

T o P u ll o u t th e
s ta n d a rd p a p e r
c a s s e tte u n it w h e n
p u ttin g p a p e r .

* 5 1 1 m m w ith th e fa c e - u p tr a y in s ta lle d .

Figure 1-6. Space


Requirement........................................................................................

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-13


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.2.5 Environmental Conditions for Storage and


Transportation
o temperature and Humidity: See Table 1-10.

Table 1-10. Environmental Conditions 1


Temperature Humidity Guaranty
Normal condition 0 - 35 °C 15 - 80%RH* For 12 months
Extreme condition High: 35 - 40 °C High: 80 - 95%RH* One month (Max.)
Low: -20 - 0 °C Low: 5 - 15%RH*

* Without condensation.
o Storage air pressure (altitude):
0 - 2500m (0 up to 15000m is possible during air shipping, but the
air pressure in the cargo room must be 0.7 hPA or more.)
o Drop test: See Table 1-11.

Table 1-11. Drop Test


Height Test times
Bottom: 457 mm (18”) Once
Free drop Other than bottom: 305mm Once for each surface
(12”) (total of 5 times)
Once for each side (total
Ridge drop 457 mm (18”)
of 4 times)

o Resistance to vibration:
n Frequency: 2 - 500 Hz
n Acceleration: 12.6 m/s 2 (on a vibrating board)*1
n Direction: 3 directions (X, Y, Z) *2
n Duration: 30 minutes (single way)
*1.Overall rms value
*2.Z: vertical, X and Y: horizontal

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-14


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.2.6 Electrical Specification o Leakage current:


o AC line noise: n 100 V model: 0.5mA or less
n Pulse width: 50 to 1000 ns n 120V model: 3.5mA or less
n Pulse polarity: +/− n 220V/240V model: 3.5mmA or less
n Repeat: Not synchronized Condition: 1.5K Ω, 0.15uF
(between non-metallic parts and frames)
n Modes: Common/normal
n Voltage: 1kv (However, the parts can withstand up to
2kv without damage.)
o Instant cutoff: DIP 100% (at rated voltage-10%) for one
cycle with normal print quality.
o Electrostatic durability:
No possibility of any error which affects on print quality under the
following conditions.
n Atmospheric discharging: ± 8KV

n Contact discharging: ± 6KV

o Rush current: 1/2 cycle, 100A or less


o Insulation resistance: 10 M Ω or more
o Dielectric strength:
There is no breakdown when the following voltages are applied for
one minute.
n 100V/120V model:
AC 2000V (Between primary and secondary sides)
AC 1000V (Between primary side and chassis)
n 220V/240V model:
AC 2000V (Between primary and secondary sides)
AC 1500V (Between primary side and chassis)

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-15


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.2.7 Process Specifications n 220V/240V:


IEC825 Class l Laser Product
o Printing method: Dry electrophotographic with 2 ingredients
Using the intermediate belt transfer Note: Laser power: 5mW (rated)
system Wavelength: 785nm +10/-15nm (at 25 °C)
o Light source: Semi-conductive laser beam o EMI
o Exposed object: OPC drum (organic photo conductor) n US: FCCPart15 SubpartB, ClassB(ANSI 63.4/11.4D)
o Charging method: Roller transfer system n Europe: EN55022(CSIPR Pubilication22), ClassB or
EN61000-3-2 (Hamonics)*
o Developing method: Exposed part developing system
EN61000-3-3 (Flicker)*
o Toner: Single-ingredient nonmagnetic toner with * Becomes effective in January, 2001
carrier
o Others
o 1st transfer: Intermediate belt transfer system
n Toner: No effect on human health (OSHA, TSCA, EINECS)
o 2nd transfer: Roller transfer system
n Carrier: No effect on human health
o Fusing: Heat roller system
n OPC: No effect on human health (OSHA)
o Density adjustment: Automatic (can not be set by user)
n Ozone: UL478 (5th edition)
n Material: SWISS environmental law (must contains no Cds)
1.2.8 Applicable Standards
o Safety Standards
n 100V/120V:
UL1950 2nd Edition, CSA C22.2 No. 950-M89
n 220V/240V:
IEC950 2nd Edition/1991 by VDE with GS-mark
o Safety regulations:
n 100V/120V:
FDA21CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter L, Section 1010, 1040

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-16


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.2.9 Consumables and Options 1.2.9.1 Toner cartridge


o Toner Cartridge life: See Table 1-13.
The table below shows the consumables and options available for EPL-
C8000.
Table 1-13. Toner Cartridge Life
Item Life
Table 1-12. Consumables and Options Available for EPL-C8000
Toner Cartridge (Black) 4,500 images
Code Items
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) 6,000 images*
o Option
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) 6,000 images*
Large Capacity Paper Unit C81301*
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) 6,000 images*
250 Sheet Lower Paper Cassette Unit A3W C81302*
* Defined under the conditions that the image ratio is 5% on A4 (LEF)
RIPStation 5100 -
paper during continuous printing, and different in color printing.
o Consumables Also, life varies depending on the image ratio and printer usage,
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) S050016 weather continuous or intermittent.
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) S050017
o Dimensions and weight:
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) S050018
Toner Cartridge (Black) S050019
See Table 1-14. (Tolerances for dimensions and weight are both ±
1%)
Waste Toner Collector (WASTE TONER BOX) S050020
Fuser Oil Roll S052002
Photoconductor unit (DRUM CARTRIDGE) S051061 Table 1-14. Dimensions and Weight
EPSON Color Laser Transparencies (A4) S041175 Unpacked Packed
EPSON Color Laser Transparencies (Letter) S041174 Dimensions 50 mm(W) x 400mm (D) x 85 mm(W) x 435mm (D) x
o Interface card (WxDxH) 54.5mm (H) 80mm (H)
Ethernet Interface Card C82357*, C82362* Weight Black: 0.39kg Black: 0.48kg
C82363*, C82364* Y/M/C: 0.39kg Y/M/C: 0.48kg
32KB Serial Interface Card C82307*
32KB Parallel Interface Card C82310*
Coax Interface Card C82314*
Twinax Interface Card C82315*
LocalTalk Interface Card C82312*
GPIB Interface Card C82313*

* Asterisk varies depending on the market.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-17


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o Environmental conditions for storage and transportation 1.2.9.2 DRUM CARTRIDGE


n Temperature/Humidity: See Table 1-15. o Specifications: See Table 1-16.

Table 1-15. Temperature/Humidity Table 1-16. Photoconductor Unit Specifications


Temperature Humidity Guaranty *1 Specifications
Normal condition 0 - 35 °C 15 - 80% RH *1 24 months Formation Photoconductor, drum cleaner, waste toner box
Extreme condition High: 35 - 45 °C High: 80 - 95% Rh*1 1 month (Max.) Life 20,000 sheets *1 (same for the waste toner box)
Low: -20 - 0 °C Low: 5 - 15% Rh*1 Dimension (WxDxH) • Unpacked: 213 mm(W) x510 mm (D) x 181 mm (H)
*2 • Packed: 318 mm(W) x 618 mm (D) x 280 mm (H)
*1. Without condensation Weight • Unpacked: 2.45 kg
*2. 12 months for unpacked cartridges under the used condition. • Packed: 3.5 kg
o Storage air pressure: Environmental Same as for Toner Cartridge
0 - 2,500m (0 up to 15,000 m is possible during air shipping, but the condition for storage
and transportation
air pressure in the cargo room must be 0.7 hPA or more.)
*1.Defined under the conditions that the image ratio is 5% on A4 (LEF) paper
o Drop test: during continuous printing, and different in color printing. Also, life varies
depending on the image ratio and printer usage, weather continuous or
n Height: 91 cm intermittent printing.
(1 corner, 3 sides, 6 surfaces) *2.Tolerances for dimensions and weight are both ± 1%

o Resistance to vibration:
n Frequency: 5 - 100 Hz
n Acceleration: 0.7G
n Direction: 3 directions (X, Y, Z) *2
n Duration: 50 minutes (single way) for each direction

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-18


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.2.9.3 Fuser Oil Roll 1.2.9.4 Waste Toner Box


o OIL ROLL specifications: See Table 1-17. o WASTE TONER BOX specifications: See Table 1-18.

Table 1-17. Fuser Oil Roll Unit Specifications Table 1-18. Waste Toner Box
Specifications Specifications
Formation Oil roll Formation Waste toner box and others
Life 20,000 sheets *1 Life 20,000 sheets *1
Dimensions (WxDxH) • Unpacked: 75 mm(W) x 421 mm (D) x 48 mm (H) Dimensions (WxDxH) • Unpacked: 80 mm(W) x 444 mm (D) x 131 mm (H)
*2 • Packed: 160 mm(W) x 600 mm (D) x 130 mm (H) *2 • Packed: 149 mm(W) x 495 mm (D) x 192 mm (H)
Weight • Unpacked: 0.68 kg Weight • Unpacked: 0.45 kg
• Packed: 1 kg • Packed: 0.87 kg
Environmental Same as for Toner Cartridge Environmental Same as for Toner Cartridge
condition for storage condition for storage
and transportation and transportation
*1. Varies depending on the operating conditions, as follows: *1. Defined under the conditions that the image ratio is 5% on A4
Operating rate is 120 sheets / day or more: 20,000 sheets (LEF) printing at 4P/J. Life varies depending on the image ratio
Operating rate is 120 sheets / day or less: 11,000 sheets and printer usage, weather continuous or intermittent printing.
*2. Tolerances for dimensions and weight are both ± 1% *2. Tolerances for dimensions and weight are both ± 1%

1.2.10 Regularly Replaced Parts


The regularly replaced parts (replaced by service engineers) and their
lives are as follows.
n MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY 100,000 sheets
(including the ventilation filter)
n 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY: 100,000 sheets

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-19


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.2.11 Exterior Dimensions


Exterior dimensions of the EPL-C8000 are as follows.

6 4 1 m m (D )
5 6 0 m m (W )

4 9 0 m m (H )
7 2 8 m m (W )
1 3 6 7 .4 m m (M a x .)

Figure 1-7. Exterior Dimensions of EPL-C8000

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-20


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.2.12 Controller Specification


- Optional: Postscript3 with RIPStation 5100
- Others: EJL, PJL
• CPU: R4700 (133MHz) RCC
• Enhancement: AcuLaser Color Halftoning: Up to 256 tones per color • Supplementary Software: Status sheet
Technologies: Enhanced Micro Gray: Up to 4 tones per color Test sheet (color sample)
RIT: For B/W Hex dump
• RAM: SDRAM, 64-bit-wide DIMM (168 pins, 3.3V) Maintenance mode (for engine)
Maximum: 256MB
3 RAM slots (1of them is used for standard RAM) 1.2.13 Controller Board Jumper Settings
- Standard: 64MB
- Expansion: 32MB, 64MB, 128MB The controller board configuration of this printer can be set for the target
• ROM: 64 bit-wide market (destination) as indicated below. The settings are made at
- Program: 4MB (DIMM) factory (by jumper resistor).
- Font 2MB
o Market (destination) settings:
• Expansion ROM: 2 slots (ROM DIMM slots)
- Slot A: Flash DIMM, Font ROM module A4/Letter switch
- Slot B: NLSP fonts only
North-South America: Letter, EXE
• Panel: 1-line 20-Character LCD, 6 LEDs, 8 switches
• Interfaces Other markets: A4, B5
- Standard: Parallel (1 Channel)
1EEE-1284-compliant bidirectional; B-type connector;
Compatibility; Nibble; ECP
- Optional: Type-B (2 slots)
• Printer settings: Settings made at panel or by EJL commands.
Memory element: EEPROM (serial type, 16Kbit)
• Printer Modes
- Standard: ESC/Page-Color
ESC/Page (B/W)
LJ4 (B/W)
GL2 (B/W)
ESCP2 (B/W)
FX (B/W)
1239X (B/W)

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-21


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.3 Interface Specifications Figure below shows the locations of these interfaces.

The EPL-C8000 supports the following external interfaces.


o Standard
1. Parallel interface
T y p e -B (A U X 1 ) In te rfa c e
o Optional P a r a lle le In te r fa c e

2. Type-B host interfaces (2 slots)

The host interface usage configurations are as follows.

Table 1-19. Host Interface Usage Configurations


T y p e -B (A U X 2 ) In te rfa c e
Type B (AUX1) Type B (AUX2)
Parallel I/F
I/F I/F
1. Automatic I/F switching Usable Usable Usable
2. Fixed I/F (Parallel) Usable Not Usable Not Usable
3. Fixed I/F AUX1 Not Usable Usable Not Usable
4. Fixed I/F AUX2 Not Usable Not Usable Usable Figure 1-8. Locations of the Interface Slots

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-22


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.3.1 Parallel Interface Specification


o Interface type: IEEE 1284 High-Speed Bi-directional Parallel I/F
D A T A V V A A L L I ID D V V A A L L I ID D
o Operating Modes: Compatibility, Nibble, ECP
S T R B X
(1 ) (2 ) (3 )
o Synchronization: /STROBE pulse 1 3 2

o Connector type: 57RE-40360-830B(D7A)DDK or equivalent


B U S Y
o Plug: Amphenol equivalent
A C K X
o Data transmission timing:Refer to Table 1-20 and Figure 1-9. (4 ) (5 ) (7 ) ( 88 ) ( 6 6 )
8 6
7
o Device ID: See Table 1-21.

Figure 1-9. Data Transmission Timing


Table 1-20. Data Transmission Timing
Min. Typ. Max *

(1) Data hold setup 0.5 us Table 1-21. Device ID


(2) Data hold 0.5 us *1;
(3) Strobe pulse 0.5 us MFG: EPSON;
CMD: PJL, EJL, ESCPL2-00, ESCP9-84, PRPXL24-01, HP
(4) BUSY to STRBX 0 us
ENHANCED PCL5, HPGL2-01, ESCPAGE-04,
(5) STROB to BUSY 0.5 us ESCPAGECOLOR;
(6) BUSY to STRBX 0 us MDL: EPL-C8000;*2
(7) ACKX pulse width 0.5 us 1 us* CLS: PRINTER;
MODE: *3;
(8) ACKX to BUSY 0s
STATUS: *4;
(9) BUSY to PE or ERRX 2 ms* DES: EPSON EPLC-8000;*5
(10) PE or ERRX to BUSY 2 ms*
(11) Power on to signal output valid 05 s *1. Total length of Device ID + 2 (hex)
*2. Model name
(12) PE or ERRX to ACKX 2 ms*
*3. Emulation type defined by currently running emulation CMD. If no
(13) STRBX to ACKX 0 s*
emulation is running, it is “EJL”.
*4. Either “IDLE” or “BUSY”.
*5. Manufacture and product name

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-23


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 1-22. Centrocics Parallel Interface Pin Assignment


Pin No. Signal Name I/O Description
1 STRBX I Latch pulse used to read data. DATA is valid when the signal is LOW.
2-9 DATA 1-8 I DATA 8 is MSB and DATA 1 is LSB.
10 ACKNLGX O An acknowledge pulse to the host that indicates the data from the host computer
has been received.
11 BUSY O HIGH status indicates the printer is not ready to accept data.
12 PE O Indicates paper empty status in paper tray or cassette selected.
13 SELOT O Always HIGH.
14 AUTOX I When the signal is LOW, the printer automatically feeds a line as “CR” is input. The
“CR” is detected when the printer is turned on or the interface selection is switched
from the optional I/F to parallel I/F.
15 NC - Not used.
16 GND - Ground level for the twisted pair return.
17 CG - Connected to the printer chassis. The printer chassis GND and the signal GND are
connected each other.
18 NC - Not used.
19-30 GND - Ground level for the twisted pair return.
31 INITX I When the signal is LOW, the STRBX signal is ignored.
32 ERRX O The signal is LOW when the printer is in the following condition:
User maintenance is required.
Service maintenance is required.
Another type of error has occurred.
The printer is off line.
33 GND - Ground level for the twisted pair return.
34 NC - Not used.
35 +5V - Pulled up to +5V through 1K Ω resistor.
36 SELINX I Always LOW.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-24


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.3.2 Option Interface


The followings are the Serial Interface Specifications by Type-B 32-K
serial interface.
o Interface type: RC232C or CURRENT LOOP
o Data transmission system: Full Duplex
o Synchronism:
n Synchronous: Asynchronous
n Start bit: 1BIt
n Stop bit: 1Bit (Other bits could be used, but without
guaranty of proper operation)
n Data bit: 7Bit or 8Bit (DP-SW 1-2)
n Parity: None Even, Odd (DP-SW 1-3, 1-4)
n Protocol:
- X-ON/X-OFF (Can not be used with DTR control) (DP-SW 2-3)
- DTR Control (Can not be used with X-ON/X-OFF) (DP-SW 2-3)
n Transmission rates:
300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 baud
(DP-SW 1-5, 1-6, 2-1, 2-2)

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-25


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.4 Control Panel


This section describes the control panel of this printer and its functions.

1.4.1 Appearance and Descriptions


The control panel of this printer consists of the LCD, 8 buttons, and 6
LEDs. See Figure 1-10 and Table 1-23 for the control panel appearance
and its descriptions, respectively.
A B C D E F G

P a p e r S o u rc e P a p e r S iz e M a n u a l F e e d O r ie n ta t io n
R IT e c h C o p ie s M P T r a y S iz e O u t B in
M e n u Ite m V a lu e E n te r

O n L in e F o rm F e e d C o n tin u e S e le c T y p e

H I J K L M N O
R e s e t A lt

Figure 1-10. Control Panel Appearance

Table 1-23. LEDs and Switches on the Control Panel


LED Button
Location Name Remarks Location Name Remarks
1 line, 20 characters
A LCD Panel H On Line button
(5 x 7 dot matrix)
B On Line LED Green I Form Feed button
C Data LED Yellow J Continue button
D Continue LED Red K SelecType/Alt button Also serves as the Shift button
E OneTouch Mode 1 LED L Menu Select button
F OneTouch Mode 2 LED M Item Select button
G SelecType Mode LED N Value Select button
- - O Enter button

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-26


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.4.1.1 LED Description o OneTouch Mode 2 LED (F)


o LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) (A) On: OneTouch mode 2 is enabled. The following 4
One-line display for 20 characters (5 x 7 dot matrix) items can be set in this mode:
Normally displays printer status. - RITech
In panel setting mode, LCD displays various setting values. - Copies
- Mp Tray Size
o On Line LED (B) - Out Bin
On: The printer is on-line. o SelecType Mode (G)
Off: The printer is a pause status.
On: SelecType mode is enabled.
o Form Feed LED (C)
o All LEDs
On: Unprinted data remains in the printer. However, the
lamp is not lit if the remaining data is not effective print All LEDs come on when a service-call error has occurred.
data but other data such as control codes including
commands.
Off: No effective print data remains in the printer. If control
codes are not terminated, the indicator is lit.
Blinking: The printer is processing data.
o Continue LED (D)
Blinking: An error has occurred which can be cleared by
pressing the Continue button.
o OneTouch Setting Mode 1 LED (E)
On: OneTouch mode 1 is enabled. The following 4
items can be set in this mode:
- Paper Source
- Paper Size
- Manual Feed
- Orientation

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-27


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.4.2 Button Functions o Menu button (L)


o On Line button (H) n Pressing this button activates the SelecType mode, and the
initial level of the mode (“Test Menu”) appears. In the SelecType
When the printer is on-line, pressing this button puts the printer in
mode, this button is used to select the setting menu, the primary
off-line to prevent printing. Pressed during panel setting mode, it
level of the mode.
immediately terminates the setting mode and brings the printer back
to on-line status. n In OneTouch mode 1, used to select the value for “Paper
Source”.
o Form Feed button (I)
n In OneTouch mode 2, used to select the item for “RITech”.
If the Form Feed lamp is lit in off-line status, pressing this button
causes the printer to print a page of data. If data for multiple pages n In SelecType mode, used to select the setting menu.
has been received, it is printed. If the Form Feed LED is lit because
NOTE:If this button is pressed with the Shift button held down,
the control codes are not terminated, the data received up to that
setting values and items scroll backward.
point is printed. The printer does not eject paper when the Form
Feed LED is on. o Item button (M)
o Continue button (J) Pressing this button brings up the item that was last selected.
While the Continue LED is on, pressing this button clears the error. n In OneTouch mode 1, this button is used to select the value for
Also, a warning message indicated during on-line status can be “Paper Size”.
cleared by pressing this button.
n In OneTouch mode 2, this button is used to select the value for
o SelecType button (K) (or Shift button) “Copies”.
Used to select OneTouch mode 1 / OneTouch mode 2 / SelecType n In SelecType mode, this button is used to select the setting item.
mode, as follows:
NOTE:If this button is pressed with the Shift button held down,
n The first push of the button puts the printer in OneTouch mode setting values and items scroll backward.
1.
o Value button (N)
n Pressing this button in the OneTouch mode 1 puts the printer in
Pressing this button enables the item that was last selected.
OneTouch mode 2.
n In OneTouch mode 1, used to select the value for “Manual
n Pressing this button in the OneTouch mode 2 activates the
Feed”.
SelecType mode to enter the initial level of SelecType mode.
(The “Test Menu” appears.) n In OneTouch mode 2, used to select the value for “MP Tray
Size”.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-28


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

n In SelecType mode, used to select the value for the currently


selected setting item. The next available value for the item is
indicated.
NOTE:If this button is pressed with the Shift button held down,
setting values and items scroll backward.
o Enter button (O)
Pressing this button generates “Status Sheet” in “Test Menu”.
n In OneTouch mode 1, used to select the value for “Orientation”.
n In OneTouch mode 2, used to select the value for “Out Bin”.
n In SelecType mode, the setting value is confirmed and printing
or other functions are activated.
NOTE:If this button is pressed with the Shift button held down,
setting values and items scroll backward.
o Reset button (Continue button + Alt button) (K + J)
Pressing this button with the Alt button held down causes the printer
to stop printing and reset. After the message “Reset” is indicated on
the LCD, if the both buttons are kept pressed for more 5 seconds,
“Reset All” is indicated and warm boot is performed.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-29


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.5 Service Functions 1.5.3 Formatting the Flash ROM Module


o Buttons: Alt + Item + Value + Enter + Power on
Turning the printer on while pressing the specified button(s) until RAM
o Functions: Clears the flash ROM module inserted in the slot A.
check is completed provides several service functions. (See the next
It starts as the message “DIMM A ERASING”
section for details.)
appears.
o Termination: After formatting the flash ROM module, the printer
1.5.1 Hex dump Mode performs warm boot and returns to the normal
o Buttons: Form Feed + Power on states.
o Functions: “Hex Dump” is indicated.
Received data is converted into hex ASCII. This is 1.5.4 Updating the Program ROM
valid for all interfaces. The hex damp sheet
o Buttons: On Line + Alt + Value + Power on
contains the following information.
o Functions: Updates the DIMM inserted in the program socket.
• Dump list with the received data in hex ASCII
format. NOTE: This method is used to update a ∗.crb file. In case of updating a
• Data list with 1-byte code characters ∗.rcc file, refer to Section 3.2.3.1.
(Unreadable characters are expressed by *.*.
• Page number 1.5.5 ROM Module Copy
o Termination: Press “Reset” button to perform warm boot or turn
the printer off and back on. o Buttons: On Line + Alt + Enter + Power on
o Functions: Copies the contents of the ROM module in the
socket B to the flash ROM module in the socket A. If
1.5.2 EEPROM Initialization
there is no module in the socket B, the contents of
o Buttons: On Line + Continue + Menu + Power on the ROM module in the code ROM socket is copied.
o Functions: Clears the EEPROM to 00h and writes factory As the indication “DIMM COPY MODE” appears,
default values. All values but the counter values for press the Enter button. The contents of the ROM is
the IBT Cleaner, 2ND BTR, Fuser and accumulated erased and copy process is carried out.
printed pages are cleared. (Refer to Section 1.5.7.) o Termination: After copying, the printer performs warm boot and
o Termination: After initializing, the printer performs warm boot returns to the normal states.
and returns to the normal states.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-30


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.5.6 Panel Setting Initialization 1.5.8 Error Recovery Operation


o Buttons: Continue + Power on By pressing the specified buttons, the following special functions are
o Functions: All panel settings for total environment and activated.
interface-specific environment are reset to the
factory defaults. Information such as accumulated a) CPU reset when E***** or C2000 Service call error is indicated
printed pages to which users have no access is not o Buttons: Alt + Menu + Item + value + Enter
initialized.
o Functions: Returns the printer to the normal states without
o Termination: After initializing, the printer performs warm boot turning off and back on the printer.
and returns to the normal states.
NOTE: If the message “Printing SysErr?>” appears after this
operation, an error sheet can be printed by pressing the
1.5.7 Maintenance Mode
Enter button. If any other button is pressed, the printer
o Buttons: On Line + Form Feed + Continue + Power on returns to the normal status without outputting an error
o Functions: Adds the Maintenance menu to the setting menu. sheet.
After this operation, the printer automatically
performs warm boot and the Maintenance menu is b) Display of error details when E***** or C2000 Service call error
enabled. To eliminate this menu from the setting is indicated
menus, turn the printer off and back on. Note that Step 1 Press the Continue, Alt, and Menu buttons.
all engine-related Service-Call Errors (Service-Call “ERR Y x x x x 0x********” (code and address) appears. *1
Error e f f f f) are ignored (No Service-Call Error
Step 2 Press any button.
occurs.) while the Maintenance menu is generated.
“ERR TYPE 0x********” (error type) appears.
(Same as for EJL) Note the following points in the
Maintenance mode: Step 3 Press any button.
l Interfaces are always open. (Disconnected)
The display returns to *1.
l Before entering the Maintenance mode to print an In the software evaluation processing chart, the above two items
engine status sheet, make sure no engine-related should be included, or an error sheet (See NOTE above.) should be
error is indicated in a normal mode (other than attached.
Maintenance mode).
l In this mode, the printer only prints engine status
sheet. In case other printouts such as normal status
sheet is needed, be sure to check that no engine
related error is indicated in a normal mode (other
than Maintenance mode), as described above.
o Termination: Turn the printer off and back on.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-31


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.6 Panel Setting 1.6.1 Setting Methods


OneTouch mode:
This printer is equipped with 2 types of panel setting functions; the
OneTouch modes and SelecType mode. The OneTouch modes allow NOTE: OneTouch mdoe is effective when no error has occurred.
the users to get directly to the specified items in the SelecType mode.
Therefore, this manual only lists the setting items for the SelecType 1. Enter the OneTouch mode 1 or 2 by pressing the SelecType button.
mode. (The current values for 4 items are shown on the LCD.)

o OneTouch mode 1/2 2. Scroll the setting value list by pressing the OneTouch button*.
There are two OneTouch modes, OneTouch mode 1 and 2. This
mode enables users to make selection by pressing a button in the 3. When the desired value is indicated, exit the OneTouch mode, and
panel design matrix. the new value is stored.

o SelecType mode 4. To return to the On Line status from the OneTouch mode, perform
The SelecType mode has two levels. one of the followings:
1. Setting menu 1) Press the On Line button.
Panel setting items fall into numbers of categories called setting 2) Perform panel setting initialization.
menus. 3) Run a status sheet.
2. Setting item 4) Press the SelecType button.
This is the lowest level of the panel setting mode. Some items
have values to be selected and others are just executed directly. * “Menu”, “Item”, “Value” and “Enter” buttons serve as the OneTouch buttons
in this mode.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-32


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

SelecType mode: NOTE: Keeping the Value button (+ Alt button) depressed for a
certain length of time causes the values to change
NOTE: SelecType mode is effective when no error has occurred.
continuously.
1. To enter the SelecType mode, perform one of the followings: 5) In the value select mode, press the Enter button when the
desired value is displayed. The value is stored as the new setting
1) Press the SelecType button to enter the SelecType mode or excuted directly. (For the value previously set, pressing the
through the One touch mode 1 and 2. Enter button has no effect.)
2) Press the Menu button, Item, Value, or Enter button. 6) In the itme select mode, pressing the Menu button brings back
NOTE:SelecType mode is effective when no error has occurred. the setting menu select mode and the next menu is displayed.
7) In the value select mode, pressing the Menu or Item button, the
2. Refer to the descriptions below to operate the SelecType mode. item select mode is brought back.

1) In the setting menu select mode, select the desired menu by 3. To return to the On Line status from the SelecType mode, perform
pressing the Menu button. The menus are shown left-aligned on one of the followings:
the LCD.
2) To enter the setting item select mode, press the Item button. The 1) Press the On Line button.
initial item appears in the format below: 2) Perform panel setting initialization.
3) Run a status sheet.
“Setting Item = Current setting value *” 4) Press the SelecType button.
NOTE: The trailing * means the current setting value.
3) In the setting item select mode, press the Item button to bring up
the desired item. With each push of the Item button, the item is
switches to the next item, again shown in the format below:

“Setting Item = Current setting value *”


NOTE: The trailing * means the current setting value.
4) To select the value for the selected item, press the Value button.
Each value available appears in the format below:

“Setting Item = Current setting value *”


NOTE: The trailing * means the current setting value.
NOTE: Using the Alt button + Menu/Item/Value button, it is
possible to cycle through the lists backward.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-33


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

M e n u Ite m /V a lu e /E n te r

O n L in e S e ttin g m e n u S e le c T y p e
s e le c t m o d e
O n e -to u c n
M e n u s e ttin g

S e le c T y p e Ite m M e n u
O n e T o u c h
m o d e
Ite m S e ttin g ite m
s e le c t m o d e
In itia liz e
E n te r
p a n e l s e ttin g s . V a lu e
S to r e in E E P R O M
o r p e r fo r m p r o c e s s in g .
E x e c u te te s t
p r in t/c le a n in g p r in t M e n u
Ite m O n e T o u c h m o d e
E n te r
V a lu e S e ttin g v a lu e
s e le c t m o d e

O n L in e s ta tu s S e le c T y p e M o d e

O n - L in e s ta tu s P a n e l s e ttin g m o d e

Figure 1-11. Panel Setting Mode Diagram

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-34


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.6.2 SelecType Setting Menu List


Table 1-25. Panel Setting Menu List (2/6)
This section contains the tables which list the SelecType setting menus.
Menu Item Value
The factory defaults values are shown in Bold Italic style. The menus
Config Menu *RITech On, Off
selected through the One-touch mode are marked with “*”.
Toner Save Off, On
Table 1-24. Panel Setting Menu List (1/6) Top Offset -5.0 ∼ 0.0 ∼ 6.0 mm step 0.5 mm
Menu Item Value Left Offset -5.0 ∼ 0.0 ∼ 6.0 mm step 0.5 mm
Test Menu Status sheet, Color Test Size Ignore Off, On
Sheet, ESC/Page Font
Auto Cont Off, On
Sample*16 , LJ4 Font
Sample, ESCP2 Font Page Protect Auto, On
Sample, FX Font Sample, Image Optimum Auto, Off, On
1239X Font sample, Paper Type Normal, Thick, Trmsprnc,
Ext Printer Info*14
Setup Menu Interface Auto, Parallel, AUX1*4, AUX2*4
Emulation Parallel Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX 1239X, GL2
Menu Time Out 0. 5 ∼ 60 ∼ 300 step1
AUX1*4 Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX 1239X, GL2
Standby*21 Enable, Disable
AUX2*4 Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX 1239X, GL2
Lang English
Printing Menu *Paper Source Auto, MP, LC1, LC2*1, LC3*1, LC4*1 Lang Francais
*Page Size A4*2, A3, A5, B4, B5, LT*3, B, HLT, Sprache Deutsch
LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON, LINGUA ITALIANO
C10, DL, C6, IB5, CTM, A3W LENG ESPANOL
Wide A4 Off, On SPRAK SVENSKA
Sprog Dansk
*Orientation Port, Land
Taal Nederl.
*Out Bin FD, FU LANG SUOMI
*Copies 1 ∼999 Ling Portugues
*Manual Feed Off, On Paper Lock*8 Off, On
Resolution 600, 300 Printer Name Off, On
Skip Blank Page Off, On*19 Y Toner*7
Tray Size Menu MP Tray Size A4*2, A3, A5, B4, B5, LT*3, B, HLT, M Toner*7 E * * * * F, E * * * o F, E * * o o F,
LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON, C Toner*7 E * o o o F, E o o o o F
C10, DL, C6, IB5, A3W
K Toner*7
LC1 Size*7 With the standard cassette mounted:
Page Count*7 0 ∼ 99999999
A4, A3, B4, B5*17, LT, LGL, B, EXE*18
With A3 W cassette mounted: A3W SelcType lnit

LC2 Size*1,*7 A4, A3, B4, B5*17, LT, LGL, B, EXE*18


LC3 Size*1,*7 A4, A3, B4, B5*17, LT, LGL, B, EXE*18
LC4 Size*1,*7 A4, A3, B4, B5*17, LT, LGL, B, EXE*18

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-35


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 1-26. Panel Setting Menu List (3/6) Table 1-27. Panel Setting Menu List (4/6)
Menu Item Value Menu Item Value
Parallel Menu Speed Fast, Normal LJ4 Menu Form 5∼ 60*3 ∼ 64*2 ∼ 128 lines
Bi-D Nibble, ECP, Off (Continued) Source SymSet*5 0 ∼ 277 ∼ 3199
Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum Dest SymSet*5 0 ∼ 277 ∼ 3199
AUX1 Menu*4 Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum GL2 Menu GL-Mode LJ4GL2, GLlike
AUX2 Menu*4 Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum Scale Off, A0, A1, A2, A3
ESC/Page Auto CR On, Off Origin Corner, Center
Menu*16 Auto FF On, Off Pen Pen0, Pen1, Pen2*6, Pen3*6, Pen4*6, Pen5*6,
CR Function CR, CR+LF Pen6*6
LF Function CR+LF, LF End Butt, Square, Triangular, Round
FF Function CR+FF, FF Join Mitered, Miteredbeveled, Triangualr, Round,
Beveled, None
Error Code Ignore, Space
Pen0 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
Avoid Error Off, On
Pen1 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
Low Resolution No, Yes
Pen2*6 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
LJ4 Menu Font Source Resident, DIMM, Download
Pen3*6 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
(Continues to Font Number 0 ∼ available (Max 65535)
the next Pen4*6 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
Pitch*20 0.44 ∼ 10.00 ∼ 99.99 cpi step 0.01 cpi
table.) Pen5*6 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
Height*20 4.00 ∼ 12.00 ∼ 999.75 pt step 0.25 pt
Pen6*6 0.05 ∼ 0.35 ∼ 5.00 mm step 0.05 mm
SymSet IBM-US, Roman-8, ECM94-1, 8859-2 ISO, 8859-9
ISO, IBM-DN, PcMultiling, PcE.Europe, PcTk437, ESCP2 Menu Font Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Roman
WiAnsi, WiE.Europe, WiTurkish, DeskTop, (Continues to T, Orator S, Sans H, Script,
PsText, Velnternati,VeUS, MsPublishin, Math-8, the next table.) OCR A, OCR B
PsMath, VeMath, PiFont, Legal, UK, ANSI ASCII, Pitch 10 cpi, 12 cpi,15 cpi, Prop.
Swedis2, Italian, Spanish, German, Norweg1, Condensed Off, On
French2, Windows, Pclcelandic* 5, PcLt774*5,
T.Margin 0.40 ∼ 0.50 ∼ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch
PcTurk1*5*9, PcPortugues*5, PcEt850*5,
PcTurk2*5*9, PcCanFrench*5, PcSl437*5, Text 1 ∼ 62*3 ∼ 66*2 ∼ available (Max:111) Lines
PcNordic*5, 8859-3 ISO*5, 8859-4 ISO*5, CGTable PcUSA, Italic, PcMultilin, PcPortugue,
WiBaltic*5, WiEstonian*5, WiLatvian *5, Mazowia PcCanFrenc, PcNordic, PcTurkish2,
*5*12, CodeMJK*5*12, BpBRASCII*5, BpAbicomp*5, PcE.Europe, BpBRASCII, BpAbicomp,
PcGK437*5*10, PcGk851*5, PcGk869*5*25,8859-7 PcSl437*5, PcTurkish1*5, Pclcelandic*5, 8859-9
ISO*5*25, WiGreek*5, Europe3*5, PcCy855*5*11, ISO*5, Mazowia*5, CodeMJK*5, PcGk437*5,
PcCy866*5*11, PcLt866*5, 8859-5 ISO*5, PcGK851*5, PcGk869*5, 8859-7 ISO*5,
WiCyrillic*5, Bulgarian*5*11, PcUkr866*5, PcCy855*5, PcCy866*5, Bulgarian*5,
Hebrew7*5, 8859-8 ISO*5, Hebrew8*5, PcHe862*5, PcUkr866*5, Hebrew7*5, Hebrew8*5,
Arabic8*5, PcAr864*5, 8859-6 ISO*5, OCR A*5, PcAr864*5, PcHe862*5
OCR B*5

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-36


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 1-28. Panel Setting Menu List (5/6) Table 1-29. Panel Setting Menu List (6/6)
Menu Item Value Menu Item Value
ESCP2 Menu Country USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, 1239X Menu Font Courier, Prestige, Gothic, Orator, Script,
(Continued) Italy, Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, Presentor, Sans serif
LatinAmeric, Korea, Legal Pitch 10 cpi, 12cpi,15cpi, 17cpi, 20cpi, 24cpi, Prop.
Auto CR On, Off Code Page 437, 850, 860, 863, 865
Auto LF Off, On T. Margin 0.30 ∼ 0.40 ∼ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch
Bit Image Dark, Light, Barcode Text 1 ∼ 63*3 ∼ 67 *3∼ available (Max:111) Lines
ZeroChar 0, 0 Auto CR Off, On
FX Menu Font Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Script, Auto LF Off, On
Orator S, OCR A, OCR B
Alt. Graphics Off, On
Pitch 10 cpi, 12 cpi,15 cpi, Prop.
Bit Image Dark, Light
Condensed Off, On
ZeroChar 0, 0
T. Margin 0.40 ∼ 0.50 ∼ 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch
Character Set 1*3, 2*2
Text 1 ∼ 62*3 ∼ 66*2 ∼ available (Max:111) Lines
Maintenance 2nd BTR Reset
CGTable PcUSA, Italic, PcMultilin, PcPortugue,
Menu*15 IBT Cleaner Reset
PcCanFrenc, PcNordic, PcTurkish2, PcE.Europe,
BpBRASCII, BpAbicomp Fuser Unit Reset
Country USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, Page Count Clear
Italy, Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, Engine Status Sheet
LatinAmeric
Auto CR On, Off
Auto LF Off, On
Bit Image Dark, Light, Barcode
ZeroChar 0, 0

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-37


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

NOTE: *15.Displayed only if maintenance mode has been enabled by


appropriate (undocumented) operation at power-up.
*1. Appears only if optional Large Capacity Paper Unit is installed.
*16.Not displayed on the panel. Cannot be selected (and value can not
*2. Factory default for European/Pacific, Russian, Taiwanese, and be changed) from RCP. Does not appear on status sheet. Not
Chinese models. intended for users. Can be selected using EJL.
*3. Factory default for North/Latin American models. *17.Displayed only on Taiwanese and Chinese models.
*4. Appears only if optional Type-B interface card is installed. *18.Displayed only on North/Latin American, European/pacific, and
Russian models.
*5. Appears only if NLSP Bitmap3 Front Module is installed. *13
*19.Effective only under LJ4 and ESC/Page modes.
*6. Displayed only if GL-like mode.
*20.Only one of these is displayed, depending on the selected font type.
*7. Display only. Setting can not be changed.
*21.STANDBYTIME command of EJL is also supported. The default
*8. Not displayed on the LCD.
setting is 60 (minutes).
*9. Appears only if NLSP EDG OEM Scalable Font ROM for Turkish is
installed.

*10.Appears only if NLSP EDG OEM Scalable Font ROM for Greek is
installed.

*11.Appears only if NLSP EDG OEM Scalable Font ROM for Cyrillic is
installed.

*12.Appears only if NLSP EDG OEM Scalable Font ROM for Latin is
installed.

*13.If LJ4 Menu->SymSet value is changed to this symbol set, “Font


Source” changes to “Resident” and “Font Number” changes to “0”.
In order to print with this symbol set, therefore, “Font Source” and
“Font Number” must be set to a font that supports this symbol set.

*14.Displayed if NLSP Font DIMM includes status-sheet resource.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-38


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1.6.3 Details of Menus and Settings 2. Toner Save


During color printing, toner is saved by controlling halftone
This section contains the EPL-C8000-specific information on the menus propagation and reducing the print density.
and settings.
3. Size Ignore
o Test Print
Setting the value to “On” generates “1up” printing.
Press the ENTER button to start test printing. If language data is still
in the printer, the sheet wilt eject. Test print will be printed with RIT 4. PaperType
and toner-save, and resolution settings remain as they were before Fusing temperature and print speed are set to match the paper
the ENTER switch was pressed; and all other settings as their type (Half-speed mode for the paper type except Normal).
factory default. The user-default environment remains in effect after
the test print is completed. The LCD data blinks while test printing is -Normal: Copy paper, recycled paper, J paper, etc.
in progress. Print speed: Standard mode
-Thick: Envelopes, thick paper
o Printing Menu
Print speed: Half-speed mode
1. Wide A4 -Trnsprnc: OHP sheets
This setting is not effective under ESC/Page and ESC/Page- Print speed: Half-speed mode
Color modes.
Note that if paper size is set to "Envelope”, paper type is
2. Out Bin handled as ”Thick" regardless of the setting that is made here.
Selects the ejection tray.
FD: Eject into face-down tray. Note that for certain paper o Setup Menu
sizes and types the printer will force ejection into the
face-up tray regardless of this setting. 1. Standby
FU: Eject into face-up tray. Determines whether the printer goes into power-save standby
state when idle for a preset period of time.
3. Manual -Enable: Enable power-save feature.
Manual Feed is always printed “1 up”. -Disable: Disable power-save feature.

o Config Menu If this feature is enabled, transition into power-save standby


mode is governed by the standby time setting and a countdown
1. RITech timer.
The contour-correction feature operates during B/W printing or
special mode color printing.

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-39


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Any of the events 1 to 5 listed below terminates power-save 2. Page Count


standby (if it is currently active), resets the timer, and restarts Displays total number of pages printed to date (display only).
the countdown. If the countdown proceeds to 1/2 the standby Counting stops at 99999999. On this printer, the count is
time setting, the printer switches into power-save level 1. If the obtained from the engine.
countdown then reaches the full standby time setting, the printer
Display range: 0 to 99999999
switches into power-save level 2.
(advances by 1 with each sheet printed)
Events
3. SelecType lnit
(1) Generation of first printable image is completed, Returns panel settings to their factory defaults. The following
following entry into emulation mode. counters are not reset: Page counter, YMCK Toner counters,
2nd BTR counter, lBT Cleaner counter, Fuser-Unit counter,
(2) Request to print. Engine Printer 1 counter, Engine Printer 2 counter.

(3) Reset from control panel.

(4) Warm boot.

(5) Standby set to Disable (at panel or by EJL).


l Standby Level 1
Uses less power than “normal’’ standby mode, by maintaining
the fuser unit temperature within a lower range. Power saving is
not as great as at level 2 (note that level 1 is not EnergyStar-
compliant, since power usage is above 45W), but the warm-up
time required to move back into normal standby mode is
relatively short (about 60 seconds).
l Standby Levd 2
Provides greater power savings than standby level-1 mode, by
switching off the fuser unit and many of the mechanical circuits.
Level 2 is EnergyStar compliant (not above 45W), but warm-up
time required to return to normal standby mode is relatively long
(about 300 seconds).

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-40


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o Parallel Menu

1. Buffer Size
Sets the amount of installed memory that operates as a receive
l Normal: Balances between draw processing and buffer.
buffer. Specifically, sets the balance between the amount of
l Maximum: Allocates more memory for use as receive buffer.
memory used for draw processing and the amount used as
l Minimum : AlIocates less memory for use as receive buffer.
receive buffer.

Table 1-30. Buffer Size Specifications


I/Fs I/F=Auto, with no optional I/F;
I/F=Auto, with 1 optional I/F I/F=Auto, with 1 optional I/F
Installed or I/F other than Auto
memory
(MB) Normal Maximum Minimum Normal Maximum Minimum Normal Maximum Minimum

64 1440 5760 8 720 2880 8 480 1920 8


80 1920 7680 8 960 3840 8 640 2560 8
96 2400 9600 8 1200 4800 8 800 3200 8
112 2880 11520 8 1440 5760 8 960 3840 8
128 3360 13440 8 16B0 6720 8 1120 4480 8
160 4320 17280 8 2160 8640 8 1440 5760 8
176 4800 19200 8 2400 9600 8 1600 6400 8
192 5280 21120 8 2640 10560 8 1760 7040 8
224 6240 24960 8 3120 12480 8 2080 8320 8
256 7200 28800 8 3600 14400 8 2400 9600 8

Setting change does not become effective until next warm-boot


or power-on.
Buffer size can be calculated as follows.
l Normal: Buffer size [KB] = (Installed memory [MB] - 16) x 30 ÷ number of interfaces)
l Maximum: Buffer size [KB] = (lnstaIIed memory [MB] - 16) x 120 ÷ number of interfaces)
l Minimum: Buffer size = 8 KB

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-41


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o Maintenance Menu
This display appears only if the maintenance menu is available for
selection (only if the operator uses undocumented sequence when
switching on power). Switching power off and then back on will
remove the maintenance menu from the display (so that it can no
longer be selected by the user). This menu is provided only for use
by maintenance engineers.

1. 2nd BTR Reset


Resets the 2nd BTR counter. The maintenance engineer must
reset this counter after replacing the 2nd BTR during
maintenance.

2. IBT Cleaner Reset


Resets the IBT Cleaner counter. The maintenance engineer
must reset this counter after replacing the lBT Cleaner.

3. Fuser Unit Reset


Resets the Fuser Unit counter. The maintenance engineer must
reset this counter after replacing the Fuser Unit.

4. Page Count Clear


CIears the total page count (aggregate total of printed pages:
engine’s printer 1 and printer 2 counters).

5. Engine Status Sheet


Pressing the Enter switch starts printout of an engine status
sheet. lf language data is still in the printer, the sheet wiIl eject.
Engine Status Sheet will be printed with RIT, toner-save, and
resolution remained in the current settings; and all other set to
their factory defaults. The user-default environment remains in
effect after printing is completed. The LCD data blinks while
printing is in progress. The printed sheet will show the count
values of all of the engine’s unit counters. The sheet is always
printed in English (regardless of the Setup menu’s Lang setting).

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 1-42


CHAPTER

2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

Contents
PRINT PROCESS .......................................................................................... 1 Fusing-II .................................................................................................. 37
Print Process Overview ............................................................................. 1 Paper Exit................................................................................................ 39
Print Process - Major Components ........................................................... 2 Drives ...................................................................................................... 40
Print Process Description .......................................................................... 3 Electrical.................................................................................................. 42
(1) Charge ............................................................................................. 3 OPERATION MODES .................................................................................. 44
(2) Exposure .......................................................................................... 4
CONTROLS ................................................................................................. 45
(3) Development .................................................................................... 5
Paper Size Control .................................................................................. 45
(4) First Transfer (Drum → Belt) .......................................................... 8
Paper Tray Selection Control .................................................................. 46
(5) Cleaning (Drum)............................................................................... 9
OHP Side Detection Control ................................................................... 47
(6) Repeat (Forming a complete full-color toner image)...................... 10
ROS Control ............................................................................................ 48
(7) Second Transfer (Belt → Paper) .................................................. 11
Scanner Motor Rotation ...................................................................... 48
(8) Detach............................................................................................ 13
Light Quantity Control.......................................................................... 48
(9) Cleaning (Belt) ............................................................................... 13
Process Control....................................................................................... 49
(10) Fusing .......................................................................................... 14
Electric Potential Control ..................................................................... 49
PRINT DATA FLOW .................................................................................... 15 Toner Density Control (PCDC)............................................................ 50
Data Flow ................................................................................................ 15 Toner Density Control (ADC) .............................................................. 51
DRIVER POWER TRANSMISSION PATH .................................................. 16 ADC Solenoid Operation ..................................................................... 52
Process Motor Assembly......................................................................... 16 Process Sequence ............................................................................. 52
P/H Motor Assembly................................................................................ 17 Xerographic Control ................................................................................ 53
Dispense Motor Assembly....................................................................... 18 BCR/Erase Lamp Control.................................................................... 53
Rotary Motor Assembly ........................................................................... 18 Drum Cartridge Replacement.............................................................. 54
Gear Layout............................................................................................. 19 Drum Cartridge End of Life Detection ................................................. 55
PAPER TRANSPORTATION....................................................................... 20 Waste Toner Box Full Detection.......................................................... 55
Paper Transportation Path (No Option)................................................... 20 Developer Control ................................................................................... 56
Home Position Detection..................................................................... 56
MAIN COMPONENTS.................................................................................. 21
Toner Cartridge Detection Position ..................................................... 57
Paper Tray............................................................................................... 22
Toner Cartridge: Old/New Detection ................................................... 57
Paper Feeder .......................................................................................... 23
Development Position ......................................................................... 57
Multi Sheet Inserter (MSI) ....................................................................... 24
Development Control: Detection Methods........................................... 58
Paper Transportation............................................................................... 26
IBT Control .............................................................................................. 60
Xerographics I ......................................................................................... 28
First Transfer (Drum → Belt)................................................................ 60
Xerographics II ........................................................................................ 29
Second Transfer (Belt → Paper)........................................................ 61
Development ........................................................................................... 31
Discharging ......................................................................................... 64
IBT-I......................................................................................................... 33
Belt Cleaning ....................................................................................... 64
IBT-II........................................................................................................ 34
1-UP/2-UP Control .................................................................................. 67
Fusing-I ................................................................................................... 35
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

Fuser Control........................................................................................... 68
Fuser Control Method.......................................................................... 68
Warm-up Control ................................................................................. 68
Mode Control: READY, LIGHT SLEEP, DEEP SLEEP ....................... 69
Printing Mode Control.......................................................................... 69
Not Ready State Detection During Printing ......................................... 69
Oil Roll Control .................................................................................... 70
Fuser Fan Control ............................................................................... 72
Detection Controls in Fuser ................................................................. 72
CONTROLLER OPERATING PRINCIPLES................................................ 76
EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.1 Print Process

2.1.1 Print Process Overview


This is a full-color laser printer using the Xerographic process. This Transfer
process forms an image of toner (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Black) on
the surface of the drum. The image of one color is then transferred onto
the IBT Belt Assembly (Belt). On the belt, this process is repeated four
times, resulting in a full-color image. The print process is summarized
as follows:

(1) Charge: Charges the drum surface.


(2) Exposure: Exposes the image with a laser beam.
(3) Development: Develops the image with the toner.
(4) First transfer:Transfers the toner image on the drum to the
belt.
(5) Cleaning: Cleans the drum.
(6) Repeat: In the YMCBk mode, steps [1-5] are repeated
for each toner. At the end, the belt has a full- Figure 2-1. Print Process Flowchart
color image. (The steps are not repeated in
the B/W mode.)
(7) Second transfer: Transfers the image on the belt onto the
paper.
(8) Detach: Removes the electrical charge from the paper.
(9) Cleaning: Cleans the belt.
(10) Fusing: Fixes the toner image to the paper by heat
and pressure.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-1


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.1.2 Print Process - Major Components


The major components of the printer are shown in the figure below.
NOTE: In this document Developer Assembly Y, Developer Assembly
M, Developer Assembly C, and Developer Assembly Bk are
termed Developer Assembly.
NOTE: In this document Toner Cartridge Y, Toner Cartridge M, Toner
Cartridge C and Toner Cartridge Bk are termed Toner Cartridge.

Figure 2-2. Major Components

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-2


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.1.3 Print Process Description o The BCR is always in contact with the surface of the drum, driven by the
drum rotation. The BCR is a conductive roll, receiving discharge voltage
from the HVPS. The discharge voltage is negative DC voltage to which AC
2.1.3.1 (1) Charge voltage has been superimposed. The discharge occurs in the very small
gap between the BCR and the drum surface. The drum surface is uniformly
In the Charge step, the surface of the drum rotates at a constant speed charged (negative) with DC bias voltage. The drum surface consists of
and is uniformly charged (negative) by the discharge of the BCR (Bias photoconductive material (on the surface) and an aluminum cylinder
Charge Roll) in the Drum Cartridge. (inside the drum). (The photoconductive material becomes conductive
when it receives light; it becomes an insulator in the dark.)

Figure 2-3. Charge

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-3


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.1.3.2 (2) Exposure The laser beam irradiated on the drum surface generates electron-
hole pairs in the photoconductive layer. (Excited electrons create a
In the exposure step, the system scans the drum surface (negatively hole in the conductive band.) The electrons are attracted by the
charged) with a laser beam and forms an invisible electrostatic latent electric field and move toward the inner conductor of the drum and
image on the drum surface. flow into it. The holes move toward the outside surface of the
o The printer controller outputs the data (image data) to the laser photoconductive layer and recombine with the negative charges
beam unit. As determined by the data from the printer controller, the (electrons) on the drum surface, thus decreasing the negative
laser beam unit emits a laser beam onto the drum surface, the area charges on the surface. The resultant less negatively charged areas
of which is determined by data from the printer controller. (That is, on the drum surface forms an invisible electrostatic latent image
areas on the drum surface where the laser is emitted will be (printed image).
developed with toner; areas on the drum surface where the laser is
not emitted will not be developed.)
The laser beam is emitted from the laser diode in the ROS
Assembly. The laser beam goes through the Scanner Assembly in
the ROS Assembly, the rotating polygon mirror, fixed mirror and
lens, and scans the drum surface from one end to the other in the
axis direction of the drum.

Figure 2-5. Exposure process

Figure 2-4. Lase beam emission

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-4


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.1.3.3 (3) Development


In the development step, toner particles are attracted to the invisible
electrostatic latent image on the drum surface to form a visible toner
image.
o This printer employs the rotary and trickle development methods. In
rotary development, four Developer Assemblies rotate in sequence;
trickle development uses developer consisting of carrier and toner.
The developer in the Developer Assembly is agitated by the Auger.
(The auger is a spiral agitator.) The developer is sent to the Magnet
Roll near the surface of the drum. The toner particles and carrier
particles (that make up the developer) are charged by agitation;
toner particles are negatively charged, carrier particles are positively
charged and thus electrically attracted each other. The carrier
particles are magnetic and are attracted to the Magnet Roll
(magnetized). The carrier particles go through the Trimmer Blade,
resulting in a uniform carrier layer.
The Magnet Roll surface is covered with a thin semiconductive
sleeve. The HVPS applies the DB (Developing Bias) voltage to this
sleeve. The DB voltage is negative DC voltage to which AC voltage
has been superimposed. Using this DC voltage, the Magnet Roll
retains constant negative voltage on the photoconductive layer of
the drum. As a result, areas where negative potential on the drum
surface has not been decreased have lower electric potential than
the Magnet Roll; areas where negative potential has been
decreased have higher electric potential. The AC voltage shakes
developer onto the Magnet Roll so that it is easy for the toner
particles to be attracted to the drum surface.
The negatively charged toner particles are attracted only toward
Bias
areas where negative potential on the drum surface has decreased,
thus forming a toner image on the drum surface. When the toner
particles adhere to the drum surface, the negative potential at that
area where the toner particles are adhering decreases, resulting in a
decrease in force in attracting toner particles to that area. Figure 2-6. Development (1)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-5


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o As the printer prints more pages, the toner in the developer


decreases. To maintain proper developer density, it is necessary to
resupply toner to the Developer Assembly from the Toner Cartridge.
This is called ‘Toner Dispensing.’ The Toner Dispensing mechanism
uses two types of controls (PCDC and ADC). For details on PCDC
and ADC, See Section 2.7.5.
o To obtain a full-color image (of 4-color toner), four toner images
(YMCBk) must be formed on the drum’s surface in sequence. This
printer uses the rotary development method to form images. The
rotary development method uses the Rotary Frame Assembly. The
Rotary Frame Assembly has four Developer Assemblies which are
installed every 90° (see figure below). For each image, the
appropriate Develop Assembly faces the drum surface to form an
image. (For more details, see Section 2.7.7.)

Figure 2-7. Development (2)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-6


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o The carrier looses its electrical charges. This occurs because the
surface of a carrier particle may be covered with a toner particle or
may be damaged by agitation. To maintain the electrical charge of
carrier particles, a small amount of carrier is mixed in the toner;
when the toner is dispensed, carrier is also supplied.
The carrier in the Developer Assembly, however, is collected into a
different chamber in the Toner Cartridge, so that the developer
(mostly carrier) is replaced little by little, resulting in a constant
electrical charge being maintained. This is called the trickle
development method. The trickle development method uses the
rotation of the Rotary Frame Assembly.
The trickle development process is as follows:
1. An L-shaped pipe is inserted in the developer.
2. A small amount of carrier moves into the pipe.
3. The carrier is sucked in and moves deeper into the pipe.
4. The carrier is collected in the Toner Cartridge.

Figure 2-8. Development (3)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-7


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.1.3.4 (4) First Transfer (Drum → Belt)


In the first transfer step, the toner image formed on the drum surface is
transferred onto the belt (Transfer Assembly) by the 1st BTR (First Bias
Transfer Roll).
o The 1st BTR is a conductive roll, receiving positive high voltage
from the HVPS. The 1st BTR touches the back of the belt. Following
the rotation of the belt, the 1st BTR gives a positive charge to the
back of the belt. The toner image on the drum surface (negatively
charged) is attracted to the positive charge on the back of the belt.
The image is transferred from the drum surface to the belt.

Figure 2-9. First Transfer

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-8


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.1.3.5 (5) Cleaning (Drum) o Electrical drum cleaning


An electrical charge still remains on the drum surface after the
In the Cleaning (Drum) step, the residual toner on the drum surface is residual toner has been scraped off. This residual electrical charge
scraped off and the residual charge is cleaned off. is removed by the LED beam output from the Erase Lamp
o Physical drum cleaning Assembly.
Toner that is not transferred in the 1st Transfer step remains on the
drum surface. This residual toner is scraped off by the Cleaning
Blade. It is then transported to the Waste Toner Box by the Auger in
the Drum Cartridge.

Figure 2-10. Cleaning (Drum)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-9


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.1.3.6 (6) Repeat (Forming a complete full-color toner


image)
In the Repeat step (forming a complete full-color toner image), the toner
image of each color on the drum surface is transferred onto the belt and
is repeated four times, resulting in a complete full-color toner image on
the belt.

Figure 2-11. Repeat (1)

Figure 2-12. Repeat (2)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-10


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.1.3.7 (7) Second Transfer (Belt → Paper)


In the Second Transfer step, the complete image on the belt is
transferred onto the paper. This is done by supplying voltage to the
Contact Roll, Back Up Roll and 2nd BTR (Second Bias Transfer Roll).
o The Contact Roll is a small-diameter metal roll and is in contact with
the Back Up Roll. The Back Up Roll is a conductive roll and is in
contact with the back of the belt. It faces the 2nd BTR where the belt
is in between. The 2nd BTR is also a conductive roll and is
grounded to the frame via the metal shaft in the center.
o The Contact Roll receives negative high voltage (DC) and gives the
potential to the Back Up Roll. The negative potential given to the
Back Up Roll neutralizes the positive charge on the back of the belt,
and induces a positive charge on the 2nd BTR through the belt and
the paper. The Back Up Roll, belt and 2nd BTR have resistance and
the paper functions as a capacitor, resulting in induction of a
positive charge on the 2nd BTR.
When the back of the belt is neutralized, the belt looses the ability to
retain toner and the complete toner image on the belt is transferred
onto the paper by the positive charge induced on the 2nd BTR.
o The paper (adhering to the belt) is transferred at the correct time so
that the complete toner image on the belt will be transferred onto the
paper in the proper position. When the paper reaches the point the
2nd BTR and the Back Up Roll face each other, the HVPS outputs
high voltage.

Figure 2-13. Second Transfer (1)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-11


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o In the Repeat step (forming a complete full-color toner image), the


toner image is transferred onto the belt from the drum surface four
times. If, during these transfers, the 2nd BTR is touching the belt,
the toner image created up to this point will be destroyed. This IBT Surface
means the 2nd BTR must touch (advance to) the belt only after the
complete toner image has been transferred onto the paper. At other
times, the 2nd BTR must be retracted from the belt. This Advance/
Retract switching operation is carried out by the BTR Cam Solenoid.

By BTR Cam Solenoid

Figure 2-14. Second Transfer (2)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-12


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.1.3.8 (8) Detach 2.1.3.9 (9) Cleaning (Belt)


In the detach step, the charge on the paper is neutralized/removed. This In the Cleaning (Belt) step, the belt is cleaned after the image has been
is done when the Detach Saw gives negative DC voltage to the back transferred onto the paper.
side of the paper.
o The belt has residual toner that was not transferred onto the paper
o The Detach Saw receives high voltage from the HVPS. in the 2nd Transfer step. The residual toner is scraped off by the
In the 2nd Transfer step, if there is a positive charge, the toner may Cleaning Blade (in the Belt Cleaner Assembly) which is touching the
scatter, resulting in a damaged image. To prevent this, the Detach belt. The scraped toner is transferred through the Auger High
Saw removes the charge on the paper. Assembly to the Waste Toner Box.
o In the Repeat step (forming a complete full-color toner image), the
toner images are transferred from the drum surface to the belt four
times. If, during these transfers, the Cleaning Blade is touching the
belt, the toner image created up to this point will be destroyed. So
the Cleaning Bade must touch (advance to) the belt only after the
complete image has been transferred onto the paper. At other
times, the Cleaning Blade must be retracted from the belt. This
Advance/Retreat switching operation is carried out by the Cleaner
Cam Solenoid.

Figure 2-15. Cleaning (Belt)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-13


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.1.3.10 (10) Fusing


In the Fusing step, the toner (image) is fused onto the paper by heat
and pressure.
o The complete full-color toner image transferred onto the paper form
the belt is very fragile, so it must be fused onto the paper by the
Fuser Assembly. The toner is melted with heat from the Heat Roll
and fused under pressure between the Pressure Roll and the Heat
Roll. (The Heat Roll is heated by the H/R Heater.) As auxiliary heat,
the Pressure Roll has a P/R Heater.
o When the toner image is fused, the toner becomes adhesive,
causing the paper to adhere to the Heat Roll. To prevent this, the Oil
Roll Assembly supplies Fuser Oil to the Heat Roll. This allows the
paper to be peeled off easily from the Heat Roll.
o If the Oil Roll (Oil Roll Assembly) is continuously touching the Heat
Roll, the Fuser Oil may degrade or cause oil spots on the paper. To
prevent this, the Oil Roll touches (advances) the Heat Roll only
when the toner is fused; at other times it is retracted from the Heat
Roll. This Advance/Retract switching operation is carried out by the
Oil Cam Solenoid.

Figure 2-16. Fusing

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-14


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.2 Print Data Flow NOTE: How a two-dimensional image is formed


Scanning the laser beam over the drum’s surface from one side
to the other by switching the laser beam ON and OFF produces
2.2.1 Data Flow a dot image of one line. A single-color, two-dimensional dot
image is produced by repeating the scanning of the laser beam
The print data (electrical signals) from the printer controller goes
for one page. To obtain a full-color image, a single-color image
through the processes shown below to form a final print image on the
is generated for each color (YMCBk).
paper.
The resolution is determined by the following two factors:
- Main scanning direction: Dots/inch
- Subscanning direction: Number of scanned lines/inch

(Laser beam)

(On Drum) (Invisible)

(On Drum) (Visible)

(On Belt)

(On Paper)

(On Paper) Figure 2-18.

Figure 2-17. Data Flow

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-15


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.3 Driver Power Transmission Path

2.3.1 Process Motor Assembly


The rotational force of the Process Motor Assembly is transmitted to the
Process WDD Assembly and then transmitted to various units as shown
below.

Figure 2-19. Drive Transmission in Process Motor Assembly

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-16


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.3.2 P/H Motor Assembly


The rotational force of the P/H Motor Assembly is transmitted to the
Fuser Drive Assembly and P/H Drive Assembly and then to various
units as shown on the right.

Figure 2-20. Drive Transmission in P/H Motor assembly

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-17


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.3.3 Dispense Motor Assembly 2.3.4 Rotary Motor Assembly


The Dispense Motor Assembly drives the Auger in the Developer The Rotary Motor Assembly drives the Rotary Frame Assembly.
Assembly. (The Auger supplies the toner from the Toner Cartridge to
the Developer Assembly.)

Figure 2-22.
Transmission in Rotary Motor Assembly

Figure 2-21.
Drive Transmission in Dispense Motor Assembly

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-18


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.3.5 Gear Layout

Figure 2-23. Gear Layout

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-19


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.4 Paper Transportation

2.4.1 Paper Transportation Path (No Option) P a p e r fe e d (C a s s e tte 1 )


NOTE: In this document, the standard paper tray (bottom of the printer)
is called Cassette 1, the top tray of the optional Large Capacity
Paper Unit is called Cassette 2, the middle tray is Cassette 3
and the bottom tray is Cassette 4.

Laser beam

P R E -R E G I. R O L L A S S Y

Figure 2-24. Paper Transportation Path Layout Figure 2-25. Paper Transportation Flow

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-20


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5 Main Components


This section describes the main components and their functions. Each
subsection has a figure illustrating the component and its function. The
major components are listed below.
n Paper Tray
n Paper Feeder
n Multi Sheet Inserter
n Paper Transportation
n Xerographics-I
n Xerographics-II
n Development
n IBT-I
n IBT-II
n Fusing-I
n Fusing-II
n Paper Exit
n Frame & Drive
n Electrical

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-21


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.1 Paper Tray


1. Universal Tray
n The End Guide can be moved toward the paper feed and holds
the paper stack in place. By moving the End Guide, the moving
force is transmitted to the Sector Gear and the position of the
Tray Size Actuator changes. The Tray Size Actuator pushes
down (turns on) the Paper Size Switches (on the Size Switch
Assembly). If the Tray Size Actuator position changes, the
combinations of ON/OFF of the four Paper Size Switches
change. The printer recognizes the paper size from the ON/OFF
combinations.
n The Rear Guide Assembly moves in a direction perpendicular to
the direction of the paper feed and holds the paper stack
horizontally.
n The Bottom Plate Assembly pushes the paper stack onto the
Feed Roll so that one sheet is pulled out by friction. The Tray N/
F Springs push up the Bottom Plate Assembly.
n The bottom of the Bottom Plate Assembly has a magnet that
detects the low paper state (Low Paper Sensor).
n The Front Snubber pushes down a corner of the paper so that
only one sheet of paper is pulled out. (This mechanism uses the
stiffness of the paper to prevent more than one sheet of paper
from being pulled out.)

Figure 2-26. Paper Tray

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-22


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.2 Paper Feeder


1. Size Switch Assembly
The Size Switch Assembly consists of four Paper Size Switches.
(The switches are directly mounted on the circuit board.) When the
Tray Size Actuator position changes, the ON/OFF combinations of
these switches change and the printer detects the paper size and
the paper tray.
2. Tray No Paper Sensor
From the Tray N/P Actuator position, the printer detects paper in the
paper tray.
3. Low Paper Sensor
If the paper in the paper tray gets low, the distance between the
Bottom Plate Assembly and the Low Paper Sensor is shortened.
That is, the Magnet behind the Bottom Plate Assembly gets closer;
the Low Paper Sensor detects the magnetism from the Magnet,
determining that the supply of paper is getting low.
4. Feed Solenoid
By controlling the rotation of the Feed Gear, the operation (rotation/
stop) of the Feed Roll Assembly is controlled.
5. Feed Roll Assembly
When the Feed Solenoid is activated, the Feed Spring force causes
the Feed Gear and Feed Idler Gear to mesh. The Feed Roll
Assembly then receives the driving force from the P/H Motor
Assembly and starts rotating, causing the Feed Roll to pull a sheet
of paper from the Paper Tray.
The Feed Gear has a notch that, after it rotates once, dislodges the
Feed Gear and the Feed Idler, causing the Feed Roll Assembly to
stop rotating. This mechanism ensures that only one sheet of paper
is pulled out.
6. Turn Roll Assembly
The Turn Roll Assembly receives the driving force from the P/H
Motor Assembly (via the Main P/H Assembly); it rotates and sends
the paper pulled out from the Paper Tray to the Main P/H Assembly. Figure 2-27. Paper Feeder

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-23


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.3 Multi Sheet Inserter (MSI) (d) MSI Short N/P Sensor

1. MSI Assembly When the MSI N/P Actuator position changes, the MSI Short N/
The MSI Assembly feeds paper from the MSI Tray. The MSI P Sensor detects paper on the MSI Assembly. The MSI Short N/
Assembly consists of the MSI Edge Sensor, Pick Up Solenoid, MSI P Sensor only functions when the printer controller sends a
Clutch and others. signal indicating short paper size (shorter than 150mm) in the
feeding direction.
(a) MSI Edge Sensor
(e) MSI Long N/P Sensor
The MSI Edge Sensor detects the paper interval (from the
bottom edge of the preceding sheet to the top edge of the next The MSI Long N/P Sensor detects paper on the MSI Assembly
sheet) in the 2UP mode. If the paper interval is too short, printing by detecting the light reflected from the paper’s surface. The
is not done properly in the 2UP mode. If the paper interval sensor is horizontally attached to the MSI Tray Assembly. It can
detected by the MSI Edge Sensor is shorter than the detect light from the light emitter which is reflected on the
predetermined interval, the system turns off the MSI Clutch. This paper’s surface. (A transparent OHP sheet can be detected by
causes temporarily cuts the driving force to the Pick Up Rolls so this method.) The sensor only functions when the printer
that the paper transportation timing is adjusted. controller sends a signal indicating long paper size (150mm or
longer) in the feeding direction.
(b) Pick Up Solenoid
(g) Retard Pad Assembly
The MSI Roll Assembly operation (rotation/stop) is controlled by
controlling the rotation of the Pick Up Cam Gear. When the Pick Up Roll pulls out a sheet of paper, the friction
between the paper and the Retard Pad Assembly prevents more
(c) MSI Clutch than one sheet of paper from being pulled out.
If the paper interval detected by the MSI Edge Sensor is shorter (h) Pick Up Roll
than the predetermined interval, the paper transportation timing
needs to be adjusted. If the paper interval is too short, the MSI The MSI Roll Assembly receives the force from the Pick Up
Clutch temporarily cuts off the driving force to the Pick Up Rolls Solenoid and the MSI Clutch and starts rotating and the Pick Up
transportation timing. (to adjust the paper interval) and corrects Roll pulls out a sheet of paper. Both the Pick Up Gear and the
the paper. Pick Up Cam Gear have a notch that, after rotating once,
disengages the Pick Up Cam Gear and MSI Gear, thus causing
the MSI Roll Assembly to stop rotating. This mechanism
ensures that only one sheet of paper is pulled out.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-24


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2. MSI Tray Assembly


The MSI Tray Assembly hold the paper stack on the MSI Assembly.

RETARD PAD ASSY

Figure 2-28. Multi Sheet Inserter

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-25


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.4 Paper Transportation paper (such as an OHP sheet) may go through the Registration
Metal Roll and the Registration Rubber Roll without making a
1. Main P/H Assembly loop. By turning on the Registration Brake Clutch, the
The Main P/H Assembly consists of the following components: Registration Metal Roll and the Registration Rubber Roll are
n Pre-Registration Roll Assembly constricted and the paper cannot go through—and that causes a
paper loop.
n Registration Clutch
(d) The Registration Clutch transmits the driving force from the P/H
n Pre-Registration Clutch
Motor Assembly to the Registration Metal Roll and Registration
n Registration Brake Clutch Rubber Roll so that the paper and the IBT Belt Assembly are
n Registration Sensor properly positioned for a secondary image transfer.

n Front OHP Sensor (e) The Pre-Registration Clutch transmits the driving force from the
P/H Motor Assembly to the Pre-Registration Roll Assembly.
n Rear OHP Sensor
n Registration Brake Clutch (f) The Registration Sensor detects when the top of the paper has
reached the Registration Metal Roll and the Registration Rubber
n Registration Metal Roll Roll. To determine the paper size, the system detects the
n Registration Rubber Roll bottom edge of the paper. (The paper size is determined by the
system keeping track of the time from when the Registration
(a) The Registration Metal Roll and Registration Rubber Roll pull Clutch is turned on to when the Registration Sensor detects no
out the paper in synchronization with the IBT Belt Assembly paper.)
timing so that the paper will be positioned properly for the
complete toner image on the IBT Belt Assembly to be correctly (g) The printer detects the front and back of an OHP sheet* from the
transferred onto the paper. combined results of the Front OHP Sensor and the Rear OHP
(b) Pre-Registration Roll Assembly transfers paper from the paper Sensor. (For more details, see “7.3 OHP Side Detection Control”
tray or the MSI Assembly onto the Registration Metal Roll and in Section 10.)
Registration Rubber Roll. Until the top of the paper reaches the *The printer can use EPSON Color Laser Transparencies
Registration Metal Roll and Registration Rubber Roll and until (S041175, S041174) only.
those rolls start rotating, the Pre-Registration Roll Assembly (h) The resistor and the capacitor installed on the front of the Main
keep transferring the rear part of the paper by making a paper P/H Assembly maintain the potential of the Registration Metal
loop and correcting the skew at the top of the paper. Roll at the time of image transfer. If the Registration Metal Roll is
(c) The Registration Brake Clutch controls (applies the brake to) the directly grounded, the potential of the paper escapes to the
Registration Metal Roll. ground via the Registration Metal Roll. This means that the
When the top of the paper reaches the Registration Metal Roll paper will not have enough potential for an image to be
and Registration Rubber Roll it forms a loop. However, hard transferred correctly.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-26


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 2-29. Paper Transportation

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-27


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.5 Xerographics I (d) To form a proper electrostatic latent image on the drum surface,
the laser scanning timing and the writing timing of the image
1. ROS Assembly data must be coordinated. The SOS Sensor on the SOS PWB
The ROS (Raster Output Scanner) Assembly outputs laser beam to (Start Of Scan Printed Wiring Board) converts the laser beam
form an electrostatic latent image on the drum’s surface. The ROS into electrical signals (SOS signals) which detect the initial
Assembly consists of the following components. position (scan start position) in each line that the laser will scan.
n LD Assembly n Lens
n Scanner Assembly n Mirror
n SOS PWB n Window

(a) The image data is sent to the ROS Assembly as electrical


signals. (High and low voltage indicates data in the electrical
signals.). The LD (Laser Diode) Assembly converts the electrical
signals (of the image data) to optical signals (laser beam ON/
OFF). If the laser light quantity changes, a proper electrostatic
latent image cannot be obtained. To obtain a stable laser
amount, the LD Assembly (monitor circuit) always monitors and
controls the LD output (LD Power). This is called the APC (Auto
Power Control). For details, see Section 2.7.4.2.
(b) The Scanner Assembly consists of the Scanner Motor and
Polygon Mirror. (The Scanner Motor rotates at a constant
rotational speed; the Polygon Mirror is on the rotational axis of
the Scanner Motor.). The laser beam output from the LD
Assembly is projected onto the Polygon Mirror. The Polygon
Mirror has 12 reflecting surfaces; as the Scanner Motor rotates,
the reflection angle of the laser beam changes. This change
causes the laser beam to scan the drum’s surface in the drum
axis direction. One reflecting surface of the mirror scans one
line.
(c) The laser beam reflected by the Polygon Mirror arrives on the
drum surface via the lens, mirror and window. The lens corrects
any aberrations and the mirror ensures light passage. The
window prevents any foreign objects from entering the ROS.
Figure 2-30. Xerographics I

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-28


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.6 Xerographics II 5. ADC Sensor Assembly


The ADC Sensor Assembly consists of the ADC Sensor, ADC
1. Drum Cartridge Solenoid and others.
The Drum Cartridge consists of the Xero. Cartridge, Waste Toner
Box and others. (a) ADC Sensor
The ADC (Automatic Density Control) Sensor detects the toner
(a) The Xero. Cartridge consists of the Drum, BCR, Cleaning Blade, density of the image on the drum’s surface or toner density of
and others. the drum’s surface itself, and sends the density data to the
• The Drum is an aluminium cylinder on which the OPC Process Control Unit.
(Organic Photoconductor) material has been painted. The (For more details, see Section 2.7.5.)
OPC material is photoconductive so a laser scanning the
drum’s surface forms an electrostatic latent image on the (b) ADC Solenoid
drum. (Photoconductive: A photoconductive material is an If the ADC Sensor light emitter or receptacle is dirty with toner,
insulator (holds potential in the dark) that, when it receives the sensor cannot detect the toner density of the image or the
light, becomes conductive and the potential is grounded.) drum’s surface. So, the ADC Sensor light emitter and receptacle
• The BCR uniformly charges the drum surface in the Charge are cleaned by the cleaning lever when the ADC Solenoid is
step in the print process. activated.
• The Cleaning Blade scrapes off the residual toner particles in
the First transfer process in the print process.
(b) The Waste Toner Box collects the toner scraped off the drum’s
surface by the Cleaning Blade and the other toner sent by the
Auger High Assembly (the toner scraped off from the IBT Belt
Assembly by the Belt Cleaner Assembly).

2. Erase Lamp Assembly


The Erase Lamp Assembly emits a light onto the drum’s surface to
remove the residual charges remaining from the previous Charge
process.

3. Waste Toner Sensor


The Waste Toner Sensor detects when the Waste Toner Box is full
of discarded toner.

4. Toner Box Sensor


The Toner Box Sensor detects the Waste Toner Box.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-29


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 2-31. Xerographics II

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-30


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.7 Development (a) The three Augers in the Developer Assembly:


• Supplies toner from the Toner Cartridge to the Developer
1. Used Cartridge Sensor Assembly.
The Used Cartridge Sensor detects whether the toner cartridge is • Agitates the developer in the Developer Assembly.
new or used for the color in each toner cartridge. In the trickle • Supplies the developer from the Developer Assembly to the
development method, the used developer is collected in the Magnet Roll.
collection chamber in the Toner Cartridge. A reflection seal has (b) The Magnet Roll has the following functions:
been pasted on a wall inside the chamber; when collected and
accumulated in the collection chamber, the used developer covers • Attracts the carrier particles.
the reflection seal. The Used Cartridge Sensor is a reflection type • Forms an even developer layer.
photo sensor. If it detects a reflected light from the Toner Cartridges • Supplies toner to the drum.
for each color, it determines that the used developer has not filled (c) The Trimmer Blade is positioned so that a gap is maintained
up the collection box, meaning that the Toner Cartridge is still new. between the Magnet Roll and the Trimmer Blade; it forms an
If it does not detect a reflected light from the Toner Cartridge, the even developer layer on the Magnet Roll.
Toner Cartridge is old.
(d) The Tracking Roll maintains a gap between the drum and the
2. Cartridge Sensor Magnet Roll.
The Cartridge Sensor is a reflection type photo sensor. It detects a
reflection light from the Toner Cartridges. If it detects a reflected 5. The Toner Cartridges (Y, M, C and Bk) have toner (including
light, it determines that the Toner Cartridge has been mounted. If it carriers) and collect the used developer (carriers).
does not detect a reflected light, it determines that the Toner
Cartridge has not been mounted.

3. Rotary Sensor
The Rotary Sensor detects the home position of the Rotary Frame
Assembly. The Developer control is done based on the home
position.
(For more details, see “7.8 Developer Control.”)

4. Developer Assembly Y, Developer Assembly M, Developer


Assembly C, Developer Assembly Bk
The major components of each of these Developer Assemblies (Y,
M, C and Bk) are the Augers, Magnet Roll, Trimmer Blade and
Tracking Roll.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-31


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 2-32. Development

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-32


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.8 IBT-I Process Motor runs, the transfer reference marks are alternately
detected. This prevents the image from being transferred onto
1. Transfer Assembly the same location on the belt all the time—something that leads
The Transfer Assembly consists of the following components: to image degradation.
n 1st BTR n IBT Drive Roll Assembly (f) A one-color toner image on the drum is transferred onto the IBT
n Back Up Roll n TRO Sensor Belt Assembly. This process is repeated four times (for four
n Contact Roll n IBT Belt Assembly colors). At the end, a 4-color overlaid toner image has been
formed on the IBT Belt Assembly. When the complete toner
(a) The 1st BTR (First Bias Transfer Roll) is a conductive roll, facing image is formed on the belt, the 2nd BTR provides negative
the drum. (The IBT Belt Assembly is in the middle.) The 1st BTR transfer voltage to the belt and the belt transfers the image (of 4-
transfers the toner image on the drum to the IBT Belt Assembly. color toner) onto the paper (2nd transfer).
(b) The Contact Roll is a metal roll (small diameter). It is in contact
with the Back Up Roll and provides the 2nd transfer voltage to
the Back Up Roll.
(c) The Back Up Roll is a conductive roll, facing (from inside) the
2nd BTR. (The IBT Belt Assembly is in the middle). When the
paper passes through, the Back Up Roll provides the 2nd
transfer voltage to the paper from the inside of the IBT Belt
Assembly.
(d) The IBT Drive Roll Assembly transfers the driving force of the
Process Motor Assembly to the IBT Belt Assembly. (The
Process Motor Assembly receives the driving force from the
Process WDD Assembly.)
(e) The silver marks (TRO marks) is pasted at the rear end of the
IBT Belt Assembly. This is because the toner images transferred
onto the IBT Belt Assembly must match precisely. The TRO
Sensor detects this mark every time the IBT Belt Assembly
makes one rotation. When the sensor detects the mark, the
system waits for a predetermined period and then generates a
TRO signal (which indicates the reference point and the image
transfer reference point to form an image.) The IBT Belt
Assembly has two TRO marks. As a result, every time the
Figure 2-33. IBT-I

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-33


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.9 IBT-II (a) The Cleaning Blade moves forward to the IBT Belt Assembly
after the 2nd transfer process and scrapes off the remaining
1. 2nd BTR Assembly toner on the belt.
The 2nd BTR Assembly consists of the following components: (b) The Auger transfers the scraped toner to the Auger High
n 2nd BTR Assembly.
n 2nd BTR Cleaner (The Auger High Assembly transfers the toner to the Waste
n Detach Saw (Charge Removable board) Toner Box.)

(a) The 2nd BTR (Second Bias Transfer Roll) is a conductive roll. It
faces the Back Up Roll from outside the belt. (The IBT Belt
Assembly is in the middle.) The 2nd BTR induces the transfer
voltage from the voltage provided by the Back Up Roll and
transfers the toner image on the IBT Belt Assembly onto the
paper (2nd transfer).
(b) The 2nd BTR Cleaner is in contact with the 2nd BTR and
scrapes off the toner from the surface of the 2nd BTR. (The
scraped toner is collected in the toner chamber in the 2nd BTR
Assembly.)
(c) The Detach Saw (Charge Removal Plate) provides the charges
on the back of the paper and neutralizes/removes the charges
on the paper.

2. BTR Cam Solenoid


The BTR Cam Solenoid transfers the drive force from the P/H Motor
Assembly, via the P/H Drive Assembly, to the 2nd BTR Cam
Assembly, and controls the advance/retract movement of the 2nd
BTR Assembly. (Advance: The 2nd BTR Cleaner moves forward to
the IBT Belt Assembly; Retract: The 2nd BTR Cleaner moves away
from the IBT Belt Assembly.)

3. BELT Cleaner Assembly


The Belt Cleaner Assembly consists of the following components:
n Cleaning Blade Figure 2-34. IBT-II
n Auger

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-34


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.10 Fusing-I Assembly fails, the contact point in the Thermostat opens,
shutting off the power supply to the H/R Heater and P/R
1. Fuser Assembly Heater (secondary overheating prevention mechanism).
The Fuser Assembly fuses the toner on the paper with heat and • The Thermal Fuse is connected in series to the power supply
pressure, and transfers the paper in and out, to and from the Fuser circuits of the H/R Heater and P/R Heater. If the primary and
Assembly. The Fuser Assembly consists of the Main Fuser secondary overheating prevention mechanisms fail, the Ther-
Assembly and the Fuser Tray Assembly. mal Fuse is melted by the heat, shutting off the power supply
to the H/R Heater and P/R Heater (tertiary overheating pre-
n Main Fuser Assembly vention mechanism).
The Main Fuser Assembly consists of the Heat Roll, Pressure • The Fuser Exit Sensor detects a paper pass from the position
Roll, H/R Heater, P/R Heater, Temperature Sensor Assembly change of the Fuser Exit Actuator.
and others. • The H/R Finger prevents paper from being rolled into the
Heat Roll.
• The Heat Roll is a cylindrical metal roll with a rubber layer on
the surface. It applies heat to the paper to fuse the toner onto • The P/R Finger prevents paper from being rolled into the
the paper. Pressure Roll.
• The Pressure Roll is a cylindrical metal roll with the rubber
layer on the surface. It applies heat and pressure on the
paper to fuse the toner on the paper.
• The H/R Heater is a halogen lamp in which heating coils have
been sealed. (The heating coils provide the heat source for
the Heat Roll.) The H/R Heater is installed inside the Heat
Roll and heats the Heat Roll to the fusing temperature.
• The P/R Heater is a halogen lamp in which heating coils have
been sealed. (The heating coils provide the heat source for
the Pressure Roll.) The P/R Heater is installed inside the
Pressure Roll and heats the Pressure Roll to the fusing tem-
perature.
• The Temperature Sensor Assembly is a thermistor sensor. It
always touches the Heat Roll and detects the temperature on
the Heat Roll’s surface. (A thermistor is an element that
changes its resistance by temperature.) From the detected
temperature, the Temperature Sensor Assembly controls the
ON/OFF of the H/R Heater and P/R Heater and prevents
overheating (primary overheating prevention mechanism).
• The Thermostat is connected (in series) to the power supply
circuits of the H/R Heater and P/R Heater. If the primary over-
heating prevention mechanism of the Temperature Sensor

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-35


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 2-35. Fusing-I

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-36


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.11 Fusing-II appear on the paper. The Oil Roll needs to touch the Heat
Roll only during the fusing operation; at other times, the Oil
1. Fuser Assembly Roll must remain separated from the Heat Roll.
The Fuser Assembly fuses the toner on the paper with heat and The Oil Cam Solenoid transfers the driving force from the P/H
pressure and transfers the paper to and from the Fuser Assembly. Main Assembly, via the P/H Drive Assembly, to the Oil Cam
Assembly, and controls the advance/retract operations of the
The Fuser Assembly consists of the Main Fuser Assembly and Oil Roll Assembly. (Advance: The Oil Roll of the Oil Roll
Fuser Tray Assembly. Assembly moves forward to the Heat Roll; Retract: The Oil
Roll moves away from the Heat Roll.)
(a) Fuser Tray Assembly
• Exchange Solenoid
The Fuser Tray Assembly consists of the Fuser In Sensor, the After fusing, the paper may be ejected face up or face down.
Oil Cam Solenoid and the Exchange Solenoid. It transfers the The Exchange Solenoid switches the Exchange Chute and
paper to and from the Main Fuser Assembly. controls the paper ejection modes.
• Fuser In Sensor • Exit-1 Roll Assembly
The Fuser In Sensor detects a paper pass status from the The Exit-1 Roll Assembly transfers the fused paper from the
position change of the Fuser In Actuator. (It detects the paper Fuser Main Assembly.
tip based on the detection timing of the Fuser Exit Sensor.)
• Fuser Chute Fan 2. Oil Roll Assembly
The Fuser Chute Fan pulls down the paper to the Fuser The Oil Roll Assembly has an Oil Roll in which Fuser Oil has been
Paper Guide and the Horizontal Chute. This is necessary to impregnated. The Oil Roll in the Oil Roll Assembly follows the Heat
position the paper correctly so that the paper is properly Roll rotation and applies the Fuser Oil evenly onto the Heat Roll
transferred to the Fuser Main Assembly. surface. The Fuser Oil prevents the following:
• Cleaner Cam Solenoid
The Cleaner Blade in the Belt Cleaner Assembly needs to • Paper from being rolled into the Heat Roll.
touch the IBT Belt Assembly only immediately after the 2nd • Heat Roll wear caused by contact with the Temperature Sen-
toner transfer. It must not touch the belt at any other time. (If sor Assembly and the H/R Fingers.
the Cleaning Blade is touching the IBT Belt Assembly while
the toner image is being formed on the IBT Belt Assembly,
the toner image is damaged.)
The Cleaner Cam Solenoid transfers the driving force from
the P/H Main Assembly, via the P/H Drive Assembly, to the
Cleaner Cam Assembly and the Cleaner Cam Guide, and
controls the advance/retract operation of the Belt Cleaner
Assembly. (Advance: The Cleaning Blade moves forward to
the IBT Belt Assembly; Retract: The Cleaning Blade moves
away from the IBT Belt Assembly.)
• Oil Cam Solenoid
If the Oil Roll in the Oil Roll Assembly is constantly touching
the Heat Roll, the Fuser Oil may degrade and oil stains may

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-37


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 2-36. Fusing-II

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-38


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.12 Paper Exit


1. Exit-2 Roll Assembly
The Exit-2 Roll Assembly transfers the fused paper to the Top
Cover Assembly (face down paper ejection).

2. Exit-3 Roll Assembly


The Exit-3 Roll Assembly transfers the fused paper to the Top
Cover Assembly (face down paper ejection).

3. Exit Chute Switch


The Exit Chute Switch detects the open/close of the Exit Upper
Assembly. If open, the Exit Chute Switch halts the printer operation
(a safety feature). (The Exit Chute Switch is turned ON when the rib
of the Exit Upper Assembly is pushed in.)

4. Fuser Fan
The Fuser Fan exhausts the heat from the Fuser Assembly to
prevent overheating in the printer.

5. Top Exit Sensor


The Top Exit Sensor detects the fused paper's pass status. The
sensor detects the paper pass status from the position change of
the actuator.

Figure 2-37. Paper Exit

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-39


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.13 Drives 3. P/H Drive Assembly


The P/H Drive Assembly transfers the driving force from the P/H
1. Process Drive Assembly Motor Assembly to the Main P/H Assembly and the Drum Cartridge.
The Process Drive Assembly consists of the Process Motor
Assembly and Process WDD Assembly. It provides the driving force 4. Fuser Drive Assembly
to the Drum Cartridge and the Transfer Assembly. The Fuser Drive Assembly transfers the driving force from the P/H
Motor Assembly to the Fuser Assembly, the 2nd BTR Assembly and
(a) Process Motor Assembly the Developer Assembly.
Process Motor Assembly provides the driving force to the
following components via the Process WDD Assembly: 5. Dispense Motor Assembly
• Drum Cartridge The Dispense Motor Assembly provides the driving force to the
• Transfer Assembly Auger. (The Auger conveys the toner from the Toner Cartridge in
(b) Process WDD Assembly the Developer Assembly to the Developer Assembly.)
The Process WDD Assembly transfers the driving force from the
6. Developer Clutch Assembly
Process Motor Assembly to the Drum Cartridge and the Transfer
The Developer Clutch Assembly transfers the driving force from the
Assembly.
P/H Motor Assembly to the Developer Assembly (Magnet Roll and 2
2. P/H Motor Assembly Augers).
The P/H Motor Assembly consists of the Motor unit and the drive
7. Rotary Motor Assembly
circuit board. It provides the driving force to the following
The Rotary Motor Assembly provides the driving force to the Rotary
components via the P/H Drive Assembly and the Fuser Drive
Frame Assembly.
Assembly:
n Main P/H Assembly 8. Rotary Motor PWB
The Rotary Motor PWB controls the rotation of the Rotary Motor
n Developer Assembly Assembly and provides the power to the Rotary Motor Assembly.
n Fuser Assembly
n 2nd BTR Assembly
n Belt Cleaner Assembly
n Exit Lower Assembly
n Auger High Assembly
n Drum Cartridge

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-40


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 2-38. Drives

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-41


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.5.14 Electrical n Magnet Roll (Developer Assembly)

1. Front Cover Switch R n 1st BTR/Contact Roll (Transfer Assembly)


The Front Cover Switch R (interlock switch) detects whether the n Detach Saw (2nd BTR Assembly)
Front Cover Assembly is opened or closed. If open, the interlock
switch shuts off the 24 VDC-I/L and 5 VDC-LD circuits to cut off the 7. MCU PWB
output (24VDC/5VDC-LD) from the LVPS. The Front Cover Switch The MCU PWB controls the print operation using the data from the
R has two switches for the 2 circuits above. printer controller and the sensors and switches.
Its main functions are as follows:
2. Front Cover Switch L
The Front Cover Switch L detects whether the Front Cover n Communication with the PWB Controller
Assembly is opened or closed. If it detects that the Front Cover n Receiving data from the sensors and switches.
Assembly is open, it halts the printer operation (a safety switch).
n Controlling the ROS Assembly, Fuser Assembly and Motors
3. Top Cover Switch (Process Motor Assembly, P/H Motor Assembly, Dispense
The Top Cover Switch (interlock switch) detects the Top Cover Motor Assembly, Rotary Motor Assembly).
Assembly. If it detects no Top Cover Assembly, it cuts off the 5VDC-
n Print sequence control
LD circuit.
n Distribution of low voltage (DC) power from the LVPS to various
4. Developer Fan components.
The Developer Fan exhausts the heat from inside the printer,
preventing overheating. 8. Environment Sensor
The Environment Sensor detects the temperature in the printer. (It
5. LVPS detects the temperature using its internal thermistor. A thermistor is
The LVPS provides the AC power (from the power supply unit) to an element that changes its resistance by temperature.) Based on
the H/R Heater and P/R Heater (Fuser Assembly), and generates the detected temperature, this sensor controls the supply voltage to
stable low voltage DC power which is used by the logic circuits and the BCR and the Warm-up Fuser control temperature.
others. The LVPS includes the power supply circuit, control circuit
(for H/R Heater and P/R Heater), inlet and power switch. 9. Controller Fan
The Controller Fan exhausts the heat from inside the Controller
6. HVPS PWB, preventing the Controller PWB from overheating.
The HVPS provides high voltage to the following components. The
high voltage is needed for the various printing processes (Charging, 10. Controller PWB
Developing, 1st Transfer, 2nd Transfer, Detach). The Controller PWB receives data from the host, does the printing
operation, and controls the whole printer.
n BCR (Drum Cartridge)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-42


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 2-39. Electrical

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-43


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.6 Operation Modes


The printer has the following 7 operation modes:
o WARM-UP: The printer is warming up to be print ready.
o READY: After warm-up, the printer is waiting to print.
o PRINTING: The printer is printing.
o LIGHT SLEEP: Standby level 1
The printer is in a mode in which, to save energy,
the Fuser control temperature is low.
o DEEP SLEEP: Staneby level 2
The printer is in a mode in which, to save
energy, power is not supplied to the Fuser,
Fuser Fan or Developer Fan.
o DIAGNOSTIC TEST: The printer can accept a diagnostic
command or is running a diagnostic.
o ERROR: The printer has detected an error
(exceptions: Empty Tray error, No Paper
error, end of life errors).

The following shows the transition paths among the modes. Figure 2-40. Transition Paths among the Modes

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-44


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7 Controls

2.7.1 Paper Size Control


The following table shows the Paper Size Switch status (ON/OFF),
Diagnostic Data (Analog Input Test data), and voltage for the Size
Switches for the corresponding paper sizes.
NOTE: The Paper Size Switches are SW1, SW2, SW3, and SW4
(viewed from the left when facing the printer); the ON switch is
“1” and the OFF switch is “0.”
Table 2-1. Paper Size Control
Paper Size Switch Diagnostic Voltage
Paper size
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 display data (V DC)
No paper tray 0 0 0 0 0E - 0F 0.275 - 0.293
B5 (LEF) *1 1 1 0 0 BB - BE 3.671 - 3.715
EXECUTVE (LEF) *2
A4 (LEF) 0 1 0 0 47 - 4A 1.396 - 1.445
LETTER (LEF) 1 0 0 0 9D - A1 3.098 - 3.152
A4 (SEF) *1 0 1 1 1 72 - 76 2.248 - 2.298
LETTER (SEF) *2
LEGAL14” (SEF) 1 1 1 0 B8 - DB 4.247 - 4.276
B4 (SEF) 0 1 0 1 55 - 59 1.680 - 1.730
A3 (SEF) 0 0 1 0 2A - 2D 0.834 - 0.871
LEDGER (SEF) 0 0 1 1 3A - 3C 1.116 - 1.157
12” x 8” (SEF) 0 0 0 1 1C - 1E 0.554 - 0.583
Irregular 1 1 1 1 E7 - E9 4.537 - 4.554
<Reserved> 1 0 0 0 - --
<Reserved> 1 0 0 1 - --
<Reserved> 0 1 1 0 - -
<Reserved> 1 0 1 1 - -
<Reserved> 1 1 0 1 - -
* If the Paper Size Switch ON/OFF state is the same, one of the two will be selected according to the printer specifications. (*1: A
printer with specifications in millimeters (mm) /*2: A printer with specifications in inches.)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-45


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.2 Paper Tray Selection Control


If the paper tray is not controlled by the Printer Controller, the tray will
be selected at the Power ON defined in the table below.
Table 2-2. Paper Tray Selection Control
Priority Selected tray Conditions
Cassette 1: Paper Cassette: Yes / Paper: Yes
1 Cassette 1
Or all paper cassettes: No paper
Cassette 1: Not selected.
2 Cassette 2
Cassette 2: Paper Cassette: Yes / Paper: Yes
Cassette 1/Cassette 2: Not selected.
3 Cassette 3
Cassette 3: Paper Cassette: Yes / Paper: Yes
Cassette1/Cassette2/Cassette3: Not selected
4 Cassette 4
Cassette 4: Paper Cassette: Yes / Paper: Yes
Cassette1/Cassette2/Cassette3/Cassette 4: Not
5 MSI tray selected
MSI tray: Paper: Yes

NOTE: Cassette 1:Cassette installed under the printer.


Cassette 2:First cassette in the Large Capacity Paper Unit (option)
Cassette 3:Second cassette in the Large Capacity Paper Unit (option)
Cassette 4:Third cassette in the Large Capacity Paper Unit (option)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-46


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.3 OHP Side Detection Control


The printer detects the side (back/front) of the OHP set in the printer. If
the back side of the transparency is set facing the belt (top side), the
transparency will be rolled into the Heat Roll. The OHP Side Detection
Control function prevents an OHP film from being rolled up with the
Heat Roll. The printer detects the side of the OHP from the signals sent O H P ( film ) O H P ( film )
by the Front OHP Sensor and the Rear OHP Sensor. Epson exclusive
OHP transparency film (S041175/4) has a white edge with a notch on it.
The sensors detect the notch and the printer determines whether the
film is set properly (based on the signals sent from the sensors). If any
OHP film other than specified one is used, the printer indicates the
message “Check OHP sheet” and stops printing.

F F B R r a oO c n N k t T BB aA c C k K

N o t c h e s

R E A R O H P S E N S O R
W h it e B a n d
F R O N T O H P S E N S O R S R N A 8 5 F A

S R N A 8 6 F

Figure 2-41. OHP Film Side Detection Control

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-47


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.4 ROS Control 2.7.4.2 Light Quantity Control


Image data is input to the ROS (LD Assembly) as electrical signals.
2.7.4.1 Scanner Motor Rotation (The data is represented by the high/low voltage of the electrical
The following table defines the Scanner Motor Rotation ON/OFF control signals). The LD Assembly converts the electrical signals into light
in the printer modes. signals. (A light signal represents data by turning the laser beam on/off.)
To obtain a correct electrostatic latent image, the LD Power for the laser
light, the optical system (lens, etc.), and the drum sensitivity must be
Table 2-3. Scanner Motor Rotation Control stable. Based on the feedback from the electric potential control (See
Mode Scanner Motor: ON/OFF Section 2.7.5.1 Electric Potential Control), the LD Assembly monitors
WARM-UP OFF and controls the laser light quantity to obtain a correct electrostatic
READY OFF latent image. This control is called APC (Automatic Power Control).
PRINTING ON
LIGHT SLEEP OFF
DEEP SLEEP OFF
DIAG TEST ON in the following case:
• Diagnostic tool: Test print
• Diagnostic tool: Executing ROS_MOT in Digital
Output Test
ERROR OFF

NOTE: The Scanner Motor rotates when the PMSTT (Printing/Status Control) is
executed in any mode.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-48


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.5 Process Control


For a stable printing process, it is necessary to adjust the image
parameters. This parameter adjustment is called Process Control.

There are three types of process controls:

n Electric potential control


n Toner density control (PCDC)
n Toner density control (ADC)

2.7.5.1 Electric Potential Control


For a stable printed image, it is necessary to maintain the correct BCR
(drum charge) voltage and laser quantity. The electric potential control
does the following
n Measures the development density of the image (Cin50% patch
in each color: Y, M, C and Bk) and the non-development density
on the drum. (The image is formed on the drum by the BCR
voltage, laser, and development voltage.) (The ADC Sensor
detects the densities.)
n Computes a correct BCR voltage and laser quantity.
n Sends the data to the HVPS and ROS. (Feedback)
NOTE: A Cin50% patch is an image that has been developed for every
3 dots. The image may be monochrome (Bk) or color (YMCBk)
and is determined by the color mode. In color image formation, a
2-color image is formed in one belt rotation in the Bk → Y → M →
C sequence.

Figure 2-42. Electric Potential Control

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-49


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.5.2 Toner Density Control (PCDC)


The toner density in the developer becomes degraded as more
printings are done. To obtain a stable printed image, stable toner
density in the developer must be maintained. The PCDC (Pixel Count
Dispense Control) counts the number of video signals that are input to
the ROS Assembly and computes the consumed toner amount in the
development process. Based on data from the PCDC, the system
provides toner to the Developer Assembly. The toner is supplied to the
Developer Assembly from the Toner Cartridge when the system rotates
the Dispense Motor (Dispense Motor Assembly) (driving the Auger in
the Developer Assembly) for the calculated duration (dispense time).
The PCDC counts the capacitor charges/discharges for the video
signals in the CR circuit that has been implemented parallel to the video
signal cable.

Figure 2-43. Toner Density Control (PCDC)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-50


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.5.3 Toner Density Control (ADC) When detecting low toner, the system rotates the Dispense Motor
(Dispense Motor Assembly) (driving the Auger in the Developer
To obtain stable print quality, it is necessary to maintain constant toner Assembly) for the calculated duration (dispense time) to supply toner to
density in the developer. (The toner density must be detected correctly the Developer Assembly from the Toner Cartridge. If too much toner
in the actual developer without being affected by the laser.) The ADC (toner density in the developer is too high) is detected, the system forms
(Auto Density Control) forms BIAS development bands (for each color: numbers of BIAS development bands to consume the toner until the
YMCBk) on the drum and measures the density of the bands with the right toner density is detected.
ADC Sensor. (The BIAS development bands are formed with the
standard BCR voltage and development voltage and are different from NOTE: The BIAS development bands are images developed on the
the printing voltages.) BCR charged area that has negatively charged toner. This is
done by raising the BCR voltage higher than the development
voltage.

Figure 2-44. Toner Density Control (ADC)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-51


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.5.4 ADC Solenoid Operation 2.7.5.5 Process Sequence


The ADC Solenoid turns on/off (ON: 0.5 sec/OFF: 0.5 sec) twice The process sequences are as follows:
(nominal) every 300 counts (nominal). This operation causes the Table 2-4. Process Sequence
Cleaning Lever to clean the ADC Sensor emitter/receptor.
Sequence Description Errors Detected
Power Up Warm-UP sequence • ADC sensor error
NOTE: The count described above is based on the following: Sequence (Power ON). • Toner out
1 count:
• Low density error
Printing a sheet that has a length (feed direction) of
Cycle Up Sequence in READY mode • PCDC error
219mm (LETTER/LEF) or smaller Sequence (before printing after receiving a • High density error
2 counts: print signal).
Printing a sheet that is larger than the above. Print Sequence Printing sequence • PCDC error
• High density error
Cycle Down Print-end (print job end) -
Sequence sequence

During these sequences, the following errors are detected.


• Toner out
• ADC sensor error
• Abnormal density (too low) error
• Abnormal density (to high) error
• PCDC error

The printer indicates the corresponding message on the LCD panel and
stops printing.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-52


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.6 Xerographic Control


Table 2-5. BCR/Erase Lamp Control
2.7.6.1 BCR/Erase Lamp Control Status Control item Description
Warm-up BCR Turns BCR ON as the Warm-up mode starts at
BCR/Erase lamp control in the BCR and the Erase Lamp Control is mode starting power on.
defined in the following table (ON/OFF in the process control is not In A1 second after ON, turns the BCR OFF.
included.): Erase lamp Turns BCR ON as the Warm-up mode starts at
power on.
In A1 second after ON, turns the BCR off.
Turns the Erase lamp ON as the Warm-up mode
starts with power on.
In B1 second after ON, turns the Erase lamp OFF.
Print job BCR After Cycle-up sequence is complete, turns the BCR
starting ON with the first TRO signal.
Erase lamp Receiving the print signal, turns the Erase lamp ON
as Cycle-up sequence starts.
During printing BCR [Standard speed mode]
Keeps the BCR ON.
[Half speed mode]
After forming the image (electrostatic latent image)
with the last color, turns the BCR OFF with the
second TRO signal, and turns it ON with the TRO
signal which is a basis for switching the Developer
assembly.
Erase lamp [Standard speed mode]
Keeps the Erase lamp On.
[Half speed mode]
Turns the Erase lamp OFF with the first TRO signal
after forming the image with the last color. Then turn
the lamp ON with the next TRO signal and turn it
OFF in B2 seconds. Turns the erase lamp ON with
the TRO signal which is a basis for switching the
Developer assembly.
Print job BCR Turns the BCR OFF in A2 seconds after TRO signal
ending is sent when the imaging with the last color is
complete.
Erase lamp Turns the Erase lamp OFF in [A2 + B3] seconds.
(Half speed mode: [A2 + B3] x 2 seconds)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-53


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.6.2 Drum Cartridge Replacement

C A U T IO N Whenever removing the Drum Cartridge, the printer


must be turned off.

When the Drum Cartridge is replaced with a new and the printer is on,
the printer generates the following image on the furface of the PPC
drum so that the Cleaning Blade does not rotate in the reverse direction.
Since the image is not transferred (1st), the toner adheres to the
Cleaning Blade. (The toner acts as a lubricant.) This prevents Cleaning
Blade from rotating in reverse.
Image generated when the Drum Cartridge is replaced
The following image is generated several times (the number of
generations has been predefined/Nominal: 5 times) in three colors
(Yellow, Magenta and Cyan).

Figure 2-45. Image Generated

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-54


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.6.3 Drum Cartridge End of Life Detection 2.7.6.4 Waste Toner Box Full Detection
1. End of life detection When the Waste toner box is almost full, the waste toner sensor detects
The life of the Drum Cartridge is determined by the number of Drum the status (Signal: High) and the message “Waste T Box Nearfull” is
rotations. By accumulating the belt rotation counts (this data is sent indicated on the LCD panel. The printer continues to perform the
from the TRO sensor), the Drum Cartridge life is detected. specified printing (toner dispense time*1) and stops printing when the
The conditions for Drum Cartridge life are defined in the following message “Replace Waste T Box” appears on the LCD panel. The
table: counter is reset when a new waste toner box is installed.
Table 2-6. Conditions for Drum Cartridge Life
*1: See the table below for the reference values which show how many
Drum Cartridge end of life warning
100,100 counts (standard) pages can be printed until “Replace Waste T Box” is displayed.
(“Warning Photocondctr”)
Drum Cartridge life - exceeded
110,000 counts (standard)
(“Replace Photocondctr”) Table 2-7. Available Print Pages
Page Length
Print Mode
NOTE:The above counts are incremented by 2 and accumulated 215.9 mm or less More than 215.9 mm
every time the TRO signal is generated while the Process Monochrome 1250 or less 625 or less
Motor Assembly is in operation. (The drum rotates twice for Color 312 or less 156 or less
one belt rotation.)

C A U T IO N Whenever you remove the Drum Cartridge, turn


the printer off.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-55


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.7 Developer Control

2.7.7.1 Home Position Detection


The Home Position is the starting point for Development Control. The
following position is the Home Position of the Rotary Frame Assembly.
Home Position: 30° in the opposite direction of the rotation
direction from the Bk development position on the
Developer Assembly.

The Home Position is the location where the Rotary Frame Assembly
has been rotated 46° after the Rotary Sensor detected the protruding
section of the Rotary Frame Assembly.

Figure 2-46. Home Position Detection

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-56


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.7.2 Toner Cartridge Detection Position 2.7.7.4 Development Position


The Toner Cartridges are detected by the Cartridge Sensor. The The Developer Assemblies are moved to their development positions by
Cartridge Sensor detects the Toner Cartridges at the appropriate the Rotary Frame Assembly rotation.
detection position. Each Toner Cartridge is moved to its detection
position by the Rotary Frame Assembly rotation. Table 2-10. Development Position
120° from the Home Position
Toner Cartridge - Y development position
Table 2-8. Toner Cartridge Detection Position (rotational position)
270° from the Home Position (rotational Toner Cartridge - M development 210° from the Home Position
Toner Cartridge - Y detection position position (rotational position)
position)
0° from the Home Position 300° from the Home Position
Toner Cartridge - M detection position Toner Cartridge - C development position
(rotational position) (rotational position)
90° from the Home Position Toner Cartridge - Bk development 390° (30°) from the Home Position
Toner Cartridge - C detection position position (rotational position)
(rotational position)
180° from the Home Position
Toner Cartridge - Bk detection position
(rotational position)

2.7.7.3 Toner Cartridge: Old/New Detection


The Toner Cartridges (new/old) are detected by the Used Cartridge
Sensor. The Used Cartridge Sensor detects the Toner Cartridges (new/
old) at the appropriate detection position. Each Toner Cartridge is
moved to its detection position by the Rotary Frame Assembly rotation.

Table 2-9. Development Position


Toner Cartridge - Y (new/old) detection 75° from the Home Position
position (rotational position)
Toner Cartridge - M (new/old) detection 165° from the Home Position
position (rotational position)
Toner Cartridge - C (new/old) detection 255° from the Home Position
position (rotational position)
Toner Cartridge - Bk (new/old) detection 345° from the Home Position
position (rotational position)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-57


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.7.5 Development Control: Detection Methods (a) No Toner Detection flow

1. Toner Cartridge detection S T A R T


The Cartridge Sensor detects the Toner Cartridges at the detection
positions. A photo sensor, it detects reflected light from a Toner
Cartridge and determines the following: D is p e n s e tim e ( a c c u m u la te d ) o f th e c o lo r ≥ P r e d e te r m in e d tim e A

Y e s N o
Reflection: Toner Cartridge has been installed.
"T o n e r L o w "
No reflection: Toner Cartridge has not been installed.

2. Toner Cartridge (new/old) detection N o to n e r d e te c te d fro m N o to n e r d e te c te d fro m


The Used Cartridge Sensor detects the Toner Cartridge (new/old) at th e B ia s d e v e lo p m e n t b a n d . th e B ia s d e v e lo p m e n t b a n d .

the detection position. In the trickle development method, used Y e s N o Y e s N o


developer is collected in the collection chamber in the Toner
" " T T oo n e r O u tt " "
Cartridge. A reflection seal is pasted on the wall of the collection
S R N A 9 2 G A
chamber. As the developer is collected, the seal is covered with
developer; it does not reflect light. The Used Cartridge Sensor is a
(b) No Toner Reset flow
photo sensor and detects reflected light from the collection chamber
of the toner cartridges. S T A R T

Reflection: Toner cartridge is still new.


T o n e r C a r tr id g e : N e w /O ld d e te c tio n
No reflection: Toner cartridge is old. (Used carrier is collected.)
N e w O ld
3. Toner Cartridge (no toner) detection
R e c o v e r in g to n e r d e n s ity R e c o v e r in g to n e d e n s ity
The No Toner status is detected by the process control. in th e d e v e lo p e r in th e d e v e lo p e r
The following shows the No Toner Detection flow, No Toner Reset
D id n o t r e c o v e r D id n o t r e c o v e r
flow, and Toner End of Life Warning Reset flow.
R e c o v e re d "T o n e r L o w " R e c o v e re d "T o n e r O u t"

D is p e n s e tim e ( a c c u m u la te d )
N o to n e r: R e s e t o f th e c o lo r = P r e d e te r m in e d tim e A
( C le a r D is p e n s e tim e
( a c c u m u la te d ) o f th e c o lo r )
N o to n e r: R e s e t
"T o n e r L o w "

S R N A 9 1 F A

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-58


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(c) Toner End of Life Warning Reset flow

S T A R T

T o n e r C a r tr id g e : N e w /O ld d e te c tio n
N e w O ld
T o n e r life w a r n in g : R e s e t T o n e r life w a r n in g
( C le a r D is p e n s e tim e ) ] ("T o n e r L o w ")
( a c c u m u la te d ) o f th e c o lo r ) ( D is p e n s e tim e o f th e c o lo r : n o c h a n g e )

S R N A 9 3 F A

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-59


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.8 IBT Control

2.7.8.1 First Transfer (Drum → Belt) O u tp u t th e p r e d e te r m in e d c u r r e n t to th e 1 s t B T R to


m o n ito r th e 1 s t B T R r e s is ta n c e .
Transferring the toner image on the drum onto the belt is called the First
Transfer. The First Transfer is done when the HVPS outputs power to
the 1st BTR.

(1) First Transfer Current (Flow) M o n ito r s th e o u tp u t v o lta g e o b ta in e d fr o m th e


p r e d e te r m in e d c u r r e n t ( a s a s u b s titu te fo r th e r e s is ta n c e v a lu e )
The resistance of the 1st BTR changes due to time and
environment. To obtain a stable transfer, it is necessary to adjust
this resistance by adjusting the transfer current. The following is a
flowchart showing how 1st transfer current is determined. C a lc u la te th e 1 s t tr a n s fe r c u r r e n t a c c o r d in g to th e o u tp u t
v o lta g e m o n ito r e d .
N o te : T h e re a re th re e ty p e s o f 1 s t tra n s fe r c u rre n t fo r th e
o u tp u t v o lta g e r a n g e s - H ig h , M id d le a n d L o w .

A d ju s t th e 1 s t tr a n fe r c u r r e n t a c c o r d in g to th e D r u m u s a g e .
N o te : T h e D ru m s u r fa c e c h a r a c te r is tic s c h a n g e s a c c o r d in g to u s e .

D e te r m in e th e 1 s t tr a n s fe r to u s e in p r in tin g .

Figure 2-47. First Transfer Current Flow

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-60


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.8.2 Second Transfer (Belt → Paper)


Transferring the toner image on the belt onto the paper is called 2nd
Transfer. 2nd transfer is done when the HVPS outputs the power to the A d v a n c e th e 2 n d B T R A s s e m b ly a n d th e B e lt C le a n e r A s s e m b ly
Contact Roll.

1. 2nd Transfer Current


O u tp u t th e p r e d e te r m in e d v o lta g e to th e C o n ta c t R o ll to m o n ito r th e
The resistance of the 2nd BTR and Back Up Roll changes due to 2 n d tr a n s fe r r e s is ta n c e .
time and environment. To obtain a stable transfer, it is necessary to
adjust the resistance by adjusting the transfer current. The following
is a flowchart showing how 2nd transfer current is determined. M o n ito r th e o u tp u t c u r r e n t o b ta in e d fo r m th e p r e d e te r m in e d v o lta g e
( a s a s u b s titu te fo r th e r e s is ta n c e v a lu e ) .
NOTE: If the output current is not valid, including the case that the 2nd
BTR does not perform advance/retract control because of the
2nd BTR malfunction, it causes the 2nd BTR bad resistance and
a service call error is indicated on the LCD panel. C a lc u la te th e 2 n d tr a n s fe r v o lta g e a c c o r d in g to th e o u tp u t c u r r e n t
m o n ito r e d .
N o te : T h e 2 n d tr a n s fe r v o lta g e d iffe r s d e p e n d in g o n th e c o lo r m o d e ,
s p e e d m o d e a n d p a p e r ty p e .

A d ju s t th e 2 n d tr a n s fe r c u r r e n t a c c o r d in g to th e 1 s t tr a n s fe r v o lta g e .

D e te r m in e th e 2 n d tr a n s fe r v o lta g e to b e u s e d fo r p r in tin g .

R e tr a c t th e 2 n d B T R A s s e m b ly a n d th e B e lt C le a n e r A s s e m b ly .

Figure 2-48. Second Transfer Current Flow

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-61


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2. 2nd BTR Advance/Retract control NOTE:If there is not sufficient time from when the BTR Cam
Solenoid is turned on from its off state—because there is not
In a 2nd transfer, the 2nd BTR must be in the Advance position.
enough time between the bottom edge of the previous image
(Otherwise it must be in the Retracted position.) The 2nd BTR
and the top edge of the next image (for example, the time
Advance/Retract is controlled by the BTR Cam Solenoid.
between the 1st print in the LETTER [LEF] (1 side of the belt)
NOTE:To advance the 2nd BTR, the system continuously turns on in the 2-UP mode and the 2nd print)— the BTR Cam
the BTR Cam Solenoid. To retract the 2nd BTR, the system Solenoid stays ON and the HVPS continues to supply power
continuously turns off the BTR Cam Solenoid. (The mode is to the Contact Roll.
changed by the P/H Motor Assembly rotation.) NOTE:The time required for the 2nd BTR advance operation is 1.2
seconds (standard speed mode) and 2.4 seconds (half-
BTR cam solenoid On/Off timing is as shown in the table below:
speed mode) since the 2nd BTR receives the BTR Cam
Table 2-11. 2nd BTR Advance/Retract Control Solenoid ON signal. The time required for the 2nd BTR
Standard speed mode retract operation is 1 second (standard speed mode) and 2
Comes ON E1 second before the top edge of the seconds (half-speed mode) since the 2nd BTR receives the
ON timing
image (printed area) passes the 2nd transfer position.
BTR Cam OFF signal.
Comes ON E3 seconds before the top edge of the
Normal state
image (printed area) passes the 2nd transfer position.
3. 2nd BTR Assembly end of life detection
OFF In case the rear edge of the image (printed area)
timing Abnormal
passes the 2nd transfer position after the rear edge of (a) End of life detection
the paper, the solenoid comes OFF E3 seconds before
state
the rear edge of the paper passes the 2nd transfer The life expectancy of the 2nd BTR Assembly is determined by
position. the number of printings (number of 2nd BTR transfer rotations).
Half speed mode By accumulating the 2nd BTR rotation counts, the life
Comes ON E2 second before the top edge of the expectancy of the 2nd BTR Assembly (2nd BTR) is determined.
ON timing
image (printed area) passes the 2nd transfer position.
The conditions for 2nd BTR end of life detection is defined in the
Comes ON E4 seconds before the top edge of the
Normal state following table (See the next page):
image (printed area) passes the 2nd transfer position.

OFF In case the rear edge of the image (printed area)


timing passes the 2nd transfer position after the rear edge of Table 2-12. 2nd BTR End of Life Detection
Abnormal
the paper, the solenoid comes OFF E4 seconds before
state 2nd BTR Assembly end of life warning
the rear edge of the paper passes the 2nd transfer 98,000 counts (standard)
position. (Maintenance-call error xxxx)
2nd BTR life - exceeded
100,000 counts (standard)
(Service-call error: E0024)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-62


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

NOTE:The count described above is based on the following:


1 count:
- Printing a sheet that has a length (feed direction) of 219mm
(LETTER/LEF) or smaller
2 counts:
- Printing a sheet that is larger than the above.
(b) Processes after replacement

C A U T IO N Do the following operations after you replace the


2nd BTR Assembly with a new one. Doing any of
these operations before replacing the 2nd BTR
Assembly may result in damage to the system or
cause the system to malfunction.

• Life expectancy exceeded - Service-call error


After replacing the 2nd BTR Assembly with a new one,
peform the “2nd BTR Reset” in the maintenance menu.
• End of life warning - Maintenance service-call error
After replacing the 2nd BTR Assembly with a new one,
peform the “2nd BTR Reset” in the maintenance menu.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-63


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.8.3 Discharging Toner (excess toner) may be on the belt surface:

Discharging is to neutralize/remove the charge on paper after 2nd n Residual toner from the 2nd transfer.
transfer. It is done by applying high voltage from the HVPS to the n Residual toner from the Cin50% patch and BIAS development
Detach Saw in the “2nd BTR Assembly. bands.
n Untransferred toner on the belt because of a paper jam.
2.7.8.4 Belt Cleaning
1. Belt Cleaning types
The belt surface must be clean for an image to be formed. The belt
There are three types of belt cleaning
surface is cleaned by the Belt Cleaner Assembly. The Belt Cleaner
Assembly needs to advance to the belt surface to clean it. The Belt (a) Normal cleaning
Cleaner Assembly Advance/Retract is controlled by the Cleaner Cam
The Belt is cleaned during a normal print operation. The
Solenoid.
maximum printable area (18 inches in the process direction) is
NOTE: To advance the Belt Cleaner Assembly, the system continuously cleaned.
turns on the Cleaner Cam Solenoid. To retract the Belt Cleaner
(b) Irregular cleaning
Assembly, the system continuously turns off the Cleaner Cam
Solenoid. (The mode is changed by the P/H Motor Assembly An irregular cleaning is done when the Warm-up mode is started
rotation.) (except recovering from an image generation error) after a
NOTE: If there is not sufficient time from when the Cleaner Cam Cin50% patch or BIAS development bands have been
Solenoid is turned on from its off state—because there is not generated. One circumference of the belt is cleaned.
enough time between the bottom edge of the previous image (c) Error cleaning
and the top edge of the next image (for example, in a continuous
printing in the standard speed mode or B/W mode)—the Cleaner When the system is recovering from an image generation error,
Cam Solenoid stays ON and the Belt Cleaner Assembly toner may be on the belt; the belt is cleaned when the Warm-up
continue to be in the advanced position. mode is started. One circumference of the belt is cleaned.

NOTE: The time required for the Belt Cleaner Assembly advance
operation is 1.0 seconds (standard speed mode) and 2.1
seconds (half-speed mode) since the Belt Cleaner Assembly
receives the Cleaner Cam Solenoid ON signal. The time
required for the Belt Cleaner Assembly retract operation is 0.9
seconds (standard speed mode) and 1.8 seconds (half-speed
mode) since the Belt Cleaner receives the Cleaner Cam
Solenoid OFF signal.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-64


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2. Cleaner solenoid ON/OFF timing (b) Irregular cleaning


NOTE:The top edge of the image in the 2UP mode is defined as the Table 2-14. Irregular Cleaning On/Off Timing
top edge of the first page on the IBT 1 surface. ON timing While the IBT is driven, the solenoid comes ON G3 seconds
before the top edge of the image (printed area) on the IBT
surface advances to the position where the Belt cleaner
(a) Normal cleaning
assembly cleans the belt.
Table 2-13. Normal Cleaning On/Off Timing
OFF timing Goes from ON to OFF G2 seconds before the top edge of
ON timing Comes ON G1 second before the top edge of the image the next image (printed area) on the IBT surface advances
(printed area) on the IBT surface after the 2nd transfer to the position where the Belt cleaner assembly cleans the
advances to the position where the Belt cleaner assembly belt.
cleans the belt.
OFF timing Goes from ON to OFF G2 seconds before the top edge of
(c) Error cleaning
the next image (printed area) on the IBT surface advances
to the position where the Belt cleaner assembly cleans the Table 2-15. Error Cleaning On/Off Timing
belt.
ON timing While the IBT is driven, the solenoid comes ON G1 second
before the top edge of the image (printed area) on the IBT
NOTE:The time specified above only applies to the standard surface advances to the position where the Belt cleaner
speed mode. The time required for the half speed mode will assembly cleans the belt.
be doubled. OFF timing Goes from ON to OFF G2 seconds before the top edge of
the next image (printed area) on the IBT surface advances
NOTE:If there is not sufficient time for the Cleaner Cam to the position where the Belt cleaner assembly cleans the
Solenoid to switch from OFF to ON—because there is not belt.
enough time between the bottom edge of the previous image
and the top edge of the next image (for example, in a
continuous printing in the standard speed mode or B/W
mode)—the Cleaner Cam Solenoid stays ON and the Belt
Cleaner Assembly continues to be in the advanced condition.
NOTE:The time required for the Belt Cleaner Assembly advance
operation is 1.0 seconds (standard speed mode) and 2.1
seconds (half-speed mode) since the Belt Cleaner Assembly
receives the Cleaner Cam Solenoid ON signal. The time
required for the Belt Cleaner Assembly retract operation is
0.9 seconds (standard speed mode) and 1.8 seconds (half-
speed mode) since the Belt Cleaner receives the Cleaner
Cam Solenoid OFF signal.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-65


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

3. Belt Cleaner Assembly end of life detection (b) Processes after replacement
(a) End of life detection
C A U T IO N Do the following operations after you replace the
The life of the Belt Cleaner Assembly is determined by the Belt Cleaner Assembly with a new one. Doing any of
number of printings (number of belt cleanings). By accumulating these operations before replacing the Belt Cleaner
cleaning counts, the life of the Belt Cleaning Assembly Assembly may result in damage to the system or
(Cleaning Blade) life is determined. The conditions for Belt cause the system to malfunction.
Cleaner Assembly end of life detection is as defined in the
following table:
• Life expectancy exceeded
After replacing the 2nd Belt Cleaner Assembly with a new
Table 2-16. IBT Cleaner End Of Life Detection one, perform “IBT Cleaner Reset” in the maintenance menu.
Belt Cleaner Assembly end of life warning • End of life warning
98,000 counts (standard) After replacing the 2nd Belt Cleaner Assembly with a new
(Maintenance-call error xxxx)
Belt Cleaner Assembly life - exceeded one, perform “IBT Cleaner Reset” in the maintenance menu.
100,000 counts (standard)
(Service-call error: E0023)

NOTE:
The count described above is based on the following:
1 count:
- Each print of the two prints on one belt surface (2-UP mode)
2 counts:
- One print in 1-UP mode,
- One print on one belt surface (2-UP mode).

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-66


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.9 1-UP/2-UP Control 2. 2-UP mode


Two sheets are transported the distance equivalent to one belt
This section describes the print sequence for 1-UP and 2-UP modes. circumference. The image (toner image) is formed as follows:

Table 2-17. 1-UP/2-UP Control Yellow (1st sheet) → Yellow (2nd sheet) → Magenta (1st sheet) →
Image for 1 Belt Magenta (2nd sheet) → Cyan (1st sheet) → Cyan (2nd sheet) →
Mode Paper size
Circumference Black (1st sheet) → Black (2nd sheet)
1-UP 1 print All paper sizes
2-UP 2 prints A4 (LEF)/LETTER (LEF) or smaller

1. 1-UP mode
One sheet is transported the distance equivalent to one belt
circumference. The image (toner image) is formed in the following
color sequence: Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Black.

Figure 2-50. 2-UP Mode

Figure 2-49. 1-UP Mode

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-67


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.10 Fuser Control 2.7.10.2 Warm-up Control


When Fuser Warm-up (Warm-up mode) starts, the H/R Heater and P/R
2.7.10.1 Fuser Control Method Heater are turned on. When the Fuser temperature reaches the Fuser
The Fuser temperature is controlled by turning the H/R Heater and the control temperature, Fuser Warm-up ends. The Fuser control
P/R Heater ON/OFF as follows: temperature in the Warm-up mode changes (described in the table
below) according to the Heat Roll surface temperature at Power ON.
1. If the temperature on the surface of the Heat Roll is higher than the
Fuser control temperature, the power supplied to the H/R Heater Table 2-18. Warm-up Control
and P/R Heater is turned off. (Fuser temperature: Thermistor
Heat Roll surface
detected temperature in the Temperature Sensor Assembly) Fuser control
temperature at Description
temperature
Power ON
2. If the temperature on the surface of the Heat Roll is lower than the [Standard [Temp.1]°C Temp. 1 has been defined by the NVM
Fuser control temperature, the power supplied to the H/R Heater temperature: H] °C (MCU PWB).
and P/R Heater is turned on. (Fuser temperature: Thermistor or higher

detected temperature in the Temperature Sensor Assembly) Less than [0.1t+b]°C Warm-up ends after 30 seconds from when
[Standard the Heat Roll surface temperature becomes
temperature: H] °C [0.1t+b]°C (after Power ON) and the Fuser
control temperature becomes [Temp.1]°C.
t: Fuser temperature at Power On
b: Compensation (Defined in NVM on the
MCU PWB.)

NOTE: The Fuser temperature in the Warm-up is corrected according to


the environment temperature (detected by the Environment
Sensor).
NOTE: When Fuser Warm-up is started, the Heater turns ON/OFF for a
predetermined duration and then remains ON.
NOTE: Thermal fuser and the thermostat are activated under the
following conditions:
• Thermal fuse: 141°C
• Thermostat: 180°C

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-68


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.10.3 Mode Control: READY, LIGHT SLEEP, DEEP SLEEP 2.7.10.4 Printing Mode Control
The ON/OFF controls for the H/R Heater and P/R Heater are defined as The Fuser control temperature for the Printing mode has been
follows: determined by the paper type (regular paper, OHP, etc.), color mode
(YMCBk mode/BW mode), environment temperature (detected by the
Table 2-19. Mode Control Environment Sensor) and the number of continuous printings. The H/R
Heater and P/R Heater are turned ON/OFF as determined by the Fuser
Mode Heater ON/OFF control
control temperature.
READY • If the Fuser temperature is lower than the Fuser control
temperature (Temp 1), then Heater On. NOTE: Before and after the Printing mode is enabled, a compulsive
• If the Fuser temperature is the Fuser control temperature
heater ON/OFF is executed.
(Temp 1) or higher, then Heater OFF.
LIGHT SLEEP • If the Fuser temperature is lower than the Fuser control
temperature (Temp.0) in the Light Sleep mode, then 2.7.10.5 Not Ready State Detection During Printing
Heater ON.
• If the Fuser temperature is Fuser control temperature A Not Ready state is generated to maintain constant and correct print
(Temp.0) or higher in the Light Sleep mode, then Heater quality. When a Not Ready state is detected, the system halts the print
OFF.
job.
DEEP SLEEP Always Heater OFF.
1. A Not Ready state occurs during printing if the following occurs

(a) More than 30 sheets are printed during a predefined period


when the paper size is B4 (SEF) or smaller and the mode is B/
W.
(b) Continuous printings are ordered in the B/W mode immediately
after YMCBk mode.

2. Not Ready detection timing


Each time the Fuser Exit Sensor detects a sheet of paper, the
system check whether all paper has been ejected. If so, the system
issues a Not Ready state and stops printing.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-69


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

3. Not Ready state: Canceling 2.7.10.6 Oil Roll Control


When the system is determining whether to cancel a Not Ready
state, it cancels the state after running the P/H Motor Assembly for a If the Oil Roll in the Oil Roll Assembly continuously touches the Heat
predetermined period. The following describes how a Not Ready Roll, the Fuser Oil may degrade and oil stains may appear on the paper.
state is canceled: The Oil Roll needs to touch (advance to) the Heat Roll only during the
fusing operation; at all other times, the Oil Roll must be separated
(a) The system has already accepted a print signal in the B/W mode (retracted) from the Heat Roll. The Oil Cam Solenoid controls the
after printing the last page in the YMCBk mode. advancement/retraction of the Oil Roll Assembly.
When the Fuser Exit Sensor detects the last sheet (YMCBk
NOTE: To advance the Oil Roll, the system continuously turns ON the
mode), the system turns on the Heater and inhibits printing for a
Oil Cam Solenoid. To retract the Oil Roll, the system
period requiring 2 circumferences (nominal) of the belt. The
continuously turns OFF the Oil Cam Solenoid.
system then cancels the Not Ready state.
(The mode is changed by the rotation of the P/H Motor
(b) The system has not accepted any B/W mode printing signal
Assembly.)
after printing the last page in the YMCBk mode.
If a B/W mode print signal comes within 1 minute after the NOTE: After receiving the Oil Cam Solenoid ON/OFF signal, the time
YMCBk mode printing has completed, the system turns on the required for Oil Roll advancing and retracting is 1.1 seconds in
Heater and inhibits printing for a period requiring 2 standard speed mode and 2.2 seconds in half-speed mode.
circumferences (nominal) of the belt. The system then cancels
the Not Ready state. (If a Cycle Down Sequence is executed
after YMCBk mode printing, the Not Ready state is not
canceled.)

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-70


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

1. Oil Roll: Advance/Retract control 2. Emergencies


The Oil Roll advanced period is determined by the print count and
the waiting time (between print jobs) in the Ready mode. (The Oil (a) Emergency stop
Roll advanced period is from when the Oil Roll starts advancing to If the printer stops (shuts down) because of an emergency such
when the Oil Roll starts retracting.) The Oil Roll Assembly starts as a paper jam, the printer turns off the Oil Cam Solenoid.
advancing before the paper tip enters the Fuser Nip section (where (b) Operation after recovery from a paper jam (paper remains in the
the Heat Roll and the Pressure Roll come into contact) and starts Fuser)
retracting when the bottom of the paper passes the Fuser Nip The system advances the Oil Roll Assembly when the P/H Motor
section. Assembly is activated (restarted) after removing the jammed
paper. The advancing time is 15 seconds (maximum). The Oil
NOTE: The advance time has been defined as follows: Roll stops advancing when the P/H Motor Assembly stops. In
Advance time = A + B the subsequent operation, the system executes a regular Oil
Where: Roll advance/retract control from the next print job.
A: From the start of advancement to when the paper top enters (c) Operation after recovery from a paper jam (no paper in the
the Fuser. Fuser)
B: From when the bottom of the paper passes the Fuser to the The system executes a regular Oil Roll advance/retract control
end of retraction. from the next print job.

Figure 2-51. Advance Time

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-71


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.7.10.7 Fuser Fan Control 2.7.10.8 Detection Controls in Fuser


The Fuser Fan is controlled (ON/OFF or High/Low rotations) by the 1. Oil Roll Assembly end of life detection
operation modes as follows: The life of the Oil Roll Assembly is determined by the number of
printings (oil quantity being used). Two counters (PV and Oil Rate)
are used to detect the life of the Oil Roll Assembly. If either counter
Table 2-20. Fuser Fan Control
reaches a predetermined value, an end of life warning or No Fuser
Warm-up Fuser Fan: OFF
Oil (life expectancy exceeded) error is detected.
Ready Fuser Fan: ON (Rotation: Low)
Printing Fuser Fan: ON (Rotation: High) (a) PV Counter
Light Sleep Fuser Fan: OFF The PV Counter counts the number of printings. The counter
NOTE: The Fuser Fan control differs in the Error mode and Diagnostic detects the following.
Test mode according to the errors and diagnostics. For
example, if a paper jam error has occurred, the Fuser Fan is Table 2-21. PV Counter
turned ON and the rotation is set to Low. Oil Roll Assembly end of life warning
19,000 counts (standard)
(“Oil Roll Near Empty”)
NOTE: If the mode transition (to the Deep Sleep or Light Sleep modes)
No Fuser Oil (“Replace Oil Roll”) 20,000 counts (standard)
has been set and the time for the transition is shorter than
normal, the Fuser Fan remains ON for the predetermined period NOTE:
to prevent the printer from overheating. The count described above is based on the following:
1 count:
- Printing a sheet that has a paper length (feed direction) of
219mm (LETTER/LEF) or smaller
2 counts:
- Printing a sheet that is larger than the above.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-72


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(b) Oil Rate Counter 2. New/Old Oil Roll Assembly detection


The Oil Rate Counter accumulates the amount of oil being used. The CRU Switch Assembly detects a new/old Oil Roll Assembly.
The oil rate is calculated from the following: Metal foil has been attached to the Oil Roll Assembly. The CRU
Switch Assembly checks the conductivity of the foil.
• The printing counts (PV counts) for one hour after a Power
ON Conductive: Oil Roll Assembly is new.
• The Fuser Oil amount calculated for 1 print (A4 (LEF)) from
the PV counts. Not conductive: Oil Roll Assembly is old.

The Oil Rate Counter detects an end of life warning or No Fuser (When the Oil Cam Assembly rotates, the Oil Cam Assembly pin
Oil. The counter detects the following:↑ cuts the metal foil. This action activates the PV Counter and Oil
Rate Counter.)

Table 2-22. Oil Rate Counter


Oil Roll Assembly end of life warning
19,000counts (standard)
(“Oil Roll Near Empty”)
No Fuser Oil (“Replace Oil Roll”) 20,000 counts (standard)

(c) Process after replacement


The PV Counter and the Oil Rate Counter are reset only if the
system detects a new Oil Roll Assembly.

Figure 2-52. New/Old Oil Roll Assembly detection

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-73


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

3. Oil Roll Assembly detection 4. Main Fuser Assembly end of life detection
The CRU Switch Assembly detects the Oil Roll Assembly. Metal foil
has been attached to the Oil Roll Assembly. The CRU Switch (a) End of life detection
Assembly checks the conductivity of the foil. The life of the Main Fuser Assembly is determined by the print
image density being fused. Life expectancy is determined from
Conductive: Oil Roll Assembly has been installed the accumulated dispense time and the number of images
Not conductive: Oil Roll Assembly has not been installed (image count) being fused. If either reaches a predetermined
value, an end of life warning or a life exceeded error is detected.
(b) Dispense time
The dispense time is the accumulated hours that the Dispense
Motor has been in use. This data can be used to calculate toner
consumption (PDCD or ADC). The conditions for the Main Fuser
Assembly end of life detection are defined in the following table:

Table 2-23. MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY Counter (sec.)


Main Fuser Assembly end of life warning
69,152 seconds (standard)
(Maintenance-call error xxxx)
Main Fuser Assembly life - exceeded
70,564 seconds (standard)
(Service-call error 0003)

(c) Image count


A toner image for one color is counted as one image. The image
count accumulates the number of images being formed.

Table 2-24. MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY Counter (sheet)


Main Fuser Assembly end of life warning
245,000 counts (standard)
(Maintenance-call error xxxx)
Main Fuser Assembly life - exceeded
250,000 counts (standard)
(Service-call error 0003)
Figure 2-53. Oil Roll Assembly detection
NOTE:One printing in the YMCBk mode consist of 4 images (4
counts); one printing in the B/W mode is 1 image (1 count).

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-74


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(d) Processes after replacement

C A U T IO N Do the following operations after you replace the


Main Fuser Assembly with a new one. Doing any
of these operations before replacing the Main
Fuser Assembly may result in damage to the
system or cause the system to malfunction.

• Life expectancy exceeded - Service-call error


After replacing the Main Fuser Assembly with a new one, per-
form “Fuser Unit Reset” in the maintenance menu.
• End of life warning - Maintenance service-call error
After replacing the Main Fuser Assembly with a new one, per-
form “Fuser Unit Reset” in the maintenance menu.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-75


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2.8 Controller Operating Principles


This section describes the C235MAIN board, the MAIN CONTROLLER
PWB of the EPL-C8000.

The main functions of the C235MAIN board are as follows:


n Processing print commands and print data sent from the host
computer.
n Producing image video signals
n Controlling and driving each mechanism in the engine to print
image on paper, synchronizing with the signals from the engine
controller side (MCU PWB).

The printer is equipped with the data bus 64-bit RISC CPU “R4700-
133MHz” for the processor and a168-pin SDRAM module
(CLK:66MHz), which is becoming a major module used for desk top
personal computer, for memory. Combining those equippements, the
printer has secceeded in processing data on the C235MAIN board at a
higher speed.

Specific to color print, one page of data processed is more than 4 times
as large as in monochrome print. Since the data to process is so heavy,
the printer has a high-speed image procossor ASIC on the C235MAIN
board for a faster color image data processing. With this ASIC
equipped, the conputer side is less loaded in processing data, and the
CPU on the C235MAIN board also processes color image data with a
less load. (The 2UP mode equipped with the printer allows the engine to
run 2 pages (A4/LETTER) at a time.)

See Figure 2-54 for the C235MAIN board circuit diagram and Table
2-25 and Table 2-26 for the major components on the C235MAIN board
and their functions.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-76


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

2 5 6

Figure 2-54. C235MAIN Board Circuit Diagrams

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-77


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 2-25. C235MAIN Board Major Components Table 2-26. C235MAIN Board Major Components (Continued)
Componant name Location Function Componant name Location Function
The RISC*-type CPU, which operates at 133 MHz The 4K-bit EEPROM, which stores the
RISC-CPU 93C86 IC15
IC1 (internal) and 3.3V. (External: 66.66 MHz)
R4700-133 printer setting infomation.
*RISC: Reduced Instruction Set Computer
41.1699C CR1 41.1699 MHz (→ E05B53, E05B28)
Controls memory areas (SDRAM, Code-DIMM,
66.6666 MHz (→ CPU, SDRAM, E05B51,
E05B51 (ASIC) IC2 IPL/FONT ROM, Option ROM DIMM) 66.6666C CR2
E05B53)
Performs DMA.
ACT1284 IC18/19/21 Bus driver for the IEEE1284ECP
Contains the following functions:
NDB6020 QF1 FET driven at 3.3 VDC
• CPGI (Color Photo & Graphics Improvement)
E05B53 IC23 M51953B IC3 Reset IC
• Controls video signals
• I/F for the engine controller board (MCU PWB) LM3411 IC28 3.3-VDC regulator
Contains the following functions: CGS74C IC29 Manages separation of the 66.66-MHz clock
• Controls the IEEE1284 Parallel B Socket P. A DIMM with a 2M-bit FLASH ROM
Code DIMM CN3
E05B40 IC17 • Controls the EEPROM (IC15) equipped.
• Controls the I/O of the control panel • Slot 0/1/2 (Standard: 32M-bit DIMM is installed
in the slot 0.)
• Controls the Type-B (1st channel)
• Slot 0: A DIMM with a capacity of 64MB or
Contains the following functions:
more must be set in this slot.
E05B52 IC14 • Interface for E05B51 and E05B40 SDRAM DIMM CN7/8/9
• Slot 1/2: A DIMM with a capacity of 32/64/
• Controls the Type-B (2nd channel) 128MB must be set in this slot.
Contains the following functions: • The maximum memory capacity acceptance
• PGI (Photo & Graphics Improvement) for the C235MAIN board is 256MB.
• RIT (Resolution Improvement Technology)
E05B28 IC26
• I/F (Video I/F) for the Engine controller board
(MCU PWB)
• Manages ON/OFF of the CONTROLLER FAN
E05B54 IC22 CCNV (Color CoNVersion) ASIC (RGB→ CMYK)
Contains the following functions:
• IPL and FONT (Upper 16-Bit data / Lower 16-
Bit data)
M80C25/26 IC8/9
• Has two mask ROMs (size: 512K bit x 16 bit
(1MB) ) to store the control program and font
data.
AD9561 IC25 8-bit PWM controller
The S-RAM (1M-bit), which is used as the high-
TC55V1325FF IC24
speed working RAM for Bit-bild in the E05B53.

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 2-78


CHAPTER

3
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY/ADJUSTMENT
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

Contents
OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 1 Multi Sheet Inserter ................................................................................. 27
Precautions for disassembly, assembly and adjustment........................... 1 MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.1.10) ..................................... 27
Tools.......................................................................................................... 2 MSI ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.1.1) .................................................. 28
Items to check after assembly................................................................... 2 MSI FRONT COVER Removal (PL4.1.3) ........................................... 29
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES .............................................. 3 MSI REAR COVER Removal (PL4.1.4) ............................................. 29
Exterior View and Part Names .................................................................. 4 MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.2.4) ........................... 30
Removing/Replacing the Consumables .................................................... 5 MSI EDGE SENSOR Removal (PL4.2.6) ........................................... 31
Updating the Program ROM...................................................................... 5 MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR Removal (PL4.2.7) ................................. 31
Updating the ROM using a standard parallel interface ......................... 6 PICK UP ROLL Removal (PL4.2.11) .................................................. 32
Updating by copying from the FLASH ROM module ............................ 7 RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.3.3) ................................. 33
Formatting the FLASH ROM Module .................................................... 8 PICK UP SOLENOID Removal (PL4.2.21) ........................................ 34
Formatting the FLASH ROM Module .................................................... 9 MSI CLUTCH Removal (PL4.2.26) .................................................... 35
Cover....................................................................................................... 10 MSI ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.2.9) ....................................... 36
FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.1) .............................. 10 MSI BOTTOM ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.3.9) ................................. 37
FRONT LOWER COVER Removal (PL1.1.5) .................................... 10 MSI LONG N/P SENSOR Removal (PL4.3.16) .................................. 38
TOP COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.20) ................................. 11 Paper Transportation .............................................................................. 39
INNER COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.10) ............................. 12 MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.1) ........................................ 39
REAR COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.30) .............................. 13 PRE-REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.5) ........................ 40
FILTER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.32) .......................................... 14 P/H TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.4) .......................... 41
LEFT LOWER COVER Removal (PL1.1.40) ...................................... 14 REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.6) ................................. 42
RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.50) ............................. 15 PRE-REGI. CLUTCH Removal (PL5.2.8) .......................................... 43
OPERATION PANEL Removal (PL1.1.60) ......................................... 15 PRE-REGI. ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.2.4) ........................... 44
Paper Tray............................................................................................... 16 REGI. CLUTCH Removal (PL5.2.15) ................................................. 45
UNIVERSAL TRAY Removal (PL2.1.1) .............................................. 16 REGI. BRAKE CLUTCH Removal (PL5.2.20) .................................... 46
FRONT SNUBBER Removal (PL2.2.9) .............................................. 16 REGI. METAL ROLL Removal (PL5.2.16) ......................................... 47
END GUIDE (PL2.2.16), SECTOR GEAR (PL2.2.17) Removal ......... 17 REGI. RUBBER ROLL Removal (PL5.2.24) ...................................... 48
Paper Feeder .......................................................................................... 19 REGI. SENSOR Removal (PL5.2.28) ................................................ 49
TURN IN CHUTE Removal (PL3.1.18) ............................................... 19 FRONT OHP SENSOR Removal (PL5.2.31) ..................................... 50
TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL3.1.11) .................................. 20 REAR OHP SENSOR Removal (PL5.2.32) ....................................... 51
FEED ROLL Removal (PL3.1.3) ........................................................ 21 Xerographics ........................................................................................... 52
FEED SOLENOID Removal (PL3.1.9) ............................................... 22 DRUM CARTRIDGE Removal (PL6.1.10) ......................................... 52
FEED ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL3.1.1) .................................... 23 WASTE TONER BOX Removal (PL6.1.12) ....................................... 52
SIZE SWITCH ASSEMBLY Removal (PL3.1.9) ................................. 24 ROS ASSEMBLY Removal (PL6.1.1) ................................................ 53
TRAY N/P SENSOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL3.1.30) ..................... 25 ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL6.1.20) .............................. 54
LOW PAPER SENSOR Removal (PL3.1.35) ..................................... 26 XL RAIL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL6.1.40) ......................................... 55
TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR Removal (PL3.1.32) ............................. 26 WASTE TONER SENSOR Removal (PL6.1.42) ................................ 56
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

TONER BOX SENSOR Removal (PL6.1.43) ..................................... 56 CRU SWITCH ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.3.25) ............................... 95
ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY Removal (PL6.1.30) ............................... 57 FUSER IN SENSOR Removal (PL9.4.4) ........................................... 96
Development ........................................................................................... 58 FUSER CHUTE FAN Removal (PL9.4.10) ......................................... 97
Toner Cartridge Removal (PL7.1.1 ~ PL7.1.4) ................................... 58 Paper Exit................................................................................................ 98
Developer Assembly Removal EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.1.10) ................................. 98
(PL7.1.10, PL7.1.20, PL7.1.30, PL7.1.40) ...................................... 59 EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.1.2) ................................. 98
Developer Removal (PL7.1.13, PL7.1.23, PL7.1.33, PL7.1.43) ......... 60 EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.1.1) ................................ 99
ROTARY SENSOR Removal (PL7.2.22) ........................................... 61 EXIT-2 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.2.5) ................................ 99
ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY Removal (PL7.2.2) ............................ 62 EXIT-3 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.2.7) .............................. 100
CARTRIDGE SENSOR Removal (PL7.2.26) ..................................... 64 FUSER FAN Removal (PL10.2.15) .................................................. 100
USED CART. SENSOR Removal (PL7.2.30) ..................................... 65 TOP EXIT SENSOR Removal (PL10.2.12) ...................................... 101
IBT........................................................................................................... 66 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH Removal (PL10.2.13) .................................. 101
TENSION LEVER Removal (PL8.1.4) ................................................ 66 Drive ...................................................................................................... 102
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.3) ..................................... 67 P/H DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.1) .................................. 102
BTR CAM SOLENOID Removal (PL8.1.15) ....................................... 69 P/H MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.3) ................................ 103
BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.30) ........................... 70 ROTARY MOTOR PWB Removal (PL11.1.21) ................................ 103
2ND BTR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.20) ....................................... 71 ROTARY MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.20) .................... 104
2ND BTR CAM ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.10) .............................. 72 DISPENSE MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.22) ................. 105
AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.40) ............................... 73 FUSER DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.2) ............................ 106
IBT BELT ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.2.2) ......................................... 75 PROCESS MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.12 ................... 107
TRO SENSOR Removal (PL8.2.12) ................................................... 77 PROCESS DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.10) .................... 108
Fusing...................................................................................................... 78 DEVE. CLUTCH ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.23) ........................ 109
OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.1.10) ...................................... 78 Frame .................................................................................................... 110
FUSER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.1.1) ............................................ 78 DEVE. TIE PLATE Removal (PL12.1.4) ........................................... 110
MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.1.2) .................................. 79 Electrical................................................................................................ 111
FUSER UPPER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.2.23) ............................. 80 LVPS Removal (PL13.1.1) ............................................................... 111
H/R HEATER Removal (PL9.2.20) ..................................................... 81 HVPS Removal (PL13.1.2) ............................................................... 112
P/R HEATER Removal (PL9.2.19) ..................................................... 82 TOP COVER SWITCH Removal (PL13.1.3) .................................... 112
LOWER GUIDE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.2.26) ............................. 83 DEVE. FAN Removal (PL13.1.5) ..................................................... 113
FUSER EXIT SENSOR Removal (PL9.2.25) ..................................... 84 MCU PWB Removal (PL13.2.1) ....................................................... 114
UPPER GUIDE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.2.32) ............................. 84 COMMUNICATION ASSEMBLY Removal (PL13.2.2) ..................... 115
HEAT ROLL Removal (PL9.2.12) ...................................................... 85 FRONT COVER SWITCH R Removal (PL13.2.3) ........................... 116
PRESSURE ROLL Removal (PL9.2.9) .............................................. 86 FRONT COVER SWITCH L Removal (PL13.2.4) ............................ 117
TEMP. SENSOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.2.24) ........................... 87 ENVIRONMENT SENSOR Removal (PL13.2.5) .............................. 118
EXCHANGE CHUTE Removal (PL9.3.10) ......................................... 88 Controller............................................................................................... 119
OIL CAM SOLENOID Removal (PL9.3.21) ........................................ 89 CONTROLLER FAN Removal (PL 14.1.2) ....................................... 120
EXCHANGE SOLENOID Removal (PL9.3.16) ................................... 90 CONT. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY Removal (PL 14.1.1) ....................... 120
OIL CAM ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.3.22) ....................................... 91 ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................... 121
CLEANER CAM SOLENOID Removal (PL9.4.23) ............................. 92 NIP Pressure Adjustment of the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY ................ 121
CLEANER CAM ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.4.26) ............................ 93 Deve. Spacer Selection......................................................................... 123
EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.3.7) ................................... 94
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.1 Overview
This chapter describes procedures for disassembly, assembly, and C A U T IO N n When servicing, avoid handling any parts forcibly.
adjustment of the EPL-C8000. Note the procedures are applicable only Doing so might damage the parts and cause printer
when the printer has no options installed. For information on removing/ malfunction.
installing the options, please see the EPL-C8000 Setup Guide. n Various types of screws are used to assemble the
printer, and wrong usage might crush tapped hole and
3.1.1 Precautions for disassembly, assembly and cause troubles. Therefore, be sure to mount the right
adjustment screws to the specified positions.

Precautions for disassembly, assembly and adjustment are as follows:

W A R N IN G n Before starting, be sure to turn the printer off and


unplug the power cable from the AC power socket.
n As this printer weighs as much as 70Kg, make sure
that it is always carried carefully by 4 people or more.
n When working on the FUSER ASSEMBLY or nearby
parts, be sure to wait until the temperature of the parts
cool down to a safe level.
n When printing, make sure that all the outer covers are
installed.
n In case you need to print before assembling, note the
cautions below:
1. Be careful not to get your hands and clothes
caught in the rotating parts such as rollers and
cooling fans.
2. Never touch any electrical terminal or high voltage
components such as HVPS and LVPS.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-1


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.1.2 Tools 3.1.3 Items to check after assembly


Table below shows the tools used for servicing. Performs the items described below when completing assembly after
repairing the printer or replace any parts.
Table 3-1. Tools o Clean the housings and the interior of the engine. (Refer to Chapter
Must Recommended 6.)
Phillips screw driver (#1) Soldering iron
o After assembling or adjust the printer, print an engine status sheet
Phillips screw driver (#2) E-ring holder
to check the counters for the consumables and other parts which
Tweezers Mini screw driver
need periodical replacing. If any of them is close to its life, replace it
Pliers
with a new one.
#F728 SELF TRAINING KIT (Code: 1050686)
#F691 DIAGNOSTIC TOOL NOTE: After replacing any part which needs periodical replacement,
(Part Code: 1042425 clear the corresponding counter using the “Maintenance Menu”.
ADJUSTMENT KIT (Code: 1046450) (Refer to Chapter 6.) The parts replaced and the corresponding
operations to be performed are as listed below:
- 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY: 2ND BTR Clear
- MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY: FUSER Counter Clear
NOTE: When replacing MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY, replace FILTER
ASSEMBLY as well.
o Check the program ROM version, and update it if necessary. (Refer
to Section 3.2.3.)
o Print several status sheets and check print quality.
o Send a few pages of data from the host computer and check for
proper functions of the printer.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-2


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2 Disassembly/Assembly Procedures Refer to the followings which explain descriptions used in this chapter.
o Regarding “(PL X, Y, Z)” at the end of each heading of removal
This section describes procedures for disassembling/assembling the sections, it corresponds to the numbers in the part list in
printer. Unless otherwise specified, assembly can be performed by Appendix. Referring to the numbers, you can find the
reversing the disassembly procedure. Refer to Section 3.3 for appearance and location of the parts efficiently.
adjustment procedure. In principle, you are to remove all options before
servicing. However, you can leave them if possible. o Directions are described as mentioned below.
(See Figure 3-1.)
C A U T IO N
n Front: Front side viewing the printer toward its front side
Some parts are listed as spare parts but not mentioned
n Back: Rear side viewing the printer toward its front side
in disassembly/assembly procedure. Therefore, look
n Left: Left hand side viewing the printer toward its front side
carefully how they are installed before you removing
n Right: Right hand side viewing the printer toward its front
them.
side
o Screws are mentioned with descriptions including “(mounting
NOTE: Directions used in this section are defined as shown in the figure location, color, feature, thread part length, and so on)”.
below: o “Z)” in a drawing corresponds to the step “Z” of the section.
o Fasten the screws in the drawings using a Philips screw driver
if no instruction is given.
R e a r o If black arrows are shown with numbers, they show the order to
act for the step.
o White arrows (FRONT) in the drawings show the front side of
the printer.
o Refer to Appendix for the connector (P/J) locations and
L e ft harness routings.
o The generic term “Developer Assembly” is used for
“DEVELOPPER ASSEMBLY Y”, “DEVELOPER ASSEMBLY
M”, “DEVELOPER ASSEMBLY C”, AND “DEVELOPER
R ig h t ASSEMBLY K”.
o The generic term “TONER CARTRIDGE” is used for “TONER
F ro n t CARTRIDGE Y”, “TONER CARTRIDGE M”, “TONER
CARTRIDGE C”, and “TONER CARTRIDGE K”.

Figure 3-1. Directions

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-3


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.1 Exterior View and Part Names


The part names used in this manual are based on the after service part
names. (They differ from the ones used in Users Guide.) (4)
(1)
The names of the parts which are frequently handled by the users are
shown below. (The terms used in User’s Guide are also shown with (5)
brackets, however, some may not be mentioned.) (2)

(6)
(1) (6)
(3) (7)
(2) (8)
(7)
(9)
(8)
(3)
(9)
(1) - (Parallel interface connector) (6) FUSER ASSEMBLY (Fuser Unit)
(10)
(4) (2) - (Connector cover) (7) - (Power Switch)
(3) - (Right ventilation grill) (8) EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
(11) (Face-up Tray)
(5)
(4) FILTER ASSEMBLY (-) (9) - (AC Inlet)
(5) EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY
(Eject Cover)

(1) TOP COVER (Face-down tray) (7) - (Top ventilation grill) Figure 3-3. Printer viewed from the rear left
(2) PANEL UNIT (Control Panel) (8) RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY
(Right Side Cover))
(3) FRONT COVER (Front Cover) (9) MSI ASSEMBLY (MP Tray)
(4) - (Front ventilation grill) (10) MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY (Expansion Tray)
(5) UNIVERSAL TRAY (11) MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY (Paper Path Unit)
(Paper Cassette)
(6) STOPPER COVER (Stopper)

Figure 3-2. Printer viewed from the front right

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-4


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.3 Updating the Program ROM

(3) The program ROM of this printer is a flash ROM module and can be
updated in one of the following 2 ways:

(1) 1. Transferring the ROM updating program data (*.RCC) from the host
(4)
computer via the standard parallel interface.
(5)
(2) 2. Copying the program ROM from the flash ROM module which has
the most updated program.

Also, when you failed to write the program into the flash ROM and
perform the same writing operation again or when you copy the
program from the flash ROM module to another flash ROM module. you
need to perform:
(1) MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY (Fuser) (4) WASTE TONER BOX
(Waste Toner Collector)
3. Formatting Flash ROM module
(2) OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY (5) TONER CARTRIDGE
(Fuser Oil Roll) (Toner Cartridge)
See the following sections for the procedures of each operation.
(3) DRUM CARTRIDGE
(Photoconductor Unit)

Figure 3-4. Interior view of the printer

3.2.2 Removing/Replacing the Consumables


The consumables available (can be replaced by users) for this printer
are as shown below. Refer to Section 6-3 in Chapter 6 for the
procedures.
n TONER CARTRIDGE
n OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY
n DRUM CARTRIDGE (including WASTE TONER BOX)
n WASTE TONER BOX

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-5


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.3.1 Updating the ROM using a standard parallel interface 5. To transfer the program data file from the computer to the printer,
type the command (shown below) on the DOS prompt (from the
Follow the instruction below to update the program ROM using a directory that has “*.RCC”) and press Enter key.
standard parallel interface.
COPY /B file name.RCC PRN:
Preparation
NOTE: This method is used to update a *.rcc file. In case of updating a 6. Check the printer message on the LCD panel changes as follows:
*.crb file, refer to Section 1.5.5. “Writing DIMM P” → “Reset “→ “Ready”
Copy the data file (program ROM source file: “file name. RCC”) in (Takes about 10 minutes to complete.)
the route directory (HDD).
7. When the message is “Ready”, the program has been downloaded
NOTE:The personal computer to be used should be able to send and turn the printer off.
binary data from DOS prompt via a parallel interface.
8. Turn the printer back on and print a status sheet, and check that the
Procedure
program has been updated by comparing the Firmware Revision
1. Print a status sheet. No. with the one in the status sheet printed in Step 1. (The version is
shown in the left side of the column.)
2. Turn off the printer and the personal computer, and connect a
interface to each of them. Make sure to disconnect all interface
cables but the parallel interface cable so the printer will not receive
data from any other interfaces.

3. Turn on the printer then the personal computer, and the printer
starts initializing and warm-up is completed within 5 minutes.
If the OS is Windows95, follow the steps below:
1. Click “Start”, then choose “Shut Down”.
2. In the Shut Down Window, select “Reset the computer in MS
-DOS mode?” to reset the computer.
3. MS-DOS starts up. (Follow the steps below.)

4. Check that the message “Ready” is indicated on the LCD panel of


the printer.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-6


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.3.2 Updating by copying from the FLASH ROM module 5. When the program has been properly updated, the printer enters the
Ready status. If an error occurs, one of the following messages
Follow the steps below. appears.
1. Insert the ROM module which has the program ROM source to the DIMM COPY B>A ERROR
socket B of the CONTROLLER PWB.
NOTE:Leave the ROM module in the socket P of the FORMAT ERROR DIMM A
CONTROLLER PWB as it is.

2. Set the ROM module in which the program is to be written in the 6. Turn the printer power off and remove the ROM module from the
socket A of the CONTROLLER PWB. both sockets A and B.
NOTE:Format this ROM module in the way describe in Section 7. Replace the updated ROM module with the ROM module in the
3.2.3.3. socket P.
3. Turn the printer on while pressing the “On Line”, “Alt”, and “Enter”
buttons. (Keep the buttons down until proceeding to Step 4.) All the
LED lamps and LCD on the panel come on and the LCD indicates
the message below:
RAM CHECK**.*MB

Numeric is shown in place of **.* and starts counting up, then the
engine initialization takes place.

4. When the printer enters the program ROM copy mode, the LCD
message shown below appears.
DIMM COPY MODE

Then press the Enter button. The message below appears.

DIMM B>A COPYING oooo

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-7


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.3.3 Formatting the FLASH ROM Module 4. When an error has occurred, the message bellow appears.

Flash ROM module can be formatted as instructed below. ERASE ERROR

1. Install the ROM module to be formatted to the socket A of the


CONTROLLER PWB.
NOTE:Leave the ROM module in the socket P of the
CONTROLLER PWB as it is.

2. Turn the printer on while pressing down the “Alt”, “Item”, “Value”,
and “Enter” buttons, and keep the buttons down until instructed to
do so. The LCD and all the LED lamps on the control panel come on
and the message bellow appears.

RAM CHECK **.* MB

Numeric is shown in place of **.* and starts counting up, then the
engine initialization takes place.
When the printer is in the ROM formatting mode, the following
messages are indicated consequently.

DIMM A ERASING

Release the buttons at this point. The message below appears.

DIMM A ERASING o o o o

3. After while, the message below appears and the ROM has been
formatted.

DIMM A ERASED

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-8


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.3.4 Formatting the FLASH ROM Module 4. When an error has occurred, the message bellow appears.

Flash ROM module can be formatted as instructed below. ERASE ERROR

1. Install the ROM module to be formatted to the socket A of the


CONTROLLER PWB.
NOTE: Leave the ROM module in the socket P of the
CONTROLLER PWB as it is.

2. Turn the printer on while pressing down the “Alt”, “Item”, “Value”,
and “Enter” buttons, and keep the buttons down until instructed to
release them. The LCD and all the LED lamps on the control panel
come on and the message bellow appears.

RAM CHECK **.*MB

Numeric is shown in place of **.* and starts increasing, then the


engine initialization begins.
When the printer is in the ROM formatting mode, the following
messages are indicated consequently.

DIMM A ERASING

Release the buttons at this point. The message below appears.

DIMM A ERASING o o o o

3. After while, the message below appears and the ROM has been
formatted.

DIMM A ERASED

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-9


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.4 Cover 3.2.4.2 FRONT LOWER COVER Removal (PL1.1.5)


1. Remove the UNIVERSAL TRAY.
3.2.4.1 FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.1)
2. Remove 2 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the FRONT
1. Take out the UNIVERSAL TRAY about 20cm. (See Section 3.2.5.1.)
LOWER COVER, and remove the FRONT LOWER COVER.
NOTE: Be sure to perform Step 1 to support the FRONT COVER
ASSEMBLY.

2. Open the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY.

3. Remove 2 screws (gold, with a washer, 8mm) securing the right and
left COVER SUPPORTs.

4. Remove 2 screws (black, tapped, 10mm) securing the FRONT


COVER ASSEMBLY and right and left HINGE PLATES. Then
remove the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY and right and left HINGE
PLATES.

Figure 3-6. FRONT LOWER COVER Removal

C H E C K When installing the FRONT LOWER COVER, fit the front


P O IN T
edge to 4 hooks in the frame to set the cover to the
correct position.

Figure 3-5. Front Cover Assembly Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-10


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.4.3 TOP COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.20)


1. Open the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY.

2. Open the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY.


NOTE: In the following step, the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY is kept
connected to the printer body with a harness. Therefore, do
not move the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY too away from the
printer.

3. Remove 4 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the TOP


COVER ASSEMBLY.

4. Disconnect 2 connectors (P/J317) from the OPERATION PANEL


and remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY along with the
OPERATION PANEL.

5. Remove the OPERATION PANEL from the TOP COVER


ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.9.)

C H E C K When installing the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY, be sure to


P O IN T
fasten the 2 screws at the back to secure TOP COVER
ASSEMBLY and REAR COVER ASSEMBLY together. Pay
special attention to the left screw. Fasten the screw with
the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY securely pressed down so
that the rib in the TOP COVER presses the TOP COVER
SWITCH (PL13.1.3) without fail.

Figure 3-7. TOP COVER Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-11


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.4.4 INNER COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.10)


NOTE: Be sure to perform Step 1 to support the FRONT COVER
ASSEMBLY.

1. Take out the UNIVERSAL TRAY about 20cm.

2. Open the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY.

3. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

4. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.) 7)-2


6)
5. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.)
6)
NOTE: As a result of the next step, the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY 7)-1
will be supported with 2 hinge parts only. Therefore, be 7)-1
careful not to add excess force to the cover when handling it. 7)-1 7)-1
7)-1
6. Remove 2 screws (black, cup head, 6mm) securing the right and left 7)-1
COVER SUPPORT in the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY to the 7)-1
printer body.
Figure 3-8. INNER COVER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
7. Remove 7 screws (black, cup head, 6mm) securing the INNER
COVER to the printer body. Then tilt the INNER COVER
ASSEMBLY forward and lift it up to remove.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-12


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.4.5 REAR COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.30)


1. Take out the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)

2. Pressing the tub at the upper edge of the O/H COVER, pull the O/H
COVER down to release the hook attaching the cover to the REAR
COVER ASSEMBLY. Then move the O/H COVER backward to
remove it.

3. Remove 6 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the REAR


COVER ASSEMBLY and remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY.

C H E C K n When installing the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY, be sure


P O IN T
to fasten the 2 screws at the top to secure both TOP
COVER ASSEMBLY and REAR COVER ASSEMBLY.
Pay special attention to the left screw. Fasten the
screw with the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY securely
pressed down so that the rib in the TOP COVER Figure 3-9. REAR COVER ASSEMBLY Removal
presses the TOP COVER SWITCH (PL13.1.3) without
fail.
n When installing the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY, be
careful not to get the harness caught.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-13


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.4.6 FILTER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.32) 3.2.4.7 LEFT LOWER COVER Removal (PL1.1.40)
1. Hold the tab of the FILTER ASSEMBLY at the back and unlock it 1. Take the UNIVERSAL TRAY out.
from the REAR COVER.
2. Remove the FRONT LOWER COVER. (See Section 3.2.4.2.)

3. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

4. Remove 2 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the LEFT


LOWER COVER.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hooks in the
LEFT LOWER COVER since they might be too tight.

5. Shift the LEFT LOWER COVER forward to release the hooks


securing the LEFT LOWER COVER. Then remove the cover.

Figure 3-10. FILTER ASSEMBLY Removal

Figure 3-11. LEFT LOWER COVER Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-14


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.4.8 RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL1.1.50) 3.2.4.9 OPERATION PANEL Removal (PL1.1.60)
1. Open the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY. 1. Remove the TOP COVER along with the OPERATION PANEL.
(See Section 3.2.4.3.)
2. Take the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY out.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hooks in the
3. Remove 2 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the RIGHT OPERATION PANEL.
COVER ASSEMBLY and open the front side of the cover. Then shift
the cover to the rear and remove it. 2. Release the hooks in the OPERATION PANEL and remove the
panel from the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY.

3)-3
3)-2
3)-1

3)-1

Figure 3-12. RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY Removal

Figure 3-13. OPERATION PANEL Removal


C H E C K When installing the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY, fit the
P O IN T
hooks in the assembly in the positioning holes at the
rear part of the printer to set the assembly to the
correct position.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-15


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.5 Paper Tray 3.2.5.2 FRONT SNUBBER Removal (PL2.2.9)


1. Take the UNIVERSAL TRAY out. (See Section 3.2.5.1.)
3.2.5.1 UNIVERSAL TRAY Removal (PL2.1.1)
NOTE: In the following steps, be careful not to bend the edge of the
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to drop the UNIVERSAL
FRONT SNUBBER where paper is placed.
TRAY.
2. Remove 2 screws (black, tapped, 8mm) securing the FRONT
1. Draw out the UNIVERSAL TRAY and lift it up. Then take the tray out
GUIDE ASSEMBLY and remove the FRONT GUIDE ASSEMBLY.
further as it is held up and remove it.
3. Using a tool such as pliers, release the hooks securing the FRONT
SNUBBER and remove the SNUBBER SUPPORT. Then remove
the FRONT SNUBBER.

Figure 3-15. FRONT SNUBBER Removal

C H E C K When installing the FRONT SNUBBER, fit the snubber


Figure 3-14. UNIVERSAL TRAY Removal P O IN T
to the rear slit in the FRONT GUIDE ASSEMBLY.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-16


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.5.3 END GUIDE (PL2.2.16), SECTOR GEAR (PL2.2.17) Removal


1. Take the UNIVERSAL TRAY out. (See Section 3.2.5.1.)

2. Move the END GUIDE to the right end. (= minimum paper size fits)
NOTE: After removing the FRONT GUIDE ASSEMBLY, hold the
BOTTOM PLATE ASSEMBLY down.

3. Remove 2 screws (black, tapped, 8mm) securing the FRONT


GUIDE ASSEMBLY and remove the FRONT GUIDE ASSEMBLY.

4. Push down the BOTTOM PLATE ASSEMBLY to lock it at the


bottom.

5. Turn the UNIVERSAL TRAY over and remove 5 screws (gold,


tapped, 8mm) securing the TRAY BOTTOM COVER. Then remove
the TRAY BOTTOM COVER.

6. Remove the SECTOR GEAR SPRING from the TRAY HOUSING


and SECTOR GEAR.

7. Release the joint for the hole in the SECTOR GEAR and the swivel
peg in the UNIVERSAL TRAY, and slide the SECTOR GEAR along
the groove to fit the round end of the groove to the peg in the END
GUIDE. Then remove the SECTOR GEAR.

(Continues to the next page.)

Figure 3-16.
END GUIDE (PL2.2.16), SECTOR GEAR (PL2.2.17) Removal (1)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-17


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

8. Remove 2 screws (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the LOCK PLATE
by the right edge.

9. Remove 2 screws (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the LOCK PLATE
by the left edge, and remove the LOCK PLATE.

10. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the REAR GUIDE
PLATE L.
NOTE: In the following step, hold the REAR GUIDE while removing
the REAR GUIDE PLATE R. so that the REAR GUIDE will
not drop.

11. Remove 1 screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the REAR GUIDE
PLATE R and remove the REAR GUIDE R and the REAR GUIDE.
NOTE: In the following step, TRAY N/F SPRINGS will spring out.
Therefore, be careful not to lose them.

12. Moving the PLATE LINK, unlock the BOTTOM PLATE ASSEMBLY
and open it. Then slide the END GUIDE further right and remove it.

C H E C K When installing the SECTOR GEAR, make sure that the


P O IN T
triangle marks on the SECTOR GEAR and TRAY SIZE
ACTUATOR are aligned.

Figure 3-17. END GUIDE (PL2.2.16), SECTOR GEAR (PL2.2.17)


Removal (2)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-18


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.6 Paper Feeder

3.2.6.1 TURN IN CHUTE Removal (PL3.1.18)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY installed on
it.
NOTE: In the next step, be careful not to damage the hinge part of
the TURN IN CHUTE.

3. Press the hinge at the rear part of the TURN IN CHUTE to release
the peg and swivel the TURN IN CHUTE right around the front side
as the supporting point.

Figure 3-18. TURN IN CHUTE Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-19


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.6.2 TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL3.1.11) NOTE: In the next step, the pulley and the gear in the TURN ROLL
ASSEMBLY will dislocate. Therefore, be careful not to drop
1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) and lose them.
2. Remove the UNIVERSAL TRAY. (See Section 3.2.5.1.) 14. Remove the E-ring securing the TURN ARM ASSEMBLY and the
TURN ARM SUPPORT, and remove the TURN ARM ASSEMBLY.
3. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
15. Remove the TURN GEAR, TURN GEAR PIN, and the TURN ARM
4. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY
STOPPER from the TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY.
installed on it. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)

5. Remove the TURN IN CHUTE. (See Section 3.2.6.1.)

6. Remove 2 screws (silver, 6mm) securing the TURN CHUTE and


remove the TURN CHUTE.

7. Remove 1 screw (silver, 8mm) securing the FEED GUIDE SHAFT


and remove the FEED GUIDE SHAFT.

8. Remove 2 screws (gold, cup head, 8mm) securing the TRAY


STOPPER and remove the TRAY STOPPER.

9. Remove TURN ARM SPRING from the TURN ARM ASSEMBLY


and the frame.

10. Remove the E-ring securing the TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY.

11. Shift the TURN FRONT BEARING to the rear and remove the
bearing.

12. Shift the TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY forward to release the rear end
Figure 3-19. TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal
and shift the rear part of the assembly to the right. Then, shifting the
assembly to the rear, remove it along with the TURN FRONT
BEARING, TURN REAR BEARING, and TURN ARM ASSEMBLY. C H E C K
P O IN T
When installing the TRAY STOPPER, verify that the
stopper is at the right position by moving the MSI tray in
13. Remove the TURN FRONT BEARING AND TURN REAR and out to see if the tray is securely supported.
BEARING from the TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-20


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.6.3 FEED ROLL Removal (PL3.1.3)


1. Remove the UNIVERSAL TRAY. (See Section 3.2.5.1.)

2. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY
installed on it. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)
NOTE: In the following step, be careful with the metal plate as you
maybe hurt with its sharp edge.

4. Inserting your hand into the opening in the UNIVERSAL TRAY,


release the hook securing the FEED ROLL and remove the FEED
ROLL.

Figure 3-20. FEED ROLL Removal

C H E C K When installing the FEED ROLL, make sure the arrow


P O IN T
marked on the side of the roll is facing to the rotating
direction.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-21


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.6.4 FEED SOLENOID Removal (PL3.1.9)


1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)
NOTE: In the following step, the OPTION BRACKET is kept
connected to the printer body with a harness. Therefore, do
not move the OPTION BRACKET too away from the printer.

2. Remove 2 screws (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the OPTION


BRACKET and separate the OPTION BRACKET from the printer
body.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful with the sharp edges of the
OPTION BRACKET when handling it. Remove the bracket if
necessary.

3. Disconnect the connector (P/J103B) for the FEED SOLENOID and


release its harness from the clump.

4. Remove the screw (silver, 6mm) securing the FEED SOLENOID


and remove the FEED SOLENOID.

Figure 3-21. FEED SOLENOID Removal

C H E C K n Make sure the protrusion on the FEED GEAR and the


P O IN T
arm of the FEED SOLENOID are securely engaged.
n After installing the solenoid, verify that the notch of
the FEED GEAR is held at the arm of the solenoid.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-22


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.6.5 FEED ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL3.1.1)


1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY.

2. Remove the UNIVERSAL TRAY. (See Section 3.2.5.1.)

3. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

4. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY
installed on it. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)

5. Remove the FEED SOLENOID. (See Section 3.2.6.4.)

6. Remove the FEED SPRING from the FEED GEAR and the frame.

7. Remove the E-ring securing the FEED GEAR and remove the
FEED GEAR.

8. Remove the screw (silver, 8mm) securing the FEED SHAFT GUIDE
and remove the FEED SHAFT GUIDE and FEED BEARING on the
front.

9. Shift the FEED ROLL ASSEMBLY forward to release the rear end
from the frame. Then move the end downward and move the FEED
ROLL ASSEMBLY backward, avoiding contact with the TRAY N/P
SENSOR ASSEMBLY, and remove it along with the FEED Figure 3-22. FEED ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal
BEARING.
C H E C K After installing the FEED ROLL ASSEMBLY, check that
P O IN T
10. Remove the E-ring and the FEED BEARING from the REED ROLL the notch of the FEED GEAR is held at the arm of the
ASSEMBLY.
FEED SOLENOID.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-23


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.6.6 SIZE SWITCH ASSEMBLY Removal (PL3.1.9)


1. Draw the UNIVERSAL TRAY out.

2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

3. Remove the LVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.1.)


NOTE: In the following step, the OPTION BRACKET is kept
connected to the printer body with a harness. Therefore, do
not move the SIZE BRACKET ASSEMBLY too away from
the printer.

4. Remove 2 screws (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the SIZE


BRACKET ASSEMBLY and separate the SIZE BRACKET
ASSEMBLY from the printer body.

5. Disconnect the connector (P/J102) for the SIZE SWITCH


ASSEMBLY and remove the SIZE BRACKET ASSEMBLY.

6. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 12mm) securing the SIZE
SWITCH ASSEMBLY and remove the SIZE SWITCH ASSEMBLY Figure 3-23. SIZE SWITCH ASSEMBLY Removal
from the SIZE SWITCH ASSEMBLY.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-24


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.6.7 TRAY N/P SENSOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL3.1.30)


1. Remove the UNIVERSAL TRAY. (See Section 3.2.5.1.)

2. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY
installed on it. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)

4. Disconnect the following connectors;


n P/J106 for LOW PAPER SENSOR and MAIN HARNESS
ASSEMBLY
n P/J101 for TRAY N/P HARNESS and MAIN HARNESS
ASSEMBLY

5. Unhook the TRAY N/P SENSOR ASSEMBLY from the frame and
remove it.

Figure 3-24. TRAY N/P SENSOR ASSEMBLY Removal

C H E C K Route the harness carefully so that the harness don’t


P O IN T
float.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-25


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.6.8 LOW PAPER SENSOR Removal (PL3.1.35) 3.2.6.9 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR Removal (PL3.1.32)
1. Remove the UNIVERSAL TRAY. (See Section 3.2.5.1.) 1. Remove the UNIVERSAL TRAY. (See Section 3.2.5.1.)
2. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.) 2. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY 3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY
installed on it. (See Section 3.2.8.1.) installed on it. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)

4. Remove TRAY N/P SENSOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.6.7.) 4. Remove TRAY N/P SENSOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.6.7.)
5. Disconnect the connector (P/J107) for the TRAY NO PAPER
5. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the LOW PAPER
SENSOR and remove the harness.
SENSOR, and remove the LOW PAPER SENSOR.
6. Release the hooks securing the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR from
the TRAY N/P BRACKET and remove the TRAY NO PAPER
SENSOR.

Figure 3-25. LOW PAPER SENSOR Removal

C H E C K When installing the LOW PAPER SENSOR, be sure to


P O IN T
align the peg on the TRAY N/P SENSOR with the
location hole in the LOW PAPER SENSOR. Figure 3-26. TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR Removal
C H E C K
P O IN T
When installing the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR, set the
TRAY N/P ACTUATOR staying above the TRAY NO
PAPER SENSOR.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-26


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.7 Multi Sheet Inserter

3.2.7.1 MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.1.10)


1. Using a Phillips screw driver, push the lock in the front arm of the
MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY to the rear, and release the front arm of the
MSI FRAME.

2. Release the rear arm from the MSI FRAME, remove the MSI TRAY
ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-27. MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-27


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.7.2 MSI ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.1.1)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Draw the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY out.

3. Disconnect 2 connectors (P/J92B and 113B) connecting the MSI


ASSEMBLY and MSI P/H ASSEMBLY.

4. Remove the screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the MSI EARTH
WIRE to the REGI. BRAKE BRACKET.
NOTE: In the next step, hold the MAIN P/H COVER ASSEMBLY
when you remove MAIN P/H COVER ASSEMBLY, or the P/
H COVER ASSEMBLY will be dislocated. (You can remove
the MAIN P/H COVER if necessary.)

5. Remove 2 screws (black, cup head, 12mm) securing the MSI


ASSEMBLY, and then remove the assembly by lifting it to the upper
right.
Figure 3-28. MSI ASSEMBLY Removal

C H E C K When installing the MSI ASSEMBLY, make sure that the


P O IN T
MSI CLUTCH gear in the MSI ASSEMBLY securely
meshes with the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY PRE-REGI.
GEAR1.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-28


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.7.3 MSI FRONT COVER Removal (PL4.1.3) 3.2.7.4 MSI REAR COVER Removal (PL4.1.4)
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.) 1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.) 2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the screw (silver, tapped, 14mm) securing the MSI FRONT 3. Remove the screw (silver, tapped, 14mm) securing the MSI REAR
COVER. COVER.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hooks. NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hooks for
the MSI REAR COVER and MSI FRAME.
4. Release 2 hooks at the top of the MSI FRONT COVER and the at
the bottom of the MSI FRAME, and remove the MSI FRONT 4. Release 2 hooks at the top of the MSI REAR COVER and the at the
COVER. bottom of the MSI FRAME and remove the MSI REAR COVER.

Figure 3-29. MSI FRONT COVER Removal Figure 3-30. MSI REAR COVER Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-29


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.7.5 MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.2.4)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MSI FRONT COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.4.)

4. Remove the MSI REAR COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.3.)


NOTE: In the following step, MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY is kept
connected with MSI FRAME by a harness. Therefore, do not
leave them too far.

5. Remove 2 screws (silver, tapped, 14mm) securing the MSI TOP


COVER ASSEMBLY, and remove the MSI TOP COVER
ASSEMBLY along with the MSI HARNESS COVER from the MSI
FRAME.

6. Release 2 hooks securing the MSI HARNESS COVER to the MSI


TOP COVER ASSEMBLY, and remove the MSI HARNESS
COVER.

7. Disconnect 2 connectors P/J203 and P/J204 (for the MSI EDGE


SENSOR and MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR, respectively), and
remove the MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY.

C H E C K When installing the MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY, make


P O IN T
sure that the harness is not caught between the MSI TOP
COVER ASSEMBLY and MSI HARNESS COVER.

Figure 3-31. MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-30


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.7.6 MSI EDGE SENSOR Removal (PL4.2.6) 3.2.7.7 MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR Removal (PL4.2.7)
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.) 1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.) 2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MSI FRONT COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.3.) 3. Remove the MSI FRONT COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.3.)

4. Remove the MSI REAR COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.4.) 4. Remove the MSI REAR COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.4.)

5. Remove the MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.5.) 5. Remove the MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.5.)

6. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the MSI EDGE NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hooks for
SENSOR, and remove the EDGE SENSOR. the MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR.

6. Release the hooks securing the MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR to the
MSI TOP COVER, and remove the MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR.

Figure 3-32. MSI EDGE SENSOR Removal

Figure 3-33. MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-31


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.7.8 PICK UP ROLL Removal (PL4.2.11)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)


NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hooks for
the FRONT CORE ROLL.

3. Release 2 hooks securing the front and rear FRONT CORE ROLLs
in the MSI ROLL ASSEMBLY from the groove on the PICK UP
SHAFT, and move each FRONT CORE ROLL away from the PICK
UP ROLL 20mm or more.

4. Slide each PICK UP ROLL toward the corresponding FRONT


CORE ROLL, and lift them up to remove.

C H E C K When installing the PICK UP ROLL, set it in the


P O IN T
following condition:
n Set the roll surface facing to the opposite side of
the cam of the PICK UP CAM.
n The arrow marked on the side of the PICK UP ROLL Figure 3-34. PICK UP ROLL Removal
is indicating the rotating direction.
While turning the FRONT CORE ROLL back to the
position, hold the RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY down.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-32


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.7.9 RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.3.3)


C H E C K After installing the RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY,
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.) P O IN T
align the RETARD SPRING with the groove on
2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.) the MSI FRAME by using tweezers.

3. Remove the MSI FRONT COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.3.)

4. Remove the MSI REAR COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.4.)

5. Remove the MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.5.)

6. Remove the PICK UP ROLL. (See Section 3.2.7.8.)

7. Hold the MSI BOTTOM ASSEMBLY down.


NOTE: In the following step, if the FRONT CORE ROLL is above the
RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY, shift it further away until it is not
above the RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: In the following steps, note the following:
- Be careful not to break the hook and hinge.
- Be careful not to drop and lose the RETARD SPRING as
it may dislocate.

8. Using the standard driver or equivalent, push the hook on the


RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY to release the hook from the MSI
FRAME, and turn the RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY to the right.

9. Set the pad surface of the RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY vertical, then
remove the RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY along with the RETARD
SPRING pulling them out to the right.

10. Remove 2 RETARD SPRINGs from the RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY.


Figure 3-35. RETARD PAD ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-33


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.7.10 PICK UP SOLENOID Removal (PL4.2.21)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MSI REAR COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.4.)

4. Disconnect the connector (P/J201B) for the PICK UP SOLENOID


and release the harness from the clamp.

5. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the PICK UP


SOLENOID and remove it.

C H E C K n When routing the harness, make sure it is not touching


P O IN T
any gear.
n When installing the PICK UP SOLENOID, be sure to
engage the notch on the PICK UP CAM GEAR and the
arm of the PICK UP SOLENOID securely.
Figure 3-36. PICK UP SOLENOID Removal
n After installing the PICK UP SOLENOID, check that the
notch on the PICK UP CAM GEAR is held at the arm of
the PICK UP SOLENOID. (with the PICK UP ROLL top
and the cam of the PICK UP CAM bottom)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-34


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.7.11 MSI CLUTCH Removal (PL4.2.26) 12. Remove the E-ring securing the MSI SHAFT and remove the shaft
from the MSI CLUTCH.
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MSI FRONT COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.3.)

4. Remove the MSI REAR COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.4.)

5. Remove the MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.5.)

6. Disconnect the connector (P/J202B) for the MSI CLUTCH and


release the harness from the clamp.

7. Remove 3 screws (gold, tapped, 12mm) securing the MSI HOLDER,


and remove the MSI HOLDER.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to drop and lose the
PICK UP SPRING.

8. Remove the PICK UP SPRING from the CLUTCH BRACKET and


PICK UP GEAR.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to drop the MSI FRONT
BEARING as it will come off.

9. Remove 3 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the CLUTCH


BRACKET and remove it along with the MSI CLUTCH.
Figure 3-37. MSI CLUTCH Removal
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to drop the MSI REAR
BEARING as it will come off. C H E C K n When routing the harness, make sure it is not
P O IN T
touching any gear.
10. Remove the MSI CLUTCH, MSI GEAR, and the MSI SHAFT from
n When installing the MSI CLUTCH, fit the pin on the
the CLUTCH BRACKET.
CLUTCH BRACKET with the notch on the MSI
11. Remove the MSI GEAR from the MSI SHAFT. CLUTCH.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-35


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.7.12 MSI ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.2.9)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MSI FRONT COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.3.)

4. Remove the MSI REAR COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.4.)

5. Remove the MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.5.)

6. Remove the PICK UP SPRING from the CLUTCH BRACKET and


PICK UP GEAR.

7. Release the hook for the PICK UP GEAR from the shaft and remove
the PICK UP GEAR from the MSI ROLL ASSEMBLY.

8. Remove the PICK UP CAM GEAR, LEVER STOPPER, and CAM


GEAR SPRING by one unit.
Figure 3-38. MSI ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal
NOTE: In the following step, be careful with MSI BOTTOM
ASSEMBLY, as it springs up while the MSI ROLL
ASSEMBLY is being removed.
C H E C K n Install the PICK UP CAM GEAR to the MSI ROLL
P O IN T
9. Remove 2 E-rings securing the MSI ROLL ASSEMBLY, and remove ASSEMBLY with the arm of the PICK UP SOLENOID
2 MSI BEARINGs. and the GEAR LEVER pressed down.
n After installing the MSI ROLL ASSEMBLY, check that
10. Lift up the MSI ROLL ASSEMBLY and remove the MSI ROLL the notch on the PICK UP CAM GEAR is held at the
ASSEMBLY. arm of the PICK UP SOLENOID. (with the PICK UP
ROLL top and the cam of the PICK UP CAM bottom)
n When installing the MSI BEARING in the front, note
following:
- Do not bend the earth plate of the MSI FRAME.
- The bearing is in full contact with the grounding
plate.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-36


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.7.13 MSI BOTTOM ASSEMBLY Removal (PL4.3.9)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MSI FRONT COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.3.)

4. Remove the MSI REAR COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.4.)

5. Remove the MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.5.)

6. Remove the MSI ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.12.)


NOTE: In the following steps, MSI N/F FRONT SPRING and MSI N/
F REAR SPRING will be free from pressure. So, be careful
not to drop and lose the springs.
NOTE: In the following step, MSI BOTTOM ASSEMBLY and MSI
FRAME will be connected with a harness. Therefore, do not
leave them too far.

7. Release the pegs on the rear then front sides of the MSI BOTTOM
ASSEMBLY from the MSI FRAME, and remove the MSI BOTTOM
ASSEMBLY.

8. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 6mm) securing the MSI EARTH
WIRE to the MSI BOTTOM PLATE.
Figure 3-39. MSI BOTTOM ASSEMBLY Removal
9. Disconnect the connectors P/J206 for MSI LONG N/P SENSOR and
release the harness from the clump. Then remove the MSI
BOTTOM ASSEMBLY. C H E C K n Be sure to route the harness properly. Otherwise, the
P O IN T
harness is slack and interferes with MSI BOTTOM
ASSEMBLY.
n Set the MSI N/F FRONT SPRING (2 in front, color:
silver) and the MSI N/F REAR SPRING (1 at the rear,
color: black) securely so they operate properly.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-37


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.7.14 MSI LONG N/P SENSOR Removal (PL4.3.16)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MSI FRONT COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.3.)

4. Remove the MSI REAR COVER. (See Section 3.2.7.4.)

5. Remove the MSI TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.5.)

6. Remove the MSI ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.12.)

7. Remove the MSI BOTTOM ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.13.)


NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hooks for
the MSI BASE TRAY. Figure 3-40. MSI LONG N/P SENSOR Removal

8. Release the MSI LONG N/P SENSOR from the hook in the MSI
BASE TRAY, and remove the MSI LONG N/P SENSOR.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-38


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.8 Paper Transportation

3.2.8.1 MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.1)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)
3. Remove the MAIN P/H COVER from the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: In the following steps, be careful not to drop the MAIN P/H
ASSEMBLY.
4. Among the slide rails securing the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY to the
printer, loosen following 2 screws well:
-1 (black, cup head, 8mm) on the P/H FRONT RAIL S
-1 (black, cup head, 8mm) on the P/H REAR RAIL S
(They are securing the P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY, P/H FRONT RAIL
S, and P/H REAR RAIL S.)
5. Leaving the P/H FRONT RAIL S, P/H FRONT RAIL L, P/H REAR
RAIL S, and P/H REAR RAIL L in the printer, take out the MAIN P/H
ASSEMBLY and remove it.
6. Using a standard driver or equivalent, push the stopper in the P/H
FRONT RAIL L inward to remove the stopper from the frame in the
printer, and remove the P/H FRONT RAIL S along with the P/H
FRONT RAIL L.
7. Using a standard driver or equivalent, push the stopper in the P/H
REAR RAIL L inward to remove the stopper from the frame in the
printer, and remove the P/H REAR RAIL S along with the P/H REAR
RAIL L.

C H E C K Fasten well the screws preventing the P/H FRONT RAIL


P O IN T
S and P/H FRONT RAIL L from coming off the P/H
FRAME ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-41. MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-39


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.8.2 PRE-REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.5)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)

4. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the PRE-REGI.


CHUTE ASSEMBLY and remove the PRE-REGI. CHUTE
ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-42. PRE-REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-40


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.8.3 P/H TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.4) 6. Push the upper pegs in the P/H TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY inward
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.) and remove the P/H TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY from the P/H
FRAME ASSEMBLY
2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)

4. Remove the PRE-REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY. (See Section


3.2.8.2.)
NOTE: In the following steps, be careful not to damage the housing
which will be widen forcibly.

5. Pulling the socket areas in the P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY where the
pegs in the P/H TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY fit in, turn the P/H
TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY in the direction indicated with the arrow
(5)-1 (See the figure below.) to release the lower pegs from the P/H
FRAME ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-44. P/H TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (2/2)

Figure 3-43. P/H TURN CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (1/2)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-41


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.8.4 REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.1.6) 6. Open the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY vertically and shift it to the
rear until it touches the bottom of the rear stud to release the hole in
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.) the front from the front stud. Then lift up the front end and pull it out
to the upper front to remove the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY.
2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)

4. Remove the screw (silver, 6mm) securing the REGI. EARTH WIRE
to the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY and release the wire.

5. Remove the E-ring securing the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-46. REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (2/2)

Figure 3-45. REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY Removal (1/2)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-42


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.8.5 PRE-REGI. CLUTCH Removal (PL5.2.8) 6. Remove 2 E-rings fixing the PRE-REGI. SUPPORT and remove the
PRE-REGI. SUPPORT toward the rear.
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
7. Among 2 PRE-REGI. GEAR 1, remove the outer one to the rear
2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.) from the stud.
3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.) 8. Disconnect the connector (P/J95) for the PRE-REGI. CLUTCH
NOTE: In the following step, hold the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY to through the hole to the back of the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
keep it closed while turning over the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
9. Remove the PRE-REGI. CLUTCH from the stud and remove the
4. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the PRE-REGI. PRE-REGI CLUTCH.
GEAR ASSEMBLY and remove it.

Figure 3-48. PRE-REGI. CLUTCH Removal (2/2)

C H E C K n When installing the PRE-REGI. CLUTCH, make sure


P O IN T
the notch on the clutch is properly aligned with the pin
on the MSI FRAME ASSEMBLY.
Figure 3-47. PRE-REGI. CLUTCH Removal (1/2)
n Route the harness carefully so it does not touch any
gear.
5. Disconnect the connector (P/J95) for the PRE-REGI. CLUTCH from
the back of the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY, and release the harness. n If it is hard to connect the PRE-REGI CLUTCH
connector, release the harness from the clump, then
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to drop gears as they will connect the connector.
be disengaged.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-43


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.8.6 PRE-REGI. ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL5.2.4)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)
3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)
4. Remove the PRE-REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY. (See Section
3.2.8.4.)
5. Remove the PRE-REGI. CLUTCH. (See Section 3.2.8.5.)
6. Remove the E-ring fixing the TURN IDLER GEAR, and then remove
the TURN IDLER GEAR and the PRE-REGI. BEARING on the rear.

7. Pull the PRE-REGI. KNOB ASSEMBLY out of the PRE-REGI.


ROLL ASSEMBLY to remove.
NOTE: In the following step, make sure you won’t leave the MSI
OUT HOLDER too far from the MSI FRAME ASSEMBLY,
since they are kept connected with the harness.
8. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the MSI OUT
HOLDER and separate the MSI OUT HOLDER from the MSI
FRAME ASSEMBLY.
9. Remove the E-ring in the front securing the PRE-REGI. ROLL
ASSEMBLY, and then, using a standard screw driver, remove the
PRE-REGI. BEARING in the front.
10. Lifting the PRE-REGI. ROLL ASSEMBLY up keeping it level, turn
the assembly to align the pin on it with the cutout in the P/H FRAME
ASSEMBLY, and shift the assembly backward.
11. Lift up the front end of the PRE-REGI. ROLL ASSEMBLY and pull it
out to the upper front, and remove the PRE-REGI. GEAR 2 and
PRE-REGI ROLL ASSEMBLY respectively.

Figure 3-49. PRE-REGI. ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-44


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.8.7 REGI. CLUTCH Removal (PL5.2.15)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)


NOTE: In the following step, hold the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY to
keep it closed while turning over the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.

4. Disconnect the connector (P/J94) for the REGI. CLUTCH from the
back of the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY and release the harness.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to lose the REGI.
UPPER BEARING, since it may come off when the REGI.
CLUTCH is removed.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to lose the REGI.
SPACER.

5. Pull the connector (P/J94) through the harness hole to the rear side
of the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.

6. Remove the E-ring fixing the REGI. CLUTCH, and remove the
REGI. SPACER and REGI. CLUTCH from the stud to the rear.

Figure 3-50. REGI. CLUTCH Removal

C H E C K When installing the REGI. CLUTCH, align the notch on


P O IN T
the REGI. CLUTCH with the pin on the P/H FRAME
ASSEMBLY.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-45


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.8.8 REGI. BRAKE CLUTCH Removal (PL5.2.20) 7. Remove the REGI. BRAKE CLUTCH and REGI. BRAKE GEAR
from the REGI. BRAKE BRACKET.
1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)


NOTE: In the following step, hold the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY to
keep it closed while turning over the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.

4. Disconnect the connector (P/J109) for the REGI. BRAKE CLUTCH


from the back of the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY and release the
harness.

Figure 3-51. REGI. BRAKE CLUTCH Removal (1/2)

Figure 3-52. REGI. BRAKE CLUTCH Removal (2/2)


5. Remove 3 screws (gold tapped, 8mm) securing the REGI. BRAKE
ASSEMBLY, and remove the REGI. BRAKE ASSEMBLY.

6. Remove 2 E-rings; one securing the REGI. BRAKE CLUTCH and


the other securing the REGI BRAKE GEAR.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-46


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.8.9 REGI. METAL ROLL Removal (PL5.2.16)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)

4. Remove the REGI. CLUTCH. (See Section 3.2.8.7.)

5. Using the standard driver or equivalent, remove the REGI UPPER


BEARING at the back of the REGI. METAL ROLL.

6. Remove the REGI. BRAKE ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Section 3.2.8.8.)

7. Remove the E-ring fixing the REGI. OUT GEAR and remove the
REGI. OUT GEAR. Figure 3-53. REGI. METAL ROLL Removal

8. Using a standard driver or equivalent, remove the REGI. UPPER


BEARING in front of the REGI. METAL ROLL.
C H E C K When installing the REGI. METAL ROLL the side whose
P O IN T
9. Open the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY. end with shorter diameter is longer than the other must
come to the front.
10. Lift up the rear part of the REGI. METAL ROLL and shift it to the
rear. Then remove the REGI. METAL ROLL.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-47


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.8.10 REGI. RUBBER ROLL Removal (PL5.2.24)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)

4. Remove the REGI. CLUTCH. (See Section 3.2.8.7.)

5. Remove the REGI. BRAKE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Section


3.2.8.8.)

6. Remove the REGI. METAL ROLL. (Refer to Section 3.2.8.9.)


NOTE: In the following steps, be careful not to drop and lose the
Figure 3-54. REGI. RUBBER ROLL Removal
REGI. FRONT SPRING and REGI. REAR SPRING.

7. Remove the front E-ring fixing the REGI. RUBBER ROLL to remove
the REGI. GEAR. C H E C K When installing the REGI, RUBBER ROLL, be careful
P O IN T
not to damage the mylar film attached onto the P/H
8. Taking out the front REGI. LOWER BEARING, remove the REGI.
FRAME ASSEMBLY.
FRONT SPRING and REGI. LOWER BEARING.

9. Remove the E-ring securing the REGI. RUBBER ROLL by the rear
end. Then, taking out the rear REGI. LOWER BEARING, remove
the REGI. LOWER BEARING and the REGI. REAR SPRING.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to damage the mylar film
attached onto the P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY.

10. Lifting up the rear end of the REGI. RUBBER ROLL, pull out the roll
to the upper rear to remove.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-48


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.8.11 REGI. SENSOR Removal (PL5.2.28)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)


NOTE: In the following step, hold the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY to
keep it closed while turning over the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.

4. Disconnect the connector (P/J93) for REGI. SENSOR from the back
of the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hooks in the
P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY.

5. Release the hooks on the P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY securing the


REGI. SENSOR and lift the sensor up vertically to remove.
Figure 3-55. REGI. SENSOR Removal

C H E C K When installing the REGI. SENSOR, make sure the


P O IN T
sensor is securely hooked to the P/H FRAME
ASSEMBLY.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-49


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.8.12 FRONT OHP SENSOR Removal (PL5.2.31)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)


NOTE: In the following steps, hold the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY to
keep it closed while turning over the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: In the following step, do not move the OHP SENSOR
ASSEMBLY too far from the P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY, since
they are connected with the harness.

4. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the OHP SENSOR
ASSEMBLY, and remove the OHP SENSOR ASSEMBLY from the
P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY.

5. Disconnect the connectors P/J98 for the FRONT OHP SENSOR

6. Remove the screw (gold, 6mm) securing the FRONT OHP


SENSOR and remove the FRONT OHP SENSOR.

C H E C K When installing the OHP SENSOR ASSEMBLY, make


P O IN T
sure the harnesses are not caught between the OHP
SENSOR ASSEMBLY and P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-56. FRONT OHP SENSOR Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-50


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.8.13 REAR OHP SENSOR Removal (PL5.2.32)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.2.)

3. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)


NOTE: In the following steps, hold the REGI. CHUTE ASSEMBLY to
keep it closed while turning over the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: In the following step, do not move the OHP SENSOR
ASSEMBLY too away from the P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY,
since they are connected with the harness.

4. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the OHP SENSOR
ASSEMBLY, and remove the OHP SENSOR ASSEMBLY from the
P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY.

5. Disconnect the connectors P/J99 for the REAR OHP SENSOR.

6. Remove the screw (gold, 6mm) securing the REAR OHP SENSOR
and remove the REAR OHP SENSOR.

C H E C K When installing the OHP SENSOR ASSEMBLY, make


P O IN T
sure the harnesses are not caught between the OHP
SENSOR ASSEMBLY and P/H FRAME ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-57. REAR OHP SENSOR Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-51


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.9 Xerographics 3.2.9.2 WASTE TONER BOX Removal (PL6.1.12)


1. Open the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY.
3.2.9.1 DRUM CARTRIDGE Removal (PL6.1.10)
NOTE: After removing the WASTE TONER BOX in the following
1. Open the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY.
step, place it level on a safe place.
2. Turn the TENSION LEVER to the unlocking position to release the
DRUM CARTRIDGE from the IBT BELT ASSEMBLY. 2. Push down the tab on the hook of the WASTE TONER BOX and
take out the WASTE TONER BOX horizontally to remove.
NOTE: In the following step, do not touch the drum surface of the
DRUM CARTRIDGE.
NOTE: After removing the DRUM CARTRIDGE, place the cartridge
level on a safe place and keep it out direct sunlight.
3. Turn the drum cartridge lock lever to the unlocking position and
draw the DRUM CARTRIDGE enough to hold the belt on the top,
then take out the DRUM CARTRIDGE horizontally and remove it.

Figure 3-59. WASTE TONER BOX Removal

C H E C K When installing the WASTE TONER BOX, make sure the


P O IN T
hook for the WASTE TONER BOX securely fits in the
Figure 3-58. DRUM CARTRIDGE Removal
locking position.
C H E C K When installing the drum cartridge, make sure the
P O IN T
positioning labels on the drum cartridge are properly
aligned wit the corresponding labels on the XL RAIL
ASSEMBLY.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-52


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.9.3 ROS ASSEMBLY Removal (PL6.1.1)


1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove 8 screws (silver, cup head, 6mm) securing the ROS


COVER and remove the ROS COVER.

3. Disconnect 3 connectors (P/J121, 122, and 124) for the ROS


ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: In the following step, ROS ASSEMBLY is kept connected to
the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY with the harness. Do not move the
ROS ASSEMBLY to away from the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: In the following steps, keep your hands away from the
window part of the ROS ASSEMBLY, where laser beam is
emitted, and other functioning parts such as motor shaft.

4. Remove 4 screws (black, cup head, 12mm) securing the ROS


ASSEMBLY and remove the ROS ASSEMBLY from the printer.

5. Remove the connector (P/J123) at bottom of the ROS ASSEMBLY


and remove the ROS ASSEMBLY carefully. Window part

C H E C K n Keep the harness away from the motor shaft of the


P O IN T
Scanner assembly in the ROS ASSEMBLY.
n Do not get the harnesses caught between the ROS
ASSEMBLY and the frame. Figure 3-60. ROS ASSEMBLY Removal (2/2)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-53


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.9.4 ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL6.1.20)


1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)

3. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.)

4. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.4.)

5. Disconnect the connector (P/J81) for the ADC SENSOR


ASSEMBLY. Then release the harness from the clamp and pull it
out from the harness hole to bring it to the inner side.
NOTE: In the following step, keep your hands off the IBT BELT
ASSEMBLY and the Magnet roll in the DEVELOPER
ASSEMBLY.

6. Remove the E-ring securing the ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY.

7. Shift the ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY to the rear to release the front
end from the frame. Then release the rear end of the shaft from the
frame, and take the ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY out to the front.

Figure 3-61. ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY Removal

C H E C K When installing the ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY, be sure


P O IN T
to set the shaft of the assembly securely to the front
and rear frames of the printer body.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-54


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.9.5 XL RAIL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL6.1.40)


1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)

3. Remove the ROS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.3.)

4. Remove the connectors P/J86 and P/J116 for the ERASE LAMP
ASSEMBLY and the TONER BOX HARNESS, respectively.

5. Release the harnesses for the ERASE LAMP, ROS HARNESS, and
VIDEO HARNESS from the clamps.
NOTE: In the following step, be sure not to damage the IBT BELT
ASSEMBLY and the Magnet Rolls in the Developer
Assembly with such parts as XL RAIL ASSEMBLY and the
harnesses.
NOTE: In the following step, be sure to keep your hands off the IBT
BELT ASSEMBLY and the Magnet Roll surface.

6. Remove 4 screws (sliver, cup head, 8mm) securing the XL RAIL


ASSEMBLY, and then remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY.

C H E C K n When installing the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY, be sure not


P O IN T
to damage the IBT BELT ASSEMBLY and the Magnet
Rolls in the Developer Assembly with such parts as
XL RAIL ASSEMBLY and the harnesses.
n When installing the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY, be sure to
keep your hands off the IBT BELT ASSEMBLY and the
Magnet Roll surface.
Figure 3-62. XL RAIL ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-55


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.9.6 WASTE TONER SENSOR Removal (PL6.1.42) 3.2.9.7 TONER BOX SENSOR Removal (PL6.1.43)
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.) 2. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)

3. Remove the ROS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.3.) 3. Remove the ROS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.3.)

4. Remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.5.) 4. Remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.5.)

5. Release the harness from the hook on the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY and 5. Release the harness for the TONER BOX SENSOR from the clamp.
the clamp.
6. Disconnect the connector (P/J83A) for the TONER BOX SENSOR.
6. Disconnect the connector (P/J88) for the WASTE TONER
SENSOR. 7. Unhook the TONER BOX SENSOR from the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY,
and remove the TONER BOX SENSOR.
7. Release the hooks securing the WASTE TONER SENSOR from the
XL RAIL ASSEMBLY, and remove the WASTE TONER SENSOR.
8)-2

8)-1

Figure 3-63. WASTE TONER SENSOR Removal Figure 3-64. TONER BOX SENSOR Removal

C H E C K When installing the TONER BOX SENSOR, make sure


C H E C K P O IN T
P O IN T
When installing the WASTE TONER SENSOR, make the harness is not loosely routed.
sure the harness is not loosely routed.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-56


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.9.8 ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY Removal (PL6.1.30)


1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)

3. Remove the ROS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.3.)

4. Remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.5.)

5. Take the harness for the ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY out of the hole
to release it.

6. Using a standard driver, release the hooks securing the ERASE


LAMP ASSEMBLY from the XL RAIL and remove the ERASE LAMP
ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-65. ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-57


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.10 Development
NOTE: The generic term “Toner Cartridge” is used for “TONER
Cartridge Y”, “TONER CARTRIDGE M”, “TONER CARTRIDGE
C”, and “TONER CARTRIDGE K”.

3.2.10.1 Toner Cartridge Removal (PL7.1.1 ~ PL7.1.4)


1. Open the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY.

2. Push up the ROTARY LATCH LEVER and turn the ROTARY KNOB
ASSEMBLY to set the Toner Cartridge to be replaced to the
replacing position.
NOTE: After removing the toner cartridge, place it level on a safe
surface.

3. Turn the lever on the cartridge to the unlocking position and take the
Toner Cartridge out.

Figure 3-66. Toner Cartridge Removal

C H E C K Installing the Toner Cartridge with the arrow mark on it


P O IN T
facing upward.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-58


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.10.2 Developer Assembly Removal (PL7.1.10, PL7.1.20, PL7.1.30, PL7.1.40)


NOTE: The generic term “Developer Assembly” is used for
“DEVELOPPER ASSEMBLY Y/M/C/K”.

1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)

3. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.)

4. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.4.)

5. Remove the Toner Cartridge from the Developer Assembly in the


replacing position. (See Section 3.2.10.1.)

6. Remove the FRONT COVER SWITCH L. (See Section 3.2.16.8.)

7. Remove the screw (silver, 8mm) securing the ROTARY LATCH


ASSEMBLY. Then shift the ROTARY LATCH ASSEMBLY right to
release the hook and remove the ROTARY LATCH ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: In the following step, be sure not to drop the screw.

8. Turn the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY until the screw (silver, M4,
22mm) securing the Developer Assembly is aligned with the round
cutout in the frame in front. Then, remove the screw inserting a
driver.
NOTE: In the following step, note the points below.
n Never touch the Magnet Roll in the Developer Assembly.
n The ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY will rotate in the next step
since the ROTARY LATCH ASSEMBLY has been removed.
n After removing the Developer Assembly, place it level on a safe Figure 3-67. Developer Assembly Removal
surface.
A D J U S T M E N T Perform “Deve. Spacer Selection” after replacing the
R E Q U IR E D
9. Shift the Developer Assembly forward first. Then lift up the front part Developer Assembly. (Refer to Section 3.3.2.)
of the Developer Assembly and remove it.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-59


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.10.3 Developer Removal (PL7.1.13, PL7.1.23, PL7.1.33, PL7.1.43)


NOTE: The generic term “Developer” is used for “DEVELOPER Y/M/C/
K”.
NOTE: The generic term “Deve. Upper Assembly” is used for “DEVE.
UPPER ASSEMBLY Y/M/C/K”.

1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)


2. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)
3. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.)
4. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.4.)
5. Remove the Toner Cartridge from the Developer Assembly in the
replacing position. (See Section 3.2.10.1.)
6. Remove the TOP COVER SWITCH. (See Section 3.2.16.3.)
7. Remove the Developer Assembly that has the Developer to be
removed. (See Section 3.2.10.2.)
NOTE: Before proceeding to the next step, note the points below.
n Do not scatter toner.
n Place the Developer Assembly on a sheet of paper set on a
desk or floor.
n Get a sheet of paper on which you place the Developer.
n Be careful not to drop and lose the gear as it may dislocate
when the bracket of the developer is removed.

8. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) and 1 screw (gold, 6mm)


securing the bracket. Figure 3-68. Developer Removal
9. Remove 4 screws (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the Deve. Upper
C H E C K Do not use the Developer that is once taken out.
Assembly. Then release 4 hooks on the Deve. Upper Assembly and P O IN T
shift the Deve. Upper Assembly forward to remove.

10. Place the Developer on a sheet of paper.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-60


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.10.4 ROTARY SENSOR Removal (PL7.2.22)


1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

2. Release the harness from the hook on the FAN DUCT.

3. Disconnect the connector (P/J82) for the DEVE. FAN.

4. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the FAN
DUCT, and shift the FAN DUCT upward to release the hooks from
the frame. Then remove the FAN DUCT along with the DEVE. FAN.

Figure 3-70. ROTARY SENSOR Removal (2/2)

C H E C K When routing the harnesses, do not let it touch the


Figure 3-69. ROTARY SENSOR Removal (1/2) P O IN T
gears.

5. Disconnect the connector (P/J58) for the ROTARY SENSOR.

6. Remove the screw (silver, 6mm) securing the ROTARY SENSOR


ASSEMBLY and remove the ROTARY SENSOR ASSEMBLY.

7. Unhook the ROTARY SENSOR from the ROTARY SENSOR


PLATE and remove the ROTARY SENSOR.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-61


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.10.5 ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY Removal (PL7.2.2) 18. Remove the LVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.1.)

1. Remove the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.1.) 19. Remove the FUSER DRIVE ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.14.6.)

2. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 20. Remove the DEVE. CLUTCH ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.14.9.)

3. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.) 21. Remove the DEVE. TIE PLATE. (See Section 3.2.15.1.)

4. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.) 22. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the ROTARY
KNOB ASSEMBLY.
5. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.4.)
6. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 23. Using a standard driver, remove the ROTARY KNOB ASSEMBLY.

7. Remove all Toner Cartridges. (See Section 3.2.10.1.)

8. Remove the FRONT COVER SWITCH L. (See Section 3.2.16.8.)

9. Remove all Developer Assemblies. (See Section 3.2.10.2.)

10. Remove the ROTARY SENSOR. (See Section 3.2.10.4.)

11. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
and OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY installed. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

12. Remove the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.2.)

13. Remove the EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.3.)

14. Remove the P/H MOTOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.14.2.)

15. Remove the ROTARY MOTOR PWB. (See Section 3.2.14.3.) Figure 3-71. ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY Removal (1/2)

16. Remove the ROTARY MOTOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section


3.2.14.4.)

17. Remove the DISPENSE MOTOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section


3.2.14.5.)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-62


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

NOTE: As the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY weighs heavily, note the


points below when handling it in the following steps:
n Avoid dropping the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY.
n Keep the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY well away from
adjacent parts.

24. Remove the E-ring securing the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY at


the rear side, and remove the ROTARY REAR BEARING.
NOTE: In the following step, support the front part of the ROTARY
FRAME ASSEMBLY as the front end of the shaft in the
ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY will be released from the
base frame.

25. Remove the ROTARY FRONT BEARING in the front.

26. Release the front end of the shaft in the ROTARY FRAME
ASSEMBLY from the U-cut in the base frame. Then shift the
ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY forward to release the rear end of
the shaft, and lift up the rear part of the ROTARY FRAME
ASSEMBLY and remove it.

Figure 3-72. ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY Removal (2/2)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-63


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.10.6 CARTRIDGE SENSOR Removal (PL7.2.26) 9. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the CARTRIDGE
SENSOR, and remove the CARTRIDGE SENSOR from the CART.
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) SENSOR HOLDER.
2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY


and OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY installed. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

4. Remove the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.2.)

5. Remove the EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.3.)

6. Release the harness from the clamp holding the CART. SENSOR
HARNESS to the DEVE. TIE PLATE.

7. Using a mini driver, push inside of 2 concaves in the CART.


SENSOR ASSEMBLY to release hooks from the frame. Then shift
the CART. SENSOR ASSEMBLY to the left and remove it.

8. Disconnect the connector (P/J168) for the CARTRIDGE SENSOR


and remove the CART. SENSOR HARNESS.

Figure 3-74. CARTRIDGE SENSOR Removal (2/2)

C H E C K n Route the harness carefully so it will not be caught.


P O IN T
n Make sure the harness is not slack in the CART.
SENSOR HOLDER.
Figure 3-73. CARTRIDGE SENSOR Remove (1/2)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-64


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.10.7 USED CART. SENSOR Removal (PL7.2.30)


1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Disconnect the connector P/J87 and P/J197 for the USED CART.
SENSOR and the FRONT COVER SWITCH L, respectively, and
release the harnesses from the USED SENSOR PLATE.

3. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the USED


SENSOR ASSEMBLY and remove the USED SENSOR
ASSEMBLY.

4. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 8mm) securing the USED CART.
SENSOR and remove the USED CART. SENSOR from the USED
SENSOR PLATE.

C H E C K Route the harness tightly via the USED SENSOR PLATE


P O IN T
and the hook in the ROTARY LATCH ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-75. USED CART. SENSOR Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-65


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.11 IBT

3.2.11.1 TENSION LEVER Removal (PL8.1.4)


1. Open the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY.

2. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)


NOTE: In the following step, keep your hands off the IBT BELT
ASSEMBLY.

3. Turn the TENSION LEVER to the locking position and remove the
screw (gold, with a washer, 12mm) securing the TENSION LEVER.
NOTE: It is better to use a magnetic forced screw driver to avoid
dropping screw inside the printer.

4. Take the TENSION LEVER out to remove.

Figure 3-76. TENSION LEVER Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-66


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.11.2 TRANSFER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.3)


1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

3. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)

4. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.)

5. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.4.)

6. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

7. Draw out the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY and remove it along with the Figure 3-77. TRANSFER ASSEMBLY Removal (1/2)
MSI ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)
16. Remove 2 screws (black, cup head, 12mm) securing the
8. Remove the ROS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.3.) TRANSFER ASSEMBLY by the rear end.
9. Remove the ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.4.) 17. Remove the KL clip securing the SLIDE COLLAR at the front end of
the TRANSFER ASSEMBLY.
10. Remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.5.)
NOTE: In the following step, note the points below.
11. Remove the HVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.2.)
n Never get other parts come in contact with the IBT BELT
12. Install the TENSION LEVER and turn it to the unlocking position, ASSEMBLY.
then remove the lever again.
n Never touch the IBT BELT surface with your hands.
13. Release the 1ST BTR WIRE and the CONTACT ROLL WIRE from n Do not catch the wire in other parts such as frames.
the clamp and leave it on the inner side of the frame.
n Place the removed TRANSFER ASSEMBLY on a piece of paper
14. Disconnect the connector (P/J57) for the TRO SENSOR. spread on a flat level surface.

15. Loosen the screw (gold, with a washer, 8mm) securing the AUGER n To protect the IBT BELT ASSEMBLY, you can cover the both
HIGH ASSEMBLY at the back of the printer, and shift the AUGER right and left frames in the TRANSFER ASSEMBLY with paper.
HIGH ASSEMBLY right. Then fasten the screw back to fix the
AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-67


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

18. Shift the SLIDE COLLAR inward and remove the IBT BEARING-4
from the frame. C H E C K n When installing the IBT BELT ASSEMBLY, cover the
P O IN T
belt surface with paper to protect it.
19. Lift up the both ends of the IBT DEVE ROLL ASSEMBLY in the
n When installing the TRANSFER ASSEMBLY, put the
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY about 20mm, then shift the front part of the
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY wire inside the printer first,
IBT DRIVE ROLL ASSEMBLY left and lift up the TRANSFER
then align the COLLAR-BUR in the TRANSFER
ASSEMBLY to remove.
ASSEMBLY with the IBT FRONT BRACKET and the
IBT REAR BRACKET.

Figure 3-79. TRANSFER ASSEMBLY Installation

n Route the harnesses tightly via the clamp.

Figure 3-78. TRANSFER ASSEMBLY Removal (2/2)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-68


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.11.3 BTR CAM SOLENOID Removal (PL8.1.15)


C H E C K When installing the BTR CAM SOLENOID, make sure it
1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) P O IN T
is under the following condition:
2. Remove the HVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.2.) n The arm of the BTR CAM SOLENOID is in induced
condition.
3. Disconnect the connector (P/J63) for the BTR CAM SOLENOID and
n The lower end of the arm is in contact with the
release the harness from the clamp.
Spring Clutch in the BTR CAM ASSEMBLY.
4. Remove the screw (gold, 6mm) securing the BTR CAM SOLENOID
and remove the BTR CAM SOLENOID.

Figure 3-81. BTR CAM SOLENOID Installation

Figure 3-80. BTR CAM SOLENOID Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-69


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.11.4 BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.30) NOTE: In the following step, place the removed BELT CLEANER
ASSEMBLY on a sheet of paper as toner may spill.
1. Remove the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.1.)
4. Take the BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY out from the left side of the
2. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY along with the EXIT TRAY printer.
ASSEMBLY and OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)
NOTE: In the following steps, toner might spill from the BELT
CLEANER ASSEMBLY. Be sure to place a sheet of paper
over the lower frame that is located under the BELT
CLEANER ASSEMBLY and handle the assembly carefully to
prevent toner from spilling.

3. Loosen the screw in the CLEANER SUPPORT ASSEMBLY


securing the CLEANER SUPPORT ASSEMBLY and remove the
CLEANER SUPPORT ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-83. BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY Removal (2/2)

C H E C K n After replacing the BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY with


P O IN T
a new one, perform “IBT Cleaner Reset”. (See Section
6.2 in Chapter 6 “Maintenance”.)
Figure 3-82. BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY Removal (1/2) n When installing the BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY,
make sure the toner inlet part of the AUGER HIGH
NOTE: In the following step, keep your hands off the IBT BELT ASSEMBLY and the toner outlet part of the BELT
ASSEMBLY and Cleaning Blade in the BELT CLEANER CLEANER ASSEMBLY are properly connected.
ASSEMBLY. Also, do not get the Cleaning Blade touch any n Set the CLEANER SUPPORT ASSEMBLY vertically
other parts. against the frame.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-70


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.11.5 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.20)


1. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY installed on it. (See Section
3.2.12.2.)

2. Remove the BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.11.4.)


NOTE: In the following step, do not touch the IBT BELT ASSEMBLY
and the 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY. Also do not get any other
parts touch the 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY.

3. Take the 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY out from the left side of the printer.

C H E C K n After replacing the 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY with a new


P O IN T
one, perform “2ND BTR Reset”. (See Section 6.2 in
Chapter 6 “Maintenance”.)
n When installing the 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY, push it all
the way into the printer.

Figure 3-84. 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-71


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.11.6 2ND BTR CAM ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.10) 18. Remove 3 screws (gold, cup head, 4mm) securing the 2ND BTR
CAM ASSEMBLY.
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to drop and lose the BTR
2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) BEARING-4 and the BTR BEARING-6 as they will come off.

3. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.) 19. Shift the 2ND BTR CAM ASSEMBLY to the front and remove the
TORQUE GEAR SHAFT and the BTR CAM ASSEMBLY from the
4. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.) BTR BEARING-4 and the BTR BEARING-6, respectively.
5. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.4.) NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to catch the wire in the
frame.
6. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)
20. Lift the 2ND BTR CAM ASSEMBLY up to remove.
7. Pull out the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI ASSEMBLY on it.
(See Section 3.2.8.1.)

8. Remove the ROS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.3.)

9. Remove the ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.4.)

10. Remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.5.)

11. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

12. Remove the HVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.2.)

13. Remove the TRANSFER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.11.2.)

14. Remove the BTR CAM SOLENOID. (See Section 3.2.11.3.) Figure 3-85. 2ND BTR CAM ASSEMBLY Removal

15. Remove the BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.11.4.) C H E C K


P O IN T
Route the wire tightly via the clamps.
16. Remove the 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.11.5.)

17. Release the DTS WIRE from all clamps and bring it to the inner side
of the frame.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-72


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.11.7 AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.1.40) 18. Remove the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.8.)

1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 19. Remove the CONTROLLER PWB. (See Section 1..)

2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 20. Remove the CONT. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.17.2.)

3. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.) 21. Remove the screw (silver, 6mm) securing the CRUM CONNECTOR
ASSEMBLY and remove the CRUM CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY.
4. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.)
22. Remove the screw (gold, with a washer, 8mm) securing the AUGER
5. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.4.) HIGH ASSEMBLY at the back.
6. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

7. Pull out the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI ASSEMBLY on it.
(See Section 3.2.8.1.)

8. Remove the ROS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.3.)

9. Remove the ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.4.)

10. Remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.5.)

11. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

12. Remove the HVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.2.)

13. Remove the TRANSFER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.11.2.)

14. Remove the BTR CAM SOLENOID. (See Section 3.2.11.3.)

15. Remove the BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.11.4.)

16. Remove the 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.11.5.)

17. Remove the 2ND BTR CAM ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.11.6.)
Figure 3-86. AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY Removal (1/3)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-73


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

23. Remove the screw (gold, cup head, 8mm) and the E-ring securing
the AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY at the left inner side (lower) of the
printer.

24. Remove the screw (gold, 6mm) securing the AUGER HIGH
ASSEMBLY at the middle inner side (upper) of the printer.
NOTE: In the following steps, toner might spill from the AUGER
HIGH ASSEMBLY. Be sure to place a sheet of paper over
the lower frame in the AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY and
handle the assembly carefully to prevent toner from spilling.
NOTE: In the following step, place the removed AUGER HIGH
ASSEMBLY on a sheet of paper to receive spilt toner.

25. Move the AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY forward to release it from the
peg and remove the AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY.

Left Figure 3-88. AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY Removal (3/3)

Figure 3-87. AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY Removal (2/3)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-74


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.11.8 IBT BELT ASSEMBLY Removal (PL8.2.2)


1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

3. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)

4. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.)

5. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.4.)

6. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)


Figure 3-89. IBT BELT ASSEMBLY Removal (1/3)
7. Pull out the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI ASSEMBLY on it.
(See Section 3.2.8.1.) 15. Turn the TENSION LEVER and push down the arms for the PUSH
IN SHAFT, then remove the TENSION LEVER.
8. Remove the ROS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.3.)
16. Push the metallic cam on the
9. Remove the ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.4.)
both sides of the TRANSFER
10. Remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.5.) ASSEMBLY inward and
insert a hex driver (allen
11. Remove the HVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.2.) wrench) through the hole on
the side to lock the cam.
NOTE: In the following step, never touch the IBT BELT surface but
the ribs on the sides. 17. In a side of a table, put up the
IBT DRIVE ROLL
12. Remove the TRANSFER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.11.2.) ASSEMBLY of the
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY with
13. Install the TENSION LEVER and lift up the PUSH IN SHAFT.
its gear part sticking out.
14. Wide the arms on the TRANSFER ASSEMBLY to remove the
PUSH IN SHAFT.

Figure 3-90. IBT BELT ASSEMBLY Removal (2/3)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-75


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

18. Remove the IBT BELT ASSEMBLY from the TRANSFER


ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-91. IBT BELT ASSEMBLY Removal (3/3)

C H E C K n When installing the IBT BELT ASSEMBLY, be careful


P O IN T
not to damage or stain it.
n Before installing the PUSH IN SHAFT, clean the shaft
to remove any oil and foreign matter.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-76


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.11.9 TRO SENSOR Removal (PL8.2.12)


1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

3. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)

4. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.)

5. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.4.)

6. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

7. Pull out the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI ASSEMBLY on it.
(See Section 3.2.8.1.)

8. Remove the ROS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.3.)

9. Remove the ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.4.)

10. Remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.5.) Figure 3-92. TRO SENSOR Removal

11. Remove the HVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.2.)

12. Remove the TRANSFER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.11.2.)

13. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the TRO
SENSOR and remove the TRO SENSOR.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-77


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12 Fusing 3.2.12.2 FUSER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.1.1)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)
3.2.12.1 OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.1.10)
2. Draw out the UNIVERSAL TRAY.
1. Draw out the FUSER ASSEMBLY.
3. Draw out the FUSER ASSEMBLY.
C A U T IO N Be careful when handling the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY.
If it is still very hot, you may get burnt. Therefore, 4. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)
always check that the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY has
NOTE: FUSER ASSEMBLY weighs quite heavily. Therefore, in the
cooled down enough for servicing.
following step, be careful not drop it or get it touch with other
parts.
NOTE: In the following step, place the removed OIL CAM
ASSEMBLY in a stable, level condition with its roller side 5. Loosen the screw (black, cup head, 8mm) at the front left of the
facing upward. printer, and lift up the FUSER ASSEMBLY to the upper left and
remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY.
2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY by holding its handles.

5)-2
5)-2

Figure 3-93. OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal Figure 3-94. FUSER ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-78


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.3 MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.1.2)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Disconnect 2 connectors (P/J72B, P/J79) for the MAIN FUSER


ASSEMBLY.

5. Remove 2 screws (gold, with a washer, 8mm) securing the MAIN


FUSER ASSEMBLY, and remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY.

C H E C K After replacing the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY with a new


P O IN T
one, perform “Fuser Unit Reset”. (See Chapter 6.)

Figure 3-95. MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-79


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.4 FUSER UPPER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.2.23)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)


NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to damage the HEAT
ROLL surface with a driver when remove the TEMP.
SENSOR ASSEMBLY.

5. Remove the screw (silver, tapped, 14mm) securing the TEMP.


SENSOR ASSEMBLY and release the harness from the hook on
the FUSER UPPER ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to drop the FUSER
FRONT COVER and the FUSER REAR COVER since they
will not be supported as the FUSSER UPPER ASSEMBLY is
removed.

6. Remove the following 4 screws securing the FUSER UPPER


ASSEMBLY. Figure 3-96. FUSER UPPER ASSEMBLY Removal
-2 outer screws (gold, with a washer, 8mm) sealed with black tapes
-2 inner screws (silver, 6mm)

C H E C K When installing the FUSER UPPER ASSEMBLY, fasten


P O IN T
the screws (Step 6) with the following parts:
n Outer screws: H/R HEATER
n Inner screws: HEATER WIRE

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-80


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.5 H/R HEATER Removal (PL9.2.20)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)

5. Remove the FUSER UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.4.)

6. Supporting the terminal part in the front part of the H/R HEATER
with a driver or equivalent, remove the FUSER FRONT COVER and
place it inside the HEAT ROLL carefully.
NOTE: In the following step, avoid damaging the H/R HEATER and
the P/R HEATER when disconnecting the connector (P/
JF791) which is tightly connected.

7. Release the wire and harness from the hook on the FUSER REAR
COVER and disconnect the connector (P/JF791) for the P/R
HEATER and the H/R HEATER.
NOTE: In the following step, gear will be released as the FUSER
REAR COVER is removed. Be careful not to drop and lose
the gear.
Figure 3-97. H/R HEATER Removal
8. Remove the FUSER REAR COVER getting the rear terminals of the
P/H HEATER and H/R HEATER through the holes in the cover.
NOTE: In the following step, do not touch the H/R HEATER surface
when removing the H/R HEATER.

9. Pull out the H/R HEATER to the rear keeping it level.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-81


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.6 P/R HEATER Removal (PL9.2.19)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)

5. Remove the FUSER UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.4.)

6. Supporting the terminal part in the front part of the H/R HEATER
with a driver or equivalent, remove the FUSER FRONT COVER and
place it in side the HEAT ROLL gently.
NOTE: The connector (P/JF791) to be disconnected in the next step
is firmly connected. Therefore, be careful not to break the H/
R HEATER and the P/R HEATER when disconnecting the
connector.

7. Release the wire and harness from the hook on the FUSER REAR
COVER and disconnect the connector (P/JF791) for the P/R
HEATER and the H/R HEATER.
NOTE: In the following step, gear will be released as the FUSER
REAR COVER is removed. Therefore, be careful not to drop
and lose the gear.

8. Remove the FUSER REAR COVER getting the rear terminals of the
H/R HEATER and P/R HEATER through the holes in the cover. Figure 3-98. P/R HEATER Removal

NOTE: In the following step, do not touch the H/R HEATER surface
when removing the P/R HEATER.

9. Remove the screw (gold, with a washer, 8mm) securing the P/R
HEATER and take out the P/R HEATER backward to remove.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-82


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.7 LOWER GUIDE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.2.26)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)

5. Open the UPPER GUIDE ASSEMBLY.


NOTE: When removing the LOWER GUIDE ASSEMBLY in the
following step, be careful not to damage the PRESSURE
ROLL with the P/R FINGERs.
NOTE: When removing the LOWER GUIDE ASSEMBLY in the
following step, make sure that the FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR
does not come off interfering with the FUSER EXIT
SENSOR.
Figure 3-99. LOWER GUIDE ASSEMBLY Removal
6. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 12mm) securing the LOWER
GUIDE ASSEMBLY. Then shift LOWER GUIDE ASSEMBLY
backward to remove.
C H E C K n When installing the LOWER GUIDE ASSEMBLY, leave
P O IN T
the P/R FINGERs open.
n When servicing the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY, keep it
with its right side down.
OPEN

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-83


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.8 FUSER EXIT SENSOR Removal (PL9.2.25) 3.2.12.9 UPPER GUIDE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.2.32)
1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.) 1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.) 2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.) 3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.) 4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)

5. Remove the LOWER GUIDE ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.7.) 5. Remove the FUSER UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.4.)

6. Disconnect the connector (P/J75) for the FUSER EXIT SENSOR. 6. Open the UPPER GUIDE ASSEMBLY and align the hinges with the
cutouts in the front and rear frames, and lift up the UPPER GUIDE
7. Release the hooks securing the FUSER EXIT SENSOR from the ASSEMBLY to remove.
FUSER BOTTOM PLATE and remove the FUSER EXIT SENSOR.

Figure 3-100. FUSER EXIT SENSOR Removal Figure 3-101. UPPER GUIDE ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-84


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.10 HEAT ROLL Removal (PL9.2.12)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)

5. Remove the FUSER UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.4.)

6. Remove the H/R HEATER. (See Section 3.2.12.5.)

7. Open the UPPER GUIDE ASSEMBLY.

8. Release the nuts securing the front and rear NIP SPRINGs.

9. Remove the NIP SPRINGs.

10. Remove the H/R RING securing the rear H/R GEAR and remove the
rear H/R GEAR and the REAR H/R BEARING.

11. Remove the front H/R RING and remove the front H/R BEARING.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to damage the HEAT
ROLL surface.

12. Shift the HEAT ROLL backward to release the front end from the
frame. Then shift the roll forward and remove the HEAT ROLL.

Figure 3-102. HEAT ROLL Removal

C H E C K n After installing the HEAT ROLL, perform the


P O IN T
adjustment “NIP adjustment of the MAIN FUSER
ASSEMBLY”. (See Section 3.3.1.)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-85


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.11 PRESSURE ROLL Removal (PL9.2.9)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)

5. Remove the FUSER UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.4.)

6. Remove the H/R HEATER. (See Section 3.2.12.5.)

7. Remove the P/R HEATER. (See Section 3.2.12.6.)

8. Remove the LOWER GUIDE ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.7.)

9. Remove the UPPER GUIDE ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.9.)

10. Remove the HEAT ROLL. (See Section 3.2.12.10.)

11. Remove the screw (gold, 5mm) securing the FUSER INLET PLATE
Figure 3-103. PRESSURE ROLL Removal
and remove the FUSER INLET PLATE.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to damage the
PRESSURE ROLL surface.
C H E C K After installing the PRESSURE ROLL, perform the
P O IN T
12. Lift up the PRESSURE ROLL along with the P/H BEARING on the adjustment “NIP adjustment of the MAIN FUSER
front and rear ends, then remove the P/R BEARING from the ASSEMBLY”. (See Section 3.3.1.)
PRESSURE ROLL.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-86


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.12 TEMP. SENSOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.2.24)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)

5. Remove the FUSER UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.4.)

6. Remove the H/R HEATER. (See Section 3.2.12.5.)

7. Remove the P/R HEATER. (See Section 3.2.12.6.)

8. Remove the LOWER GUIDE ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.7.)

9. Remove the UPPER GUIDE ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.9.)

10. Remove the HEAT ROLL. (See Section 3.2.12.10.)

11. Remove the PRESSURE ROLL. (See Section 3.2.12.11.)


Figure 3-104. SENSOR ASSEMBLY Removal
12. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 16mm) securing the FUSER
REAR FRAME and remove the FUSER REAR FRAME and the
FUSER REAR BRACKET along with 2 gears. C H E C K n After installing the TEMP. SENSOR ASSEMBLY,
P O IN T
perform the adjustment “NIP adjustment of the MAIN
13. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 16mm) securing the FUSER FUSER ASSEMBLY”. (Refer to Section 3.3.1.)
FRONT FRAME and remove the FUSER FRONT FRAME and the n Route the harness tightly via the hook on the FUSER
FUSER FRONT BRACKET along with the NIP SCREWs. BOTTOM PLATE.
14. Disconnect the connector (P/J75) from the FUSER EXIT SENSOR
and release the harness from the hook on the FUSER BOTTOM
PLATE. Then remove the TEMP. SENSOR ASSEMBLY.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-87


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.13 EXCHANGE CHUTE Removal (PL9.3.10)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)

5. Remove the EXCHANGE SPRING from the EXCHANGE CHUTE.

6. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 10m) securing the EXCHANGE


STOPPER-F, and then remove the EXCHANGE STOPPER-F.

7. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the EXCHANGE


STOPPER-R, and then remove the EXCHANGE STOPPER-R.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the front and
rear hinges in the EXCHANGE CHUTE.

8. Remove the EXCHANGE CHUTE by taking it out to the right


horizontally.

Figure 3-105. EXCHANGE CHUTE Removal

C H E C K When installing the EXCHANGE CHUTE, fit the notch at


P O IN T
the rear end of the EXCHANGE CHUTE in the plunger in
the EXCHANGE SOLENOID.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-88


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.14 OIL CAM SOLENOID Removal (PL9.3.21)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)


NOTE: In the following step, FUSER REAR RAIL will be kept
connected to the FUSER TRAY ASSEMBLY. Do not move
the FUSER REAR RAIL too far from the FUSER TRAY
ASSEMBLY.

5. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the FUSER REAR


RAIL, and separate the FUSER REAR RAIL from the FUSER TRAY
ASSEMBLY.

6. Disconnect the connector (P/J73) for the OIL CAM SOLENOID and
release the harness from the clamp.
Figure 3-106. OIL CAM SOLENOID Removal
7. Remove 2 screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the OIL CAM
SOLENOID and remove the OIL CAM SOLENOID.

C H E C K n When installing the OIL CAM SOLENOID, make sure


P O IN T
the arm on the OIL CAM SOLENOID lines up with the
T-shaped protrusion on the OIL CAM ASSEMBLY.
n After installing the OIL CAM SOLENOID, ensure that
the protrusion on the OIL CAM ASSEMBLY stays in
contact with the arm on the OIL CAM SOLENOID.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-89


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.15 EXCHANGE SOLENOID Removal (PL9.3.16)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)

5. Remove the EXCHANGE CHUTE. (See Section 3.2.12.13.)

6. Remove the OIL CAM SOLENOID. (See Section 3.2.12.14.)

7. Disconnect the connector (P/J74) for the EXCHANGE SOLENOID


and release the harness from the clamp.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to drop the gear since it
will be disengaged when the EXCHANGE BRACKET is
removed.

8. Remove the screw (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the SOLENOID


ASSEMBLY and remove the SOLENOID ASSEMBLY along with the
FUSER EARTH-B.

9. Remove 2 screws (silver, 3mm) securing the EXCHANGE


SOLENOID to the EXCHANGE BRACKET. Then remove the
EXCHANGE SOLENOID.

Figure 3-107. EXCHANGE SOLENOID Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-90


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.16 OIL CAM ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.3.22)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)

5. Remove the OIL CAM SOLENOID. (See Section 3.2.12.14.)

6. Remove the EXCHANGE SOLENOID. (See Section 3.2.12.15.)


NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hook on the
OIL CAM ASSEMBLY.

7. Release 4 hooks on the FUSER TRAY LEVER and remove the


FUSER TRAY LEVER.

8. Remove the OIL CAM ASSEMBLY by pulling it out to the left


horizontally.
Figure 3-108. OIL CAM ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-91


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.17 CLEANER CAM SOLENOID Removal (PL9.4.23)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)


NOTE: In the following step, the FUSER REAR RAIL and the
FUSER TRAY ASSEMBLY will be kept connected with the
harness. Therefore, do not leave the FUSER TRAY
ASSEMBLY too far from the fuser rear rail.

5. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the FUSER REAR


RAIL, and separate the FUSER REAR RAIL from the FUSER TRAY
ASSEMBLY.
Figure 3-109. CLEANER CAM SOLENOID Removal
6. Disconnect the connector (P/J62) for the CLEANER CAM
SOLENOID and release the harness from the frame. C H E C K Follow the steps below when installing the
P O IN T
CLEANER CAM SOLENOID:
7. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the INPUT
1. The arm on the CLEANER CAM ASSEMBLY is in
BRACKET FT and remove the INPUT BRACKET FT along with the
the induced position.
FUSER EARTH-A.
2. Set the lower side of the tip of the arm staying in
8. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the CLEANER contact with the Spring Clutch of the CLEANER
CAM SOLENOID and remove the CLEANER CAM SOLENOID. CAM ASSEMBLY, and fix the solenoid.

Figure 3-110. CLEANER CAM SOLENOID Installation

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-92


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.18 CLEANER CAM ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.4.26)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)

5. Remove the CLEANER CAM SOLENOID. (See Section 3.2.12.17.)

6. Remove 2 screws (gold, tapped, 10mm) securing the FUSER


FRONT RAIL, and remove the FUSER FRONT RAIL from the
FUSER TRAY ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: When removing the CLEANER CAM in the following step, be
careful not to drop and lose the CLEANER CAM PIN.
Figure 3-111. CLEANER CAM ASSEMBLY Removal
7. Remove the E-ring securing the CLEANER CAM and remove the
CLEANER CAM, CLEANER CAM PIN, CLN CAM BEARING-F.
C H E C K When installing the both right and left cams, set them in
8. Pull out the CLEANER CAM ASSEMBLY backward and remove tit P O IN T
along with the CLN CAM BEARING-F. the same proper direction.

9. Remove the CLN CAM BEARING-F from the CLEANER CAM


ASSEMBLY.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-93


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.19 EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.3.7)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)

5. Remove the E-ring securing the EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY.

6. Push the front EXIT-1 BEARING to the rear and slide the front part
of the EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY to the right.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not drop the EXIT-1
BEARING at the rear end of the EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY
since it will be released from the FUSER TRAY.

7. Shift the EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY forward to release the rear end
and remove the EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY to the rear along with the
EXIT-1 BEARING and the EXIT-1 GEAR.

8. Remove the EXIT-1 BEARING and the EXIT-1 GEAR from the Figure 3-112. EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal
EXIT-1 ROLL ASSEMBLY.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-94


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.20 CRU SWITCH ASSEMBLY Removal (PL9.3.25)


1. Remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.1.)

2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.3.)

5. Remove the EXCHANGE CHUTE. (See Section 3.2.12.13.)

6. Remove the EXCHANGE SOLENOID. (See Section 3.2.12.15.)

7. Remove the FUSER TRAY LEVER. (See Section 3.2.12.16.)

8. Disconnect the connector (P/J77) for the CRU SWITCH


ASSEMBLY and release the harness from the clamp.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the contact parts of the CRU
SWITCH ASSEMBLY.
Figure 3-113. CRU SWITCH ASSEMBLY Removal
9. Release the hooks securing the CRU SWITCH ASSEMBLY from
the FUSER TRAY and remove the CRU SWITCH ASSEMBLY.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-95


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.21 FUSER IN SENSOR Removal (PL9.4.4)


1. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.) 4. Release the hook for the FUSER IN HOLDER from the FUSER
TRAY, and then remove the FUSER IN HOLDER.
2. Remove the two screws (gold, with a washer, 8 mm) securing the
HORIZONTAL CHUTE, and then lift up the HORIZONTAL CHUTE 5. Disconnect the connector (P/J117) for the FUSER IN SENSOR.
to remove.
6. Release the hook for the FUSER IN SENSOR from the FUSER
3. Remove the four screws (gold, tapped, 10 mm) securing the FUSER TRAY, and then remove the FUSER IN SENSOR.
BOTTOM COVER, and remove the FUSER BOTTOM COVER.

Figure 3-114. FUSER IN SENSOR Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-96


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.12.22 FUSER CHUTE FAN Removal (PL9.4.10)


1. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.2.) 4. Remove the FUSER CHUTE FAN from the FUSER TRAY.

2. Remove the two screws (gold, with a washer, 8 mm) securing the 5. Disconnect the connector (P/J80) for the FUSER CHUTE FAN.
HORIZONTAL CHUTE, and then lift up the HORIZONTAL CHUTE
to remove.

3. Remove the four screws (gold, tapped, 10 mm) securing the FUSER
BOTTOM COVER, and remove the FUSER BOTTOM COVER.

Figure 3-115. FUSER CHUTE FAN Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-97


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.13 Paper Exit 3.2.13.2 EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.1.2)


1. Open the exit upper assembly.
3.2.13.1 EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.1.10)
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the hinge in the
1. Push the hinge at the rear end of the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY.
inward to release the peg from the FUSER TRAY. Then release the
front peg and remove the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY. 2. Push the front hinge part of the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY inward to
release it from the peg on the EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY. Then
release the rear hinge and remove the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY.

Rear

Front

Figure 3-116. EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.1.10)

Figure 3-117. Figure 3-94. EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY Removal


C H E C K When installing the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY, hang the
P O IN T
hinge spring longer end to the outer side of the frame.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-98


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.13.3 EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.1.1) 3.2.13.4 EXIT-2 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.2.5)
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY 3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY on it. (See Section 3.2.12.2.) and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY on it. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.2.) 4. Remove the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.2.)

5. Disconnect 3 connectors (P/J111B, P/J161B, P/J89) for the EXIT 5. Remove the EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.3.)
LOWER ASSEMBLY.
6. Remove 2 E-rings securing the EXIT-2 ROLL ASSEMBLY by the
6. Remove 5 screws (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the EXIT front and rear ends, and remove 2 SPUR GEARs, EXIT FRONT
LOWER ASSEMBLY, and remove the EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY BEARING, and the EXIT REAR BEARING.
by lifting it up.
7. Remove the EXIT-2 ROLL ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-119. EXIT-2 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal


Figure 3-118. EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-99


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.13.5 EXIT-3 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal (PL10.2.7) 3.2.13.6 FUSER FAN Removal (PL10.2.15)
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 1. Draw out the FUSER ASSEMBLY.

2. Remove front and rear E-rings securing the EXIT-3 ROLL 2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)
ASSEMBLY.
3. Disconnect the connector (P/J111B) for the FUSER FAN and
3. Remove the SPUR GEAR, EXIT FRONT BEARING and EXIT release the harness from the clamp.
REAR BEARING.
4. Widen the hooks securing the FUSER FAN and remove the FUSER
4. Remove the EXIT-3 ROLL ASSEMBLY. FAN.

Figure 3-121. FUSER FAN Removal

C H E C K When placing the FUSER FAN, make sure the


P O IN T
fan is installed with the maker label facing
outward.
Figure 3-120. EXIT-3 ROLL ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-100


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.13.7 TOP EXIT SENSOR Removal (PL10.2.12) 3.2.13.8 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH Removal (PL10.2.13)
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY 3. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY on it. (See Section 3.2.12.2.) and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY on it. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

4. Remove the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.2.) 4. Remove the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.2.)

5. Remove the EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.3.) 5. Remove the EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.3.)

6. Disconnect the connector (P/J165) for the TOP EXIT SENSOR. 6. Disconnect the connector (P/J166) for the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH.

7. Release the hooks securing the TOP EXIT SENSOR and remove 7. Release the hooks securing the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH and remove
the TOP EXIT SENSOR. the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH.

Figure 3-122. TOP EXIT SENSOR Removal

Figure 3-123. EXIT CHUTE SWITCH Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-101


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.14 Drive 5. Remove 5 screws (black, cup head, 10mm) securing the P/H DRIVE
ASSEMBLY, and remove the P/H DRIVE ASSEMBLY along with 2
3.2.14.1 P/H DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.1) DRIVE CLAMP-Ys.

1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 6. Remove the both 2 DRIVE CLAMP-Ys from the P/H DRIVE
ASSEMBLY.
2. Remove the HVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.2.)

3. Release 3 harnesses from the clamp on the P/H DRIVE


ASSEMBLY.

4. Remove the screw (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the DRIVE
CLAMP-N.

Figure 3-124. P/H DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (1/2) Figure 3-125. P/H DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (2/2)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-102


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.14.2 P/H MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.3) 3.2.14.3 ROTARY MOTOR PWB Removal (PL11.1.21)
1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY.(See Section 3.2.4.5.)

2. Disconnect 2 connectors (P/J49 and P/J50) from the P/H MOTOR NOTE: In the following step, the ROTARY MOTOR PWB will be
ASSEMBLY. kept connected to the printer body with the harness.
Therefore, be careful not to leave the ROTARY MOTOR
3. Remove 5 screws (black, cup head, 4mm) securing the P/H PWB too far from the printer.
MOTOR ASSEMBLY and remove the P/H MOTOR ASSEMBLY
along with 2 P/H MOTOR SUPPORTs. 2. Remove the screw (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the ROTARY
MOTOR PWB and separate the ROTARY MOTOR PWB from the
4. Using pliers, remove the 2 P/H MOTOR SUPPORTs from the P/H printer body.
MOTOR ASSEMBLY.
3. Disconnect 3 connectors (P/J245, P/J246, P/J247) for the ROTARY
MOTOR PWB and remove the ROTARY MOTOR PWB.

Figure 3-126. P/H MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal Figure 3-127. ROTARY MOTOR PWB Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-103


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.14.4 ROTARY MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.20)


1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

2. Disconnect the connector (P/J247) for the ROTARY MOTOR


ASSEMBLY.

3. Remove 3 screws (gold, 6mm) securing the ROTARY MOTOR


ASSEMBLY and remove the ROTARY MOTOR ASSEMBLY.

C H E C K When installing the ROTARY MOTOR ASSEMBLY, do


P O IN T
not catch the harness between the parts.

Figure 3-128. ROTARY MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-104


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.14.5 DISPENSE MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.22)


1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

2. Remove the P/H MOTOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.14.2.)

3. Remove the ROTARY MOTOR PWB. (See Section 3.2.14.3.)

4. Remove the ROTARY MOTOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section


3.2.14.4.)

5. Disconnect the connector (P/J55) for the DISPENSE MOTOR


ASSEMBLY.

6. Remove 2 screws (silver, 6m) securing the DISPENSE MOTOR


ASSEMBLY. Then shift the DISPENSE MOTOR ASSEMBLY to
align the gear with the cutout in the frame, and remove the
DISPENSE MOTOR ASSEMBLY.

C H E C K When installing the DISPENSE MOTOR ASSEMBLY,


P O IN T
use the marked holes for the both top and bottom
screws.

Figure 3-130. DISPENSE MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal

Figure 3-129.
DISPENSE MOTOR ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-105


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.14.6 FUSER DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.2)


1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

2. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY


and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY on it. (See Section 3.2.12.2.)

3. Remove the P/H MOTOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.14.2.)

4. Remove the LVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.1.)

5. Release the harness from the clamp on the P/H MOTOR


BRACKET.

6. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 4mm) securing the P/H
MOTOR BRACKET, and remove the P/H MOTOR BRACKET.

7. Remove the KL clip securing the AUGER HIGH ASSEMBLY.

8. Remove 5 screws (black, cup head, 4mm) securing the FUSER


DRIVE ASSEMBLY, and remove the FUSER DRIVE ASSEMBLY.

C H E C K When installing the FUSER DRIVE ASSEMBLY, be


P O IN T
careful not to catch the harness between the parts.

Figure 3-131. FUSER DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-106


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.14.7 PROCESS MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.12


1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

2. Disconnect 2 connectors (P/J51 and P/J52) for the PROCESS


MOTOR ASSEMBLY.

3. Remove 4 screws (gold, 8mm) securing the PROCESS MOTOR


ASSEMBLY, and remove the PROCESS MOTOR ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-132. PROCESS MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-107


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.14.8 PROCESS DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.10) 17. Remove 7 screws (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the PROCESS
DRIVE ASSEMBLY and remove the PROCESS DRIVE
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) ASSEMBLY.
2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

3.Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)

4. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.)

5. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

6. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

7. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY with the MSI ASSEMBLY


installed on it. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)

8. Remove the ROS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.3.)

9. Remove the ADC SENSOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.4.)

10. Remove the XL RAIL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.9.5.)

11. Remove the HVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.2.)

12. Remove the TRANSFER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.11.2.)


Figure 3-133. PROCESS DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal
13. Remove the P/H DRIVE ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.14.1.)
C H E C K When installing the PROCESS DRIVE ASSEMBLY,
14. Remove the P/H MOTOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.14.2.) P O IN T
make sure the location hole in the PROCESS DRIVE
15. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the HVPS ASSEMBLY fits in the protrusion on the base frame.
BRACKET-1, and remove the HVPS BRACKET-1 along with 2
ELEC. CLAMP-Ss.

16. Disconnect 2 connectors (P/J51 and P/J52) for the PROCESS


MOTOR ASSEMBLY and release the harnesses from the clamp.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-108


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.14.9 DEVE. CLUTCH ASSEMBLY Removal (PL11.1.23)


1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

2. Remove the FUSER ASSEMBLY with the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY


and the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY installed on it. (See Section
3.2.12.2.)

3. Remove the P/H MOTOR ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.14.2.)

4. Remove the ROTARY MOTOR PWB. (See Section 3.2.14.3.)

5. Remove the LVPS. (See Section 3.2.16.1.)

6. Remove the FUSER DRIVE ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.14.6.)

7. Disconnect the connector (P/J56) for the DEVE. CLUTCH


ASSEMBLY and release the harness from the clamp.

8. Remove 4 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the DEVE.


CLUTCH ASSEMBLY, and remove the DEVE. CLUTCH
ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-134. DEVE. CLUTCH ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-109


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.15 Frame

3.2.15.1 DEVE. TIE PLATE Removal (PL12.1.4)


1. Remove the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.1.)

2. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

3. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)

4. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.)

5. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

6. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

7. Remove the EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.2.)

8. Remove the EXIT LOWER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.13.3.)

9. Remove the FRONT COVER SWITCH L. (See Section 3.2.16.8.)

10. Remove the FRAME CLAMP-PS.


NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to damage the connector
connected to the rear frame in the printer by touching it with
the DEVE. TIE PLATE. Figure 3-135. DEVE. TIE PLATE Removal
11. Remove 4 screws (black, cup head, 8mm) securing the DEVE. TIE
PLATE, and lift the DEVE. TIE PLATE up to remove.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-110


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.16 Electrical

3.2.16.1 LVPS Removal (PL13.1.1)


1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

2. Disconnect 3 connectors (P/J32, P/J33, P/J35) for the LVPS and


release the harnesses from the clamp.

3. Remove 4 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the LVPS.

4. Lift up the LVPS to release the hook on the left and remove the
LVPS.

C H E C K n When installing the LVPS, route the harnesses


P O IN T
properly so they won’t be caught in the gears and the
plates.
n When installing the LVPS, be sure to join the LVPS to
the frame of the printer body by the hook on the left
edge.
Figure 3-136. LVPS Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-111


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.16.2 HVPS Removal (PL13.1.2) 3.2.16.3 TOP COVER SWITCH Removal (PL13.1.3)
1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.) 1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Disconnect 7 connectors (P/J41, P/J42, P/JA, P/JC, P/JD, P/JF, P/ 2. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)
JG) for the HVPS.
3. Disconnect the connector (P/J195) for the TOP COVER SWITCH.
3. Remove 4 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the HVPS and
remove the HVPS. 4. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 6mm) securing the TOP
COVER SWITCH, and remove the TOP COVER SWITCH.

Figure 3-137. HVPS Removal Figure 3-138. TOP COVER SWITCH Removal

C H E C K When installing the HVPS, route the harnesses properly


P O IN T
so that they won’t be caught in the gears and the plates.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-112


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.16.4 DEVE. FAN Removal (PL13.1.5)


1. Remove the REAR COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.5.)

2. Disconnect the connector (P/J82) for the DEVE. FAN and release
the harness from the FAN DUCT.

3. Widen the hooks on the FAN DUCT and remove the DEVE. FAN.

C H E C K n When installing the DEVE. FAN, set the side with the
P O IN T
maker label on it facing outside.
n When installing the DEVE. FAN, route the harness
properly.

Figure 3-139. DEVE. FAN Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-113


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.16.5 MCU PWB Removal (PL13.2.1)

C A U T IO N When replacing the MCU PWB, perform the following


operations referring to Chapter 4 “Diagnostics”.
n Read data prior to replacement, then write the read
data when the replacement is completed.
n Perform “NVM Write” after replacement. 6)-1

1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.8.)

3. Remove the CONTROLLER PWB. (See Section 1..)

4. Remove the CONT. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.17.2.)

5. Disconnect 9 connectors (P/J12, P/J13, P/J14, P/J15, P/J16, P/J17,


P/J18, P/J19, P/J20, and P/J21) for the MCU PWB.

6. Remove 4 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the MCU PWB
to the printer body and remove the MCU PWB.
Figure 3-140. MCU PWB Removal

C H E C K Among the screws securing the MCU PWB, fasten the


P O IN T
bottom rear one to attach the earth wire together.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-114


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.16.6 COMMUNICATION ASSEMBLY Removal (PL13.2.2)


1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.8.)

3. Draw out the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.

4. Remove the CONTROLLER PWB. (See Section 1..)

5. Remove the CONT. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.17.2.)

6. Disconnect the connector (P/J105) for the COMMUNICATION


ASSEMBLY and release the harness from the clump.

7. Remove the screw (silver, 6mm) securing the COMMUNICATION


ASSEMBLY and remove the COMMUNICATION ASSEMBLY.

C H E C K When installing the COMMUNICATION ASSEMBLY,


P O IN T
align the location hole in the COMMUNICATION
ASSEMBLY with the protrusion on the frame of the
printer body. Figure 3-141. COMMUNICATION ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-115


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.16.7 FRONT COVER SWITCH R Removal (PL13.2.3)


1. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)

2. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

3. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.)

4. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

5. Remove the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.8.)

6. Remove the CONTROLLER PWB. (See Section 1..)

7. Remove the CONT. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.17.2.)


NOTE: In for following step, remember the correct connecting
position for each connector.

8. Disconnect 4 connectors (P/J191, P/J192, P/J193, P/J194) for the


FRONT COVER SWITCH R.

9. Release the hooks securing the FRONT COVER SWITCH R from


the frame. Then push the FRONT COVER SWITCH R forward to
remove. Figure 3-142. FRONT COVER SWITCH R Removal

C H E C K Be sure to install the FRONT COVER SWITCH R


P O IN T
securely.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-116


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.16.8 FRONT COVER SWITCH L Removal (PL13.2.4)


1. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE. (See Section 3.2.9.1.)

2. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

3. Remove the TENSION LEVER. (See Section 3.2.11.1.)

4. Remove the INNER COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

5. Disconnect the connector (P/J197) for the FRONT COVER


SWITCH L and release the harness from the hooks.

6. Remove the screw (black, cup head, 6mm) securing the FRONT
COVER SWITCH L. Then pull out the harness through the cutout in
the frame and remove the FRONT COVER SWITCH L.

C H E C K When installing the FRONT COVER SWITCH L, make


P O IN T
sure the harness is properly routed.

Figure 3-143. FRONT COVER SWITCH L Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-117


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.16.9 ENVIRONMENT SENSOR Removal (PL13.2.5)


1. Remove the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.7.1.)

2. Remove the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY along with the MSI


ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.8.1.)

3. Disconnect the connector (P/J105) for the ENVIRONMENT


SENSOR and release the harness from the clamp.
NOTE: In the following steps, never touch the IBT BELT
ASSEMBLY.

4. Remove the screw (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the


ENVIRONMENT SENSOR and remove the ENVIRONMENT
SENSOR.

C H E C K
Figure 3-144. ENVIRONMENT SENSOR Removal
P O IN T
When fastening the screw, install the earth wire
together.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-118


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.17 Controller
1. Remove the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.8.)

2. Disconnect 2 connectors (P/J310 and P/J314) for the


CONTROLLER PWB.

3. Remove 4 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the


CONTROLLER PWB by the bottom edge.

4. Remove 3 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the


CONTROLLER PWB by the top edge.

5. Remove 4 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the CONT.


PLATE ASSEMBLY.

6. Remove the CONTROLLER PWB slowly, watching the connector


for the CONTROLLER PWB and the MCU PWB behind the
CONTROLLER PWB to avoid damage.

C H E C K When replacing the CONTROLLER PWB with a new Figure 3-145. CONTROLLER PWB Removal
P O IN T
one, be sure to install the current memory modules to
the new board. The modules to be moved are:
n Standard items:
Code Dimm (socket P), SD-RAM DIMM (slot 0)
n Optional items:
SD-RAM DIMM (slot S1, S2), DIMM module* (socket
A or B), Type B I/F card
* When installing the DIMM module, be sure to insert
the module to the correct slot A or B. The slot to be
used must be the same as on the old board.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-119


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.2.17.1 CONTROLLER FAN Removal (PL 14.1.2) 3.2.17.2 CONT. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY Removal (PL 14.1.1)
1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.) 1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)

2. Remove the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.8.) 2. Remove the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.8.)

3. Disconnect the connector (P/J314) for the CONTROLLER FAN. 3. Remove the CONTROLLER PWB. (See Section 1..)

4. Remove 2 screws (gold, 20mm) securing the CONTROLLER FAN, 4. Remove the CONTROLLER FAN. (See Section 3.2.17.1.)
and remove the CONTROLLER FAN.
5. Remove 9 screws (silver, cup head, 8mm) securing the CONT.
CHASSIS ASSEMBLY and remove the CONT. CHASSIS
ASSEMBLY.

Figure 3-146. CONTROLLER FAN Removal

C H E C K When installing the CONTROLLER FAN, route the


P O IN T
harness properly so the harness will not be caught
between the parts.
Figure 3-147. CONT. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY Removal

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-120


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.3 Adjustment 5. Install the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY and the OIL ROLL
ASSEMBLY, and close the FUSER ASSEMBLY.
This section describes how to perform NIP pressure adjustment and
6. Print a solid black belt (approximately 80mm × 289mm) in a A-4
Deve. Spacer Selection that are necessary to maintain the proper fuser
paper (orientation: SEF). (Use the /TOOL/FUSER/FUSE_TST.TRN
level for stable paper feeding.
file in the SELF TRAINING KIT CD-ROM.)

3.3.1 NIP Pressure Adjustment of the MAIN FUSER 7. Take out the FUSER ASSEMBLY.
ASSEMBLY NOTE:Perform the following steps promptly.

W A R N IN G
As the fuser can be very hot, be sure to perform the 8. Turning the green knob in the front, insert the printout with the black
adjustment carefully to avoid getting burnt. belt on it between the HEAT ROLL and the PRESSURE ROLL.
Make sure the paper is set in SEF orientation with the printed side
1. Draw out the FUSER ASSEMBLY well enough for servicing. facing to the HEAT ROLL (upward).
2. Remove the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.) 9. Remove the paper 10 seconds after insertion.
3. Remove the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.12.1.)

4. Turn the screws (A) securing the NIP SPRINGs by the right and left
ends of the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY to set the NIP SPRINGs
under the following condition (reference position):
The distance (B) between the head bottom of the screw and the
top surface of the metal above the NIP SPRING is 13.1mm.

Figure 3-149. MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY Adjustment (2/3)

Figure 3-148. MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY Adjustment (1/3)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-121


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

10. See the output and check that the darkness of the area which was 11. If the result is not satisfactory, return to the step 4 and turn the NIP
pressed has changed. Measure the width of the changed area at the (A) in the direction shown below according to the result:
following 2 points:
The width is too narrow: Turn the screw clockwise
Points: 1) 15mm inward from the right edge.
The width is too wide: Turn the screw counterclockwise
2) 15mm inward from the left edge
If the result satisfies the following 2 points, adjustment is correctly 12. Perform the steps 7 to 10 until the result is good.
done. NOTE: Repeat the procedure promptly while the MAIN FUSER
-The width of each end is 4.8 mm ± 0.2mm ASSEMBLY is still hot enough.

- The difference in the width between 2 ends is 0.2 mm or less.

MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY Adjustment (3/3)

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-122


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

3.3.2 Deve. Spacer Selection


NOTE: “Deve. SPACER” is provided as ADJUSTMENT KIT
(#1046450).
NOTE: The generic term “Deve. Spacer“is used for DEVE. SPACER
0.5”, “DEVE. SPACER 0.8”, and “DEVE. SPACER 1.2”.
NOTE: Steps included in this section describe how to select Deve.
Spacer, which must be performed after replacing the Developer
Assembly.
NOTE: During the whole operation, make sure there is no foreign object Deve. Spacer
inside the printer. If any foreign object gets inside the printer, it
may damage the drum.

1. Remove the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Section 3.2.4.3.)


NOTE: In the following step, lift up the Developer Assembly so you can
easily insert the rib on the Deve. Spacer to space between the
stud in the Developer Assembly and Housing.

2. Rotate the corresponding Developer Assembly and stop it just


before the Toner Cartridge installation position, and then, holding up
the Developer Assembly in the direction indicated with the arrow,
attach the DEVE. SPACER 1.0 to the Developer Assembly. (If it is Figure 3-150. Attaching the Deve Spacer 1.0
already attached, you can use it.)

3. Rotate the Developer Assembly clockwise to send it to the top.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-123


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

NOTE: In the following step, do not touch the tracking roll surface with
your hands. If you touch the roll surface or find oil on it, wipe the
tracking roll surface well using a clean cloth to remove oil
completely.
6)-1
4. Using a clean cloth, clean the tracking roll (white) located in front of
the Developer Assy (in front of the Magnet Roll).
NOTE: In the following step, be sure to make a mark on the tracking roll.
Based on the mark, you will see how much the tracking roll
moves.
6)-2 5)
5. Make a mark on the tracking roll.
NOTE: Action in the next step is to prevent the tracking roll from
touching the earth plate. Neglecting this operation will cause the
earth plate to interfere with tracking roll’s movement.

6. Note the magnet Roll in the Developer Assembly and the tracking
roll move back and forth a little. To remove play, push the Magnet
Roll to the rear end. Then push the tracking roll to put it in contact Tracking Roll
with the ball bearing behind.
Figure 3-151. Tracking Roll

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-124


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

NOTE: See the points to note below for the next step:
n Rotate the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY as slowly as possible.
If you rotate it fast, results of the tracking roll’s move amount 7)-2
measurement will disperse. Tracking Roll
n While rotating the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY, check visually
that the dram flange (black) and tracking roll come in contact.
For a better view, you can remove the ROS ASSY. (If they are
not in contact, you need to use a smaller Deve. Spacer.)
Drum Flange
n Be sure to set the lever in the ROTARY LATCH ASSY to the top
position to keep the tracking roll away from the lever. If they are
left in contact, the tracking roll shifts together with the lever, and
you will fail to measure a correct move amount.
n If the Drum Flange (black) and tracking roll come in contact, the
tracking roll will move along with the Drum Flange.

7. Bring the lever in the ROTARY LATCH ASSY, which is used to fix
the Developer Assy, to the top, and then rotate the ROTARY
FRAME ASSY 360° clockwise as slowly as possible.

7)-1

Figure 3-152. Rotating the Tracking Roll

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-125


EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

NOTE: Tracking roll’s move amount and relevant contact length for the 13. Run a test print and check that printer operation and print quality are
Drum Flange and tracking roll is as describe below: normal.
Move amount is large: Contact length is long.
Move amount is small: Contact length is short.
NOTE: In the following step, be careful not to break the two hooks when
replacing the Developer Assy. (Use of a small standard screw
will facilitate the job.)

8. Measure the amount that the mark has moved from the original
position made in step 5.

9. Return the mark to the original position, and repeat the steps from 6
to 9 four times.

10. Take an average from the results and select it as the value. The
next action to be taken varies depending on the value, as described
below:
n If the value fits in the range from 3 mm to 5 mm (=most
suitable value), it means the currently used Deve. Spacer is
correct.
n If the value is larger than 5 mm, replace the current Deve. Move Amount
Spacer with Deve. Spacer 1.2, and perform the same operation
(from step 6 to step 9). Then select the size that provides more
suitable value.
n If the amount is smaller than 3 mm, replace the current Deve.
Spacer with Deve. Spacer 0.8 (then 0.5), and perform the same
operation (from step 6 to step 9). Then select the size that
provides the most suitable value.

11. Ensure that the selected Deve. Spacer is securely installed.

12. Install the TOP COVER ASSEMBLY.

Chapter 3 Disassembly and Assembly/Adjustment 3-126


CHAPTER

4
DIAGNOSTICS
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

Contents
OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 1 Analog Input Test: Device codes .........................................................32
Test print by MCU PWB .............................................................................1 Analog Output Test .............................................................................33
Test Print Pattern .......................................................................................2 Analog Output Test: Device codes ......................................................34
DIAGNOSTICS BY THE DIAGNOSTIC COMMANDER................................ 3 EEPROM Read ...................................................................................35
Introduction.................................................................................................3 EEPROM Write ...................................................................................37
Configuration .........................................................................................3 EEPROM Initialize ...............................................................................39
Diagnostic Commander .........................................................................4 NVM List ..............................................................................................40
Diagnostic PWB ....................................................................................4 Commands/Status List .............................................................................45
Command/Status........................................................................................5 Paper, Media & Output Control ...........................................................45
Introduction ............................................................................................5 Printing/Status Control ........................................................................47
Data Format ..........................................................................................5 Parameter Control ...............................................................................53
Command/Status Categories ................................................................6 Diagnostics control ..............................................................................58
Preparation.................................................................................................6 Error/Status Code ....................................................................................60
Personal Computer ...............................................................................6 Transfer MCU PWB Board NVRAM Engine Status to the New Board.....61
Installing the Diagnostic Commander ....................................................7
Uninstalling the Diagnostic Commander ...............................................7
Connecting the Diagnostic Tool ............................................................8
Diagnostic Commander: Operations ..........................................................9
Starting the Diagnostic Commander .....................................................9
Setting Up the Communication ..............................................................9
Sending/receiving commands/statuses ...............................................10
Automatically executing a command ...................................................12
[Service] tab ........................................................................................13
Displaying the log ................................................................................16
Life Counter Read/Write...........................................................................17
Read ....................................................................................................17
Write ....................................................................................................18
Executing Diagnostics ..............................................................................19
Diagnostic execution steps ..................................................................19
Diagnostics functions ..........................................................................19
Test Print .............................................................................................20
Digital Input Test ................................................................................21l
Digital Input Test: Device codes ..........................................................22
Digital Output Test ...............................................................................26
Digital Output Test: Device codes .......................................................27
Analog Input Test ................................................................................31
EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.1 OVERVIEW NOTE: When disconnecting the short connector or turning the DIP
switch off, do not touch any other components.
You can perform a test print by using off-line diagnostics to check the NOTE: The paper feeder is selected with the previous panel setting.
printer operation.
NOTE: The paper size is selected with the previous panel setting when
 Test print using the jumper setting on MCU PWB: Section 4.1.2 MSI tray is selected.
 Test print using the diag board DIP switch setting: Section 4.2.1.3 NOTE: If the printer is in an error state, it will not print.

4.1.1 Test print by MCU PWB P-ROM

Test printing procedures using the MCU PWB is as shown below.

1. Remove the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Chapter 3.)

2. Remove the CONTROLLER PWB. (See Chapter 3.)

3. Remove the MCU PWB ACCESS COVER of the CONT. CHASSIS


ASSEMBLY. (See Chapter 3.)

4. Connect the two pins on the test print connector (JP3) on the MCU
PWB. Use a short connector to connect the pins. If the MCU PWU
has DIP switches, turn on the switches.
NOTE:Do not touch the live components or driving units when doing
the following steps.

5. Set the paper in the cassette. Turn on the power.

6. After the printer enters the READY mode, start the test print. (The
printer outputs test patterns continuously.)

7. To stop printing, disconnect the short connector that connects the Figure 4-1. Test Print Procedure
two pins. If the MCU PWB has a DIP switch, turn it off.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-1


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.1.2 Test Print Pattern


The off-line diagnostic prints out the pattern shown below. (Four colors
are printed on one page - One color on each quarter of the page)
NOTE: The black portion of the test print may runover from the paper
depending on the printer specifications. (There is not the top
margin.)
NOTE: If Wide has been set in the Image Area Selection in the MCU
PWB EEPROM (NVM), the images are printed without top, right
and left margins.
NOTE: The straight lines in the paper transport direction jitter because
MCU PWB circuit clocks are used. Do not use the straight lines
to evaluate print quality.
 Straight lines with 1 dot width in the laser beam scanning direction
are printed every 128 dots. (The line at the last part of each color
may not have the 128-dot interval.)
 Straight lines with about a 5.49 dot width in the paper transport
direction are printed every 5.49 x 128 dots. (The lines at the right
and left edge in each color may not have the 5.49 x 128-dot
Figure 4-2. Test Print Pattern
interval.)

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-2


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2 Diagnostics by the Diagnostic Commander

4.2.1 Introduction NOTE: The Diagnostic PWB, RS-232C cable, personal computer, and
Diagnostic Commander are collectively called the diagnostic tool
The diagnostic system is included on the CONTROLLER PWB, and the (maintenance tool). Diagnostic tool provided by SEIKO EPSON
diagnostic commander is not always performed. is as shown in the following table:
However, if you have replaced the MCU PWB, you need to perform
[Service] function using the Diagnostic Commander.
Table 4-1. Diagnostic Commander Tools
Tool Name Part Code Description
4.2.1.1 Configuration #F691 DIAGNOSTIC TOOL 1042425 Diagnostic PWB (board) and
Diagnostic Commander (2 floppy
You can run the various diagnostic routines and execute/set the various disks)
settings for the printer using the diagnostic tool (maintenance tool). The #F728 SELF TRAINING KIT 1050686
following figure shows the system configuration to perform the
diagnostics. You can run the diagnostic commander (application
software) on a personal computer and control the Diagnostic PWB to
send a command to the MCU PWB.

Figure 4-3. DIAG Tool Configuration

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-3


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.1.2 Diagnostic Commander 4.2.1.3 Diagnostic PWB


The Diagnostic Commander takes the place of the Printer Controller The following components are mounted on the Diagnostic PWB:
(CONTROLLER PWB) and controls the printer by sending and
receiving the data (commands and statuses) which is exchanged
 Connector to the MCU PWB.
between the CONTROLLER PWB and MCU PWB.  RS-232C cable connector (D-sub 25-pin female/D-sub 9-pin
The Diagnostic Commander sends a diagnostic command to run the female), DIP-Switches (6), LEDs (3)
diagnostics. The Diagnostic Commander can also send/receive a
command and status that are not the part of the diagnostics.
 DIP-Switch functions
Table 4-2. DIP-SWITCH Function
DIP-Switch Default Description
1 ON /CRDY signal (Do not change.)
RS-232C cable type
2 ON
(ON: Straight cable/OFF: Cross cable)
RS-232C cable type
3 OFF
(ON: Cross cable/OFF: Straight cable)
RS-232C cable type
4 OFF
(ON: Cross cable/OFF: Straight cable)
RS-232C cable type
5 ON
(ON: Straight cable/OFF: Cross cable)
Off-line test print
(ON: Start the test print/OFF: Stop the test print.)
6 OFF
(You can set this switch similarly to the JP3 on MCU
PWB.)

 LED functions

The LEDs indicate the following signal.


Table 4-3.
LED Description
CR1 /VSYNC signal
CR2 /READY signal
CR3 /HSYNC signal

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-4


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.2 Command/Status 4.2.2.2 Data Format

4.2.2.1 Introduction
The commands and statuses are exchanged between the Printer
Controller and MCU PWB. Using the data (commands and statuses),
the Printer Controller controls the printer.
NOTE: The communication direction of the commands and statuses are
defined as follows: (These definitions are used throughout this The data format is defined as follows:
section.)
- Command: Printer Controller (diagnostic tool) → MCU PWB
 1st byte: Command/status code

- Status: MCU PWB → Printer Controller (diagnostic tool)  2nd byte and the following bytes: Parameter code(s)
The parameter code bytes are variable. (Some commands/statuses
may not have any parameter.)
The codes are in HEX.

Example) Diagnostic (REGIST_CL) start command

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-5


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.2.3 Command/Status Categories 4.2.3 Preparation


Commands and statuses are categorized into 4 groups according to the
printer controls.
4.2.3.1 Personal Computer

(1) Paper, Media & Output Control Use a personal computer that can run the Diagnostic Commander and
set the communication port (RS-232C).
Paper feed method (position), paper type, paper size setting/
check, paper ejection method (position), etc. (1) Personal Computer: Specifications
Table 4-4. Personal Computer Specifications
(2) Print/Status Control
Item Description
Print control, Operation mode setting, Error/Status code (printer
status) check, etc. Model IBM PC compatible
CPU Pentium133MHz or higher
(3) Parameter Control Memory 16 Mbytes or more
Display Resolution: 640x480 or higher (Color or
Life counters setting and check, etc. monochrome)
(4) Diagnostic Control OS Windows 95
Recommended PC IBM Think Pad 535
Various diagnostics start/stop, EEPROM read/write, Test print
parameter settings, etc.
NOTE:The IBM Think Pad 535 has been verified for running the
Diagnostic Commander. Any IBM PC compatible machine
should be able to run the Diagnostic Commander, though it
does not fully guarantee its operation.
(2) Communication Port
Table 4-5. Communication Port
Item Format Item Format
Port No. 1 Parity Odd
Speed 9600bps Stop bit 1
Start bit 1 Transfer control Full duplex
Data length 8 bits Flow control Yes (RTS/CTS)

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-6


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.3.2 Installing the Diagnostic Commander 4.2.3.3 Uninstalling the Diagnostic Commander
The following describes how to install the Diagnostic Commander: The following describes how to uninstall the Diagnostic Commander in
the computer.
1. Start Windows 95. Select [Settings] from the [Start] menu. Select
[Control Panel] in [Settings]. 1. Start Windows 95. Select [Settings] from the [Start] menu. Select
[Control Panel] in [Settings].
2. Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon in the [Control Panel]
window. 2. Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon in the [Control Panel]
window.
3. Insert the Diagnostic Commander installation disk “DIAG. TOOL-1
Disk 1” in the floppy disk drive. 3. Select [Renoir Service Commander V2.01] in the [Add/Remove
Programs Properties] window. Click the [Add/Remove (R)] button.
4. Click [Setup (I)] button in the [Add/Remove Programs Properties]
window. 4. Follow the instructions and complete uninstalling the program.

5. Follow the instructions and install the Diagnostic Commander. NOTE:The RS-232C cable must be the correct cable for the DIP
switch setting on the Diagnostic PWB and the connector. The
6. Select [Renoir Service Commander V2.01] cable must be properly shielded and the length must be 2
meters or shorter.
7. From the SELF TRAINING KIT CD, select TOOL>DIAG>Disk3>
XXXX.DAT. Then copy the selected XXXX.DAT file to the DAT
folder under the folder in which you installed Diagnostic
Commander.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-7


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.3.4 Connecting the Diagnostic Tool


The following describes how to connect the diagnostic tool.

1. Remove the RIGHT COVER ASSEMBLY. (See Chapter 3.)

2. Remove the Controller PWB. (See Chapter 3.)


NOTE:In the following procedures, makes sure that the soldered
side of the Diagnostic PWB do not touch the Chassis
Assembly. If needed, insert an insulator (such as paper
folded into fourths) between the PWB and the sheet metal.

3. Connect the Diagnostic PWB to the MCU PWB interface connector


(P11). Make sure that the Diagnostic PWB LEDs are visible from the
outside.

4. Connect the RS-232C cable between the Diagnostic PWB and the
personal computer.
NOTE:The RS-232C cable must be the correct cable for the DIP
switch setting on the Diagnostic PWB and the connector. The
cable must be properly shielded and the length must be 2
meters or shorter.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-8


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.4 Diagnostic Commander: Operations 4.2.4.2 Setting Up the Communication


Establish communication between the computer and the Diagnostic
4.2.4.1 Starting the Diagnostic Commander Commander as follows:
Start/End the Diagnostic Commander as follows:
1. Select [Manual] or [Auto] depending on the menu you want to
1. Start Windows 95, select [Start]-[Programs] from the [Start] menu, select.
then select the [Renoir Service Commander V2.01]-[RCV2].
2. Click the [Connect] button to set up and connect the communication
2. Turn on the printer. port.

3. To close the Diagnostic Commander, click the [Close] button. 3. Click the [Sync] button to establish communication.
NOTE:Click the [Service] button to establish the communication.
NOTE:Click the [Disconnect] button first to go to another menu from
the [Manual] or [Auto] menu.
[Manual] tab window

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-9


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.4.3 Sending/receiving commands/statuses  A single click only displays the command code in the
NOTE: A command must be sent after the communication has been [Command] box.
established.
NOTE: For details, Section 4.2.7 “Commands/Status List” in this
section.
[Selecting from the pull-down menu]
NOTE: Some command codes and parameter codes are not displayed
in the pull-down menu.

1. Click the [Manual] tab. The Manual screen appears.

2. Establish the communication. (See Section 4.2.4.2 “Setting up the


Communication”.)

3. Click the [Class] box. Select the category that has the command you


want to send. (There are four categories, described in Section
4.2.2.3 “Command/Status categories”.) A double-click displays the command code in the [Command]
box; if the selected command code has a parameter, the
4. Select the command code that you want to send from the command appropriate parameter code is also displayed.
code list.

5. The selected command code is displayed in the [Command] box.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-10


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

6. As the same manner, the parameter code is displayed in the Inputting a command directly in the [Command] box.
[Command] box. When you select a parameter code from the list, if
you double-click the command code and the command code does You can input a command into the [Command] box as follows:
not have a parameter code in the lower level, the [Error] window
appears. 1. Click the [Manual] tab. The Manual screen appears.

2. Establish the communication. (See Section 4.2.4.2 “Setting up the


communication”.)

3. Enter a command code and parameter code in HEX in the


[Command] box. Enter a space as a delimiter within the code.

7. Click the [Send] button to send the command. 4. Click the [Send] button to send the command.
NOTE:If you want to select another command without sending the
5. If the selected command has its corresponding status, the status is
selected command, move the cursor into the parameter code
displayed in the [Status] box in HEX.
selection window. Click the right mouse button. The [Go
Back] button appears. Click the [Go Back] button to return to NOTE: When you want to go to either the ([Auto] or [Service]) menu,
the previous parameter code. Repeat this step until you find first disconnect the connection (by clicking the [Disconnect]
the desired command. button), then go to another menu.

8. If the selected command has its corresponding status, the status is


displayed in the [Status] box in HEX.
NOTE:When you want to go to either the ([Auto] or [Service]) menu,
first disconnect the connection (by clicking on the
[Disconnect] button), then go to another menu.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-11


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.4.4 Automatically executing a command [Creating an automatic command execution file]


NOTE: A command must be sent after the communication has been NOTE: Use an editor (e.g., WordPad, etc.) to create a file.
established.
As shown in the figure below, enter a command in HEX on one line.
NOTE: If you want to automatically execute a command, you need to
Each byte must be delimited by a space.
create an automatic command execution file.
A file name must be in alphanumeric characters; the file extension must
You can continuously send two or more commands in the automatic be “.AT”. Save the file in the [Auto] folder in the same folder installed in
command execution mode. Run the automatic command execution file the Diagnostic Commander.
as follows: A line with a “#” at the beginning is a comment line for describing the
file. A line with a “#” is displayed on the [Auto] screen.
1. Click the [Auto] tab. The [Auto] screen appears.

2. Establish the communication. (See Section 4.2.4.2 “Setting up the


communication”.)

3. Click the [File Open] button. The [Auto Run File Open] window
appears.

4. Select the automatic command execution file and click [Open].

5. Only comment lines of the file appear.

6. Click the [Start] button to automatically execute commands in the


order they are listed in the file.
NOTE: To cancel the execution of the file, click the [Stop] button. [Sample automatic command execution file]
NOTE: When you want to go to the ([Auto] or [Service]) menu, first As a sample, an automatic command execution file (Test.AT) that
disconnect the connection (by clicking the [Disconnect] button), sends the above commands has been provided.
then go to another menu.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-12


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.4.5 [Service] tab [NVM Write]

On the [Service] tab page, you can write data (specifications) in the You can write data (specifications) in the MCU PWB EEPROM (NVM).
MCU PWB EEPROM (NVM), set a password, read/write the Master and
read/initialize the Slave. NOTE: If you have replaced the MCU PWB, you need to run the [NVM
Write]. If you do not run [NVM Write], the specification settings
NOTE: Master: COMMUNICATION ASSEMBLY differ and the printer may not function properly.
Slave: MCU PWB NVM
1. Click the [NVM Write] button.
If you click the [Service] tab, the communication is established and the
following screen appears. 2. The specification (data file) selection screen appears.

3. From the list, select an appropriate data file (XXXX.DAT) that has
the correct specifications.
NOTE: “XXXX.DAT” files must be located in “\Renoir Service
Commander2.01\dat” folder, otherwise they are not displayed.

Table 4-6. Data File List


Serial No.
File Name For the Market
Header
GQ98.dat BTN0xxxxxx Japan
GR86.dat BYM0xxxxxx North America
GR87.dat BYN0xxxxxx Standard Europe
GR88.dat BYP0xxxxxx "North Europe, Australia, S.E. Asia"

4. Click the [OK] button.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-13


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

[Master Read]

In the [Master Read] page, you can read the contents of the [Master].
NOTE: Before you run [Master Read], make sure that the
communication has been established. If you run [Master Read]
when the communication has not been established, the
Diagnostic Commander may hang up.

1. Click the [Master Read] button.

2. The data read from the [Master] is displayed, as shown below:

Table 4-7. Contents of the Master


Serial No. Header (top 4-digit)
[Password Change] APC0 BBD0 BBE0 BBF0 BBG0
Not available for servicing. [OEM Code] 03 03 03 03 03
[Part No.] 8382 9140 9141 9142 9143
[Master Write]
[Serial No.] A unique Serial No. for the product (last 6-digit.).
Not available for servicing.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-14


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

[Slave Read] [Slave Initialize]

In the [Slave Read] page, you can read the contents of the [Slave]. In the [Slave Initialize] page, you can initialize (erase) the [Slave] data.
NOTE: Before you run [Slave Read], make sure that the communication C A U T IO N
has been established. If you run [Slave Read] when the Do not run [Slave Initialize] unless instructed to do so
communication has not been established, the Diagnostic in this manual.
Commander may hang up.
NOTE: Before you run [Slave Initialize], make sure that the
1. Click the [Slave Read] button. communication has been established. If you run [Slave Initialize]
when the communication has not been established, the
2. The data read from the Slave is displayed, as shown below: Diagnostic Commander may hang up.
Table 4-8. Contents of the Master
1. Click the [Slave Initialize] button.
Serial No. Header (top 4-digit)
APC0 BBD0 BBE0 BBF0 BBG0 2. The [Slave] is initialized.
[OEM Code] 03 03 03 03 03
NOTE: After you initialize the [Slave], turning the power ON/OFF
[Part No.] 8382 9140 9141 9142 9143
automatically writes the data in the Slave.
[Serial No.] A unique Serial No. for the product (last 6-digit.).
NOTE: There may be more tasks you need to do before turning the
These values must be the same as appeared in [Master Read]. If power ON/OFF after the Slave initialization. Follow the
not, you need to perform [Slave Initialize] described in the next instructions in this manual.
section.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-15


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.4.6 Displaying the log


The communication has been established
Status
The communication log shows you how the commands and statuses
are exchanged between the Diagnostic Commander and the MCU Command

PWB. Run [Log Window] to see the log.


[Displaying the Log Window]

1. Move the cursor to the white area (blank area) in the main window
of the [Renoir Service Commander]. Click the right mouse button.
The [Log Window Open] button appears.
>>: Command, <<: Status
2. Click the [Log Window Open] button. The [Log Window] appears.

3. The commands and statuses that have been sent/received are


displayed in HEX in the [Log Window].
[Operating the Log Window]
4. In the [Log Window], a voluntary status from the printer which does
not require a command is also displayed. (A voluntary status is not Move the cursor inside the Log Window. Click the right mouse button.
shown in the [Status] box.) The [Log Clear], [Log Save] and [Log Window Close] buttons appear.
NOTE: The following shows the voluntary statuses that are not Click the appropriate button.
displayed in the [Status] box.  [Log Clear]
- IGNORED40 XX (CMD) XX (REASON) Clears the log and erases the display in the Log Window.

- PPOUT20 XX (DEST) XX (DOPT) XX (SHEET)  [Log Save]


Saves the log. If you click this button, the [Log Save] window
- PCH21 XX (CASSETTE) XX (SIZE) XX (MEDIA) appears. Specify a file name and click the [Save] button. If you
- PFA30 XX (AMODE) XX (SHEET1) XX (SHEET2) do not specify the file extension, the system automatically adds
the file extension (.LOG).
- ENGERR31
 [Log Window Close]
- ERRRV32 Closes the Log Window.
- ENGWRN33 NOTE: You can open the saved log file by using an editor (e.g.,
WordPad).

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-16


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.5 Life Counter Read/Write 4.2.5.1 Read

You can read the life counter data from the MCU PWB EEPROM (NVM) Table 4-9. Life Counter Read Specifications
or write the data in the EEPROM (NVM) using the Parameter Control
commands/statuses. Item Command Note
Drum Cartridge D0 00
NOTE: Before you replace the MCU PWB, do the following: Toner Cartridge Y D0 01 Accumulated dispense time
Toner Cartridge M D0 02 Accumulated dispense time
(1) Read the data from the life counters in the MCU PWB before
Toner Cartridge C D0 03 Accumulated dispense time
replacement.
Toner Cartridge Bk D0 04 Accumulated dispense time
(2) Replace the MCU PWB. Main Fuser Assembly (1) D0 06 Accumulated dispense time
Main Fuser Assembly (2) D0 0C Image counts
(3) Write the life counter data in the MCU PWB after 2nd BTR Assembly D0 09
replacement. Belt Cleaner Assembly D0 0A
Oil Roll Assembly D0 0B PV counts
NOTE: If you cannot read the data from the new MCU PWB after
Whole printer (1) D0 05 Accumulated prints
replacement, write an expected value (estimated from future
Whole printer (2) D0 07 Accumulated image counts
usage conditions) in the MCU PWB.
NOTE: If you replace a periodically replaced part (in the MAIN FUSER NOTE: The statuses for the above commands have 4 bytes as shown
ASSEMBLY, 2nd BTR ASSEMBLY or BELT CLEANER below:
ASSEMBLY) or DRUM CARTRIDGE (without CRUM function Example)
specifications) with a new one, write "0" in V1 through V4. Command: D0 09
NOTE: You can do the same in the EEPROM Read/Write function Status D0 09 V1 V2 V3 V4
described in Section 4.2.6 “Executing Diagnostics”. If you run V1 through V4 are decimal values, indicating the
the EEPROM Read/Write function after replacing the MCU accumulated counts.
PWB, you do not need to read/write the life counter data using "123, 456": "00 12 34 56"
the Parameter Control function.
NOTE: You can use the Parameter Control commands and statuses to
read/write the setting values in the registrations.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-17


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.5.2 Write

Table 4-10. Life Counter Write Specifications


Item Command Note
Drum Cartridge 80 00 V1 V2 V3 V4 Do not send this command if
the printer has the CRUM
function.
Clear the counter if you replace
the Drum Cartridge with a new
one in the printer without the
CRUM function.
Toner Cartridge Y 80 01 V1 V2 V3 V4
Toner Cartridge M 80 02 V1 V2 V3 V4
Toner Cartridge C 80 03 V1 V2 V3 V4
Toner Cartridge Bk 80 04 V1 V2 V3 V4
Main Fuser Assembly (1) 80 06 V1 V2 V3 V4 Clear the counter if you replace
the Main Fuser Assembly with
a new one.
Main Fuser Assembly (2) 80 0C V1 V2 V3 V4 Clear the counter if you replace
the Main Fuser Assembly with
a new one.
2nd BTR Assembly 80 09 V1 V2 V3 V4
Belt Cleaner Assembly 80 0A V1 V2 V3 V4
Oil Roll Assembly 80 0B V1 V2 V3 V4
Whole printer (1) 80 05 V1 V2 V3 V4
Whole printer (2) 80 07 V1 V2 V3 V4

NOTE: For V1 through V4, write the values you have read in the
previous section. If any of the values is larger than the life over
value (threshold value), replace the part that has the large value
and write the value "00 00 00 00". If you cannot replace the part,
write the life over value.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-18


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.6 Executing Diagnostics 4.2.6.2 Diagnostics functions


There are a total of 8 diagnostic functions (9 if you include the
4.2.6.1 Diagnostic execution steps diagnostics stop function).
Run the diagnostics by sending the following command using the
command transmission function in the Diagnostic Commander. Table 4-11. Diagnostics Functions
Parameter Diagnostic
1. Send the DIAGON command (75h) to go into the DIAG TEST mode Description
(HEX) function
where you can run the diagnostics. (The DIAGON command is one
00 Test Print Sets the parameters for the built-in test print.
of the Printing/Status Control Command Class commands.)
Input test to check the sensors and switches
01 Digital Input Test
that have digital signals.
2. Set the parameters in the DIAGSTART command (90h) and send
Output test to check the digital components
the command to run the diagnostics. (The DIAGSTART command is 02 Digital Output Test (e.g., motor, solenoid, etc.) that are controlled
one of the Diagnostics Control Command Class commands.) By by the digital signals.
setting a diagnostic code as a parameter, you can run various 03 Analog Input Test
Input test to check the sensor and output
diagnostics. monitor that has an analog signal.
Output test to check the analog components
04 Analog Output Test (e.g., HVPS) that are controlled by the analog
3. Set the parameters in the DIAGSTOP command (91h) and send the
signals.
command to stop the diagnostics. (The DIAGSTOP command is Reads each data item from the MCU PWB
one of the Diagnostics Control Command Class commands.) 05 EEPROM Read
EEPROM (NVM).
Writes each data item into the MCU PWB
06 EEPROM Write
4. Send the DIAGOFF command (76h) to exit the DIAG TEST mode. EEPROM (NVM).
(The DIAGOFF command is a Printing/Status Control command 07 EEPROM Initialize
Initializes all data in the MCU PWB EEPROM
class command.) (NVM).
FF All Tests Stop Stops all diagnostic functions.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-19


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.6.3 Test Print


Example) Command
You can set the parameters for the built-in test print function.
90 00 05 0F
Table 4-12. Test Print Parameters
All colors (YMCBk)
DIAGON command: 75 DIAGOFF command: 76 Patches
DIAGSTART command (Test Print): 90 00 XX XX
Test Print
DIAGSTOP command (Test Print): Unnecessary
DIAGSTART command
Parameter Function Data (Hex)
Diagnostic
1
type
00: Test Print Example) Status
2 Image 01: Grids, 05: Patches 90 00 05 06
Color Command: 01: Black only, 0F: All colors (YMCBk)
3 Passed
DGST Status: 06: Passed, 07: Failed
With status (90 00 XX XX) Patches
Test Print
DIAGSTART command

NOTE: After setting the parameters for the test print, you have to send
the DIAGOFF command (76) and then the PFC command (70
00 F0 01) to run the test print.
NOTE: The grids in the above table are the same as the patterns shown
in Section 4.1.2 “Test Print Pattern".
NOTE: If "Wide" has been set in the Image Area Selection for the MCU
PWB EEPROM (NVM), there will not be right/left margins in the
test print pattern.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-20


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

[Patch test print pattern] 4.2.6.4 Digital Input Test

The printer prints the patch test print patterns (Cin50% patch) as shown You can detect the High/Low level in the signals output from a switch or
below. sensor that has a digital signal.

NOTE: Cin50% patch: Image that has been developed for every 3 dots.
Table 4-13. Digital Input Test Parameter
For more details, see Chapter 2.
DIAGON command: 75 DIAGOFF command: 76
NOTE: Depending on the specifications, there may not be a top margin DIAGSTART command (Digital Input Test): 90 01 XX XX
and the top part of the image may be out of the paper area. DIAGSTOP command (Digital Input Test): Unnecessary
NOTE: Use paper longer than 210mm in the paper feed direction. Parameter Function Data (Hex)
1 Diagnostic type 01: Digital Input Test
NOTE: If "Wide" has been set in the Image Area Selection for the MCU
2 Code_DI Device code (see Section 4.2.6.5.)
PWB EEPROM (NVM), there will not be right/left margins in the
3 Data Status: 00: Low, 01: High or XX (Data)
test print pattern.
With status (90 01 XX XX) only

NOTE: The status parameter 3 (data) is 1 byte data (Hex) in the device
code 32, 3F, 43, 44 and 45.

Example) Coomand

90 01 03

TRO Sensor
Digital Input Test
DIAGSTART command

Example) Status
90 01 03 01

High
TRO SNR
Digital Input Test
DIAGSTART command

Figure 4-4. Patch Test Print Pattern

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-21


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.6.5 Digital Input Test: Device codes


Table 4-14. Digital Input Test Device Codes (1/7) Table 4-15. Digital Input Test Device Codes (2/7)
Digital Input Test [DIAGSTART: 90 01 XX, DIAGSTOP: Unnecessary] Digital Input Test [DIAGSTART: 90 01 XX, DIAGSTOP: Unnecessary]
Code Function item Function item
Name Check Code
(Hex) Name Check
Status data: High (Hex) Status data: High
/VSYNC signal P/H Motor Assembly Remove the P/H Motor
PAGE_SYNC 00 -
/VSYNC signal: High Assembly connector (P/
PH_MOT_FAIL 0A P/H MOTOR FAIL
ROS error detected J49) and check by
signal: High
(ROS Assembly running the motor.
SOS_ERR 01 [SOS PWB]) Check during printing Exit Chute Switch Check the switch by
ROS error internal TOP_DOOR_SW 0B EXIT CHUTE SENSE opening/closing the Exit
signal: High (error) signal: High Upper Assembly.
MCU PWB 24 VDC Used Cartridge Check the sensor by
Check the power status Sensor blocking/opening the light
INTLK24 02 24VDC (Between by opening/closing the
LVPS-MCU PWB): path to the sensor using a
Front Cover. TONER_EMPTY_
High 0C sheet of paper. (Turn on
SNR USED CARTRIDGE
the Sensor ON signal in
TR0 Sensor Check the sensor by SENSE signal: High
the Digital Output Test
blocking/opening the light
TR0_SNSR 03 TR0 signal in MCP 3C.)
path to the sensor using a
PWB: High Cartridge Sensor Check the sensor by
sheet of paper.
blocking/opening the light
TR0 Sensor Check the sensor by
path to the sensor by
blocking/opening the light
TR0_SNR 04 TR0-M SENSE installing/detaching the
path to the sensor using a TONER_BOX_SW 0D CARTRIDGE SENSE
signal: High Toner Cartridge. (Turn on
sheet of paper. signal: High the Sensor ON signal in
Rotary Sensor Check the sensor by the Digital Output Test
ROTARY_HOME_ blocking/opening the light 3C.)
05 ROTARY HOME
SNR path to the sensor using a
SENSE signal: High Toner Box Sensor Check the sensor by
sheet of paper.
blocking/opening the light
OPT_READY_FIL 06 Not used. - WASTE_TONER_
12 TONER BOX SENSE path to the sensor by
Full Stack Sensor Check the sensor by BOX
signal: High installing/detaching the
blocking/opening the light Waste Toner Box.
TOP_TRAY_FULL_
08 FULL STACK path to the sensor using Low Paper Sensor
SNR
SENSE signal the Full Stack Sensor (Cassette 1) Check the sensor by
NEAR_EMPTY_
Actuator. 13 removing/adding the
SW [1] LOW PAPER
TOP EXIT SENSOR Check the sensor by paper in Cassette 1.
SENSE signal: High
blocking/opening the light
EXIT_TOP_SNR 09 TOP EXIT PAPER path to the sensor using
SENSE signal: High the Top Exit Sensor
Actuator.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-22


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 4-16. Digital Input Test Device Codes (3/7) Table 4-17. Digital Input Test Device Codes (4/7)
Digital Input Test [DIAGSTART: 90 01 XX, DIAGSTOP: Unnecessary] Digital Input Test [DIAGSTART: 90 01 XX, DIAGSTOP: Unnecessary]

Code Function item Code Function item


Name Check Name Check
(Hex) Status data: High (Hex) Status data: High
Tray N/P Sensor Check the sensor by Main P/H Assembly
Check the switch by
(Cassette 1) blocking/opening the light MAIN P/H
PAP_EMPTY_ PH_UNIT_SW 20 opening/closing the Main
14 path to the sensor using ASSEMBLY SENSE
SNR_1 [1] TRAY PAPER P/H Assembly.
the Tray N/P Actuator signal: High
SENSE signal: High
Tray 1. Waste Toner Sensor Check the sensor by
OHP_SNR_1 15 Not used. - TONER_FULL_SN blocking/opening the light
21 WASTE TONER
CHEAT_SW 16 Not used. - R path to the sensor using a
SENSE signal: High sheet of paper.
MSI Short N/P Check the sensor by
Sensor blocking/opening the light Oil Roll Assembly
MSI_PAP-SNR 17
MSI SHORT PAPER path to the sensor using (CRU Switch
SENSE signal: High the MSI N/P Actuator. OIL_LIFE_SW 22 Assembly) Not allowed.
MSI LONG N/P Check the sensor by NEW OIL ROLL
Sensor blocking/opening the light SENSE signal: High
MSI_PAP2_SNR 18
MSI LONG PAPER path to the sensor using a Oil Roll Assembly Check the switch by
SENSE signal: High sheet of paper. (CRU Switch installing/detaching the
MSI OHP Sensor Check the sensor by OIL_ROLL_SW 23 Assembly) Oil Roll Assembly. (Keep
blocking/opening the light OIL ROLL SENSE the Fuser Assembly
MSI_OHP_SNR 19 MSI OHP SENSE path to the sensor using a signal: High closed.)
signal: High sheet of paper. Fuser Assembly Check the switch by
Rear OHP Sensor Check the sensor by FUSER_UNIT_SW 24 FUSER ASSEMBLY opening/closing the Fuser
blocking/opening the light SENSE signal: High Assembly.
OHP_REAR_SNR 1B REAR OHP WHITE
path to the sensor using a
SENSE signal: High Fuser Exit Sensor Check the sensor by
sheet of paper.
blocking/opening the light
Front OHP Sensor Check the sensor by FUSER_EXIT_SNR 25 FUSER EXIT PAPER path to the sensor using a
blocking/opening the light SENSE signal: High
OHP_FRONT_SNR 1D FRONT OHP WHITE sheet of paper.
path to the sensor using a
SENSE signal: High JP3 Check the pin by
sheet of paper.
(or DIP-Switches) connecting/disconnecting
MSI Edge Sensor Check the sensor by the JP3 (MCU PWB)
blocking/opening the light TEST_PIN 26 using the shorting
MSI_PITCH_SNR 1E MIS EDGE PAPER path to the sensor using a TEST PRINT ON connector. Check the DIP
SENSE signal: High sheet of paper. signal: High switches by turning the
Registration Sensor Check the sensor by switches ON/OFF.
REGISTRATION blocking/opening the light
REGIST_SNR 1F
PAPER SENSE path to the sensor using a
signal: High sheet of paper.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-23


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 4-18. Digital Input Test Device Codes (5/7) Table 4-19. Digital Input Test Device Codes (6/7)
Digital Input Test [DIAGSTART: 90 01 XX, DIAGSTOP: Unnecessary] Digital Input Test [DIAGSTART: 90 01 XX, DIAGSTOP: Unnecessary]

Code Function item Code Function item


Name Check Name Check
(Hex) Status data: High (Hex) Status data: High
Front Cover Switch L Tray No Paper Check the sensor by
Check the switch by
FRONT_DOOR_S FRONT COVER Sensor (Cassette 3) blocking/opening the light
27 opening/closing the Front OPT_SENS_
W SWITCH ON signal: 3D path to the sensor using
Cover. EMPTY_3 [3] TRAY PAPER
High the Tray N/P Actuator
SENSE signal: High
Fuser In Sensor Check the sensor by (Cassette 3).
FUSER_ENT_ blocking/opening the light Tray No Paper Check the sensor by
28 FUSER IN PAPER Sensor (Cassette 4) blocking/opening the light
SNR path to the sensor using a OPT_SENS_
SENSE signal: High sheet of paper. 3E path to the sensor using
EMPTY_4 [4] TRAY PAPER
Feeder Unit the Cassette N/P Actuator
SENSE signal: High
(Cassette 4).
OPT_STATUS 32 * HRX signal: 1 byte -
data Feeder Unit
OPT_SW_FEEDER 3F * HRX signal: 1 byte -
OPT_TRAY_READ Feeder Unit
33 - data
Y * READY signal: High
Tray No Paper Check the sensor by
OPT-DUP_READY 34 Not used. -
Sensor (Cassette 2) blocking/opening the light
OPT_SW_DOOR_ OPT_SENS_
35 Not used. 40 path to the sensor using
DUP EMPTY_2 [2] TRAY PAPER
the Tray N/P Actuator
OPT_SW_TRAY_ SENSE signal: High (Cassette 2).
36 Not used. -
DUP Low Paper Sensor
OPT_SENS_INVE (Cassette 4) Check the sensor by
37 Not used. - OPT_SW_NEAR_
RT_IN 41 removing/adding the
END_4 [4] LOW PAPER paper in Cassette 4.
OPT_SENS_DUP_ SENSE signal: High
38 Not used. -
IN Low Paper Sensor
OPT_SENS_DUP_ (Cassette 2) Check the sensor by
39 Not used. - OPT_SW_NEAR_
OUT 42 removing/adding the
END_2 [2] LOW PAPER paper in Cassette 2.
OPT_SW_DUP 3A Not used. - SENSE signal: High
Low Paper Sensor
(Cassette 3) Check the sensor by
OPT_SW_NEAR_
3B removing/adding the
END_3 [3] LOW PAPER
paper in Cassette 3.
SENSE signal: High
Feeder Chute Switch
Check the switch by
OPT_SW_DOOR_ FEEDER CHUTE
3C opening/closing the
FEEDER SWITCH ON signal:
Feeder Chute Assembly.
High

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-24


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 4-20. Digital Input Test Device Codes (7/7)


Digital Input Test [DIAGSTART: 90 01 XX, DIAGSTOP: Unnecessary]

Code Function item


Name Check
(Hex) Status data: High
Size Switch Assembly
(Cassette 2)
OPT_SIZE2 43
* [2] SIZE SWITCH Check the assemblies by
signal: 1 byte data turning ON/OFF the 4
Size Switch Assembly Paper Size Switches
(Cassette 3) (Cassette2, Cassette 3,
OPT_SIZE3 44
* [3] SIZE SWITCH Cassette 4) and check the
signal: 1 byte data data in this diagnostic
Size Switch Assembly function. (See Section 2.
(Cassette 4) 7.1 Paper Size Control.)
OPT_SIZE4 45
* [4] SIZE SWITCH
signal: 1 byte data

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-25


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.6.6 Digital Output Test NOTE: While the Process Motor Assembly, P/H Motor Assembly and
Developer Clutch Assembly are on, and the Developer
Components controlled by the digital signals can be turned ON/OFF. Assembly is in the development position, do not turn on the DB
Table 4-21. Digital Output Test Parameter output (AC component) or DB output (AC component) and DB
DIAGON command: 75 DIAGOFF command: 76
output (DC component) at the same time.
DIAGSTART command (Digital Output Test): 90 02 XX NOTE: Do not keep the Dispense Motor Assembly turned on for more
DIAGSTOP command (Digital Output Test): 91 02 XX than 10 seconds to prevent toner from being clogged too much
Parameter Function Data in the developer assembly and gears from being damaged.
1 Diagnostic type 02: Digital Output Test NOTE: While the Process Motor Assembly is turned off and the P/H
2 Code_D0 Device code (See 4.2.6.7.) Motor Assembly on, do not set the 2nd BTR in the advanced
3 DGST [Status only] 06: Passed, 07: Failed position to prevent the IBT Belt Assembly from being damaged.
With status (90 02 XX XX)
NOTE: While the 2nd BTR is set in the advanced position, do not turn
Example) Command Example) Status on the Process Motor Assembly to prevent the IBT Belt
Assembly from being damaged.
90 02 21 90 02 21 06
NOTE: Do not turn on the 1st BTR with the Process Motor Assembly
MSI_CL Passed turned off to prevent the IBT Belt Assembly from being
Digital Output Test MSI_CL
damaged.
DIAGSTART command Test Print
DIAGSTART command NOTE: When the Process Motor Assembly and the P/H Motor
Assembly are turned off, do not turned on the 2nd BTR to

W A R N IN G  Do not touch live parts when high voltages are output.


prevent the IBT Belt Assembly from being damaged.

 Install all covers when the laser beam is active and NOTE: Do not turn on the P/H Motor Assembly without the Drum
exposed. Cartridge or the Waste Toner Box, otherwise the toner will spill.
 Do not touch motors and drive assemblies when they NOTE: Do not turn on the P/H Motor Assembly or the Developer Clutch
are running. Assembly when the Development Assembly is out-of-place to
prevent the inside of the printer from contaminated and the
NOTE: Do not turn on the BCR, Erase Lamp Assembly and the LD in gears from being damaged due to improper engagement.
the ROS Assembly with the Process Motor Assembly turned
NOTE: Do not turn on the H/R Heater and the P/R Heater for more than
OFF to prevent fatigue in the Drum Cartridge.
3 seconds to prevent the Main Fuser from being damaged.
NOTE: After having replaced the Drum Cartridge with a new one, do not
turn on the Process Motor Assembly ON to prevent the Cleaning
Blade from rotating in reverse.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-26


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.6.7 Digital Output Test: Device codes Table 4-23. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (2/8)
Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX]
C A U T IO N
If there is a <Warning!> or <Caution!> in the Check
column, first confirm the warnings and cautions listed Code Function item
Name Check
on the previous page to prevent problems. (Hex) Function
Process Motor <Warning!><Caution!>
Assembly Check visually and
MAIN_MOT 10 Sets the PROCESS auditorially that the
Table 4-22. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (1/8) MOTOR ON signal Process Motor Assembly
to Low. is functioning.
Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX]
Rotary Motor <Warning!><Caution!>
Code Function item Assembly Check the Rotary Motor
Name Check Hold signal. (By
(Hex) Function ROTARY_MOT_PO
15 Sets the ROTARY executing this test with
WER
HR_CUT_SEL 00 Not allowed. - MOTOR HOLD Code 16, the Rotary
ROS Assembly signal to Low Motor Assembly is put on
VDENB 01 Sets the LD ENB Check the LD ENB signal. hold.
signal to Low. Rotary Motor <Warning!><Caution!>
ROS Assembly Assembly Check the Rotary Motor
LD_ON 05 Sets the VDATA Check the VDATA signal. ROTARY_MOT 16 Sets the ROTARY ON signal. (The Rotary
signal to High MOTOR ON signal Motor Assembly is ready
WD_CAN 09 Not allowed. - to Low. for rotation.)
OPT_TRAY2 0A Not allowed. - HVPS <Warning!><Caution!>
DUP_START 0C Not allowed. - Do not check the 2nd
BTR_2ND 17 Sets the 2ND BTR BTR output.
RTS_CL 0D Not allowed. -
ON signal to Low. Check the 2nd BTR ON
OPT_TRAY 0E Not allowed. -
signal.
Process Motor <Warning!><Caution!>
HVPS <Warning!><Caution!>
Assembly Check visually and
Do not check the 1st BTR
auditorially that the
BTR_1ST 18 Sets the 1ST BTR output.
Process Motor Assembly
ON signal to Low. Check the 1st BTR ON
MAIN_MOT_SPEED 0F Sets the PROCESS rotation speed has been
MOTOR HALF- reduced to half. (By signal.
SPEED signal to executing this test with HVPS <Warning!>
Low. Code 10, the Process Do not check the DB
Motor Assembly rotation DEVE_DC 19 Sets the DB DC ON output.
speed is reduced to half.) signal. Check the DB DC ON
signal.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-27


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

C A U T IO N If there is a <Warning!> or <Caution!> in the Check


column, first confirm the warnings and cautions listed Table 4-25. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (4/8)
on the previous page to prevent problems. Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX]
Table 4-24. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (3/8) Code Function item
Name Check
Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX] (Hex) Function
MSI Clutch
Code Function item
Name Check MSI_CL 21 Sets the MSI
(Hex) Function CLUTCH ON signal
HVPS <Warning!> to Low.
Do not check the DB Pick Up Solenoid
DEVE_AC 1A Sets the DB AC ON output. MSI_FEED_SOL 22 Sets the PICK UP
signal to Low. Check the DB AC ON SOLENOID ON
signal to Low. By corresponding the
signal. clicking sound, check if
HVPS <Warning!><Caution!> Pre-Registration the clutch or solenoid has
Clutch
Do not check the BCR been activated.
BCR_DC 1B output. TAKE_AWAY_CL 23 Sets PRE-REGI.
Sets the BCR ON
signal to Low. CLUTCH ON signal
Check the BCR ON
to Low.
signal.
Registration Clutch
HVPS <Warning!><Caution!>
REGIST_CL 24 Sets the REGI.
Do not check the DTS
DTCK_SAW 1C Sets the DTS ON CLUTCH ON signal
output.
signal to Low. to Low.
Check the DTS ON signal.
Dispense Motor
P/H Motor Assembly <Warning!><Caution!> <Warning!><Caution!>
Assembly
Check visually and DISPENSE_MOT 25 Check auditorially that the
Sets the P/H Sets the DISPENSE
PH_MOT 1D auditorially that the P/H Dispense Motor Assembly
MOTOR ON signal to MOTOR ON signal to
Motor Assembly is is functioning.
Low. Low.
functioning.
Developer Fan <Warning!><Caution!>
PRE_TR0 1E Not allowed. -
Check visually or
H/R Heater, P/R <Warning!><Caution!> REAR_FAN 26 Sets the DEVE. FAN auditorially that the
Heater Check the Heater ON ON signal to High. Developer Fan is
HR_LAMP_SSR 1F signal. (The H/R Heater functioning.
Sets the HEATER
and P/R Heater are turned Fuser Fan <Warning!><Caution!>
ON signal to Low.
on.)
Sets the FUSER Check visually or
ROS Assembly Check the Scanner Motor FUSER_FAN 27
FAN ON signal to auditorially that the Fuser
Sets the SCANNER ON signal. (The Scanner High. Fan is functioning.
ROS_MOT 20
MOTOR ON signal to Motor in the ROS is
Low. rotating)

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-28


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

If there is a <Warning!> or <Caution!> in the Check Table 4-27. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (6/8)
C A U T IO N
column, first confirm the warnings and cautions listed Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX]
on the previous page to prevent problems.
Code Function item
Name Check
(Hex) Function
Table 4-26. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (5/8)
Developer Fan <Warning!>
Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX] Check visually or
auditorially that the
Code Function item Developer Fan rotation
Name Check Sets the DEVE. FAN
(Hex) Function REAR_FAN_SPEED 31 has been reduced. (By
HALF-SPEED signal
executing this test with
Feed Solenoid to High.
Code 26, the Developer
(Cassette 1)
Fan rotation speed is
CST1_FEED_SOL 28 [1] Sets the FEED reduced.)
SOLENOID ON
Fuser Fan <Warning!>
signal to Low.
Check visually or
Registration Brake
auditorially that the Fuser
Clutch FUFSER_FAN_SPE Sets the FUSER Fan rotation has been
REGI_BRK 2C Sets the REGI. 32
ED FAN HALF-SPEED reduced. (By executing
BRAKE CLUTCH signal to High. this test with Code 27, the
ON signal to Low. Fuser Fan rotation speed
By corresponding the
Developer Clutch is reduced.)
clicking sound, check if
Assembly ADC Sensor Turn the ADC Sensor ON/
the clutch or solenoid has
MAG_ROLL_CL 2D Sets the DEVE. Assembly OFF the light emitter in
been activated.
CLUTCH ON signal this diagnostic function.
By corresponding the ADC_LED 33
to Low. Sets the LED ON Run the ADC Sensor input
clicking sound, check if
BTR CAM Solenoid signal to Low. test in the Analog Input
the clutch or solenoid has
Sets the BTR CAM Test.
BTR_2ND_SOL 2E been activated.
SOLENOID ON Exchange Solenoid
signal to Low. Turns on the Check visually or
PATH_SOL_PUSH 34 EXCHANGE auditorially (clicking
Oil Cam Solenoid
sound) that the Exchange
Sets the OIL CAM SOLENOID PUSH
OIL_ROLL_SOL 2F ON signal. Solenoid is functioning.
SOLENOID ON (You can change the Face
signal to Low. Exchange Solenoid Up/Face Down with the
Cleaner CAM Turns on the Exchange Chute that is
Solenoid PATH_SOL_PULL 35 EXCHANGE controlled by the
IBT_CLEANER_SOL 30 Sets the CLEANER SOLENOID PULL Exchange Solenoid.)
CAM SOLENOID ON signal.
ON signal to Low.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-29


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

If there is a <Warning!> or <Caution!> in the Check Table 4-29. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (8/8)
C A U T IO N
column, first confirm the warnings and cautions listed Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX]
on the previous page to prevent problems.
Code Function item
Name Check
(Hex) Function
Table 4-28. Device Codes for Digital Output Test (7/8)
Feeder Motor Check visually and
Digital Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 02 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 02 XX] Sets the FEEDER auditorially that the
OPT_FEEDER_MOT 58
MOTOR ON signal to Feeder Motor is
Code Function item Low. functioning.
Name Check
(Hex) Function Feed Solenoid-3T
ADC Sensor By the clicking sound, OPT_TRAY2_SOL 59 Sets the [2] FEED
Assembly check that the ADC SOLENOID ON
ADC_CLEAN_SOL 36 Sets the ADC Solenoid in the ADC signal to Low.
SOLENOID ON Sensor Assembly is Feed Solenoid-3T By the clicking sound,
signal to Low. functioning. Sets the [3] FEED check if the clutch or
OPT_TRAY3_SOL 5A
Erase Lamp SOLENOID ON solenoid are functioning.
Remove the Top Cover. signal to Low.
Assembly
Visually check that the Feed Solenoid-3T
ERASE_LAMP 37 Sets the ERASE
Erase Lamp Assembly
LAMP ON signal to OPT_TRAY4_SOL 5B Sets the [4] FEED
has been turned on.
Low. SOLENOID ON
Used Cartridge Turn ON/OFF the light signal to Low.
Sensor, Cartridge emitter in the sensors in Turn Clutch-3T
CART_PHOTO_LED 3C Sensor this diagnostic function. OPT_TURN_ROLL_2 Sets the [2] TURN
5C
Sets the SENSOR Run the Digital Input Test _CL CLUTCH ON signal
ON signal to High. for each sensor. to Low.
By the clicking sound,
OPT_DUP_MOT_SP Turn Clutch-3T
50 Not allowed. - check if the clutch or
EED OPT_TURN_ROLL_3 Sets the [3] TURN
5D solenoid has been
OPT_DUP_MOT 51 Not allowed. - _CL CLUTCH ON signal activated.
OPT_ROLL_FRONT to Low.
52 Not allowed. -
_CL Turn Clutch-3T
OPT_ROLL_BACK_ OPT_TURN_ROLL_4 Sets the [4] TURN
53 Not allowed. - 5E
CL _CL CLUTCH ON signal
OPT-REVERSE_CL 54 Not allowed. - to Low.
OPT_FORWARD_CL 55 Not allowed. -
OPT_DUP_PATH_S
56 Not allowed. -
OL_PUSH
OPT_DUP_PATH_S
57 Not allowed. -
OL_PULL

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-30


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.6.8 Analog Input Test NOTE: The status data consists of 2 bytes; the lower byte is displayed
first.
You can run this test to detect the signal levels of the sensors and
output monitors that output an analog signal.
Example) Status
C A U T IO N Do not run this test unless specified in this manual or
instructed to do so. 90 03 01

ADC_SNR
Analog Input Test
Table 4-30. Analog Input Test Specifications DIAGSTART command

DIAGON command: 75 DIAGOFF command: 76


Example) Command
DIAGSTART command (Analog Input Test): 90 03 XX
DIAGSTOP command (Analog Input Test): Unnecessary 90 03 01 01 1F
Parameter Function Data (Hex)
Data
1 Diagnostic type 03: Analog Input Test
ADC_SNR
2 Code_AI Device code (See 4.2.6.9.)
Analog Input Test
3 Data [Status only] Data
4 Data [Status only] Data
DIAGSTART command
With status (90 03 XX XX)

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-31


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.6.9 Analog Input Test: Device codes


Table 4-32. Device Codes of the analog Input Test (2/2)
C A U T IO N If there is a <Warning!> or <Caution!> in the Check column,
first confirm the warnings and cautions listed on the previous Analog Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 03 XX, DIAGSTOP: Unnecessary]
page to prevent problem. Function item
Code
Name Signal Check
Table 4-31. Device Codes of the analog Input Test (1/2) (Hex)
Data range
Analog Input Test [DIAGSTART: 90 03 XX, DIAGSTOP: Unnecessary] Environment Sensor
Function item ENVIRONMENT TEMP.
ENV_THERM 04 Check the data.
Code signal
Name Signal Check
(Hex) 0000 - 00FFh (0 - 4.1[V])
Data range _5V_BUNATSU 05 Not used. -
HVPS (2nd transfer <Warning!><Caution! HVPS (1st transfer <Warning!><Caution!>
current monitor) > voltage monitor) Run the Digital Output
2BTR MONI signal Run the Digital Output 1 BTR MONI signal Test [18] and Analog
Test [17] and Analog BTR_1ST_IN 06 Output Test [00] for 1st
BTR_2ND_IN 00 BTR output. Check the
Output Test [01] for 0000 - 00FFh (0 - 4.1[V])
0000 - 0400h (0 - 4.1[V]) 2nd BTR output. data in this diagnostic
Check the data in this function
diagnostic function.
ADC Sensor (ADC Turn on the light
Sensor Assembly) emitter of the sensor
ADC_SNR 01 ADC SIG signal and check the data in
this diagnostic
0000 - 0400h (0 - 4.1[V]) function.
Size Switch Assembly Turn ON/OFF the
(Cassette 1) Paper Size Switches
[1] SIZE SWITCH signal (4) in the Size Switch
PAP_SIZE_SW_1 02 Assembly (Cassette
See Section 2. 7.1 Paper 1). Check the data in
Size Control this diagnostic
function.
Temperature Sensor
Assembly
HR_THERMISTER 03 Check the data.
TEMP. signal
0000 - 00FFh (0 - 4.1[V])

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-32


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.6.10 Analog Output Test


W A R N IN G  Do not touch live parts when high voltages are output.
Components controlled by the analog signals can be turned ON/OFF.
 Install all covers when the laser beam is active and
exposed.
Table 4-33. Analog Output Test Specifications
 Do not touch motors and drive assemblies when they
DIAGON command: 75 DIAGOFF command: 76 are running.
DIAGSTART command (Analog Output Test): 90 04 XX XX
DIAGSTOP command (Analog Output Test): 91 04 XX XX
C A U T IO N  Do not turn on the BCR, Erase Lamp Assembly and
Parameter Function Data (Hex) the LD in the ROS Assembly with the Process Motor
1 Diagnostic type 04: Analog Output Test Assembly turned OFF to prevent fatigue in the Drum
2 Code_A0 Device code (See 4.2.6.11.) Cartridge.
3 Data [Command] Data: (Output level)  While the Process Motor Assembly, P/H Motor
3 DGST [Status] 06: Passed, 07: Failed Assembly and Developer Clutch Assembly are on,
With status (90 04 XX XX) and the Developer Assembly is in the development
position, do not turn on the DB output (AC
Example) Command component) or DB output (AC component) and DB
output (DC component) at the same time.
90 04 02 01
 Do not keep the Dispense Motor Assembly turned on
Data for more than 10 seconds to prevent toner from being
BCR_DC_OUT clogged to much in the developer assembly and
Analog Output Test gears from being damaged.
DIAGSTART command  Do not turn on the 1st BTR with the Process Motor
Assembly turned off to prevent the IBT Belt Assembly
Example) Status from being damaged.
 When the Process Motor Assembly and the P/H Motor
90 04 02 06 Assembly are turned off, do not turned on the 2nd
Passed BTR to prevent the IBT Belt Assembly from being
BCR_DC_OUT damaged.
Analog Output Test  Do not turn on the P/H Motor Assembly or the
DIAGSTART command Developer Clutch Assembly when the Development
Assembly is out-of-place to prevent the inside of the
printer from contaminated and the gears from being
damaged due to improper engagement.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-33


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.6.11 Analog Output Test: Device codes Table 4-35. Analog Output Test: Device codes (2/2)
Analog Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 04 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 04 XX XX]
C A U T IO N If there is a <Warning!> or <Caution!> in the Check column,
first confirm the warnings and cautions listed on the previous Function item
Code
page to prevent problem. Name Signal Check
(Hex)
Data range
Table 4-34. Analog Output Test: Device codes (1/2)
HVPS
<Warning!><Caution!>
Analog Output Test [DIAGSTART: 90 04 XX, DIAGSTOP: 91 04 XX XX] Outputs the DTS CONT
DTCK_SAW_OUT 05 signal that has the value Check the HVPS by
Function item based on the data.
reading the DTS
Code Controller signal.
Name Function Check 00 - FFh (0 - 4.1[V])
(Hex)
Rotary Motor Assembly
Data range
Outputs the Rotary
HVPS Motor Clock signal that <Warning!><Caution!>
<Warning!> <Caution!>
Outputs the 2BTR CONT has the value based on Check visually that the
Check the HVPS by
BTR_1ST_OUT 00 signal that has the value the data. Rotary Motor Assembly
based on the data. reading the 2BTR
Controller signal. 00h: Home position rotates at the specified
00 - FFh (0 - 4.1[V]) Deve Rotary Motor 0A 01h: 30°, 02h: 45°, angle. (Simultaneously
HVPS 03h: 60°, 04h: 90°, running this test with
<Warning!><Caution!> Digital Output Test 16
Outputs the 1BTR CONT 05h: 120°, 06h: 150°,
BTR_2ND_OUT 01 signal that has the value Check the HVPS by 07h: 210°, 08h: 240°, rotates the Rotary Motor
reading the 1BTR 09h: 300°, 0Ah: 330°, Assembly.)
based on the data.
Controller signal. 0Bh: 360°, 0Ch: 90°,
00 - FFh (0 - 4.1[V])
0Dh: 15°
HVPS <Warning!><Caution!>
Outputs the BCR DC Check the HVPS by
BCR_DC_OUT 02 CONT signal that has the reading the BCR DC
value based on the data. Controller signal.
00 - FFh (0 - 4.1[V])
HVPS <Warning!><Caution!>
Outputs the DB DC Check the HVPS by
DEVE_DC_OUT 03 CONT signal that has the reading the DB DC
value based on the data. Controller signal.
00 - FFh (0 - 4.1[V])
ROS Assembly
<Warning!><Caution!>
Outputs the VREF signal
LD_POWER 04 that has the value based Check the ROS
Assembly by reading
on the data.
the VREF signal.
00 - FFh (0 - 4.1[V])

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-34


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.6.12 EEPROM Read


You can read and check the data in the MCU PWB EEPROM (NVM). Example) Command
90 05 CC 01 A0 86 01 00
Table 4-36. EEPROM Read Parameters
DIAGON command: 75 DIAGOFF command: 76 Data: 100000 (186A0h)
DIAGSTART command (EEPROM Read): 90 05 XX XX NVM No. 460 (1 CCH): Life counter
DIAGSTOP command (EEPROM Read): Unnecessary accumulated count
Parameter Function Data (Hex) EEPROM read
1 Diagnostic type 05: EEPROM Read DIAGSTART command
2 Code_EP NVM number (See 4.2.6.15: NVM List.)
3 Code_EP NVM number (See 4.2.6.15: NVM List.)
4 Data [Status only] Data
Example) Status
5 Data [Status only] Data
6 Data [Status only] Data 90 05 CC 01 A0 86 01 00
7 Data [Status only] Data
With status (90 05 XX XX XX XX XX XX) Data: 100000 (186A0h)
NVM No. 460 (1CCh): Life counter accumulated
NOTE: Enter the lower byte of the 2 bytes in Code_EP (NVM number) counts for 2nd BTR Assembly
first, then enter the second byte. EEPROM read
NOTE: Enter the lowest byte of the 4 bytes in the status data first, then DIAGSTART command
enter the second, third and fourth bytes.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-35


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

C A U T IO N If you replace a periodically replaced parts (i.e., Main


C A U T IO N Before replacing the MCU PWB, make sure to read and
record the following NVM numbers: Fuser Assembly, 2nd BTR Assembly, Belt Cleaner
Assembly) or the Drum Cartridge for the printer
60 (0044h): Oil Rate count (accumulated counts) to detect the Oil without the CRUM function, write “0” in the following
Roll Assembly life end. NVM number data. (Setting a “0” in the life counter is
122 (007Ah): Counter B to detect a full Waste Toner Box. described as a “Counter Clear” in this manual.)
324 (0144h): Counter C to detect a full Waste Toner Box. n If you replaced the Drum Cartridge (without CRUM)
356 (0164h): Overall image counts (accumulated counts) of the with a new one: 452 (01C4h)
printer. n <Do not write data for the printer with the CRUM
378 (017Ah): Accumulated dispense time to detect the life end of function.>
the Toner Cartridge Bk. n If you replaced the Main Fuser Assembly with a new
380 (017Ch): Accumulated dispense time to detect the life end of the one: 404 (0194h), 444 (01BCh)
Toner Cartridge Y. n If you replaced the Belt Cleaner Assembly with a
382 (017Eh): Accumulated dispense time to detect the life end of the new one: 424 (01A8h)
Toner Cartridge M. n If you replaced the 2nd BTR Assembly with a new
384 (0180h): Accumulated dispense time to detect the life end of the one: 460 (01CCh)
Toner Cartridge C.
404 (0194h): Image counts (accumulated counts) to detect the life NOTE: You can read some of the data items above in “2.5 Life
end of the Main Fuser Assembly. Counters: Read/Write.” If you read/write data when you replace
424 (01A8h): Accumulated counts to detect the life end of the Belt the MCU PWB, you do not need to run the EEPROM Read/
Cleaner Assembly. Write.
440 (01B8h): Overall prints (accumulated time) of the printer.
444 (01BCh): Dispense time (accumulated counts) to detect the life
end of the Main Fuser Assembly.
448 (01C0h): PV accumulated counts to detect the life end of the Oil
Roll Assembly.
452 (01C4h): Accumulated counts to detect the life end of the Drum
Cartridge.
NOTE:Read the data only if the printer has the CRUM function.
460 (01CCh): Accumulated counts to detect the life end of the 2nd
BTR Assembly.
474 (01DAh): Counter A to detect a full Waste Toner Box.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-36


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.6.13 EEPROM Write NOTE: Enter the lower byte of the 2 bytes in the Code_EP (NVM
number) first, then enter the second byte.
You can change the data in the MCU PWB EEPROM (NVM) by writing
new data in it. NOTE: Enter the lowest byte of the 4 bytes in the status data first, then
enter the second, third and fourth bytes.
C A U T IO N Do not modify any NVM numbers except when NOTE: If the data is a negative value, -1 is represented as FFh, -2 is
instructed to do so in this manual. If you change any of FEh, ... and so on.
the other NVH numbers, the system setting may be
corrupted. Example) Command

NOTE: You need to send a DIAGOFF command to actually write the 90 06 A8 01 A0 86 01 00


data in the EEPROM.
Data: 100000 (186A0h)
NVM No. 424 (1A8h)
Table 4-37. EEPROM Write Parameters
EEPROM Write Life counter (accumulated counts) for the
DIAGON command: 75 DIAGOFF command: 76
Belt Cleaner Assembly
DIAGSTART command (EEPROM Write): 90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX
DIAGSTART command
DIAGSTOP command (EEPROM Write): Unnecessary
Parameter Function Data (Hex)
Example) Status
1 Diagnostic type 06: EEPROM Write
2 Code_EP NVM No. (See 4.2.6.15: NVM List.)
90 06 A8 01 06
3 Code_EP NVM No. (See 4.2.6.15: NVM List.)
4 Data [Command] Data
Passed
DGST [Status] 06: Passed, 07: Failed
5 Data [Command only] Data NVM No. 424 (1A8h)
6 Data [Command only] Data EEPROM Write: Life counter (accumulated counts)
7 Data [Command only] Data for the Belt Cleaner Assembly
With status (90 06 XX XX XX) DIAGSTART command

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-37


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

C A U T IO N If you replace a periodically replaced parts (i.e., Main


Fuser Assembly, 2nd BTR Assembly, Belt Cleaner
Assembly) or the Drum Cartridge for the printer
without the CRUM function, write “0” in the following
NVM number data. (Setting a “0” in the life counter is
described as a “Counter Clear” in this manual.)
 If you replaced the Drum Cartridge (without CRUM)
with a new one: 452 (01C4h)
 <Do not write data for the printer with the CRUM
function.>
 If you replaced the Main Fuser Assembly with a new
one: 404 (0194h), 444 (01BCh)
 If you replaced the Belt Cleaner Assembly with a
new one: 424 (01A8h)
 If you replaced the 2nd BTR Assembly with a new
one: 460 (01CCh)

NOTE: You can read some of the data items listed in Section 4.2.5 “Life
Counter Read/Write”“If you read/write data when you replace
the MCU PWB, you do not need to run the EEPROM Read/
Write.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-38


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.6.14 EEPROM Initialize Example) Command

You can initialize the MCU PWB EEPROM (NVM).


90 07
C A U T IO N Do not initialize the EEPROM unless instructed to do
so in this manual. EEPROM Initialize
DIAGSTART command

C A U T IO N If you initialize the EEPROM, do the following:


 Read the NVM numbers using the EEPROM Read.
Example) Status

 Execute the NVM Write in the [Service] tab.


 Write the data (that has been read) using the
90 07 06

EEPROM Write. (Also execute the NVM Write in the Passed


[Service] tab.) EEPROM Initialize
DIAGSTART command

You need to send the DIAGOFF command to actually initialize the


EEPROM.

Table 4-38. EEPROM Initialize Parameters


DIAGON command: 75 DIAGOFF command: 76
DIAGSTART command (EEPROM Initialize): 90 07
DIAGSTOP command (EEPROM Initialize): Unnecessary
Parameter Function Data (Hex)
1 Diagnostic type 07: EEPROM Initialize
2 DGST [Status only] 06: Passed, 07: Failed
With status (90 70 XX)

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-39


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.6.15 NVM List Table 4-39. NVM List (1/8)

C A U T IO N  The NVM numbers that are not listed in the table


EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX],
EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX]
below are used by the system. Do not write data in
those NVM numbers. Access NVM Range
Function Default
 Do not modify any NVM number with an “X” in the
Permission
Yes/No
Number
(Hex) Data
(Hex)
Unit
(Hex)
Access Permission Yes/No column unless instructed
to do so. These NVM numbers are critical to the 0 MCU PWB Version (0F)
(Read only) -
system settings. (0000) 0F: Firmware version -
 Before replacing the MCU PWB, read and record the Fuser dummy rotation
(Belt Cycle)
0-4
(00 - 04)
data in the NVM numbers with an * (asterisk) and write 1 1
x Number of dummy rotations
the data in those NVM numbers. Belt
(0001) for continuous printing in (01)
circumfere
each color mode (plain
NOTE: The default values (Hex) may differ depending on the nce
paper)
specification of the printer. -12 - +28
3 Top registration adjustment 4
(F4 - 1C)
(0003) (04)
6.91msec
Registration loop amount: -5 - +5
4 time adjustment -3
x (plain paper) (FB - 05)
(0004) (FD)
6.91msec
Registration loop amount:
-5 - +5
5 time adjustment 0
x (thick paper) (FB - 05)
(0005) (00)
] 6.91msec
Oil Roll Advance/Retract
1 - 10
6 control counter: Clear time 5
x setting (1) (01 - 0A)
(0006) (05)
1 min
Registration loop amount: -12 - -2
7 -7
x time adjustment (envelope) (F4 - FE)
(0007) (F9)
6.91 msec
Fuser Exit On Jam (C4-20- -10 - +10
8 00): time adjustment (F6 - 0A) 3
x
(0008) 48.37 (03)
msec

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-40


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 4-40. NVM List (2/8) Table 4-41. NVM List (3/8)
EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX], EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX],
EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX] EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX]

Access NVM Range Access NVM Range


Function Default Function Default
Permission Number (Hex) Permission Number (Hex)
(Hex) (Hex)
Yes/No (Hex) Data Unit Yes/No (Hex) Data Unit
Oil Roll Advance/Retract 1 - 30 Jam detection: Enable/
0,1,2,3
9 control counter: Clear time 10 Disable
x (01 - 1E)
(0009) setting (2) (10) 0: Jam and size mismatch
detection
17 0
Top Exit On Jam(C4-80-00): -10 - +10 x 1: No Jam detection
(0011) (00)
10 time adjustment (F6 - 0A) 1 2: No size mismatch -
x
(000A) 48.37 (01) detection
msec 3: No Jam detection and no
Top Exit Off Jam(C4-80-00): -10 - +10 size mismatch detection
11 time adjustment (F6 - 0A) 0 OHP Front/Back detection:
x 18 0,1 0
(000B) 48.37 (00) x Enable/Disable
(0012) (00)
msec 0: Enable, 1: Disable -
Top Exit Off Jam(C4-20-00): -10 - +10 21 Country code 0,1 1
x
12 time adjustment (F6 - 0A) 2 (0015) - (01)
x
(000C) 48.37 (02) 24 Image area selection 0,1 0
msec (0018) 0: Standard, 1: Wide - (00)
MSI Paper feed interval: -70 - +70 Oil Roll Advance/Retract
1 - 60
13 time adjustment (BA- 46) 0 25 control counter: Clear time 30
x x (01 - 3C)
(000D) 6.916 (00) (0019) setting (3) (1E)
msec 1 min
MSI Feed Jam (C4-00-00): 0 - 20 Side registration adjustment 0 - 64
14 10 26 37
x time adjustment (00 - 14) (Cassette 1) (00 - 40)
(000E) (0A) (001A) (25)
50ms 0.17mm
Cassette 1 paper feed -35 - +35 Side registration adjustment 0 - 64
32 32
15 interval: time adjustment (DD - 23) -5 (Cassette 2) (00 - 40)
x (0020) (20)
(000F) 13.82 (FB) 0.17mm
msec Side registration adjustment 0 - 64
33 32
Cassette 2 Feed Jam (C4- -10 - +10 (Cassette 3) (00 - 40)
16 0 (0021) (20)
x 40-00): time adjustment (F6 - 0A) 0.17mm
(0010) (00)
50 msec

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-41


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 4-42. NVM List (4/8) Table 4-43. NVM List (5/8)
EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX], EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX],
EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX] EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX]

Access NVM Range Access NVM Range


Function Default Function Default
Permission Number (Hex) Permission Number (Hex)
(Hex) (Hex)
Yes/No (Hex) Data Unit Yes/No (Hex) Data Unit
Side registration adjustment 0 - 64 Toner Cartridge Bk life
34 44
(MSI) (00 - 40) 378 counter 0
(0022) (2C) *
0.17mm (017A) Black dispense: (0000)
100 msec
Side registration adjustment 0 - 64 accumulated time
46 32
(Cassette 4) (00 - 40) Toner Cartridge Y life
(002E) (20) 380 counter 0
0.17mm *
Oil Roll Assembly life (017C) Yellow dispense: (0000)
68 0 100 msec
* counter (2) accumulated time
(0044) (0000) Toner Cartridge M life
Oil Roll accumulated counts -
Oil Roll Assembly life 382 counter 0
*
76 counter (2) data 0 (017E) Magenta dispense: (0000)
100 msec
(004C) Accumulated PV counts for (0000) accumulated time
- Toner Cartridge C life
one hour
Waste Toner Box life 384 counter 0
122 0 *
* counter (2) (0180) Cyan dispense: (0000)
(007A) (0000) 100 msec
Counter B - accumulated time
1 - 1000 Toner Cartridge Bk: Life end
386 9800
Print counter (for ADC x warning
158 (0001 - 0 (0182) (2648)
x Sensor cleaning) Dispense time 100 msec
(009E) 03E8) (0000)
1 print Toner Cartridge Y: Life end
388 8000
x warning
OHP (color) reverse (0184) (1F40)
176 insertion detection: Enable/ 0, 1 0 Dispense time 100 msec
x Disable Toner Cartridge M: Life end
(00B0) (0000) 390 8000
0: Enable, 1: Disable - x warning
(0186) (1F40)
0 - 65535 Dispense time 100 msec
Waste Toner Box life 0 Toner Cartridge C: Life end
324 (0000 - 392 8000
x counter (3) (0000) x warning
(0144) FFFF) (0188) (1F40)
Counter C 1 sec Dispense time 100 msec
Printer life counter (2) Toner Cartridge Bk: Life
356 0 394 12250
x over - gas cage
x Overall image accumulated (018A) (2FDA)
(0164) 1 image (0000) Dispense time 100 msec
counts

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-42


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 4-44. NVM List (6/8) Table 4-45. NVM List (7/8)
EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX], EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX],
EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX] EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX]

Access NVM Range Access NVM Range


Function Default Function Default
Permission Number (Hex) Permission Number (Hex)
(Hex) (Hex)
Yes/No (Hex) Data Unit Yes/No (Hex) Data Unit
Toner Cartridge Y: Life over Drum Cartridge: Life over 110000
396 10000 432 -
x - gas cage x value (0001AD
(018C) (2710) (01B0)
Dispense time 100 msec Counts - B0)
Toner Cartridge M: Life over Belt Counter Assembly: Life 100000
398 10000 436 -
x - gas cage x end warning (000186
(018E) (2710) (01B4)
Dispense time 100 msec Counts - A0)
Printer life end warning 450000 Printer life counter 0
400 440
x (0006DD x Accumulated total number of (000000
(0190) Number of prints 1 print (01B8) 1 print
D0) prints 00)
Main Fuser Assembly life 0 Main Fuser Assembly: Life
404 444 0
* counter (2) (000000 * counter (1)
(0194) (01BC) (00)
Accumulated image counts - 00) Accumulated dispense time 1 sec
Main Fuser Assembly: Life 67036 Oil Roll Assembly: Life 0
408 - 448
* end warning (000105 * counter (1) (000000
(0198) (01C0)
Dispense time 1 sec DC) Accumulated PV counts - 00)
Main Fuser Assembly: Life 70564 CRUM
412 - Drum Cartridge: Life counter 0
* over value (000113 x 452
(019C) (000000
Dispense time A4) No CRUM (01C4)
Accumulated counts - 00)
Oil Roll Assembly: Life end 19000 *
416 -
x warning (000A43 Belt Cleaner Assembly: Life 180000
(01A0) 456 -
PV counts - 8) x over value (0002BF
Oil Roll Assembly: Life over 20000 (01C8)
420 - Counts 20)
x value (0004E2 2nd BTR Assembly: Life 0
(01A4) 460
PV counts - 0) * counter (000000
Belt Cleaner Assembly: Life 0 (01CC)
424 - Counts - 00)
* counter (000000 2nd BTR: Life end warning
(01A8) 100000
Accumulated counts - 00) 464
x Accumulated counts (000186
Drum Cartridge: Life end 90000 (01D0) -
428 - A0)
x warning (00015F
(01AC) 2nd BTR: Life over value - 180000
Counts - 90) 468
x (0002BF
(01D4) Counts -
20)

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-43


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 4-46. NVM List (8/8)


EEPROM Read [90 05 XX XX],
EEPROM Write [90 06 XX XX XX XX XX XX]

Access NVM Range


Function Default
Permission Number (Hex)
(Hex)
Yes/No (Hex) Data Unit
Toner Cartridge C: Life
-
472 over - gas cage 10000
x
(01D8) 100 (2710)
Dispense time 3
msec
Waste Toner Box: Life
474 0
* counter (1)
(01DA) (0000)
Counter A -
Oil Roll Assembly: Life
448 0
* counter (1)
(01C0) (00000000)
Accumulated PV counts -
CRUM Drum Cartridge: Life
x 452 counter 0
No CRUM (01C4) (00000000)
Accumulated counts -
*
Belt Cleaner Assembly:
456 - 180000
x Life over value
(01C8) (0002BF20)
Counts
2nd BTR Assembly: Life
460 0
* counter
(01CC) (00000000)
Counts -
2nd BTR: Life end
464 warning 100000
x
(01D0) Accumulated counts (000186A0)
-

468 2nd BTR: Life over value - 180000


x
(01D4) Counts - (0002BF20)

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-44


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.7 Commands/Status List (2) Statuses


m

Table 4-48. Status List


4.2.7.1 Paper, Media & Output Control
Status
(1) Commands Name code Parameter code Description
Table 4-47. Command List (Hex)
Command 1. DEST, 2. DOPT,
PPOUT % 20 Paper ejection data
Name code Parameter code Description 3. SHEET
(Hex) 1. TRAY, Selected paper feeder
PCH % 21 2. SIZE, (Cassette), Paper size,
Selects the paper 3. MEDIA Paper type
TRYSEL # 60 1. TRAY
feeder (Cassette).
[Response] Currently
MEDSEL # 61 1. MEDIA Selects the paper type. TRYSELR B0 1. TRAY selected paper feeder
TRYSIZSET # 62 1. TRAY, 2. SIZE Selects the paper size. (Cassette)
1. TRAY, 2. FSIZEU, [Response] Currently
Sets the irregular paper MEDSELR B1 1. MEDIA
USIZESET # 64 3. FSIZEL, 4. SSIZEU selected paper type
size by dots.
5. SSIZEL 1. TRAY, [Response] Paper in the
Selects the paper TRYSIZSER B2 2. SIZE, specified paper feeder
OUTSET # 63 1. DEST, 2. DOPT 3. MEDIA (Cassette).
ejection position.
Requests the data of 1. TRAY,
TRYSELR B0 None the selected paper 2. FSIZEU, [Response] Irregular paper
feeder (Cassette). USIZR B4 3. FSIZEL, size by dots in the specified
Requests the data of 4. SSIZEU paper feeder (Cassette)
MEDSELR B1 None the selected paper 5. SSIZEL
type. OUTR B3 1. DEST, 2. DOPT [Response] Paper ejection
Requests the data of A status with “#” is a voluntary status from the printer.
the paper in the
TRYSIZSER B2 1. TRAY (3) Parameter codes
specified paper feeder
(Cassette). Table 4-49. Parameter Code Description (1/2)
Requests the paper
size by dots in the Parameter code Description
USIZR B4 1. TRAY
specified paper feeder
SHEET Number of ejected paper sheets: 1 byte (Hex)
(Cassette).
Laser beam scanning direction size: Upper 1 byte (Hex)
Requests the ejection FSIZEU
OUTR B3 None [Unit: 0.1mm]
position data.
Laser beam scanning direction size: Lower 1 byte (Hex)
A command with “#” is a command without a responding status. FSIZEL
[Unit: 0.1mm]
Paper transport direction size: Upper 1 byte (Hex) [Unit:
SSIZEU
0.1mm]
Paper transport direction size: Upper 1 byte (Hex) [Unit:
SSIZEL
0.1mm]

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-45


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 4-50. Parameter Code Description (2/2)


CASSETTE SIZE MEDIA DEST DOPT
Data Detect in the
(Hex) Paper size setting SEF/ Detect in the Optional
Cassette Paper size Paper type Cassette Destination
Enable/Disable LEF Cassette stacker
Enable/Disable
00 - - No Cassette - O x Face Up ejection -
01 Cassette 1 x MONARCH LEF x Normal x Face Down ejection -
02 Cassette 2 x Post card SEF x OHP 0 (MSI only) - -
03 Cassette 3 x COM-10 LEF x Label 1 x - -
04 MSI O DL LEF x Cover x - -
05 Cassette 4 x STATEMENT LEF x Label 2 x - -
Thick paper
06 - - A5 LEF x - Postcard x - -
- Envelope
07 - - C5 SEF x - - - -
08 - - B5 LEF O - - - -
09 - - EXECUTIVE LEF O - - - -
0A - - 8” x 10” LEF x - - - -
0B - - A4 LEF O - - - -
0C - - LETTER LEF O - - - -
0D - - LETTER SEF O - - - -
0E - - Tab (Letter) LEF x - - - -
0F - - A4 SEF O No paper O - -
10 - - Tab (A4) LEF x - - - -
11 - - Sp. Folio SEF x - - - -
12 - - Folio SEF O - - - -
13 - - LEGAL 14” SEF O - - - -
14 - - B4 SEF O - - - -
15 - - A3 SEF O - - - -
16 - - LEDGER SEF O - - - -
312.5mm x
17 - - SEF x - - - -
440mm
18 - - 12” x 18” SEF x - - - -
19 - - 12.5” x 18” SEF x - - - -
1A - - 13” x 18” SEF x - - - -
Irregular O (Cassette 1
1B - - - - - - -
(Normal paper) only)
Irregular
1C - - - x - - - -
(Envelope)
Note: o: Enable, x: Disabled

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-46


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.7.2 Printing/Status Control


(1) Commands
Table 4-51. Command List of the Printing/Status Control
Command Parameter
Name Description
code (Hex) code
1. PMODE, 2.
PFC # 70 CMODE Requests paper.
3. SHEET
PMSTT # 71 None Requests to start Scanner Motor rotation.
PERST # 72 None Requests an error reset.
SLPON # 73 1. SLEEPMODE Requests to enter the specified SLEEP mode.
SLPOFT # 74 None Requests to exit from the specified SLEEP mode.
DIAGON # 75 None Requests to enter the DIAG TEST mode.
DIAGOFF # 76 None Requests to exit from the DIAG TEST mode.
STOP # 77 None Requests to stop the printing operation.
Requests to ejects the fed paper and stop the
ABORT # 78 None
operation.
SSENG C0 None Requests the error data on the printer status.
SSCONS C1 None Requests the error data on the consumables.
SSTRAY C2 None Requests the error data on the paper feeder.
Requests the error data on the Drum Cartridge
SSCRUM C3 None
CRUM function.
SSJAM C4 None Requests the error data on paper jam.
SSHW C5 None Requests the error data on the hardware.
SSLIFE C6 None Requests the error data on life.
SSOPEN C7 None Requests the error data on opening (cover, etc.)
SSWARN C8 None Requests the error data on warning.
A command with “#” is a command without a responding status.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-47


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(2) Statuses
Table 4-52. Status List of the Printing/Status Control
Status code Parameter
Name Description
(Hex) code
1. AMODE
PFA % 30 2. SHEET1 Allows paper feed.
3. SHEET2
ENGERR % 31 None Printer error.
ERRRV % 32 None Cancels the printer error.
ENGWRN % 33 None Printer warning.
1. STSMODE
SSENG C0 2. STSMODE2 [Response] Error data on printer status.
3. STSCALL
SSCONS C1 1. STSCONS [Response] Error data on the consumables.
SSTRAY C2 1. STSTRAY [Response] Error data on the paper Cassette
[Response] Error data on the Drum Cartridge
SSCRUM C3 1. STSCRUM
CRUM function.
1. STSJAM
SSJAM C4 [Response] Error data on paper jam.
2. STSPAPER
1. STSHW1
2. STSHW2
SSHW C5 [Response] Error data on the hardware.
3. STSHW3
4. STSHW4
SSLIFE C6 1. STSLIFE [Response] Error data on life.
SSOPEN C7 1. STSOPEN [Response] Error data on opening (cover, etc.)
1. STSWARN1
SSWARN C8 2. STSWARN2 [Response] Error data on warning.
3. STSWARN3
A status with “%” is a voluntary status from the printer.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-48


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(3) Parameter codes


 SLPON command parameters

Table 4-53. SLPON Command Parameters


SLPON command code: 73
Data (Hex) SLEEPMODE
00 LIGHT SLEEP mode
01 DEEP SLEEP mode

 PFC command/PFA status parameters


NOTE:The following parameters have been defined by bits.
Table 4-54. PFC command/PFA sTatus Parameters
PFC command code: 70
PFA status code: 30
PMODE CMODE AMODE
Data (Bit)
Field Logic Field Logic Field Logic
Transfer 0 = 1UP mode Colors 0 = None Transfer 0 = 1 UP
7 Layout
layout mode 1 = 2UP mode 1 = Yellow 1 = 2 UP
0 = None
6 - - - -
1 = Magenta
0 = None
5 - - - -
1 = Cyan
0 = None
4 - - -
1 = Black
Colors 0 = None
3 - - -
1 = Yellow
0 = None
2 - - - -
1 = Magenta
0 = None
1 - - -
1 = Cyan
0 = None
0 - - -
1 = Black

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-49


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

 SSENG status parameters  SSCONS/SSTRAY/SSCRUM status parameters


NOTE:The following parameters have been defined by bits. NOTE:The following parameters have been defined by bits.

Table 4-55. SSENG Status Parameters Table 4-56. SSCONS/SSTRAY/SSCRUM Status Parameters
SSENG status code: C0 SSCONS status code: C1
SSTRAY status code: C2
Data
STSMODE STSMODE2 STSCALL SSCRUM status code: C3
(Bit)
LIGHT SLEEP Consumable error Data
7 - STSCONS STSTRAY STSCRUM
mode -> (SSCONS command: C1) (Bit)
DEEP SLEEP No paper -> (SSTRAY No paper in
6 DIAG TEST mode 7 No Yellow toner Communication error
mode command: C2) Cassette 1
CRUM error -> (SSCRUM No paper in
5 WARM UP mode - 6 No Magenta toner Verification error
command: C3) Cassette 2
Acknowledge Print Paper jam -> (SSJAM No paper in Used Drum Cartridge was
4 - 5 No Cyan toner
Quality mode command: C4) Cassette 3 installed.
Hardware error -> (SSHW 4 No Black toner No paper in MSI ID error
3 READY mode -
command: C5) Full Waste Toner No paper in
3 Count error
Life over -> (SSLIFE Box Cassette 4
2 PRINTING mode -
command: C6) 2 No Fuser Oil - Dummy error 1
Cover open -> (SSOPEN 1 - - Dummy error 2
1 ERROR mode -
command: C7) 0 - - -
Warning -> (SSWARN
0 - -
command: C8)

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-50


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

 SSJAM status parameters  SSHW status parameters


NOTE:The following parameters have been defined by bits. NOTE:The following parameters have been defined by bits.

Table 4-57. SSJAM Status Parameters Table 4-58. SSHW Status Parameters (1/2)
SSJAM status code: C4 SSHW status code: C5
Data Data
STS JAM STS PAPER STSHW1 STSHW2
(Bit) (Bit)
Paper jam in the Exit Upper 7 - Fuser overheat error
Remaining paper in the Exit Upper
7 Assembly/Exit Lower 6 Option error Ross Assembly error
Assembly/Exit Lower Assembly
Assembly 5 2nd BTR error Process Motor Assembly error
Paper jam in the Main P/H Remaining paper in the Main P/H 4 Fuser warm-up error Recognition function error
6
Assembly Assembly
3 Oil Roll Assembly: Not installed Paper Cassette 2 is not set.
Paper jam in the Fuser Remaining paper in the Fuser
5 2 Main Fuser Assembly error Paper Cassette 3 is not set.
Assembly Assembly
1 - Heater error
4 - -
0 High density error Paper Cassette 1 is not set.
3 - -
2 Size mismatch -
OHP Front/Back: wrong Table 4-59. SSHW Status Parameters (2/2)
1 -
setting
Static jam (remaining paper) - SSHW status code: C5
0 -
> (STSPAPER)
Data
STSHW3 STSHW4
(Bit)
7 High density error Toner Cartridge Y: Not installed.
6 Low density error Toner Cartridge M: Not installed.
5 P/H Motor Assembly error Toner Cartridge C: Not installed.
4 Environment Sensor error Toner Cartridge Bk: Not installed.
3 Rotary Motor Assembly error PCDC error
2 Fuser low temperature error Contamination ADC Sensor
1 Waste Toner Box: Not installed. Paper Cassette 4 is not set.
0 MCU PWB error -

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-51


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

 SSLIFE/SSOPEN status parameters  SSWARN status parameters


NOTE:The following parameters have been defined by bits. NOTE:The following parameters have been defined by bits.

Table 4-60. SSLIFE/SSOPEN Status Parameters Table 4-61. SSWARN Status Parameters
SSLIFE status code: C6 SSWARN status code: C8
SSOPEN status code: C7
Data
STSWARN1 STSWARN2 STSWARN3
Data (Bit)
STSLIFE STSOPEN
(Bit) Yellow toner: Life Drum Cartridge: Life Cassette 1: Remaining
7
7 Drum Cartridge: Life over Front Cover Assembly: Open warning warning paper warning
6 - Main P/H Assembly: Open Magenta toner: Life Cassette 2: Remaining
6 -
5 - Exit Upper Assembly: Open warning paper warning
4 2nd BTR Assembly: Life over Main Fuser Assembly: Open Cyan toner: Life Cassette 3: Remaining
5
warning paper warning
3 Belt Cleaner Assembly: Life over -
Belt Cleaner
2 Main Fuser Assembly: Life over - Black toner: Life Cassette 4: Remaining
4 Assembly: Life
1 - Feeder Chute Assembly: Open warning paper warning
warning
0 - - Waste Toner Box: 2nd BTR Assembly Full paper in Top
3
Full warning warning Cover Assembly
Oil Roll Assembly:
2 Printer: Life warning -
Life warning
Main Fuser
1 Assembly: Life - -
warning
0 - - -

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-52


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.7.3 Parameter Control

C A U T IO N  Do not use any other commands except LIFCNTSET


(80), CTLSET (85), LIFCNTR (D0), LIFLIMR (D1) and
CTLSETR (D7) unless instructed to do so in this
manual.
 Before replacing the MCU PWB, run the LIFCNTR (D0)
and CTLSETR (D7). Record the data from the
commands. After installing the new MCU PWB, write
the data.

NOTE: If the life counter value read by the LIFCNTR command is larger
than the life over value read by the LIFLIMR, write the life over
value in the LIFCNTSET command.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-53


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(1) Commands
Table 4-63. Command List of the Parameter Control (2/2)
Table 4-62. Command List of the Parameter Control (1/2)
Command Parameter
Command Parameter Command Description
Command Description code (Hex) code
code (Hex) code
Reads the minimum time-out
1.LIFE, 2.V1, TIMMINR D4 1.TIM
value.
LIFCNTSET # 80 3.V2, 4.V3, Writes data in the life counter.
5.V4 Reads the maximum time-out
TIMMAXR D5 1.TIM
value.
1.LIFE, 2.V1, <Do not use this command
unless instructed!> Reads the controlled value (that
LIFLIMSET # 81 3.V2, 4.V3, CTLVALR D6 1.CTL
changes).
5.V4 Changes the life over value.
CTLSETR D7 1.CTL Reads the control value.
Changes the life over value to
LIFDEF # 82 1.LIFE Reads the privilege to access
the default. CTLACCSR D8 1.CTL
the control value.
<Do not use this command
1.TIM, 2.V1, Reads the minimum control
TIMSET # 83 unless instructed!> CTLMINR D9 1.CTL
3.V2, 4.V3 value.
Changes the time out value.
Changes the time-out value to Reads the maximum control
TIMDEF # 84 1.TIM CTLMAXR DA 1.CTL
the default. value.

1.CTL, 2.V1, STCCNR DB 1.STC Reads the statistical counter.


CTLSET # 85 Changes the control value.
3.V2, 4.V3 Reads the default life-over
LIFEDEFR DC 1.LIFE
Changes the control value to value.
CTLDEF # 86 1.CTL
the default. Reads the default time-out
TIMDEFR DD 1.TIM
1.STC, 2.V1, Writes data in the statistical value.
STSSET # 87
3.V2, 4.V3 counter. CTLDEFR DE 1.CTL Reads the default control value.
1.LIFE, 2.V1, <Do not use this command LIFWNGR F0 1.LIFE Reads the life warning value.
LIFWNGSET # 88 3.V2, 4.V3, unless instructed!> Changes
5.V4 the life warning value. Reads the default life warning
LIFWDEFR F1 1.LIFE
value.
Changes the life warning
LIFWNGDEF # 89 1.LIFE CRIDR F2 None Reads the CRUM ID.
value to the default.
LIFCNTR D0 1.LIFE Reads the life counter. CRMDR F3 None Reads the CRUM data.
LIFLIMR D1 1.LIFE Reads the life over value A command with “#” is a command without a responding status.

TIMSETR D2 1.TIM Reads the time-out value. Note: The parameter codes V1 through V4 are in decimal. Enter a value from the
upper byte so that it can be read normally.
TIMUNITR D3 1.TIM Reads the time-out unit.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-54


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(2) Statuses

Table 4-64. Status List of the Parameter Control

Status code
Status Parameter code Description
(Hex)
1.LIFE, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3, 5.V4, [Response] Life counter
LIFCNTR D0
6.V5, 7.V6, 8.V7, 9.V8

1.LIFE, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3, 5.V4, [Response] Life-over value


LIFLIMR D1
6.V5, 7.V6, 8.V7, 9.V8
TIMSETR D2 1.TIM, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3 [Response] Time-out value
TIMUNITR D3 1.TIM, 2.UNIT [Response] Time-out unit
TIMMINR D4 1.TIM, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3 [Response] Minimum time-out value
TIMMAXR D5 1.TIM, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3 [Response] Maximum time-out value
[Response] Controlled value by the
CTLVALR D6 1.CTL, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3
control value.
CTLSETR D7 1.CTL, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3 [Response] Control value.
[Response] Privilege to access the
CTLACCSR D8 1.CTL, 2.ACCESS
control value.
CTLMINR D9 1.CTL, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3 [Response] Minimum control value
CTLMAXR DA 1.CTL, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3 [Response] Maximum control value
STCCNTR DB 1.STC, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3 [Response] Statistical counter
1.LIFE, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3,
LIFEDEFR DC [Response] Default life-over value
5. V4
TIMDEFR DD 1.TIM, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3 [Response] Default time-out value
CTLDEFR DE 1.CTL, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3 [Response] Default control value
LIFWNGR F0 1.LIFE, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3, 5. V4 [Response] Life warning
LIFWDEFR F1 1.LIFE, 2.V1, 3.V2, 4.V3, 5. V4 [Response] Default life warning
CRIDR F2 1.ID [Response] CRUM ID
1.V1, 2. V2, 3.V3, 4. V4, 5. V5, 6.
CRMDR F3 [Response] CRUM data
V6, 7. V7
NOTE: The parameter codes V1 through V8 are in decimal. Display the values from the upper
byte so that it can be read normally.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-55


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(3) Parameter codes


 UNIT/ACCESS parameter codes
NOTE:The contents of the ACCESS parameters have been defined
by bits.

Table 4-65. UNIT/ACCESS Parameter Codes (1/2)


TIMUNITR status code: D3
Data (Hex) UNIT (Time Unit)
00 Milliseconds
01 Seconds
02 Minutes
03 Hours

Table 4-66. UNIT/ACCESS Parameter Codes (2/2)


CTLACCSR status code: D8
Data (Bit) ACCESS (Access Allowed)
2 Write Set Point Allowed
1 Read Set Point Allowed
0 Read Value Allowed

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-56


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

 LIFE/TIM/CTL/STC parameter codes


Table 4-67. LIFE/TIM/CTL/STC Parameter Codes
Command/ 83, 84, D2, D3,
80, D0, 81, 82, 88, 89, D1, DC, F0, F1 85, D7, 86, D6, D8, D9, AA, DE 87, D3
Status code D4, D5, DD
TIM CTL STC
Data (Hex) LIFE (Life counters)
(Time-out [sec]) (Control value/Set point) (Status counts)
00 Drum Cartridge Polygon Time-out - -
01 Toner Cartridge Y - Cycle Down Wait Timer -
02 Toner Cartridge M - - -
03 Toner Cartridge C - - -
04 Toner Cartridge Bk - - -
05 Printer1: Accumulated number of total prints - - -
06 Main Fuser Assembly - - -
Accumulated dispense time
07 Printer2: Accumulated number of total images - - -
08 - - Y Toner Concentration -
09 2nd BTR Assembly - M Toner Concentration -
0A Belt Cleaner Assembly - C Toner Concentration -
0B Oil Roll Assembly (Accumulated PV count) - Bk Toner Concentration -
0C Main Fuser Assembly (Accumulated Image count) - - -
11 - - Top registration adjustment -
(applies to all paper feeders - Unit: 0.5mm)
16 - - Side registration adjustment -
(Cassette 1 - Unit: Approx. 0.17mm)
17 - - Side registration adjustment -
(Cassette 2 - Unit: Approx. 0.17mm)
18 - - Side registration adjustment -
(Cassette 3 - Unit: Approx. 0.17mm)
19 - - Side registration adjustment -
(MSI - Unit: Approx. 0.17mm)
1A - - - -
1B - - Size mismatch: Enable (0)/Disable (1) -
1C - - Image area selection (0:Standard, 1:Wide) -
1E Side registration adjustment -
(Cassette 4 - Unit: Approx. 0.17mm)
FF All Life Counters All Timeouts All Control Set Points All State Counters
Note: Do not use the FF command/status code unless instructed in this manual. The FF code initializes all values

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-57


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.7.4 Diagnostics control (2) Statuses

(1) Commands
Table 4-69. Status List of the Diagnostic Control

Table 4-68. Command List of the Diagnostic Control Status


Status code Parameter code Description
Status (Hex)
Command code Parameter code Description Rejects the command.
(Hex) (Displays the command
IGNORED % 41 1.CMD, 2.REASON
See 4.2.6 Executing code corresponding to
DIAGSTART 90 the CMD.)
Diagnostic Function.
See 4.2.6 Executing See4.2.6 Executing
DIAGSTOP 91 DIAGSTART 90
Diagnostic Function. Diagnostic Function.
Requests the See4.2.6 Executing
DIAGTSR E0 1.DGTST DIAGSTOP 91
diagnostic status. Diagnostic Function.
Requests the option [Response] Diagnostic
OPTSR E1 None DIAGTSR E0 1.DGTST, 2.DGST
status. status
Reads the MCU PWB [Response] Option
ROMNOR E2 None OPTSR E1 1.OPTION
firmware version. status
POLLR E3 None Polling [Response] MCU PWB
ROMNOR E2 1.V1, 2.V2, 3.V3
Reads the printer firmware version
REVR E4 None POLLR E3 None Polling
version.
[Response] Printer
REVR E4 1. MACREV
version.
A status with “%” is a voluntary status from the printer.

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-58


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(3) Parameters  REASON/OPTION parameter codes


 DGTST parameter codes NOTE:The contents of the following parameters have been defined
by bits.
Table 4-70. DGTST parameter codes
Table 4-72. REASON/OPTION parameter codes
Data (Hex) DGTST (Diag Test)
00 Test Print OPTION
REASON (Reason
01 Digital Input Test Data (Bit) (Option Status)
Ignored)
02 Digital Output Test [ 0 = Off , 1 = Installed ]
03 Analog Input Test 7 - -
04 Analog Output Test 6 - -
05 EEPROM Read Full paper on the Top Cover
5 -
06 EEPROM Write Assembly.
07 EEPROM Initialize 4 Paper jam MSI Assembly
0F - Feeder Unit (Cassette 2,
3 Life over
Cassette 3, Cassette 4)
FF All Tests (To Stop all tests)
2 Size mismatch -

 DGST/MACREV parameter codes 1


0
No paper
Unknown command
-
-

Table 4-71. DGST/MACREV parameter codes


MACREV
Data (Hex) DGST (Diag State)
(Machine Revision)
06 Pass (Finished Successfully) -
07 Fail (Finished with Failure) The printer

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-59


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.8 Error/Status Code Example)

You can identify an error/status code of this printer from the following
C1-04
statuses in the Printing/Status Control in the command/status category:
SSENG, SSCONS, SSTRAY, SSJAM, SSHW, SSLIFE, SSOPEN and
SSWARN.
A detection error is set by bit in the parameter in each status. (For
details on the parameters, see Section 4.2.7 “Command/Status List”.)
Section 2 Troubleshooting lists the error/status codes that have the Parameter 1 -> 04h (Bit 2: ON): No Fuser Oil
same status codes. SSCON status
NOTE: In Section 2 Troubleshooting, a “-” is used in place of a space
between bytes.
Example)

C5-00-20-00-00

Parameter 2 -> 20h (Bit 5: ON):


Process Motor Assembly error

Parameter 1 -> 00h


SSHW status
Transfer the previous MCU PWB Engine Status to the new MCU PWB

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-60


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

4.2.9 Transfer MCU PWB Board NVRAM Engine Status to the New Board
To transfer the engine status data in the previous MCU PWB NVRAM to appears confirming that the "LOG file has been edited as AT file"
the new MCU PWB, follow the steps below. and saved with the “.AT” extension. Press the Return key again to
close this program.
1. Locate the C_READ_E.AT and CVTLOGAT.EXE files in the
“TOOL\DIAG\AT_FILE” folder of the SELF TRAINING KIT CD- 8. Turn the printer off, and replace the old MCU PWB with the new
ROM, and copy the files to the “Renoir Service Commander one.
2.01\AUTO“ in the folder that contains Diagnostic Commander.
9. Install the Diagnostic Board in the printer, connect it to the PC again,
2. Install the Diagnostic Board instead of the MAIN CONTROLLER and turn the printer on. Execute the Diagnostic Commander again.
PWB to the printer, connect it to the PC with the serial I/F, and turn
the printer on. Then execute the “”Renoir Service Commander” on 10. Choose “NVM Write” on the “Service” menu.*
the Windows 95.
11. Right-button click in the background (gray area) to open “Log
3. From the “Auto” menu, click “File Open”, and open the Window”, and choose “Log Clear” to close the “Log Window”.
“C_READ_E.AT” file.
12. Choose “File Open” on the Auto menu, and in the Auto folder open
4. Select “Connect”, “Sync”, and then “Start”. The printer perform the the file you named and saved in a previous step (xxxxxxxx.AT).
engine initialization when the printer accept the program.
13. Select Connect, Sync, and then Start. The printer perform the
5. Right-click in the background (gray area) inside the Auto menu's engine initialization when the printer accept the program.
frame, and click “Log Window Open”. The current data stored in the
14. Close the Diagnostic Commander, and turn off the printer.
installed MCU PWB NVRAM appears in the “Log Window”.
15. Replace the Diagnostic Board with the CONTROLLER PWB.
6. After checking the data in the Log Window, right-button click in the
window and then click “Log Save”. Give the file a name, up to eight 16. Print the engine status sheet, and make sure that all of the old
characters long and ending with the .LOG extension, and save it in counter readings have been transferred to the new MCU PWB.
the Auto folder.
* If the newly installed MCU PWB has been used before, choose Slave
7. Select and execute the “CVTLOGAT.EXE” file in the "Renoir
Initialize and turn the printer off and back on before choosing NVM
Service Commander 2.01\AUTO " folder, and in the menu that
Write.
appears enter the full name of the log file you saved in the previous
step. Then press the Return key following the menu. A message

Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS 4-61


CHAPTER

5
TROUBLESHOOTING
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

Contents
OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 1 FIP-1.29 ENVIRONMENT SENSOR Related Error ..........................45
Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................................1 FIP-1.30 ROTARY MOTOR ASSY (HP Detection) Related Error .....46
Self-Diagnostic Function by LCD Message................................................1 FIP-1.31 WASTE TONER BOX is Out ..............................................47
Status Message ....................................................................................3 FIP-1.32 MCU PWB MEMORY (RAM) Error .....................................48
Error Message ......................................................................................4 FIP-1.33 TONER CARTRIDGE Y/M/C/K is Out ................................49
Warning Message ......................................................................................9 FIP-1.34 PCDC Error ........................................................................49
Service-Call Error messages....................................................................12 FIP-1.35 ADC SENSOR Error ...........................................................50
LEVEL 1 FIP (FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURE)..................................... 14 FIP-1.36 Periodically Replaced Part - End Of Life ............................51
FIP-1.1 Y/M/C/K TONER CARTRIDGE TONER is Out ......................15 FIP-1.37 No Power is Applied. ..........................................................52
FIP-1.2 WASTE TONER BOX is Full ................................................16 FIP-1.38 Abnormal Print Motion ........................................................53
FIP-1.3 FUSER OIL in the OIL ROLL ASSY is Out ...........................17 FIP-1.39 CONTROLLER PWB Firmware Related Error ...................54
FIP-1.4 Paper Out - Cassette 1 .........................................................18 FIP-1.40 DIMM (SLOT P) Related Error ...........................................54
FIP-1.5 Paper Out - MSI Tray ...........................................................19 FIP-1.41 SD-RAM (SLOT S0, S1, S2) Related Error ........................55
FIP-1.6 DRUM CARTRIDGE Related Problem .................................20 FIP-1.42 CONTROLLER PWB IC8, IC9 Related Error .....................55
FIP-1.7 Paper Jam - Exit ...................................................................21 FIP-1.43 DIMM Related Error ............................................................56
FIP-1.8 Paper Jam - REGI. ...............................................................22 FIP-1.44 DIMM (Slot A, B) Related Error ..........................................56
FIP-1.9 Paper Jam - FUSER .............................................................23 FIP-1.45 CONTROLLER PWB EEPROM (IC3) Related Error ..........57
FIP-1.10 Wrong Paper Size .............................................................25 FIP-1.46 CONTROLLER PWB ASIC (IC22, IC23) Related Error .....57
FIP-1.11 OHP Sheet is Improperly Set .............................................26 FIP-1.47 CONTROLLER PWB and Other Hardware Related Errors 58
FIP-1.12 Paper Exit - Static Jam .......................................................27 FIP-1.48 “FRONT COVER OPEN” ....................................................59
FIP-1.13 Paper REGI. - Static Jam ...................................................27 FIP-1.49 “PAPER UNIT OPEN” ........................................................60
FIP-1.14 PAPER Static Jam - FUSER ..............................................28 FIP-1.50 “EXIT COVER OPEN” ........................................................61
FIP-1.15 2ND BTR Resistance Error .................................................29 FIP-1.51 “FUSER UNIT OPEN” ........................................................62
FIP-1.16 MAIN FUSER ASSY Related Error .....................................30 FIP-1.52 “PAPER OUT LC1” .............................................................63
FIP-1.17 OIL ROLL ASSY is Out ......................................................31 LEVEL 2 FIP (FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURE) .................................... 64
FIP-1.18 MAIN FUSER ASSY is Out .................................................32 FIP-2.1 LVPS 5VDC is Defective .......................................................64
FIP-1.19 DRUM CARTRIDGE is Out ................................................33 FIP-2.2 LVPS 24VDC is Defective ....................................................65
FIP-1.20 High Resolution Error .........................................................34 FIP-2.3 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR is Defective .............................68
FIP-1.21 MAIN FUSER ASSY Overheat Error ..................................35 FIP-2.4 LOW PAPER SENSOR is Defective ....................................69
FIP-1.22 ROS ASSY Related Error ...................................................36 FIP-2.5 SIZE SWITCH ASSY is Defective ........................................70
FIP-1.23 PROCESS MOTOR ASSY Related Error ...........................37 FIP-2.6 FEED SOLENOID is Defective .............................................71
FIP-1.24 MCU PWB EEPROM Error .................................................38 FIP-2.7 MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR is Defective ...............................72
FIP-1.25 CASSETTE 1 is Out ...........................................................39 FIP-2.8 MSI LONG N/P SENSOR is Defective .................................73
FIP-1.26 High Density Error ..............................................................40 FIP-2.9 MSI EDGE SENSOR is Defective ........................................74
FIP-1.27 Low Density Error ...............................................................41 FIP-2.10 MSI CLUTCH is Defective ..................................................75
FIP-1.28 P/H MOTOR Related Error ................................................43 FIP-2.11 PICK UP SOLENOID is Defective ......................................76
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

FIP-2.12 FRONT OHP SENSOR is Defective ...................................77 FIP-3.9 Creased paper ....................................................................116
FIP-2.13 REAR OHP SENSOR is Defective .....................................78 FIP-3.10 Improper fusing .................................................................117
FIP-2.14 REGI. SENSOR is Defective ..............................................79
FIP-2.15 REGI. CLUTCH is Defective ...............................................80
FIP-2.16 PRE-REGI. CLUTCH is Defective ......................................81
FIP-2.17 WASTE TONER SENSOR is Defective ..............................82
FIP-2.18 TONER BOX SENSOR is Defective ...................................83
FIP-2.19 ROS ASSY is Defective ......................................................84
FIP-2.20 ADC SENSOR is Defective ................................................86
FIP-2.21 ADC SOLENOID is Defective .............................................87
FIP-2.22 CARTRIDGE SENSOR is Defective ...................................88
FIP-2.23 USED CART. SENSOR is Defective ..................................89
FIP-2.24 ROTARY SENSOR is Defective .........................................90
FIP-2.25 TRO SENSOR is Defective ................................................91
FIP-2.26 BTR CAM SOLENOID is Defective ....................................92
FIP-2.27 FUSER IN SENSOR is Defective .......................................93
FIP-2.28 FUSER EXIT SENSOR is Defective ...................................94
FIP-2.29 TEMP. SENSOR ASSEMBLY is Defective .........................95
FIP-2.30 OIL CAM SOLENOID is Defective ......................................96
FIP-2.31 CLEANER CAM SOLENOID is Defective ...........................97
FIP-2.32 TOP EXIT SENSOR is Defective ........................................98
FIP-2.33 PROCESS MOTOR ASSY is Defective ..............................99
FIP-2.34 P/H MOTOR ASSY is Defective .......................................100
FIP-2.35 ROTARY MOTOR ASSY is Defective ..............................101
FIP-2.36 DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY is Defective ...........................102
FIP-2.37 DEVE. CLUTCH ASSY is Defective. ................................102
FIP-2.38 HVPS is Defective ............................................................103
FIP-2.39 Electrical Noise .................................................................105
PRINT QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................. 106
Print Quality Troubleshooting Entry Chart..............................................106
Print Quality FIP .....................................................................................107
FIP-3.1 Low image density ...............................................................108
FIP-3.2 Blank prints .........................................................................109
FIP-3.3 Black prints .........................................................................110
FIP-3.4 White/light deletion along the Paper Feed Direction ...........111
FIP-3.5 White/Shady deletion lines appear vertically
to the paper feeding direction .............................................112
FIP-3.6 Black/Color Spots ...............................................................113
FIP-3.7 Toner Smearing ..................................................................114
FIP-3.8 Skew ...................................................................................115
EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

5.1 Overview 5.1.2 Self-Diagnostic Function by LCD Message


This printer is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. If the printer
Types of error occur to a page printer vary widely, such as poor print
detects an error, it indicates the error information with the LED lamps on
quality or abnormal operation, and it makes identification of failed part
the LCD panel.
and component more difficult. For easy and efficient repair, this section
describes troubleshooting procedures using LCD messages and typical
The LED messages fall into the following 4 categories:
types of abnormal output.
n Status message: Shows the printer status.

5.1.1 Troubleshooting Procedure n Error message: Shows the error status.

V e r ify in g r e a p p e a r a n c e o f th e tr o u b le n Warning message: Shows the warning status.

Id e n tify in g th e tr o u b le b a s e d o n th e n Service-call error message: Shows the fatal error status.


L C D m e s s a g e s in S e c tio n 5 .1 .2 .
See the LCD massage list in the following.

H a s th e tr o u b le r e c u r r e d ?
Table 5-1. LCD Message List (1/3)
LED Description
Y e s N o Message Category Refer to
On Line Continue
Check OHP Sheet Off Off Error Table 5-6
Check Paper Size On Off Warning Table 5-15
T o u b le s h o o tin g Display at power on Off Off Status -
1 . G o to S e c tio n "5 .2 F IP 1 ". Exiting Paper Jam Off Off Error Table 5-6
2 . G o to S e c tio n "5 .3 F IP 2 ". Exit Cover Open Off Off Error Table 5-8
3 . G o to S e c tio n "5 .4 P r in t Q u a lity
Feed Jam Off Off Error Table 5-7
T r o u b le s h o o tin g " .
4 . F u rth e r tro u b le s h o o tin g r e fe r r in g to Feeder Cover Open Off Off Error Table 5-9
C h a p te r 2 , C h a p te r 4 , a n d A p p e n d ix . Format Error DIMM g On Off Warning Table 5-15
Form Feed Off Off Status Table 5-5
(Displayed during test print)
(PJL RDYMSG)
M a in te n a n c e Front Cover Open Off Off Error Table 5-8
Fuser Unit Open Off Off Error Table 5-8
G o to C h a p te r 6 " M a in te n a n c e " .
Illegal Aux I/F Card Off Off Error Table 5-13
Illegal DIMM g Off Off Error Table 5-13
Figure 5-1. Troubleshooting Flowchart Image Optimum On Off Warning Table 5-15

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-1


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 5-2. LCD Message List (2/3) Table 5-3. LCD Message List (3/3)
LED Description LED Description
Message Category Reference Message Category Reference
On Line Continue On Line Continue
Insert Oil Roll Off Off Error Table 5-8 Turn Paper Off Off Error Table 5-10
Insert Photocondctr Off Off Error Table 5-7 uuuu Toner Crtg Out *5 Off Off Error Table 5-7
Insert sss *1 Off Off Error Table 5-9 uuuu Toner Low *5 On Off Warning Table 5-16
Insert Waste T Box Off Off Error Table 5-8 uuuu Toner Out *5 Off Off Error Table 5-9
Irregular Density Off Off Error Table 5-7 Warning Photocondctr On Off Warning Table 5-16
Maintenance Req hhhh *2 On Off Warning Table 5-17 Warming Up On Off Status Table 5-4
Manual Feed sss tttt *1 *3 Off Off Error Table 5-10 Waste T Box Nearfull On Off Warning Table 5-16
Mem Overflow Off Blinking Error Table 5-12 Writing Data DIMM On Off Status Table 5-5
Menus Locked On Off Warning Table 5-17 Writing Data RAM On Off Status Table 5-5
(Panel-setting display) (PJL OPTMSG)
Need Memory On Off Warning Table 5-15 (PJL STMSG)
Oil Roll Near Empty On Off Warning Table 5-17 Writing DIMM A On Off Status Table 5-5
Paper Jam Off Off Error Table 5-6 Writing DIMM P On Off Status Table 5-5
Paper Out sss tttt *1 *3 Off Off Error Table 5-11 Write Error Data DIM Off Off Error Table 5-14
Paper Set sss tttt *1 *3 Off Off Error Table 5-11 Write Error Data RAM Off Off Error Table 5-14
Paper Unit Open Off Off Error Table 5-9 Write Error DIMM A Off Off Error Table 5-13
Photocondctr Trouble Off Off Error Table 5-8 Write Error DIMM P Off Off Error Table 5-13
Print overrun Off Blinking Error Table 5-12 Wrong Photoconductor Off Off Error Table 5-8
Ready On Off Status Table 5-5 Notes:
Regulating Printer On Off Status Table 5-4
1. sss: Shows Printing Menu’s Paper Source Value (If value is other than “Auto”.)
Replace Photocondctr Off Off Error Table 5-9 2. hhhh: See Table 5-17.
Replace Waste T Box Off Off Error Table 5-10 3. tttt: Shows Printing Menu’s Page Size value.
Replace Oil Roll Off Off Error Table 5-10 4. effff: Refer to Section 5.1.4, “Service-Call Error”.
Reset Off Off Status Table 5-4 5. uuuu=YMCK, Displays relevant letters only.
Reset All Off Off Status Table 5-4
Reset to Save Off Off Status Table 5-4
Self Test Blink Off Status Table 5-4
Service Req effff *4 On On Service-call Table 5-20
error Table 5-21
Table 5-22
Table 5-23
Standby Levelv On Off Status Table 5-5

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-2


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

5.1.2.1 Status Message Table 5-5. Status Message List (2/2)


The printer shows the status message only when: Ref Message Explanation Notes
7 Standby Levelv Another "Ready" message. Indicates that
o No error has occurred. the printer is in power-save standby state,
where v indicates the level.
o The printer is initializing. Note only one status message is applied to 1 = Standby Level 1, 2 = Standby Level 2
describe the current printer status. 8 Ready The printer is in an on line status.
9 Form Feed Remaining print data is being printed and
See Table 5-4 and Table 5-5 which list the status messages and their the paper is exiting. Please wait a
descriptions. moment.
10 Writing DIMM A Indicates the printer is writing data to the
ROM module inserted in DIMM slot A. Do
Table 5-4. Status Message List (1/2) not remove the module or switch off
power until finished.*
Ref Message Explanation Notes
11 Writing DIMM P Indicates the printer is writing data to the
1 Self Test Testing and initializing the printer. ROM module inserted in DIMM slot P. Do
2 Reset All While the printer is warming up, "Reset By Warm not remove the module or switch off
All" appears if the printer is reset. During boot power until finished.*
normal operation "Reset" appears. 12 Writing Data Indicates the printer is writing data to the
3 Reset Resets the printer to default settings Resetting DIMM program ROM module.*
during normal operation. 13 Writing Data RAM Indicates the printer is writing data to the
4 Reset to Save Appears when the print settings were code table of the RAM.*
changed during printing. Perform one of
the following to clear the message. * Do not turn the printer nor remove the module.
1. Press the Continue button or the On
Line button to override the error and
continue printing. However, the
changes are not effective until the
ongoing job is completed.
2. Reset the printer or perform a warm
boot for a instant change of the setting,
but be aware that this erases any print
data in the printer's memory.
5 Warming Up A "Ready" message that indicates the
printer is warming up.
6 Regulating A "Ready" message that indicates the
Printer printer engine is adjusting.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-3


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

5.1.2.2 Error Message Table 5-7. Error Message List (2/9)


Error messages are indicated according to priority. Therefore, if multiple
error have been detected, the message with the highest priority appears o Feed Jam
in the LCD. LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
See Table 5-6 to Table 5-14 for the error messages and their Explanation A paper jam occurred near the paper entry slot. If a simultaneous
jam occurs somewhere else along the paper feed path, an error
descriptions and solutions.
message for the paper jam with the highest priority will appear.
Table 5-6. Error Message List (1/9) Solution Clear the jam from the tray, cassette 1, cassette 2, cassette 3, or
cassette 4. Then open the feed unit (and feeder cover if the Large
Capacity Paper Unit is installed), check for paper, and then close
o Check OHP Sheet
the unit (and the feeder cover if the Large Capacity Paper Unit is
LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
installed). Opening the unit (feeder cover with the Large Capacity
Explanation An irregular OHP sheet was fed into the printer or an OHP sheet Paper Unit installed) clears the error. (The printer resumes
was fed upside down and caused a paper jam in the MSI entry printing from the data that was affected by the jam.
slot.
Solution lIf the OHP sheet is the correct size and type, try turning the o Irregular Density
sheet over. LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
lIf the OHP sheet does not meet the specifications for this printer, Explanation The print data sent to the printer requires too much toner, YMCK
load the proper OHP sheet into the tray. Open the feed unit, density exceeds 280%, near the top edge. A paper jam may occur
remove the jammed OHP sheet, and close the unit. (You must near the paper entry slot.
open the feed unit to cleat the error.) The printer warms up and Solution Open the paper feed unit, clear the jam, and then close the unit.
resumes printing starting from the data affected by the jam. Stop the print job and turn the printer off and back on to clear the
o Exiting Paper Jam data.
LED status On Line = off, Continue = off o uuuu Toner Crtg Out
Explanation A paper jam occurred near the paper exit slot. If a simultaneous
LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
jam occurs somewhere else along the paper path, an error
message for the paper jam with the highest priority will appear. Explanation One or more Toner Cartridges are not installed. The uuuu area
Solution Open the exit cover, clear the paper jam, and close the cover. identifies which Toner Cartridge is not installed in the order Y M C
Closing the cover clears the error. The printer resumes printing K. (Note the only missing Toner Cartridge (s) are indicated.)
from the data that was affected by the jam. Solution Open the front cover, install the appropriate cartridge, and close
o Paper Jam the cover to clear the error.
LED status On Line = off, Continue = off o Insert Photocondctr
Explanation A paper jam occurred in the vicinity of the fuser. If a simultaneous LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
jam occurs somewhere else along the paper feed path, an error
Explanation The photoconductor unit is not installed or it is installed
message for the paper jam with the highest priority will appear.
incorrectly.
Solution Open the fuser unit, clear the jam, and then close the unit. Closing
the unit clears the error. The printer resumes printing from the Solution Open the front cover, install (or reinstall) the photoconductor unit,
data that was affected by the jam. and close the cover. Then turn the printer off and back on.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-4


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 5-8. Error Message List (3/9) Table 5-9. Error Message List (4/9)

o Insert Waste T Box o Paper Unit Open


LED status On Line = off, Continue = off LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
Explanation The Waste Toner Collector is not installed.
Explanation The paper feed unit is open.
Solution Open the front cover, install the Waste Toner Collector, and close
the cover to clear the error. Solution Close the unit to clear the error.

o Insert Oil Roll o Feeder Cover Open


LED status On Line = off, Continue = off LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
Explanation The Fuser Oil Roll is not installed. Explanation The feeder cover is open.
Solution Open the front cover, install the Fuser Oil Roll, and close the Solution Close the cover to clear the error.
cover to clear the error.
o Insert sss
o Wrong Photoconductor
LED status On Line = off, Continue = off LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
Explanation Incorrect photoconductor unit is installed. Explanation Feed device indicated by sss is open. (Where sss is Printing
Solution Open the Fuser Unit, remove the old photoconductor unit, install menu’s Paper Source value [provided that value is other than
the correct photoconductor unit, and close the Fuser Unit. Turn “Auto” or “MP”].
the printer off and back on. Solution Close the indicated device.
o Photocondctr Trouble o uuuu Toner Out
LED status On Line = off, Continue = off LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
Explanation The Photoconductor unit is not working properly.
Explanation The printer detected that one or more Toner Cartridges is empty
Solution Open the front cover, replace the photoconductor unit, and close and needs to be replaced. The uuuu area identifies which Toner
the cover to clear the error. Cartridge is empty, Y M C or K. Printing stops since continuing to
o Front Cover Open print without toner may cause damage to the engine.
LED status On Line = off, Continue = off Solution Open the front cover, replace the empty Toner Cartridge with a
Explanation The front cover is open. new one, and close the cover to clear the error.
Solution Close the cover to clear the error.
o Replace Photocondctr
o Exit Cover Open LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
Explanation The engine has detected that the photoconductor has expired.
Explanation The exit cover is open.
Printing stopped.
Solution Close the cover to clear the error.
Solution Open the front cover, replace the photoconductor unit with a new
o Fuser Unit Open one, and close the cover. Then turn the printer off and back on.
LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
Explanation The fuser unit is open.
Solution Close the unit to clear the error.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-5


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 5-10. Error Message List (5/9) Table 5-11. Error Message List (6/9)

o Replace Waste T Box o Paper Out s s s s s t t t t


LED status On Line = off, Continue = off LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
Explanation The engine has detected that the Waste Toner Collector is full. Explanation 1. There is no paper loaded in the selected paper source
Printing stopped. s s s s s.
Solution Open the front cover, replace the Waste Toner Collector with a 2. Paper is set in none of the paper sources. (In this case,
new one, and close the cover to clear the error. the paper source previously used is indicated. If this
o Replace Oil Roll condition is detected at power on, however, “LC1” is
LED status On Line = off, Continue = off indicated.)
Explanation Engine detected that fuser oil has run out. Print stopped. “t t t t” shows the paper size selected.
Solution Open the fuser unit, replace the Fuser Oil Roll with a new one, Solution 1. Load the correct size of paper t t t t in the appropriate paper
and close the cover to clear the error. source s s s s s to clear the error.
2. Load the correct size of paper in any of the paper sources to
o Turn Paper clear the error.
LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
o Paper Set s s s s s t t t t
Explanation The paper is loaded with the shorter edge first.
LED status 1/2. On Line = off, Continue = blinking
Solution Rotate the paper to load it with the longer edge first.
Explanation When the Size Ignore setting on the printer's Device menu is set
o Manual Feed s s s t t t t to Off, if the paper loaded in the selected paper source s s s s s
LED status On Line = off, Continue = off does not match the selected paper size t t t t.
Explanation When “Manual Feed” is enabled by the command or panel Solution 1. If the Auto Cont setting on the printer's Device menu is
operation, print is requested. disabled, select and follow one of the solutions below.
Solution 1. Set paper in the indicated paper source and press the Continue lSet the paper of size t t t t in the paper source s s s s s and
or On Line button, and the printer prints on a page and press the Continue button. The error clears and the printer
indicates the same error when loading paper for the next page. resumes printing on the paper from the paper source s s s s s.
When copy was selected, result varies depending on the button lPress the Continue button, without changing the paper
pressed, Continue or On Line. If the button pressed was or paper source, to clear the error and print on paper
Continue, the error does not occur during copying, except for from the paper source s s s s s.
the case paper has run out. On the other hand, if the On Line lReset the printer or perform a warm boot.
button was used, the error message appears after each page 2. If the Auto Cont setting on the printer's Device menu is
including copied page. “Check Paper Size” error does not enabled, the printer will automatically override the paper
occur if “Size Ignore” in config menu is disabled. mismatch error and print on paper from the paper source s s s
2. Press the Continue button or On Line button without setting any s s.
paper in the indicated paper source. Paper is loaded from the
available paper source with the highest priority. If neither of the
paper sources has paper in it, the same error occurs. (This
circumstance does not generate “Paper Out” error. Other
actions affect same as described in Solution 1.
3. Perform Reset or Warm boot.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-6


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 5-12. Error Message List (7/9) Table 5-13. Error Message List (8/9)

o Print Overrun o Illegal Aux I/F Card


LED status 1/2. On Line = off, Continue = blinking LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
Explanation The print data is too complicated and the printer cannot process Explanation An incompatible optional interface card has been installed.
the data quickly enough Solution Turn off the printer and remove the incompatible card.
Solution 1. If the Auto Cont setting on the printer's Device menu is
o Illegal DIMM g
disabled, select and follow one of the solutions below.
lPress the Continue button and if there is enough LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
memory, the printer will attempt to print one more time, Explanation An illegal ROM module has been installed to the slot g (g=A/B).
which may bring up the same error. However if there is Illegal DIMM for this error is defined as a ROM module that can
not enough memory or if the Print Overrun error recurs, not be written in and not formatted, or crashed ROM. If the printer
the data for that page will be lost and the printer will can not write on the ROM because it is not formatted, the
begin processing the next page of data. message “Format Error DIMM g” is indicated instead.
lReset the printer or perform a warm boot. Solution Turn off the printer and remove the ROM module.
2. If the Auto Cont setting on the printer's Device menu is
o Write Error DIMM A
enabled, the printer will automatically override the error and
undergo the same process as described above. LED status On Line = off, Continue = off

o Mem Overflow Explanation Attempted to write to ROM module or write operation failed to
terminate normally; ROM module is not set in the slot A.
LED status 1/2. On Line = off, Continue = blinking
Solution 1. Turn off the printer.
Explanation While processing a print job, the printer ran out of memory.
2. Perform a Reset All operation.
Recovery/continuation is not possible.
Solution 1. If the Auto Cont setting on the printer's Device menu is o Write Error DIMM P
disabled, select and follow one of the solutions below. LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
lPress the Continue button and if the error was caused Explanation Attempted to write to ROM module; write operation failed to
because graphic data exceeded buffer size, the printer ignores terminate normally; data reception failed; there was an error in the
the command which caused the error ejects the page before checksum for the received data; failed to secure receive-data
the error. On the other hand, the cause of the error was a area; or specified device value was improper.
failure in registering the font macro pattern or so, the printer
Solution 1. Turn off the printer.
ignores the bad command and continues to print.
lReset the printer or perform a warm boot. 2. Perform a Reset All operation.
2. If the Auto Cont setting on the printer's Device menu is 3. If error recurs, service the printer.
enabled, the printer will automatically override the paper error
and undergoes the same process depending on the cause, as
described above.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-7


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 5-14. Error Message List (9/9)

o Write Error Data DIM


LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
Explanation Attempted to write to ROM module; write operation failed to
terminate normally; block 2 missing from the program DIMM (slot
P); specified device value was improper. (Manual explanation
shall identify this as a system-device write error caused by
inappropriate attempt to write to the system.)
Solution 1. Turn off the printer.
2. Perform a Reset All operation.
3. If error recurs, service the printer.
o Write Error Data RAM
LED status On Line = off, Continue = off
Explanation No data area within RAM allocated as code area; or write
operation failed to terminate normally. (The explanation in the
manual shall identify this as a system-device write error caused by
an inappropriate attempt to write to system.)
Solution 1. Turn off the printer.
2. Perform a Reset All operation.
3. If error recurs, service the printer.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-8


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

5.1.3 Warning Message Table 5-16. Warning Message List (2/4)


Warning errors have no effect on printer operation. o Image Optimum
LED Message No effect on LED state.
Explanation There was not enough memory to process the print data and
Table 5-15. Warning Message List (1/4) the printer optimized the data (reduced the resolution).
o Format Error ROM g Solution This message remains even after the print job has finished
LED Message No effect on LED state. printing. Perform one of the following to clear the warning.
1. Press the Continue button to clear the warning.
Explanation It is possible to format the ROM module, but the installed
ROM module in slot A or B is wrong format. 2. Perform a Reset operation or warm boot to exit while
If the module has not previously been formatted, there is no the printer is processing data.
problem. If the module has been previously o Check Paper Size
formatted, it was not formatted properly or the memory was
LED Message No effect on LED state.
damaged. Either reformat the module or turn
off the printer and remove the module. Explanation This warning only appears when the Size Ignore setting on
the Device menu is disabled.
Solution Perform one of the following to clear the warning.
The selected paper size (PAGE SIZE) and the size of the
1. Press the Continue button.
paper loaded in the selected paper source do not match.
2. Turn off the printer and remove the ROM module. When the paper was fed from the paper tray, if this error does
3. Perform a Reset operation. not occur, the value for MP tray size in the printing menu is
o Need Memory replaced with the value for the PAGE SIZE.
Depending on the paper size, the printer may not be able to
LED Message No effect on LED state.
detect some paper size mismatches.
Explanation While processing print data, the printer ran out of memory and Note: When this warning occurs, be sure to check to
attempted to compress the data. However the printer see if any pages (of the wrong size) were printed before
reached its compression limit and generated this warning. In the printer detected the paper size mismatch.
some cases the printer can process the data and print
Solution Perform one of the following to clear the warning.
even after this warning message appears. If the user presses
the Continue button and the printer reaches the 1. Press the Continue button to clear the error.
compression limit again while attempting to process the data, 2. Perform a Reset operation or warm boot.
the printer will reduce the resolution of the print data o u u u u Toner Low
and will generate an "Image Optimum" warning. (This
message has higher priority. Note: It is not possible to change LED Message No effect on LED state.
the compression limit for this printer. Explanation The engine has detected (by measuring the dispense time)
Solution This messages remains even after the print job has finished the toner level for one or more Toner Cartridges has fallen
printing. Perform one of the following to clear the warning. below 80%. The uuuu area indicates which Toner Cartridge is
low, Y, M, C, or K.
1. Press the Continue button to clear the error and try to
print the remainder of the print job. Solution See the next table.
2. Perform a Reset operation or warm boot.
Note: Installation of additional memory (optional SIMM) is
recommended.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-9


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 5-17. Warning Message List (3/4) Table 5-18. Warning Message List (4/4)
o u u u u Toner Low (continued) o Oil Roll Near Empty
Solution Do one or more of the following to clear the warning message. LED Message No effect on LED state.
1. Press the Continue button. Explanation The fuser oil is running low. (The engine's detection system
2. Perform a Reset operation. calculates the remaining level of fuser oil, and generates
3. Replace the indicated toner cartridge with a new one. this message when it determines that the fuser oil will run out
after printing 1,000 more pages (A4, 5% duty, black print:color
o Warning Photocondctr print=1:1).
LED Message No effect on LED state. Solution It is recommended that the Fuser Oil Roll be replaced when
Explanation The photoconductor unit is approaching the end of its life. The this message appears (although it is possible to continue
engine's detection system calculates the remaining using the existing oil roll until the "Replace Oil Roll" error
lifetime, and generates this message when the number of occurs). Do any of the following to clear the warning
pages left approaches: message.
Color print: 1,125 pages (A4, 4.5% duty) 1. Press the Continue button.
Black print: 4,500 pages (A4, 4.5% duty) 2. Perform a Reset operation.
Solution It is recommended that the photoconductor unit be replaced 3. Replace the Fuser Oil Roll with a new one.
when this message appears (although it is possible to
o Maintenance Req hhhh *1
continue using the existing unit until the "Replace
Photocondctr" error occurs). Do any of the following to clear LED Message No effect on LED state.
the warning message. Explanation A warning condition that cannot be corrected by the user has
1. Press the Continue button. occurred, and this condition requires maintenance.
2. Perform a Reset operation. Specifically, one or more of the internal units that cannot be
replaced by the user is nearing the end of its life.
3. Replace the photoconductor unit with a new one.
Solution Although the user can continue to operate the printer until the
o Waste T Box Nearfull "Service Req effff" error occurs, the user should write down
LED Message No effect on LED state. the warning code and call for service before the service
Explanation The Waste Toner Collector is almost full. (The engine's required state is reached; otherwise the printer may stop
detection system calculates the level of waste toner, and working partway through a print job. Do either of the following
generates this message when the Waste Toner Collector is to clear the warning message.
full. 1. Press the Continue button.
Solution It is recommended that the Waste Toner Collector be 2. Perform a Reset operation.
replaced when this message appears (although it is possible o Menus Locked
to continue using the existing box until the "Replace Waste T
Box" error occurs). Do any of the following to clear the LED Message No effect on LED state.
warning message. Explanation Panel setting change was attempted though the “Panel Lock”
1. Press the Continue button. is able in EJL.
2. Perform a Reset operation. Solution Press Continue button.
3. Replace the Waste Toner Collector with a new one.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-10


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

*1: See the following table which lists the Maintenance-Call Error
Message.

Table 5-19. Maintenance-Call Error Message List


Warning content Fuser Unit IBT Cleaner 2nd BTR
Code: hhhh near end of life near end of life near end of life
0001 A I I
0002 I A I
0003 A A I
0004 I I A
0005 A I A
0006 I A A
0007 A A A

NOTE:A: Warning is active.


I: Warning is inactive.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-11


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

5.1.4 Service-Call Error messages Table 5-21. Engine Related Service-Call Error
Error Type Error Code
If the error detected is a user-recoverable one, all LEDs on the LCD e ffff
Explanation Refer to:
panel come on to indicate Service-Call Error. The types of the error vary
E 0003 Fuser Unit error (end of life) FIP-1.36
depending on the location and condition, and they are identified by the E 0008 Bad Engine NVRAM FIP-1.24
error codes indicated on the LCD panel. make a note of the error E 0014 Engine communication error FIP-1.47
information currently indicated and turn the printer off and back on. If
E 0020 ADC sensor is dirty FIP-1.35
the same error is still indicated, service the printer by checking/ E 0022 Bad PCDC FIP-1.34
replacing the relevant part(s). E 0023 IBT Cleaner end of life FIP-1.36
E 0024 2nd BTR end of life FIP-1.36
Table 5-20. Service-Call Error Classification E 0025 Reserved −
Service Call Error effff E 0030 Fuser Unit abnormality (timeout) FIP-1.16
LED Message All on E 0031 Fuser Unit abnormality (no fuser unit) FIP-1.18
Explanation The "effff" codes vary to indicate the nature of the service call. E 0032 Fuser Unit abnormality (overheat) FIP-1.21
e = error classification code E 0033 Fuser Unit abnormality (lamp) FIP-1.16
E = engine related error E 0034 Fuser Unit abnormality (temperature low) FIP-1.16
C = controller related error E 0035 Error at Large Capacity Paper Unit FIP-1.25
ffff: error code (see tables 5-10 and 5-11) E 0036 Bad resistance at 2nd BTR FIP-1.15
Solution 1. Turn off the printer. E 0037 Reserved −
2. Check the following regarding the RAM, DIMM, ROM E 0038 MCU PWB memory error FIP-1.32
module, and optional interface card
Make sure all boards are installed in the proper locations. E 0039 Environment sensor error FIP-1.29
Make sure all boards satisfy the specification requirements E 0040 ROS motor error FIP-1.22
and are compatible with the printer's controller. E 0041 PROCESS MOTOR ASSY (lBT) error FIP-1.23
Make sure all boards are connected properly.
E 0042 P/H motor error FIP-1.28
3. Turn the printer back on.
E 0043 Abnormal toner density (too high) FIP-1.26
4. If the same error appears, write down the code and service
the printer accordingly. E 0044 Abnormal toner density (too low) FIP-1.27
E 0045 ROTARY Home-Position sensor error FIP-1.30
See the following tables for the detailed information on the Service-Call
Error messages.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-12


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table 5-22. Controller Related Service-Call Error (1/2) Table 5-23. Controller Related Service-Call Error (2/2)
Error Error Error Error
Explanation Refer to: Explanation Refer to:
Type Code Type Code
C 0017 CPU error (undefined interrupt) FIP-1.47 C 1021 SD RAM DIMM error (Slot 1) FIP-1.41
C 0081 CPU error (TLB correction exception) FIP-1.47 C 1022 SD RAM DIMM error (Slot 2) FIP-1.41
C 0082 CPU error (TLB miss exception [Load/Fetch]) FIP-1.47 C 1100 ROM checksum error (IC9) FIP-1.42
C 0083 CPU error (TLB miss exception [Store]) FIP-1.47 C 1101 ROM checksum error (IC8) FIP-1.42
CPU error (Address-error exception [Load/ C 1120 ROM DIMM (P) checksum error (bits 0 to 7) FIP-1.43
C 0084 FIP-1.47
Fetch]) C 1121 ROM DIMM (P) checksum error (bits 8 to 15) FIP-1.43
C 0085 CPU error (Address-error exception [Store]) FIP-1.47 C 1122 ROM DIMM (P) checksum error (bits 16 to 23) FIP-1.43
C 0086 CPU error (Bus error exception [Fetch]) FIP-1.47 C 1123 ROM DIMM (P) checksum error (bits 24 to 31) FIP-1.43
C 0087 CPU error (Bus error exception [Load/Store]) FIP-1.47 C 1180 Checksum error: optional ROM module A FIP-1.44
C 0088 CPU error (SYSCALL exception) FIP-1.47 C 1181 Checksum error: optional ROM module B FIP-1.44
C 0089 CPU error (Break exception) FIP-1.47 C 1185 Unsupported ROM module FIP-1.44
C 0090 CPU error (Reserved command exception) FIP-1.47 C 1200 EEPROM (IC15) write error FIP-1.45
CPU error (Coprocessor-not-in-use EEPROM (IC15) write limit (number of writes
C 0091 FIP-1.47 C 1210 FIP-1.45
exception) reached limit)
C 0092 CPU error (FPU exception) FIP-1.47 C 1400 Engine initialization error FIP-1.47
C 0093 CPU error (TLB exception) FIP-1.47 C 1500 CCNV (IC22) hardware error FIP-1.46
C 0094 CPU error (XTLB exception) FIP-1.47 C 1600 CPGI (IC23) hardware error FIP-1.46
C 0095 CPU error (cache exception) FIP-1.47 C 1999 Other hardware error FIP-1.47
C 0096 CPU error (Trap exception) FIP-1.47 C 2000 Software error* FIP-1.47
C 0097 CPU error (FPU exception) FIP-1.47
C 0098 CPU error (Watch exception) FIP-1.47 *: If soft errors occur, you may want to use the #F691 Diagnostic Tool to
0128~ perform “Slave Initialize” (from the service menu). After performing
C CPU error (Undefined trap) FIP-1.47
0254 the command, trun the printer off and back on. For details, see
C 0255 CPU error (NMI exception) FIP-1.47 Chatper 4.
C 0256 CPU error (Division by zero) FIP-1.47
C 0257 CPU error (Operation overflow) FIP-1.47
C 0258 CPU error (break) FIP-1.47
C 0800 IPL error (Controller problem) FIP-1.42
Error in standard RAM (Capacity below
C 1002 FIP-1.41
standard, or other)
C 1010 Verify error FIP-1.41
C 1020 SD RAM DIMM error (Slot 0) FIP-1.41

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-13


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

5.2 Level 1 FIP (Fault Isolation Procedure)


This section describes how to isolate the faulty unit (assembly) by using
the Level 1 FIPs.

C H E C K <Preliminary inspection>
P O IN T
In each FIP, you are required to perform the
“Preliminary inspection” prior to any other actions.
The Preliminary inspection involves the following:
n Check for any part that does not meet the
specifications.
n Check if any part has been installed improperly.
n Check for part that is damaged, deformed, smeared,
or lodged with foreign matter.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-14


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.1 Y/M/C/K TONER CARTRIDGE TONER is Out

Finding & Remedy


Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Developer Assy, DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
DEVE.CONTACT ASSY, ADC SENSOR ASSY,
MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. (10 Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
pages for each single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Is the result normal?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 4.
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
Check: Dispense Motor installation
3 2.36 "DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY is Reinstall the DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY.
Is the Dispense Motor installed properly? Defective".
If the problem still occurs, go to step 5.
Check: Dispense Motor
l Is the Dispense motor working properly? (Check it by Go to FIP-2.36 "DISPENSE MOTOR
4 Go to Step 5.
using the diagnostic tool.) ASSY is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test, Device Code: 25
Check: DEVE. CONTACT ASSY Go to FIP-2.38 "HVPS is Defective"
5 l Is the contact area deformed or lodged with any Replace the DEVE. CONTACT ASSY. If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-2.19
foreign matter? "ROS ASSY is Defective".
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 8.
Check: Photo sensor surface of the ADC SENSOR • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 7.
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
6 l Is the sensor surface smeared or lodged with any 2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is Defective".
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
foreign matter? 2.20 "ADC SENSOR is Defective".
If the problem still occurs, go to step 5.
Check: ADC SENSOR
l Is the ADC SENSOR functioning properly? (Check it Go to FIP-2.20 "ADC SENSOR is
7 Replace the PCU PWB.
by using the diagnostic tool.) Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test, Device Code: 18, 33
Check: ADC SOLENOID
Go to FIP-2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is
8 l Is the ADC SOLENOID functioning properly? Replace the PCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Output test, Device code: 36
Check: Developer Assy
9 Replace the relevant Developer Assy. Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-15


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.2 WASTE TONER BOX is Full

Remedy
Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
WASTE TONER SENSOR, WASTE TONER BOX,
TONER BOX, MCU PWB
Check: Transparency area of the WASTE TONER
BOX • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 3.
l Is the transparency are in the upper part of the Replace or clean the WASTE TONER • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
2
WASTE TONER BOX smeared or lodged with any BOX. 2.17 "WASTE TONER SENSOR is
foreign matter? Defective".
l Is the sensor flag part inside the box floating?
WASTE TONER SENSOR
l Is the WASTE TONER SENSOR functioning
properly? (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Go to FIP-2.17 "WASTE TONER
3 Replace the MCU PWB.
SENSOR is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 21

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-16


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.3 FUSER OIL in the OIL ROLL ASSY is Out

Remedy
Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
OIL ROLL ASSY, CRU SWITCH ASSY, OIL CAM
ASSY
Check: CRU SWITCH ASSY
2 l Is the terminal in the CRU SWITCH ASSY properly Go to Step 3. Replace the defective part.
connected?
Check: CRU SWITCH ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the CRU SWITCH ASSY have continuity at the
3 point below? Go to Step 4. Replace the CRU SWITCH ASSY.
- Between the terminal in the CRU SWITCH ASSY
and P77
Check: OIL CAM ASSY
l Is the shaft in the OIL CAM ASSY bent?
4 Replace the OIL CAM ASSY. Go to Step 5.
l Is the pin in the OIL CAM ASSY at an incorrect
position?
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the point below?
- J71<=>J77
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the FUSER CONNECTOR.
continuity at the point below?
- P71<=>J19
Check: OIL ROLL ASSY
7 Replace the OIL ROLL ASSY. Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-17


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.4 Paper Out - Cassette 1

Remedy
Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TRAY N/P ACTUATOR, TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR,
MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Check the Controller PWB.
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. (10
2 Go to Step 3.
sheets for each of single and continuous print)
If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: BOTTOM PLATE ASSY
Remove the TURN IN CHUTE and insert the Replace the defective part, such as the
3 Go to Step 4.
UNIVERSAL CASSETTE. paper cassette.
l Does the BOTTOM PLATE ASSY properly lift up?
Check: TRAY N/P ACTUATOR
NOTE: Be sure to remove the MAIN P/H ASSY and
insert the Cassette 1 properly before the operation.
l Is the actuator properly functioning depending on the
conditions below?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
- Paper is set:
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
4 The TRAY N/P ACTUATOR is away from the Replace the defective part.
2.3 "TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR is
detection area of the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR.
Defective".
- No paper is set:
The TRAY N/P ACTUATOR is blocking the
detection area of the TRAY NO PAPER
SENSOR?
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR
l Is the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR functioning
Go to FIP-2.3 "TRAY NO PAPER
5 properly? (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
SENSOR is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 14

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-18


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.5 Paper Out - MSI Tray

Remedy
Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MSI LONG N/P SENSOR, MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR,
MCU PWB, MSI N/P ACTUATOR
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. (10 Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Run the test print again using LETTER size or smaller.
3 Go to Step 4. Go to Step 6.
l Are the outputs still abnormal?
Check: MSI N/P ACTUATOR
l Is the actuator functioning properly depending on the
conditions below?
- Paper is set: The MSI N/P ACTUATOR is away • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 7.
from the detection area of the MSI SHORT N/P • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP- Replace the defective part, such as MSI
4
SENSOR. 2.7 "MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR is N/P ACTUATOR.
- No paper is set: The MSI N/P ACTUATOR is Defective".
blocking the detection area of the MSI SHORT N/P
SENSOR?
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR
l Is the MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR functioning Go to FIP-2.7 "MSI SHORT N/P
5 Replace the MCU PWB.
properly? (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) SENSOR is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test, Device Code: 17

(To be continued)

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-19


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(Continued)

FIP-1.5 "Paper Out - MSI Tray"

Remedy
Check point
Yes No
MSI LONG N/P SENSOR installation
l Is the MSI N/P ACTUATOR properly functioning
depending on the conditions below? • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 7.
- Paper is set: The actuator is away from the • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
6 Replace the defective part.
detection area of the MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR. 2.8 "MSI LONG N/P SENSOR is
- No paper is set: The actuator is blocking the Defective".
detection area of the MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR?
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: MSI LONG N/P SENSOR
l Is the MSI LONG N/P SENSOR properly Go to FIP-2.8 "MSI LONG N/P SENSOR
7 Replace the MCU PWB.
functioning? (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test, Device Code: 18

FIP-1.6 DRUM CARTRIDGE Related Problem

Remedy
Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
DRUM CARTRIDGE, CRUM CONNECTOR ASSY,
MCU PWB
Check: CRUM CONNECTOR ASSY electrical
continuity
Replace the CRUM CONNECTOR
2 l Does the CRUM CONNECTOR ASSY have proper Go to Step 3.
ASSY.
continuity at the point below?
- J23<=>P22
Check: DRUM CARTRIDGE
3 Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE with a specified one. Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-20


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.7 Paper Jam - Exit

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MSI LONG N/P SENSOR, MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR,
MCU PWB, MSI N/P ACTUATOR
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Check the Controller PWB.
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print)
If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
3 Is the current paper curled or easy to curl? Change the paper. Go to Step 4.
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
Check: EXIT LOWER ASSY
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
4 l Is there any foreign matter or defective parts along Clean or replace the defective part.
2.32 "TOP EXIT SENSOR is
the paper path?
Defective".
Check: TOP EXIT SENSOR
l Is the TOP EXIT SENSOR functioning properly?
Go to FIP-2.32 "TOP EXIT SENSOR is
5 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Go to Step 6.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 09
Check: EXIT-2 ROLL ASSY
Clean or replace the EXIT-2 ROLL
6 l Is there any worn-out area or foreign matter in the ASSY.
Go to Step 7.
EXIT-2 ROLL ASSY?
Check: EXIT LOWER ASSY for drive transmission
l Does the EXIT LOWER ASSY transmit drive
7 properly? Replace the defective part. Go to Step 8.
l Is there any damaged gear or worn-out area in the
EXIT LOWER ASSY?
Check: P/H DRIVE ASSY
Replace or reinstall the P/H DRIVE
8 l Is P/H DRIVE ASSY installed improperly? ASSY.
Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is any gear damaged?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-21


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.8 Paper Jam - REGI.

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 REGI. SENSOR, MAIN P/H ASSY, TURN ROLL ASSY, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FEED ROLL, P/H DRIVE ASSY, FEED SOLENOID,
MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Check the Controller PWB.
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print)
If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
3 l Is curled paper or paper that is easy to curl used? Change the paper. Go to Step 4.
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
4 l Is there any foreign matter or defective part along the • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP- Clean or replace the defective part.
paper path in the MAIN P/H ASSY? 2.14 "REGI. SENSOR is Defective".
Check: REGI. SENSOR
l Is the REGI. SENSOR properly functioning? (Check
Go to FIP-2.14 "REGI. SENSOR is
5 it by using the diagnostic tool.) Go to Step 6.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 1F
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY for drive transmission
l Does the MAIN P/H ASSY transmit drive properly?
6 Replace the defective part. Go to Step 7.
l Is there any damaged gear or worn-out area in the
MAIN P/H ASSY?
Check: TURN ROLL ASSY
7 l Is there any worn-out area or foreign matter in the Clean or replace the TURN ROLL ASSY. Go to Step 8.
TURN ROLL ASSY?
Check: FEED ROLL
8 l Is there any worn-out area or foreign matter in the Clean or replace the FEED ROLL. Go to Step 9.
FEED ROLL?
Check: P/H DRIVE ASSY
Replace or reinstall the P/H DRIVE
9 l Is the P/H DRIVE ASSY installed improperly or is ASSY.
Go to Step 10.
any gear damaged?
Check: FEED SOLENOID Go to FIP-2.6 "FEED SOLENOID is
10 Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the FEED SOLENOID properly functioning? Defective".

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-22


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.9 Paper Jam - FUSER

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR, FUSER EXIT SENSOR, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER IN ACTUATOR, FUSER IN SENSOR, FUSER
DRIVE ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
3 Is the current paper curled or easy to curl? Change the paper. Go to Step 4.
Check: FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR
l Is the FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR properly functioning • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
depending on the conditions below?
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
- Paper is set: 2.28 "FUSER EXIT SENSOR is
The actuator is away from the detection area of the
4 Defective". Replace the defective part.
FUSER EXIT SENSOR.
- No paper is set:
The MSI N/P ACTUATOR is blocking the detection If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-2.27
"FUSER IN SENSOR is Defective".
area of the FUSER EXIT SENSOR?
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: FUSER EXIT SENSOR
l Is the FUSER EXIT SENSOR properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.28 "FUSER EXIT SENSOR
5 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Go to Step 6.
is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 25

(To be continued.)

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-23


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(Continued)

FIP-1.9 "Paper Jam - FUSER"

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Check: FUSER IN ACTUATOR
l Is the FUSER IN ACTUATOR functioning properly
depending on the conditions below?
- Paper is set: • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 7.
The actuator is away from the detection area of the • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
6 Replace the defective part.
FUSER IN SENSOR. 2.27 "FUSER IN SENSOR is
- No paper is set: Defective".
The MSI N/P ACTUATOR is blocking the detection
area of the FUSER IN SENSOR.
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: FUSER IN SENSOR
l Is the FUSER IN SENSOR properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.27 "FUSER IN SENSOR is
7 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Go to Step 8.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 28
Check: FUSER DRIVE ASSY
Replace or reinstall the FUSER DRIVE
8 l Is the FUSER DRIVE ASSY installed improperly? ASSY.
Go to Step 9.
l Is there any damaged gear?
Check: FUSER ASSY
9 Replace the FUSER ASSY. Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-24


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.10 Wrong Paper Size

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective
1 Go to Step 2.
SIZE SWITCH ASSY, MAIN P/H ASSY, REGI. SENSOR, part(s).
TRAY SIZE ACTUATOR, END GUIDE, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Check the Controller PWB.
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print)
If the problem still occur, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: Paper size
3 Go to Step 4. Use a specified size of paper.
l Does the size of the paper in use meet the specifications?
4 l Is the paper fed from the MSI tray? Go to Step 5. Go to Step 6.
Check: Setting size selected for the MSI
Match the sizes of the paper selected
5 l Does the paper size selected by the Diagnostic tool or Go to Step 8.
and set in the cassette.
controller PWB match the paper size in the MSI Tray?
Check: Paper size detection mechanism
l Is the combination of the On/Off setting of the paper size • With the diagnostic tool, go to step
switches on the SIZE SWITCH ASSY corresponding to the
7.
size of the paper in the paper cassette in use?
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to
- Check that the TRAY SIZE ACTUATOR move in
step 8.
6 accordance with the END GUIDE. Replace the defective part.
- Check that the TRAY SIZE ACTUATOR properly pushes
If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-
the Paper Size Switches.
2.5 "SIZE SWITCH ASSY is
NOTE: Insert a sheet of paper from the rear side onto the SIZE Defective".
SWITCH ASSY, then set the cassette and pull out the sheet. If
you feel resistance, it means the switches are pushed.
Check: Paper Size • With the diagnostic tool, go to step
l Is the output data corresponding to the size of the paper set 8.
Go to FIP-2.5 "SIZE SWITCH ASSY
7 in the paper cassette in use? • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
is Defective".
Diag Tool: Analog Input Test FIP-2.14 "REGI. SENSOR is
Device Code: 02 Defective".
Check: REGI. SENSOR
l Is the REGI. SENSOR properly functioning? (Check it by Go to FIP-2.14 "REGI. SENSOR is
8 Replace the MCU PWB.
using the diagnostic tool.) Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test, Device Code: 1F

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-25


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.11 OHP Sheet is Improperly Set

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FRONT OHP SENSOR, REAR OHP SENSOR, MCU
PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: White edge of the OHP sheet
3 l Is a break in the white edge of the OHP sheet Replace the OHP sheet. Go to Step 4.
smeared or lodged with any foreign matter?
Check: FRONT OHP SENSOR, REAR OHP SENSOR
4 l Is the surface of the FRONT OHP SENSOR or Remove the smear/ foreign matter.
Go to Step 5.
REAR OHP SENSOR smeared or lodged with any
foreign matter?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 6.
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
Check: Paper path
Remove the smear/ foreign matter. 2.12 "FRONT OHP SENSOR is
5 l Is the paper path smeared or lodged with any foreign Defective".
matter?
If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-2.13
"REAR OHP SENSOR is Defective".
Check: FRONT OHP SENSOR
l Is the FRONT OHP SENSOR properly functioning?
Go to FIP-2.12 "FRONT OHP SENSOR
6 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Go to Step 7.
is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 1D
Check: REAR OHP SENSOR
l Is the REAR OHP SENSOR properly functioning?
Go to FIP-2.13 "REAR OHP SENSOR is
7 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 1B

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-26


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.12 Paper Exit - Static Jam

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TOP EXIT SENSOR, MCU PWB
Check: TOP EXIT SENSOR for remainder
Remove the remaining paper, paper
2 l Is there any remaining paper, paper debris, or debris, or foreign matter.
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 3.
foreign matter on the TOP EXIT SENSOR?
Check: TOP EXIT SENSOR
l Is the TOP EXIT SENSOR properly functioning?
Go to FIP-2.32 "TOP EXIT SENSOR is
3 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 09

FIP-1.13 Paper REGI. - Static Jam

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR, FUSER EXIT SENSOR, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER IN ACTUATOR, FUSER IN SENSOR, FUSER
DRIVE ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: REGI. SENSOR for remainder • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 3.
Remove the remaining paper, paper
2 l Is there any paper, paper debris, or foreign matter debris, or foreign matter.
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
remaining on the REGI. SENSOR? 2.14 "REGI. SENSOR is Defective".
Check: REGI. SENSOR
l Is the REGI. SENSOR properly functioning?
Go to FIP-2.14 "REGI. SENSOR is
3 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 1F

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-27


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.14 PAPER Static Jam - FUSER

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR, FUSER EXIT SENSOR, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER IN ACTUATOR, FUSER IN SENSOR, FUSER
DRIVE ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: FUSER EXIT SENSOR and FUSER IN
SENSOR for remainder Remove the remaining paper, paper
2 Go to step 3.
Is there any paper, paper debris, or foreign matter debris, or foreign matter.
remaining on the sensors?
Check: FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR
l Is the FUSER EXIT ACTUATOR properly functioning • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 4.
depending on the conditions below? • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
- Paper set: The actuator is away from the detection 2.28 "FUSER EXIT SENSOR is
3 Replace the defective part.
area of the FUSER EXIT SENSOR. Defective".
- No paper is set: The actuator is blocking the If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-2.27
detection area of the FUSER EXIT SENSOR. "FUSER IN SENSOR is Defective"
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: FUSER EXIT SENSOR
l Is the FUSER EXIT SENSOR functioning properly? Go to FIP-2.28 "FUSER EXIT SENSOR
4 Go to Step 5.
(Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) is Defective"
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test, Device Code: 25
Check: FUSER IN ACTUATOR
l Is the FUSER IN ACTUATOR properly functioning
depending on the conditions below? • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 6.
- Paper is set: The actuator is away from the • Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
5 Replace the defective part.
detection area of the FUSER IN SENSOR. 2.27 "FUSER IN SENSOR is
- No paper is set: The actuator is blocking the Defective".
detection area of the FUSER IN SENSOR.
l Does the actuator move smoothly?
Check: FUSER IN SENSOR
l Is the FUSER IN SENSOR functioning properly?
Go to FIP-2.27 "FUSER IN SENSOR is
6 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective"
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 28

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-28


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.15 2ND BTR Resistance Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
2ND BTR, BTR CAM SOLENOID, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
Are the outputs normal?
Check: 2ND BTR ASSY for its retract motion
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 9.
l Does the 2ND BTR ASSY retract properly during the
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
3 test print? Go to Step 4.
2.26 "BTR CAM SOLENOID is
NOTE: Inspect the BTR CAM SOLENOID’s action from Defective".
the rear.
Check: 2ND BTR CAM SOLENOID installation
4 Go to Step 5. Reinstall the BTR CAM SOLENOID.
l Is the BTR CAM SOLENOID properly installed?
Check: 2ND BTR CAM ASSY
5 Replace the 2ND BTR CAM ASSY. Go to Step 6.
Is the BTR CAM ASSY bent or deformed?
Check: 2ND BTR ASSY installation
6 Go to Step 7. Reinstall the 2ND BTR ASSY.
l Is the 2ND BTR ASSY properly installed?
Check: TRANSFER ASSY installation
7 Go to Step 8. Reinstall the TRANSFER ASSY.
l Is the TRANSFER ASSY properly installed?
Check: MCU PWB replacement
8 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to FIP-2.38 "HVPS is Defective". Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Check: BTR CAM SOLENOID
l Is the BTR CAM SOLENOID properly functioning?
Go to FIP-2.26 "BTR CAM SOLENOID is
9 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test
Device Code: 2E

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-29


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.16 MAIN FUSER ASSY Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 FUSER ASSY, MCU PWB, FUSER HARNESS ASSY, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER CONNECTOR, FUSER ASSY, TEMP.
SENSOR ASSY, H/R HEATER,
P/R HEATER, LVPS, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: TEMP. SENSOR ASSY
Go to FIP-2.29 "TEMP. SENSOR
3 l Does the problem occur when the printer is turned ASSEMBLY is Defective".
Go to Step 4.
on?
Check: H/R HEATER, P/R HEATER
NOTE: Make sure the FUSER ASSY is cool before
4 starting this operation. Go to Step 5. Replace the H/R HEATER/P/R HEATER.
l Do the both H/R HEATER and P/R HEATER come
on when the printer is turned on?
Does the problem occur while the FUSER is warming Go to FIP-2.29 "TEMP. SENSOR
5 Go to Step 6.
up? ASSEMBLY is Defective".
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the point below?
- J21<=>J32
Check: LVPS
7 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 8. Replace the LVPS.
- P21-3PIN<=> P21-2PIN: 4.5VDC
Check: HEATER ROD for ON signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the
conditions below?
8 - Pins: P/J32-12PIN<=>P/J32-13PIN Replace the LVPS. Replace the MCU PWB.
- During FUSER’s warming-up: 0VDC
- At completion of FUSER’s warming-up:
Changes from 0VDC to 4.5VDC.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-30


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.17 OIL ROLL ASSY is Out

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
OIL ROLL ASSY, CRU SWITCH ASSY, FUSER
HARNESS ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: OIL ROLL ASSY installation
2 Install the OIL ROLL ASSY properly. Go to Step 3. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Check: Conductive part in the OIL ROLL ASSY
3 l Is the conductive part (metal foil) in the OIL ROLL Replace the OIL ROLL ASSY. Go to Step 4.
ASSY damaged? (Check it visually.)
Check: Conductive part of the CRU SWITCH ASSY
4 l Are the conductive terminals in the CRU SWITCH Replace/Clean the CRU SWITCH ASSY. Go to Step 5.
ASSY smeared, dusty, or deformed?
Check: OIL ROLL ASSY electrical continuity
l Is continuity status correct depending on the
conditions below?
5 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 6.
- Pins: J19-17PIN<=> J19-18PIN
- OIL ROLL ASSY is installed: Detected
- OIL ROLL ASSY is not installed: Cut off
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J77<=>J71
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
7 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J71<=>J19

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-31


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.18 MAIN FUSER ASSY is Out

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER ASSY, MCU PWB, FUSER HARNESS ASSY,
FUSER CONNECTOR
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: FUSER ASSY • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 4.
3 l Is the FUSER ASSY properly set? • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Replace the defective part.
(Check it by inserting and removing the FUSER ASSY.) step 5.
Check: FUSER ASSY detection circuit
l Is the FUSER ASSY detection circuit properly
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
functioning? (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.)
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test, Device Code: 24
Check: Power supply to the FUSER ASSY detection
circuit
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P19-16PIN<=>P19-15PIN: 5VDC
Check: FUSER ASSY detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
6 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 7.
- Pins: P/J19-16PIN<=>P/J19-15PIN
- FUSER ASSY is installed: 0VDC
- FUSER ASSY is not installed: 5VDC
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
7 l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper Go to Step 8. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at J71<=>J78?
Check: FUSER CONNECTOR electrical continuity
8 l Does the FUSER CONNECTOR have proper continuity Go to Step 9. Replace the FUSER CONNECTOR.
at P71<=>J19?
Check: FUSER ASSY replacement
9 Replace the FUSER ASSY. Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-32


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.19 DRUM CARTRIDGE is Out

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TONER BOX SENSOR, TONER BOX HARNESS, MAIN
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: WASTE TONER BOX installation Install the WASTE TONER BOX
2 Go to Step 3.
l Is the WASTE TONER BOX properly installed? properly.
Check: DRUM CARTRIDGE installation Install the DRAM CARTRIDGE
3 Go to Step 4.
l Is the DRUM CARTRIDGE properly installed? properly.
Check: CRUM CONNECTOR ASSY electrical
continuity
Replace the CRUM CONNECTOR
4 l Does the CRUM CONNECTOR ASSY have proper Go to Step 5.
ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J23<=>P22
Check: DRUM CARTRIDGE replacement
5 Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE. Go to Step 6. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 7.
Check: TONER BOX SENSOR installation • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Install the TONER BOX SENSOR
6
l Is the TONER BOX SENSOR properly installed? FIP-2.18 "TONER BOX SENSOR is properly.
Defective".
Check: TONER BOX SENSOR
l Is the TONER BOX SENSOR properly functioning?
Go to FIP-2.18 "TONER BOX SENSOR
7 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 0D

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-33


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.20 High Resolution Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
Parts to inspect: MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: MCY PWB replacement
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to FIP-2.39 "Electrical Noise". Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-34


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.21 MAIN FUSER ASSY Overheat Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 FUSER CONNECTOR, TEMP. SENSOR ASSY, H/R Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
HEATER, P/R HEATER, FUSER ASSY, MAIN HARNESS
ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: FUSER CONNECTOR
3 l Is the FUSER CONNECTOR securely connected when Go to Step 4. Check the FUSER CONNECTOR.
the FUSER ASSY is installed?
Check: TEMP. SENSOR ASSY Go to FIP-2.29 "TEMP. SENSOR
4 Go to Step 5.
l Does the problem occur when the printer is turned on? ASSEMBLY is Defective".
Check: H/R HEATER, P/R HEATER
NOTE: Make sure the FUSER ASSY is cool. Replace the H/R HEATER, P/R
5 Go to Step 6.
l Do the H/R HEATER and P/R HEATER come on when HEATER.
the printer is turned on?
l Does the problem occur while the FUSER is warming Go to FIP-2.29 "TEMP. SENSOR
6 Go to Step 7.
up? ASSEMBLY is Defective".
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
7 l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper Go to Step 8. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at J21<=>J32?
Check: LVPS
8 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 9. Replace the LVPS.
- P21-3PIN<=> P21-2PIN: 4.5VDC
Check: HATER ROD for ON signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
9 - Pins: P/J32-12PIN<=>P/J32-13PIN Replace the LVPS. Replace the MCU PWB.
- FUSER is warming-up: 0VDC
- Warming up is completing: Changes from 0VDC to
4.5VDC

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-35


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.22 ROS ASSY Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
Parts to inspect: ROS ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Check the Controller PWB.
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Go to FIP-2.19 "ROS ASSY is
2 If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) Defective".
2.19 "ROS ASSY is Defective".
l Are the outputs normal?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-36


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.23 PROCESS MOTOR ASSY Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
PROCESS MOTOR ASSY, PROCESS WDD ASSY,
TRANSFER ASSY, TRO SENSOR, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: Process Motor rotation
3 Go to Step 4. Go to Step 9.
l Does the Process Motor rotate during the test print?
Check: PROCESS WDD ASSY Installation Install the PROCESS WDD ASSY
4 Go to Step 5.
l Is the PROCESS WDD ASSY securely installed? properly.
Check: TRANSFER ASSY installation
5 Go to Step 6. Install the TRANSFER ASSY properly.
l Is the TRANSFER ASSY securely installed?
Check: PROCESS WDD ASSY
Rotate the rotor of the PROCESS MOTOR ASSY.
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the PROCESS DRIVE ASSY.
l Does the output shaft smoothly rotate without any
irregular sound?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 8.
Check: TRO SENSOR installation • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
7 Install the TRO SENSOR properly.
l Is the TRO SENSOR properly installed? FIP-2.25 "TRO SENSOR is
Defective".
Check: TRO SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.25 "TRO SENSOR is
8 l Is the TRO SENSOR properly functioning? Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test, Device code: 04
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step
Check: PROCESS MOTOR ASSY for foreign matter 10.
9 l Is any foreign matter interfering with rotation of the Remove the foreign matter. • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
PROCESS MOTOR ASSY? FIP-2.33 "PROCESS MOTOR ASSY
is Defective".
Check: PROCESS MOTOR ASSY
l Is the PROCESS MOTOR ASSY properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.33 "PROCESS MOTOR
10 Replace the MCU PWB.
(Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) ASSY is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test, Device Code: 10

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-37


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.24 MCU PWB EEPROM Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
Parts to inspect: COMMUNICATION ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
3 l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have continuity Go to Step 4. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
between the COMMUNICATION ASSY and the MCU
PWB?
Check: COMMUNICATION ASSY replacement
4 Replace the COMMUNICATION ASSY. Go to Step 5. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Check: MCU PWB replacement
Return the COMMUNICATION ASSY and replace the
5 Go to Step 6. Problem solved.
MCU PWB with a new MCU PWB (ASP).
l Does the problem still occur?
If any other error/status message
6 l Does the problem occur when the printer is turned on? Go to Step 7.
appears, go to the relevant FIP.
Replace the installed MCU PWB with another new one
7 (ASP) and then turn the printer back on. Go to Step 8. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
1. Replace the MCU PWB with the originally installed MCU
PWB.
2. Activate the Diagnostic commander and execute the
8 “Slave Initialize”. (Refer to Section 4.2.4.5.) Go to Step 9. Problem solved.
3. Execute the “NVM Write”. (Refer to Section 4.2.4.5.)
4. Turn the printer on.
l Does the problem occur when the printer is turned on?
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
9 Problem solved. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J16<=>J22

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-38


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.25 CASSETTE 1 is Out

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
UNIVERSAL CASSETTE, TRAY SIZE ACTUATOR,
SIZE SWITCH ASSY, FEEDER PWB, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: UNIVERSAL CASSETTE
3 Go to Step 4.
Can you insert the UNIVERSAL CASSETTE smoothly?
Check: TRAY SIZE ACTUATOR
1. Insert a sheet of paper from the rear side onto the SIZE
SWITCH ASSY. • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
2. Install the cassette 1. • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
4 Replace the defective part.
3. Pull out the sheet. If you feel resistance, it means the FIP-2.5 "SIZE SWITCH ASSY is
Paper Size Switches are pushed. Defective".
l Does the TRAY SIZE ACTUATOR push the Paper Size
Switches when the cassette 1is installed?
Check: Paper size • If the optional Large Capacity Paper
l Is the SIZE SWITCH ASSY functioning properly? Unit is installed, go to Step 6.
• Replace the MCU PWB. Go to FIP-2.5 "SIZE SWITCH ASSY is
5 Check the paper size using the diagnostic tool.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Analog Input Test
Device Code: 02
Check: FEEDER PWB replacement
6 Replace the FEEDER PWB with a good one. Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-39


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.26 High Density Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
DEVE.CONTACT ASSY, ADC SENSOR ASSY,
MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: DEVE. CONTACT ASSY Go to FIP-2.38 "HVPS is Defective"
3 l Is the contact surface of the DEVE. CONTACT ASSY Replace the DEVE.CONTACT ASSY. If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-
bent, deformed, or lodged with any foreign matter? 2.19 "ROS ASSY is Defective".
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 6. • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
Check: ADC Sensor surface
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
4 l Is the ADC Sensor surface smeared or lodged with any FIP-2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is FIP-2.20 "ADC SENSOR is
foreign matter?
Defective". Defective".
Check: ADC Sensor
l Is the ADC Sensor properly functioning? (Check it by
Go to FIP-2.20 "ADC SENSOR is
5 using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device Code: 18, 33
Check: ADC Solenoid
l Is the ADC Solenoid properly functioning? (Check it by
using the diagnostic tool.) Go to FIP-2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is
6 Go to Step 7.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test
Device Code: 36
Check: MCU PWB replacement
7 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to FIP-2.38 "HVPS is Defective". Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-40


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.27 Low Density Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY, DEVE CONTACT ASSY,
Developer Assy, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: Image on the Drum surface
l Is the toner image of each color properly developed?
3 NOTE: During printing, turn the printer off when transfer is Go to Step 8. Go to Step 4.
assumed to process; and check for Cin50% on the drum
surface visually.
Check: Image on the Drum surface
l Are the image densities of all colors on the drum low?
4 NOTE: During printing, turn the printer off when transfer is Go to Step 5. Go to Step 11.
assumed to process; and check for Cin50% on the drum
surface visually.
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 6.
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to
Check: Dispense Motor installation Install the DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY
5 FIP-2.36 "DISPENSE MOTOR
l Is the Dispense Motor properly installed? ASSY is Defective".
properly.

If the problem still occurs, go to step 7.


Check: Dispense Motor
l Is the Dispense Motor properly functioning? (Check it
Go to FIP-2.36 "DISPENSE MOTOR
6 by using the diagnostic tool.) Go to Step 7.
ASSY is Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test
Device Code: 25
Check: DEVE. CONTACT ASSY Go to FIP-2.38 "HVPS is Defective".
7 l Is the contact surface of the DEVE. CONTACT ASSY Replace the DEVE. CONTACT ASSY. If the problem still occurs, go to FIP-
deformed or lodged with any foreign matter? 2.19 "ROS ASSY is Defective".

(To be continued)

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-41


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(Continued)
FIP-1.27 "Low Density Error"

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 9.
Check: ADC Sensor surface 10.
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to
8 l Is the ADC Sensor surface smeared or lodged with any • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
FIP-2.20 "ADC SENSOR is
foreign matter? FIP-2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is
Defective".
Defective".
Check: ADC Sensor
l Is the ADC Sensor properly functioning? (Check it by
Go to FIP-2.20 "ADC SENSOR is
9 using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB.
Defective".
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test
Device Code: 18,33
Check: ADC Solenoid
l Is the ADC Solenoid properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is
10 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test Defective".
Device Code: 36
Check: Developer Assy replacement
11 l Does the problem still occur when the Developer Assy Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
corresponding to the color is replaced?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-42


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.28 P/H MOTOR Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
P/H MOTOR ASSY, HEAT ROLL, PRESSURE ROLL,
1 FUSER ASSY, BELT CLEANER ASSY, EXIT LOWER Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ASSY, FEED ROLL ASSY, MAIN P/H ASSY, WASTE
TONER BOX, 2ND BTR CAM ASSY, AUGER HIGH
ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: P/H Motor rotation
3 l Does the P/H Motor rotate slightly and then stops Go to Step 5. Go to Step 4.
during the test print?
Check: P/H Motor rotation Go to FIP-2.34 "P/H MOTOR ASSY is
4 Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the P/H Motor motionless at all during the test print? Defective".
Check: Drive transmission
Rotate the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY manually
Go to FIP-2.34 "P/H MOTOR ASSY is
5 counterclockwise. Go to Step 6.
Defective".
l Does the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY rotate
smoothly?
Check: FUSER ASSY
Rotate the INPUT GEAR FT1 manually.
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the interfering part.
l Do the HEAT ROLL and PRESSURE ROLL rotate
smoothly?
Check: BELT CLEANER ASSY
7 Turn the gear manually. Go to Step 8. Replace the BELT CLEANER ASSY.
l Does the BELT CLEANER ASSY rotate smoothly?

(To be continued.)

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-43


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(Continued)

FIP-1.28 "P/H MOTOR Related Error"

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Check: EXIT LOWER ASSY
8 Rotate the EXIT IDLER GEAR manually. Go to Step 9. Replace the interfering part.
l Does the EXIT LOWER ASSY rotate smoothly?
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY
9 Rotate the PRE-REGI. KNOB ASSY manually. Go to Step 10 Replace the interfering part.
l Does the MAIN P/H ASSY rotate smoothly?
Check: WASTE TONER BOX
1. Remove the WASTE TONER BOX.
2. Rotate the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY
10 Go to Step 11. Replace the WASTE TONER BOX.
counterclockwise manually.
l Does the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY rotate
smoothly?
Check: FEED ROLL ASSY
1. Push down the FEED SOLENOID arm.
2. Mesh the gears.
11 Go to Step 12. Replace the interfering part.
3. Manually rotate the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY
counterclockwise.
l Dose the FEED ROLL ASSY rotate smoothly?
Check: 2ND BTR CAM ASSY
1. Remove the FUSER ASSY, BELT CLEANER ASSY,
and 2ND BTR ASSY.
12 Go to Step 13. Replace the interfering part.
2. Manually rotate the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY
counterclockwise.
l Does the BTR CAM ASSY rotate smoothly?
Check: AUGER HIGH ASSY
1. Remove the FUSER ASSY, BELT CLEANER ASSY,
and 2ND BTR ASSY.
13 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the AUGER HIGH ASSY.
2. Manually rotate the rotor in the P/H MOTOR ASSY
counterclockwise.
l Does the AUGER HIGH ASSY rotate smoothly?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-44


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.29 ENVIRONMENT SENSOR Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 2.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace the defective part. • Without the diagnostic tool, go to
ENVIRONMENT SENSOR, P/H HARNESS ASSY,
step 3.
MCU PWB
Check: ENVIRONMENT SENSOR
l Is the ENVIRONMENT SENSOR properly functioning?
2 (Check it by using the diagnostic tool.) Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 3.
Diag Tool: Analog Input Test
Device Code: 04
Check: ENVIRONMENT SENSOR resistance
l Does the thermistor have proper resistance at the pins
below? Replace the ENVIRONMENT
3 Go to Step 4.
- J105-1PIN<=>J105-2PIN: 5 kΩ SENSOR.
NOTE: Measure the resistance at the room temperature
18 to 20 °C.
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J71<=>J105

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-45


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.30 ROTARY MOTOR ASSY (HP Detection) Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ROTARY MOTOR ASSY, ROTARY FRAME ASSY,
ROTARY SENSOR ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: Rotary Motor
3 Run the test print. Go to Step 4. Go to Step 8.
l Does the Rotary Motor rotate?
Check: ROTARY FRAME ASSY rotation
4 l Is anything interfering with rotation of the ROTARY Remove the interfering matter. Go to Step 5.
FRAME ASSY?
Check: ROTARY SENSOR ASSY installation Install the ROTARY SENSOR ASSY
5 Go to Step 6.
l Is the ROTARY SENSOR ASSY properly installed? properly.
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 7.
Check: ROTARY MOTOR ASSY installation • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Install the ROTARY MOTOR ASSY
6
l Is the ROTARY MOTOR ASSY properly installed? FIP-2.24 "ROTARY SENSOR is properly.
Defective".
Check: ROTARY SENSOR ASSY
l Is the ROTARY SENSOR ASSY properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.24 "ROTARY SENSOR is
7 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test Defective".
Device code: 05
With the diagnostic tool, go to step 9.
Check: ROTARY FRAME ASSY
Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP-
8 l Is anything interfering with rotation of the ROTARY Remove the foreign matter.
2.35 "ROTARY MOTOR ASSY is
FRAME ASSY?
Defective".
Check: ROTARY MOTOR ASSY
l Is the ROTARY MOTOR ASSY properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.35 "ROTARY MOTOR
9 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test ASSY is Defective".
Device code: 16

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-46


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.31 WASTE TONER BOX is Out

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 WASTE TONER BOX, DRAM CARTRIDGE, TONER BOX Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
SENSOR, TONER BOX HARNESS, MAIN HARNESS
ASSY, MCU PWB
2 l Is the WASTE TONER BOX securely set? Go to Step 3. Set the WASTE TONER BOX securely.
Check: DRAM CARTRIDGE
3 Go to Step 4. Set the DRAM CARTRIDGE securely.
l Is the DRAM CARTRIDGE securely set?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
Check: TONER BOX SENSOR installation • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Install the TONER BOX SENSOR
4
l Is the TONER BOX SENSOR properly installed? FIP-2.18 "TONER BOX SENSOR is properly.
Defective".
Check: TONER BOX SENSOR
l Is the TONER BOX SENSOR properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.18 "TONER BOX SENSOR
5 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test is Defective".
Device code: 12

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-47


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.32 MCU PWB MEMORY (RAM) Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
COMMUNICATION ASSY, MCU PWB
l Does the problem occur the instance the printer is If another error/status message
2 Go to Step 3.
turned on? appears, go to the relevant FIP.
Replace the MCU PWB and turn the printer back on.
3 Go to FIP-2.39 "Electrical Noise". *1 Problem solved. *2
l Does the problem still occur?
*1: Take this step first though some external cause can be considered.
*2: If the problem still occurs after replacing the MCU PWB, go to FIP-2.39 "Electrical Noise".

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-48


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.33 TONER CARTRIDGE Y/M/C/K is Out

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
Toner Cartridge, CARTRIDGE SENSOR, MCU PWB
Check: Sticker on a Toner Cartridge
2 l Is a white reflective sticker attached to the relevant Go to Step 3. Replace the relevant Toner Cartridge.
Toner Cartridge?
Check: CARTRIDGE SENSOR installation Install the CARTRIDGE SENSOR
3 Go to Step 4.
l Is the CARTRIDGE SENSOR properly installed? properly.
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
Check: Toner Cartridge replacement
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to
4 Replace the relevant Toner Cartridge with a new one. Problem solved.
FIP-2.22 "CARTRIDGE SENSOR is
l Does the problem still occur? Defective".
Check: CARTRIDGE SENSOR
l Is the CARTRIDGE SENSOR properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.22 "CARTRIDGE SENSOR
5 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test is Defective".
Device code: 0D

FIP-1.34 PCDC Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
Parts to inspect: MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: MCU PWB replacement
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to FIP-2.39 "Electrical Noise". Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-49


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.35 ADC SENSOR Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ADC SENSOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY,
MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 6.
Check: ADC Sensor surface
• Without the diagnostic tool, go to
3 l Is the ADC Sensor surface smeared or lodged with any FIP-2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is
Go to Step 4.
foreign matter?
Defective".
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 5.
Check: ADC SENSOR ASSY installation • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Install the ADC SENSOR ASSY
4
l Is the ADC SENSOR ASSY properly installed? FIP-2.20 "ADC SENSOR is properly.
Defective".
Check: ADC Sensor
l Is the ADC Sensor properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.20 "ADC SENSOR is
5 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test Defective".
Device code: 18, 33
Check: ADC Solenoid
l Is the ADC Solenoid properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.21 "ADC SOLENOID is
6 Replace the MCU PWB.
Diag Tool: Digital Output Test Defective".
Device code: 36

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-50


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.36 Periodically Replaced Part - End Of Life

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
Parts to inspect: MCU PWB
Check: Error Reset
In the Maintenance menu, perform the required counter
reset:
- 2nd BTR Reset
2 Go to Step 3. Problem solved.
- Fuser Unit Reset
- IBT Cleaner Reset
(Refer to Chapter 6.)
l Does the problem still occur after “Error Reset”?
Replace the relevant part.
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the relevant part.
l Does the problem still occur?
4 l Does the problem occur when the printer is turned on? Go to Step 7. Go to Step 5.
l Does the problem still occur when the printer is turned
5 Go to Step 7. Go to Step 6.
on again?
l Does the problem occur when the printer is turned off
6 Go to Step 7. Go to FIP-2.39 "Electrical Noise"
and on repeatedly?
Check: MCU PWB replacement
7 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MCU PWB. Check the Controller PWB.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-51


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.37 No Power is Applied.

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
P/H HARNESS ASSY, REGI. HARNESS ASSY, MAIN
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Controller PWB for power supply voltage
1. Remove the Controller PWB and turn the printer on
after a few minutes.
2. Measure the voltage at the pins below to confirm that
there is no electrical shortage: Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
• P33-6PIN<=>P33-8PIN: 5VDC If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
• P33-5PIN<=>P33-7PIN: 5VDC
• P33-3PIN<=>P33-4PIN: 5VDC
l Is there electrical shortage in any part?
Check: Power supply voltage for short-circuited parts
1. Disconnect any connector but J12 and J21 and turn the
printer on.
2. After a few minutes, measure the voltage at the pins
below:
3 • P33-6PIN<=>P33-8PIN: 5VDC Replace the short-circuited part. Replace the MCU PWB.
• P33-5PIN<=>P33-7PIN: 5VDC
• P33-3PIN<=>P33-4PIN: 5VDC
3. Repeat the steps 1 and 2 until all connectors except for
J12 and J21 are removed.
l Is there electrical shortage in any part?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-52


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.38 Abnormal Print Motion

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
LVPS, HVPS, MCU PWB
2 Does the printer exhibit any print motion at all? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 3.
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Replace the Controller PWB. If the Check the Controller PWB.
3
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) problem still occurs, go to step 4. If the problem still occurs, go to Step 4.
l Are the outputs normal?
4 l Does the printer enter reset condition during printing? Go to FIP-2.39 "Electrical Noise". Go to Step 5.
Check: Interface cable
5 Replace the interface cable. Go to Step 6. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
Check: MCU PWB replacement
6 Replace the MCU PWB. Check the host computer. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-53


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.39 CONTROLLER PWB Firmware Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below.
• Remove all optional electrical unit modules to return the
1 printer to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Updating the CONTROLLER PWB environment
2 Update the DIMM with the latest program. Replace/reinstall the defective part. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?

FIP-1.40 DIMM (SLOT P) Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all optional electrical unit modules to return the
1 printer to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: DIMM
Format the DIMM and write the control program to the
DIMM.
2 Replace/reinstall the defective part. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?
NOTE: Verify the correct direction for setting the DIMM;
and install it to the socket P until it is locked securely.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-54


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.41 SD-RAM (SLOT S0, S1, S2) Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all optional electrical unit modules to return the
1 printer to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: SD-RAM
1. Remove all SD-RAMs from the RAM slots 0, 1, and 2.
2. Check that the printer is turned off.
3. Install a SD-RAM to slot 1 and turn the printer on.
4. Repeat the steps 2 and 3 to add other SD RAMs one by
one to the slot 1 and 2.
2 l Is there any defective SD-RAM? Replace/reinstall the defective part. Problem solved.
NOTE:
• Be sure to install a SD-RAM whose memory is more
than 32MB in the slot 0.
• Before reinstalling each SD-RAM, verify the correct
direction for installing it; and insert it to the socket until it
is locked.

FIP-1.42 CONTROLLER PWB IC8, IC9 Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all electrical unit modules to return the printer
1 to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: Defective IC
Replace the IC according to the error type as follows:
- Error C1100: Replace the IC9.
2 Replace/reinstall the defective part. Problem solved.
- Error C1101: Replace IC8.
- Other error code: replace the CONTROLLER PWB.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-55


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.43 DIMM Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all electrical unit modules to return the printer
1 to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: Relevant unit replacement
Replace the DIMM as described below:
2 • Format the current DIMM and load the latest program. Replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Problem solved.
• Format a new DIMM and load the latest program.
l Does the problem still occur?

FIP-1.44 DIMM (Slot A, B) Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all electrical unit modules to return the printer
1 to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: DIMM
Does the current DIMM meet the specifications?
2 NOTE: Be sure to check the correct direction for Replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Problem solved.
installing the DIMM before installing it.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-56


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.45 CONTROLLER PWB EEPROM (IC3) Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all electrical unit modules to return the printer
1 to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: IC15
- Error C1200: Replace the IC15.
2 Replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Problem solved.
- Error C1210: Replace the IC15.
l Does the problem still occur?

FIP-1.46 CONTROLLER PWB ASIC (IC22, IC23) Related Error

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all electrical unit modules to return the printer
1 to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: IC replacement
Replace the relevant IC according to the error code.
2 - Error C1500: Replace the IC22. Replace the CONTROLLER PWB. Problem solved.
- Error C1600: Replace the IC23.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-57


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.47 CONTROLLER PWB and Other Hardware Related Errors

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection below:
• Remove all electrical unit modules to return the printer
1 to the standard condition. Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
• Check that all connectors are properly connected to the
CONTROLLER PWB.
Check: CONTROLLER PWB replacement
2 Replace the CONTROLLER PWB. - Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-58


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.48 “FRONT COVER OPEN”

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FRONT COVER SWITCH R, FRONT COVER SWITCH L,
MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: FRONT COVER SWITCH L for its pushing
motion
l Is the actuator in the FRONT COVER ASSY functioning • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 4.
properly as follows?
3 • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Replace the defective part.
- FRONT COVER ASSY is closed:
step 5.
Turns on the FRONT COVER SWITCH L.
- FRONT COVER ASSY is open:
Turns off the FRONT COVER SWITCH L.
Check: FRONT COVER SWITCH L
l Is the FRONT COVER SWITCH L properly functioning?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device code: 27
Check:
Power supply to the FRONT COVER SWITCH L Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
5 Go to Step 6.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Defective".
- P19-2PIN<=>P19-3PIN: 5VDC
Check: FRONT COVER for the detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
6 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 7.
- Pins: P19-2PIN<=>P19-3PIN
- FRONT COVER ASSY is closed: 0VDC
- FRONT COVER ASSY is open: 5VDC
Check: MSI HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MSI HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity Replace the FRONT COVER SWITCH
7 Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below? L.
- J19<=>P197

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-59


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.49 “PAPER UNIT OPEN”

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MAIN P/H ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 4.
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY insertion
3 • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Replace the interfering part.
Is the MAIN P/H ASSY properly inserted?
step 5.
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY detection
l Is the MAIN P/H ASSY detection mechanism properly
4 functioning? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device code: 20
Check: Power supply to the MAIN P/H ASSY
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
5 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 6.
Defective".
- P20-30PIN<=>P20-31PIN: 5VDC
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
6 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 7.
- Pins: P20-30PIN<=>P20-31PIN
- MAIN P/H ASSY is installed: 0VDC
- MAIN P/H ASSY is not installed: 5VDC
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
7 Replace the MAIN P/H ASSY. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J20<=>P91

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-60


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.50 “EXIT COVER OPEN”

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MAIN P/H ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: EXIT CHUTE SWITCH’s pushing motion
l Is the actuator in the EXIT UPPER ASSY properly
functioning depending on the conditions below? • With the diagnostic tool, go to step 4.
3 - EXIT UPPER ASSY is closed: • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Replace the defective part.
Turns the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH ON. step 5.
- EXIT UPPER ASSY is open:
Turns the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH OFF.
Check: EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
l Is the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH properly functioning?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device code: 0B
Check: Power supply to the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
5 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 6.
Defective".
- P17-10PIN<=>P17-11PIN: 5VDC
Check: EXIT CHUTE SWITCH for signals
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
6 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 7.
- Pins: P17-10PIN<=>P17-11PIN
- EXIT UPPER ASSY is closed: 0VDC
- EXIT UPPER ASSY is open: 5VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
7 Replace the EXIT CHUTE SWITCH. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J17<=>P161

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-61


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.51 “FUSER UNIT OPEN”

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MAIN FUSER ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
• With the diagnostic tool, go to step 4.
Check: MAIN FUSER ASSY insertion
3 • Without the diagnostic tool, go to Replace the interfering part.
l Is the MAIN FUSER ASSY securely inserted? step 5.
Check: MAIN FUSER ASSY detection
l Is the MAIN FUSER ASSY detection mechanism
4 properly functioning? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test
Device code: 24
Check: Power supply to the MAIN FUSER ASSY
5 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 6. Go to "".
- P19-16PIN<=>P19-15PIN: 5VDC
Check: MAIN FUSER ASSY detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
6 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 7.
- Pins: P19-16PIN<=>P19-15PIN
- MAIN FUSER ASSY is installed: 0VDC
- MAIN FUSER ASSY is not installed: 5VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
7 Replace the MAIN FUSER ASSY. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J19<=>P71

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-62


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-1.52 “PAPER OUT LC1”

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
UNIVERSAL CASSETTE, BOTTOM PLATE ASSY, LOW
PAPER SENSOR, FEEDER PWB, MCU PWB
Isolation: Engine or Controller?
Run the Engine test print or diagnostic test print. Check the Controller PWB.
2 Go to Step 3.
(10 sheets for each of single and continuous print) If the problem still occurs, go to step 3.
l Are the outputs normal?
Check: UNIVERSAL CASSETTE
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the defective part.
Is the UNIVERSAL CASSETTE smoothly inserted?
Check: BOTTOM PLATE ASSY
Remove the TURN IN CHUTE-3T and then insert the
4 UNIVERSAL CASSETTE. Go to Step 5. Replace the defective part.
l Does the BOTTOM PLATE ASSY properly lift up when
the UNIVERSAL CASSETTE is inserted?
With the diagnostic tool, go to step 6.
Check: LOW PAPER SENSOR installation Without the diagnostic tool, go to FIP- Install the LOW PAPER SENSOR
5
l Is the LOW PAPER SENSOR properly installed? 2.4 "LOW PAPER SENSOR is properly.
Defective".
Check: LOW PAPER SENSOR
l Is the LOW PAPER SENSOR properly functioning? Go to FIP-2.4 "LOW PAPER SENSOR
6 Go to Step 7.
Diag Tool: Digital Input Test is Defective".
Device code: 13
Check: FEEDER PWB
7 Replace the FEEDER PWB. Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
l Does the problem still occur?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-63


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

5.3 Level 2 FIP (Fault Isolation Procedure)


This section describes how to isolate the faulty unit (assembly) by using
the Level 2 FIPs.

C H E C K <Preliminary inspection>
P O IN T
In each FIP, you are required to perform the
“Preliminary inspection” prior to any other actions.
The Preliminary inspection involves the following:
n Check for any part that does not meet the
specifications.
n Check if any part has been installed improperly.
n Check for part that is damaged, deformed, smeared,
or lodged with foreign matter.

FIP-2.1 LVPS 5VDC is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
LVPS, MCU PWB, MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Check: LVPS
Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
2 - P33-6PIN<=>P33-8PIN: 5VDC Go to Step 3. Replace the LVPS.
- P33-5PIN<=>P33-7PIN: 5VDC
- P33-3PIN<=>P33-4PIN: 5VDC
l Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity at
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
the pins below?
- J33<=>J12

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-64


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.2 LVPS 24VDC is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 LVPS, MCU PWB, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, FUSER ASSY, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MAIN P/H ASSY, FRONT COVER SWITCH R, P/H
HARNESS ASSY, FUSER CONNECTOR
Check: LVPS
2 Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3. Replace the LVPS.
- P32-11PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: Interlock path
Close the FUSER ASSY, MAIN P/H ASSY, and FRONT
3 COVER ASSY. Go to Step 4. Go to Step 6.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P32-6PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: LVPS relay circuit
Close the FUSER ASSY, MAIN P/H ASSY, and FRONT
4 COVER ASSY. Go to Step 5. Replace the LVPS.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P32-11PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
5 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J32<=>J21
Check: FUSER ASSY installation/removal
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the interfering part.
l Is the FUSER ASSY securely set?
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY installation/removal
7 Go to Step 8. Replace the interfering part.
l Is the MAIN P/H ASSY securely set?
Check: Power supply to the FRONT COVER SWITCH R
8 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 9. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
- J192-1PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC

(To be continued.)

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-65


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(Continued)

FIP-2.2 LVPS is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Check: FRONT COVER SWITCH R
Close the FRONT COVER ASSY. Replace the FRONT COVER
9 Go to Step 10.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? SWITCH R.
- P/J191-1PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
Close the FRONT COVER ASSY.
10 l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity Go to Step 11. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- P97-1PIN<=>P32-12PIN
Check: Power supply to the P/H ASSY
Close the FUSER ASSY, FRONT COVER ASSY, and TOP
11 COVER ASSY. Go to Step 12. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P91-1PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the FUSER ASSY
Close the MAIN P/H ASSY and FRONT COVER ASSY.
12 Go to Step 13. Go to Step 16.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P71-3PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
Close the MAIN P/H ASSY, FUSER ASSY, and FRONT
13 COVER ASSY. Go to Step 15. Go to Step 14.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- J70-2PIN<=>P32-12PIN: 24VDC
Check: MCU PWB
Close the MAIN P/H ASSY, FUSER ASSY, and FRONT
14 COVER ASSY. Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P/J32-6PIN<=>P/J32-12PIN: 24VDC

(To be continued)

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-66


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(Continued)

FIP-2.2 LVPS is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Check: FUSER ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER ASSY have proper continuity at the pins
15 Replace the FUSER CONNECTOR. Replace the FUSER ASSY.
below?
- J71-3PIN<=>J71-4PIN
Check: MAIN P/H ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN P/H ASSY have proper continuity at the
16 Go to Step 17. Replace the MAIN P/H ASSY.
pins below?
- J91-1PIN<=>J91-2PIN
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity at
17 Go to Step 18. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
the pins below?
- P91-1PIN<=>J97-2PIN
Check: FUSER CONNECTOR electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER CONNECTOR have proper continuity at
18 Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY. Replace the FUSER CONNECTOR.
the pins below?
- P91-1PIN<=>J70-2PIN

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-67


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.3 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR, REGI. HARNESS ASSY,
TRAY N/P HARNESS, MCU PWB
Check:
Power supply to the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 Go to Step 3.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Defective".
- P20-15PIN<=>P20-16PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the TRAY NO PAPER detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P20-17PIN<=>P20-16PIN: 5VDC
Check: TRAY NO PAPER detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J20-17PIN<=>P/J20-16PIN
- Passed (paper is set): 0VDC
- Blocked (no paper is set): 5VDC
Check: TRAY N/P HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the TRAY N/P HARNESS have proper continuity
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the TRAY N/P HARNESS.
at the pins below?
- J107<=>P101
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity at Replace the TRAY NO PAPER
6 Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
the pins below? SENSOR.
- J101<=>J20

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-68


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.4 LOW PAPER SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
LOW PAPER SENSOR, TRAY N/P HARNESS,
MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to LOW PAPER detection signal
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P20-18PIN<=>P20-19PIN: 5VDC
Check: LOW PAPER detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: P/J20-18PIN<=>P/J20-19PIN
- 20 sheets of paper are set: 0VDC
- 200 sheets of paper are set: 5VDC
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity Replace the LOW PAPER SENSOR
4 Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below? ASSY.
- J107<=>P101

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-69


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.5 SIZE SWITCH ASSY is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
SIZE SWITCH ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the SIZE SWITCH ASSY
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P19-27PIN<=>P19-26PIN: 5VDC
Check: REGI. detection signal
l Is the correct voltage output at the pins below
depending on the paper size?
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: P/J19-28PIN<=>P/J19-26PIN
NOTE: For the correct voltages, refer to Chapter 2/Section
2.7.1 “Paper Size Control”.
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Replace the SIZE SWITCH ASSY. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J102<=>J19

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-70


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.6 FEED SOLENOID is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FEED SOLENOID, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the FEED SOLENOID
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J19-29PIN<=>P/J21-2PIN: 24VDC
Check: FEED SOLENOID
l Does the FEED SOLENOID have proper continuity at
3 the pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J19-29PIN<=>J19-30PIN
- Resistance: 90Ω
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Replace the FEED SOLENOID. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J19<=> J103PIN

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-71


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.7 MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR, MSI HARNESS ASSY, REGI.
HARNESS ASSY, P/H HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: MSI SHORT N/P detection signal
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P20-32PIN<=>P20-33PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the MSI SHORT N/P detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P20-34PIN<=>P20-33PIN: 5VDC
Check: MSI SHORT N/P detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J20-34PIN<=>P/J20-33PIN
- Passed condition (paper is set): 0VDC
- Blocked condition (no paper is set): 5VDC
Check: MSI HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MSI HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the MSI HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J203<=>P113
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J113<=>J91
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity Replace the MSI SHORT N/P
7 Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below? SENSOR.
- P91<=>J20

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-72


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.8 MSI LONG N/P SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MSI LONG N/P SENSOR, MSI HARNESS ASSY, REGI.
HARNESS ASSY, P/H HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the MSI LONG N/P SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P20-11PIN<=>P20-13PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the MSI LONG N/P detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P20-14PIN<=>P20-13PIN: 5VDC
Check: MSI LONG N/Pdetection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J20-14PIN<=>P/J20-13PIN
- Reflecting condition (paper is set): 0VDC
- Unreflecting condition (no paper is set): 5VDC
Check: MSI HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MSI HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the MSI HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J206<=>P92
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J92<=>J91
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
7 Replace the MSI LONG N/P SENSOR. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- 91<=>J20

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-73


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.9 MSI EDGE SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MSI EDGE SENSOR, MSI HARNESS ASSY, REGI.
HARNESS ASSY, P/H HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the MSI EDGE SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P20-11PIN<=>P20-13PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the MSI EDGE detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P20-10PIN<=>P20-13PIN: 5VDC
Check: MSI EDGE detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J20-10PIN<=>P/J20-13PIN
- Reflecting condition (paper is set): 0VDC
- Unreflecting condition (no paper is set): 5VDC
Check: MSI HARNESS ASSY
Does the MSI HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity at
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the MSI HARNESS ASSY.
the pins below?
- J204<=>P92
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY
Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J92<=>J91
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity at
7 Replace the MSI EDGE SENSOR. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
the pins below?
- P91<=>J20

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-74


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.10 MSI CLUTCH is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
MSI CLUTCH, P/H HARNESS ASSY, REGI. MAIN
HARNESS, MSI HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the MSI CLUTCH
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J20-36PIN< =>P/J20-35PIN: 24VDC
Check: MSI CLUTCH
l Does the MSI CLUTCH have proper continuity at the
3 pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J20-36PIN<=>J20-35PIN
- Resistance: 169 Ω
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- Pins: J20<=>P91
Check: REGI. HARNESS
l Does the REGI. HARNESS have proper continuity at
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the REGI. HARNESS.
the pins below?
- Pins: J91<=>J113PIN
Check: MSI HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MSI HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
6 Replace the MSI CLUTCH. Replace the MSI HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- Pins: P113<=>J202

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-75


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.11 PICK UP SOLENOID is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
PICK UP SOLENOID, P/H HARNESS ASSY, REGI. MAIN
HARNESS, MSI HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the PICK UP SOLENOID
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J20-37PIN<=>P/J20-38PIN: 24VDC
Check: PICK UP SOLENOID
l Is proper resistance output at the pins below?
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J20-37PIN<=>J20-38PIN
- Resistance: 89Ω
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- Pins: J20<=>P91
Check: REGI. MAIN HARNESS
l Does the REGI. MAIN HARNESS have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the REGI. MAIN HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J91<=>J113
Check: MSI HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MSI HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
6 Replace the PICK UP SOLENOID. Replace the MSI HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- P113<=>J201

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-76


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.12 FRONT OHP SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to check:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FRONT OHP SENSOR, REGI. HARNESS ASSY, P/H
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the FRONT OHP SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P20-6PIN<=>P20-4PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the FRONT OHP detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P20-5PIN<=>P20-4PIN: 5VDC
Check: FRONT OHP detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
- Pins: P/J20-5PIN<=>P/J20-4PIN
4 - Photo reflecting status (paper is set): 0VDC Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Photo unreflecting status (no paper is set): 5VDC
NOTE: When setting the conditions, reflecting and
unreflecting, use white paper, not OHP sheet. Use of OHP
sheet causes failure in judgement since it is transparent.
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J98<=>J91
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
6 Replace the FRONT OHP SENSOR. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- P91<=>J20

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-77


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.13 REAR OHP SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
REAR OHP SENSOR, REGI. HARNESS ASSY, P/H
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the REAR OHP SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
P20-9PIN<=>P20-7PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the REAR OHP detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P20-8PIN<=>P20-7PIN: 5VDC
Check: REAR OHP detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
- Pins: P/J20-8PIN<=>P/J20-7PIN
4 - Photo reflecting status (paper is set): 0VDC Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Photo unreflecting status (no paper is set): 5VDC
NOTE: When setting the conditions, reflecting and
unreflecting, use white paper, not OHP sheet. Use of OHP
sheet will cause failure in judgement since it is transparent.
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J99<=>J91
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Replace the REAR OHP SENSOR. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- P91<=>J20

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-78


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.14 REGI. SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
REGI.SENSOR, REGI. HARNESS ASSY,
P/H HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the REGI. SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P20-3PIN<=>P20-1PIN: 5VDC
Check: Power supply to the REGI. detection signal
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P20-2PIN<=>P20-1PIN: 5VDC
Check: REGI. detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J20-2PIN<=>P/J20-1PIN
- Reflecting condition (paper is set): 0VDC
- Unreflecting condition (no paper is set): 5VDC
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity?
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J93<=>J91
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
6 Replace the REGI.SENSOR. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- P91<=>J20

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-79


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.15 REGI. CLUTCH is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
REGI. CLUTCH, P/H HARNESS ASSY, REGI. HARNESS
ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the REGI. CLUTCH
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go t step 3.
Defective".
- P/J20-25PIN<=>P/J20-27PIN: 24VDC
Check: REGI. CLUTCH
l Does the REGI. CLUTCH have proper continuity at the
3 pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J20-25PIN<=>J20-27PIN
- Resistance: 171 Ω
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J20<=>P91
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the REGI. CLUTCH. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J91<=>P110PIN

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-80


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.16 PRE-REGI. CLUTCH is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
REGI. CLUTCH, P/H HARNESS ASSY, REGI. HARNESS
ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the REGI. CLUTCH
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J20-25PIN<=>P/J20-27PIN: 24VDC
Check: REGI. CLUTCH
l Does the REGI. CLUTCH have proper continuity at the
3 pins below? Replace the MCU PWB Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J20-25PIN<=>J20-27PIN
- Resistance: 174Ω
Check: P/H HARNESS ASSY
l Does the P/H HARNESS ASSY have proper continuity
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the P/H HARNESS ASSY.
at the pins below?
- J20<=>P91
Check: REGI. HARNESS ASSY
l Does the REGI. HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the REGI. CLUTCH. Replace the REGI. HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J91<=>P110PIN

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-81


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.17 WASTE TONER SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 WASTE TONER SENSOR, WASTE TONER BOX, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TONER BOX HARNESS, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the WASTE TONER SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P18-A3PIN<=>P18-A1PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the WASTE TONER detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Go to Step MCU PWB
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P18-A2PIN <=>P18-A1PIN: 5VDC
Check: WASTE TONER detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
- Pins: P/J18-A2PIN <=>P/J18-A1PIN
4 Go to Step MCU PWB Go to Step 5.
- Passed condition: 0VDC
(=Waste toner level is Low.)
- Blocked condition: 5VDC
(=Waste toner level is High=Full)
Check: TONER BOX HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the TONER BOX HARNESS have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the TONER BOX HARNESS.
continuity at the pin below?
- J88<=>P116
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper Replace the WASTE TONER
6 Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pin below? SENSOR.
- J116<=>J18

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-82


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.18 TONER BOX SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TONER BOX SENSOR, TONER BOX HARNESS, MAIN
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the TONER BOX SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P18-A6PIN<=>P18-A5PIN: 5VDC
Check: TONER BOX detection signal
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go go step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P18-A6PIN<=>P18-A5PIN: 5VDC
Check: TONER BOX detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
- Pin: P/J18-A6PIN<=>P/J18-A5PIN
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Passed condition: 0VDC
(=WASTE TONER BOX is installed)
- Blocked condition: 5VDC
(=WASTE TONER BOX is not installed.)
Check: TONER BOX HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the TONER BOX HARNESS have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the TONER BOX HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J83<=>P116
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Replace the TONER BOX SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J116<=>J18

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-83


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.19 ROS ASSY is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 ROS ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, EXIT HARNESS, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TOP EXIT SENSOR, FRONT COVER SWITCH R, MAIN
HARNESS, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the SOS SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P14-1PIN<=>P14-3PIN: 5VDC
Check: Power supply to the SOS detection signal
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P14-2PIN<=>P14-3PIN: 5VDC
Check: Rotation of the Scanner Motor
4 l Does the Scanner Motor rotate when the printer is Go to Step 7. Go to Step 5.
turned on? (Check that the motor is making a sound.)
Check: Power supply to the Scanner Motor
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
5 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 6.
Defective"
- P14-10PIN<=>P14-11PIN: 24VDC
Check: Scanner Motor ON signal
l Does the voltage level changes correctly when the
6 scanner motor is turned on? Go to Step 7. Go to Step 15.
- P14-12PIN<=>P14-13PIN
- Changes from 24VDC to 0VDC
Check: Power supply to the LDD
7 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 8. Replace the LVPS.
- P33-1PIN<=>P33-2PIN: 5VDC
Check: LDD electrical continuity
8 l Does the LDD have proper continuity at the pins below? Go to Step 15. Go to Step 9.
- J33-1PIN<=> J33-2PIN

(To be continued.)

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-84


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.19 "ROS ASSY is Defective" (Continued)

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
continuity at the pins below?
9 - J33-2PIN<=>P195-2PIN Go to Step 10. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
- P195-1PIN<=>J196-2PIN
- P196-1PIN<=>J194-1PIN
- J193-1PIN<=>J33-1PIN
Check: TOP COVER SWITCH electrical continuity
l Does the TOP COVER SWITCH have proper continuity
status depending on the conditions below?
10 Go to Step 11. Replace the TOP COVER SWITCH.
- Pins: J195-1PIN<=>J195-2PIN
- Contact area is pushed: Close
- Contact area is released: Open
Check: TOP COVER ASSY for its notche’s operation

11 l Is the notch in the TOP COVER ASSY pushing in the Go to Step 12. Replace the interfering part.
contact area of the TOP COVER SWITCH when the
TOP COVER ASSY is installed?
Check: FRONT COVER SWITCH R electrical continuity
l Do the terminals in the FRONT COVER SWITCH R
have proper continuity status depending on the Replace the FRONT COVER SWITCH
12 conditions below? Go to Step 13.
R.
- FRONT COVER is closed: Close
- FRONT COVER is open: Open
Check: FRONT COVER ASSY for notche’s action
13 l Is the notche in the COVER ASSY pushing in the Go to Step 14. Replace the interfering part.
contact point in the FRONT COVER SWITCH R when
the FRONT COVER ASSY is closed?
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
14 Go to Step 15 Replace the MAIN HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J116<=>J18
Check: MCU PWB replacement
15 l Does the problem still occur after replacing the MCU Replace the ROS ASSY. Problem solved.
PWB?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-85


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.20 ADC SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ADC SENSOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the ADC Sensor
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P17-18PIN<=>P17-21PIN: 5VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J17<=>J81
Check: ADC SENSOR ASSY replacement
4 l Does the problem still occur after replacing the ADC Replace the MCU PWB. Problem solved.
SENSOR ASSY?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-86


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.21 ADC SOLENOID is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ADC SENSOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the ADC Solenoid
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J17-22PIN<=>P/J17-23PIN: 24VDC
Check: ADC Solenoid
l Does the ADC Solenoid have proper continuity at the
3 pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J17-22PIN<=> 17-23PIN
- Resistance: 36 Ω
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 - Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J17<=>P81

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-87


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.22 CARTRIDGE SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
CARTRIDGE, FUSER CONNECTOR, FUSER HARNESS
ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the CARTRIDGE SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P17-6PIN<=>P17-4PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the CARTRIDGE detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P17-5PIN<=>P17-4PIN: 5VDC
Check: CARTRIDGE detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J17-5PIN<=>P/J17-4PIN
- Passed condition (cartridge is installed): 0VDC
- Blocked condition (cartridge is not installed): 5VDC
Check: CART. SENSOR HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the CART. SENSOR HARNESS have proper
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the CART. SENSOR H-ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J168<=>P89
Check: EXIT HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the EXIT HARNESS have proper continuity at the
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the EXIT HARNESS.
pins below?
- J89<=>J161
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
7 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J161<=>J17

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-88


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.23 USED CART. SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
USED CART. SENSOR, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the USED CART. SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P17-3PIN<=>P17-1PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the USED CART. detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P17-2PIN<=>P17-1PIN: 5VDC
Check: USED CART. detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J17-2PIN<=>P/J17-1PIN
- Passed condition (Cartridge is new): 0VDC
- Blocked condition (Cartridge is old): 5VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the USED CART. SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J17<=>J87

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-89


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.24 ROTARY SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ROTARY SENSOR, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check:
Power supply to the ROTARY SENSOR. SENSOR Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 Go to Step 3.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Defective".
- P19-6PIN<=>P17-4PIN: 5VDC
Check: Power supply to the ROTARY SENSOR
detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P19-5PIN<=>P17-4PIN: 5VDC
Check: ROTARY SENSOR detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
- Pins: P/J19-5PIN<=>P/J17-4PIN
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Penetrated condition: 0VDC
(= The notch is not detected.)
- Blocked condition: 5VDC
(=The notche is detected.)
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the ROTARY SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J19<=>J58

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-90


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.25 TRO SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TRO SENSOR, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the TRO SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P17-12PIN<=>P17-14PIN: 5VDC
Check: Power supply to the TRO detection signal
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P17-13PIN<=>P17-14PIN: 5VDC
Check: TRO detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
- Pins: P/J17-13PIN<=>P/J17-14PIN
4 - Reflecting condition: 0VDC Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
(TRO mark in the IBT BELT ASSY is detected.)
- Unreflecting condition: 5VDC
(Area other than TRO mark in the IBT BELT ASSY is
detected.)
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the TRO SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS.
continuity at the pins below?
- J116<=>J18

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-91


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.26 BTR CAM SOLENOID is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
BTR CAM SOLENOID, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the BTR CAM SOLENOID
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J19-39PIN<=>P/J21-2PIN: 24VDC
Check: BTR CAM SOLENOID electrical continuity
l Does the BTR CAM SOLENOID have proper continuity
3 at the pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J19-39PIN<=>J19-40PIN
- Resistance: 215Ω
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Replace the BTR CAM SOLENOID. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J19<=> J63PIN

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-92


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.27 FUSER IN SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER IN SENSOR, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, FUSER
HARNESS ASSY, FUSER IN HARNESS, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the FUSER IN SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P19-7PIN<=>P19-8PIN: 5VDC
Check: Power supply to the FUSER IN detection signal
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P19-8PIN<=>P19-9PIN: 5VDC
Check: FUSER IN detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J19-8PIN<=>P/J19-9PIN
- Passed condition (paper is set.): 0VDC
- Blocked condition (no paper is set.): 5VDC
Check: FUSER IN HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER IN HARNESS have proper continuity
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the FUSER IN HARNESS.
at the pin below?
- J117<=>P76
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J71<=>J76
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
7 Replace the FUSER IN SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
- P71<=>J19

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-93


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.28 FUSER EXIT SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
FUSER EXIT SENSOR, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, FUSER
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the FUSER EXIT SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P19-12PIN<=>P19-13PIN: 5VDC
Check:
Power supply to the FUSER EXIT detection signal
3 Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P19-13PIN<=>P19-14PIN: 5VDC
Check: FUSER EXIT detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB Go to Step 5.
- Pins: P/J19-13PIN<=>P/J19-14PIN
- Penetrated condition (paper is set.): 0VDC
- Blocked condition (no paper is set.): 5VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS have proper continuity at
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the HARNESS.
the pins below?
- J75<=>J72
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J71<=>J72
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
7 Replace the FUSER EXIT SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- P71<=>J19

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-94


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.29 TEMP. SENSOR ASSEMBLY is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TEMP. SENSOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, FUSER
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Thermistor in the TEMP. SENSOR ASSY
Replace/clean the TEMP. SENSOR
2 l Is the detection area of the thermistor smeared or ASSY.
Go to Step 3.
lodged with any foreign matter?
Check:
TEMP. SENSOR ASSY for thermistor resistance
Replace/clean the TEMP. SENSOR
3 l Is the resistance correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4.
ASSY.
- Pins: P72-4PIN<=>P72-5PIN
- Resistance: 240 kΩ (at 18 − 20°C)
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J71<=>J72
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- P71<=>J19

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-95


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.30 OIL CAM SOLENOID is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
OIL CAM SOLENOID, FUSER HARNESS ASSY, MAIN
HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the OIL CAM SOLENOID
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P/J18-B3PIN<=>P/J21-2PIN: 24VDC
Check: OIL CAM SOLENOID
l Does the OIL CAM SOLENOID have proper continuity
3 at the pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- Pins: J18-B3PIN<=>J18-B4PIN
- Resistance: 215Ω
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J73<=>J71PIN
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
5 Replace the OIL CAM SOLENOID. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- P71<=>J18PIN

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-96


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.31 CLEANER CAM SOLENOID is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
CLEANER CAM SOLENOID, FUSER HARNESS ASSY,
MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check:
Power supply to the CLEANER CAM SOLENOID Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 Go to Step 3.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Defective".
- P/J18-B5PIN<=>P/J21-2PIN: 24VDC
Check: CLEANER CAM SOLENOID
l Does the CLEANER CAM SOLENOID have proper
3 continuity at the pins below? Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
- J18-B5PIN<=>J18-B4PIN
- 215Ω
Check: FUSER HARNESS ASSY
l Does the FUSER HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the FUSER HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J73<=> J71PIN
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper Replace the CLEANER CAM
5 Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below? SOLENOID.
- P71<=> J18PIN

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-97


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.32 TOP EXIT SENSOR is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
TOP EXIT SENSOR, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, EXIT
HARNESS, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the TOP EXIT SENSOR
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P17-7PIN<=>P17-8PIN: 5VDC
Check: Power supply to the TOP EXIT
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Replace the MCU PWB.
• P17-9PIN<=>P17-8PIN: 5VDC
Check: TOP EXIT detection signal
l Is the voltage level correct depending on the conditions
below?
4 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 5.
- P/J17-9PIN<=>P/J17-8PIN
- Passed condition (Paper is set): 0VDC
- Blocked condition (No paper is set): 5VDC
Check: EXIT HARNESS electrical continuity
l Does the EXIT HARNESS have proper continuity at the
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the EXIT HARNESS.
pins below?
- J165<=>J161
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Replace the TOP EXIT SENSOR. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J161<=>J17

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-98


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.33 PROCESS MOTOR ASSY is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
PROCESS MOTOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the PROCESS MOTOR ASSY
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 3.
- P/J51-2<=>P/J51-1: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the LVPS
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
Defective".
- J32-9<=>J32-10: 24VDC
Check:
Power supply to the PROCESS MOTOR’s ON signal
4 Go to Step 5. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P17-31<=>P17-33: 24VDC
Check:
Power supply to the PROCESS MOTOR SPEED signal
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P17-32<=>P17-33: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper Replace the PROCESS MOTOR
6 Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below? ASSY.
- J52<=>J17

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-99


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.34 P/H MOTOR ASSY is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
1 Parts to inspect: Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
P/H MOTOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: Power supply to the P/H MOTOR ASSY
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 3.
- P/J49-2<=>P/J49-1: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the LVPS
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
Defective".
- J32-8<=>J32-7: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the P/H MOTOR ON signal
4 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 5. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P17-26<=>P17-28: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the P/H MOTOR SPEED signal
5 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 6. Replace the MCU PWB.
- P17-27<=>P17-28: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
6 l Is there proper continuity at the pin below? Replace the P/H MOTOR ASSY. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
- J50<=>J17

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-100


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.35 ROTARY MOTOR ASSY is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ROTARY MOTOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the ROTARY MOTOR ASSY
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 3.
- P/J246-3<=>P/J246-1: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the LVPS
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
Defective".
- J32-3<=>J32-2: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the ROTARY MOTOR ASSY
Go to FIP-2.1 "LVPS 5VDC is
4 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 5.
Defective".
- P16-12<=>P16-11: 5VDC
Check:
Voltage level of the ROTARY MOTOR ON signal
5 Go to Step 6. Replace the MCU PWB.
l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below?
- P16-9<=>P16-11: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
6 Replace the ROTARY MOTOR ASSY. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J50<=>J17

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-101


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.36 DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P18-A8PIN<=>P18-A9PIN: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the MAIN HARNESS ASSY
3 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 4. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
- J18<=>J55
Check: MCU PWB replacement
Replace the DISPENSE MOTOR
4 l Does the problem still occur after replacing the MCU ASSY.
Problem solved.
PWB?

FIP-2.37 DEVE. CLUTCH ASSY is Defective.

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
DEVE. CLUTCH ASSY, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU
PWB
Check: Power supply to the DEVE. CLUTCH ASSY
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
2 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 3.
Defective".
- P19-31PIN<=>P19-32PIN: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the DEVE. CLUTCH ASSY
l Does the have proper continuity at the pins belowIs the
3 Replace the MCU PWB. Go to Step 4.
voltage level correct at the pins below?
- J19-31PIN<=>J19-32PIN 150Ω
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have proper
4 Replace the DEVE. CLUTCH ASSY. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
continuity at the pins below?
- J19<=>J56

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-102


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.38 HVPS is Defective

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 BCR WIRE, DEVE. WIRE, BCR CONNECTOR ASSY, Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
DEVE. CONTACT ASSY, DTS WIRE, DTS PLATE, 2ND
BTR ASSY, TRANSFER ASSY, 2ND BTR CAM ASSY,
HVPS, MAIN HARNESS ASSY, MCU PWB
Check: BCR WIRE
2 Go to Step 3. Replace the BCR WIRE.
l Do the terminals on the BCR WIRE have continuity?
Check: DEVE. WIRE
3 l Do the terminals on the DEVE. WIRE have proper Go to Step 4. Replace the DEVE. WIRE.
continuity?
Check: BCR CONNECTOR ASSY
Reinstall /replace the BCR
4 l Is the BCR CONNECTOR ASSY deformed, damaged, CONNECTOR ASSY.
Go to Step 5.
or installed improperly?
Check: DEVE. CONTACT ASSY
Reinstall/replace the DEVE. CONTACT
5 l Is the DEVE. CONTACT ASSY deformed or damaged? Go to Step 6.
ASSY.
l Is the DEVE. CONTACT ASSY installed improperly?
Check: DTS WIRE
6 Go to Step 7. Replace the 2ND BTR CAM ASSY.
l Do the terminals on the DEVE. WIRE have continuity?
Check: DTS PLATE
7 l Is the DTS PLATE deformed damaged, or installed Replace the 2ND BTR CAM ASSY. Go to Step 8.
improperly?
Check: 2ND BTR ASSY
8 l Do the terminals in the high voltage lead in the 2ND Go to Step 9. Replace the 2ND BTR ASSY.
BTR ASSY have proper continuity?
Check: TRANSFER ASSY
l Does the high voltage flow in the TRANSFER ASSY
have proper continuity? (Check the points below for
9 continuity.)
Go to Step 10. Replace the TRANSFER ASSY.
- 1ST BTR WIRE terminal<=>1ST BTR
- CONTACT ROLL WIRE terminal<=>1ST BTR

(To be continued.)

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-103


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

(Continued)

FIP-2.38 "HVPS is Defective"

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Check: Power supply to the HVPS
10 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Go to Step 12. Go to Step 11.
- P/J41-1<=>P/J41-3: 24VDC
Check: Power supply to the LVPS
Go to FIP-2.2 "LVPS 24VDC is
11 l Is the voltage level correct at the pins below? Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
Defective".
- J32-4<=>J32-5: 24VDC
Check: MAIN HARNESS ASSY electrical continuity
l Does the MAIN HARNESS ASSY have continuity at the
12 Go to Step 13. Replace the MAIN HARNESS ASSY.
pins below?
- J16<=>J42
Check: MCU PWB replacement
13 l Does the problem still occur after replacing the MCU Go to Step HVPS Problem solved.
PWB?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-104


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-2.39 Electrical Noise

Remedy
Step Check point
Yes No
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
1 LVPS, BCR CONNECTOR ASSY, DEVE. CONTACT Replace/reinstall the defective part(s). Go to Step 2.
ASSY, 2ND BTR ASSY, H/R HEATER, P/R HEATER,
DRUM CARTRIDGE, MCU PWB
2 l Is the printer properly grounded? Go to Step 3. Ground the printer properly.
l Is another electrical product near the printer making a Move the printer and the electrical
3 Go to Step 4.
noise? product away from each other.
Check: LVPS
4 l Is the grounding wire securely connected to the power Go to Step 5. Fix the grounding wire securely.
switch/inlet part in the LVPS?
Check: BCR CONNECTOR ASSY
Reinstall/replace the BCR
5 l Is the BCR CONNECTOR ASSY deformed, damaged, CONNECTOR ASSY.
Go to Step 6.
or installed improperly?
Check: DEVE. CONTACT ASSY
Reinstall/replace the DEVE. CONTACT
6 l Is the DEVE. CONTACT ASSY deformed, damaged, or ASSY.
Go to Step 7.
installed improperly?
Check: 2ND BTR ASSY
7 l Does the high voltage flow in the 2ND BTR ASSY have Go to Step 8. Replace the 2ND BTR ASSY.
proper continuity?
Check: H/R HEATER, P/R HEATER
8 l Are the both ends of the H/R HEATER, P/R HEATER Go to Step 9. Fix them properly.
securely fixed?
Check: DRUM CARTRIDGE replacement
9 l Does the problem still occur after replacing the DRUM Go to Step 10. Problem solved.
CARTRIDGE?
Check: MCU PWB replacement
10 l Does the problem still occur after replacing the MCU Go to Step 11. Problem solved.
PWB?
Check the parts listed for the preliminary inspection and
11 other relevant parts for any abnormality. Replace/reinstall the defective part. Problem solved. *1
l Is any of the parts defective?

*1: If the problem still occurs after all steps, you can wait and see what happens, since some external cause of the problem is considered.

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-105


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

5.4 Print Quality Troubleshooting 5.4.1 Print Quality Troubleshooting Entry Chart

This section describes how to solve the print quality problems by using
the Level 3 FIPs.

C H E C K <Preliminary inspection>
P O IN T S T A R T
In each FIP, you are required to perform the
“Preliminary inspection” prior to any other actions.
The Preliminary inspection involves the following: R u n a te s t p r in t.
n Check for any part that does not meet the
specifications.
n Check if any part has been installed improperly.
n Check for part that is damaged, deformed, smeared, D o y o u fin d th e N o
or lodged with foreign matter. F IP to p e rfo rm ?

Y e s

P e rfo rm th e c o r r e s p o n d in g F IP . T r o u b le s h o o t th e p r o b le m .

N o H a s th e p r o b le m N o H a s th e p r o b le m
b e e n s o lv e d ? b e e n s o lv e d ?

Y e s Y e s

F in is h e d . F in is h e d .

Figure 5-2. Print Quality Troubleshooting Entry Chart

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-106


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

5.4.2 Print Quality FIP The FIPs for the common problems are as listed below:
NOTE: The Print Quality FIP is applicable on the condition that the n FIP-3.1 "Low image density"
printer controller (Controller PWB) is functioning properly. To
n FIP-3.2 "Blank prints"
isolate the cause of the problem, whether the engine side or
controller side, you can run a test print using the engine or n FIP-3.3 "Black prints"
diagnostic board. (Some print problems can not be explained by
n FIP-3.4 "White/light deletion along the Paper Feed Direction"
the test print.)
n FIP-3.5 "White/Shady deletion lines appear vertically to the
If the test print using the engine or diagnostic board is performed
paper feeding direction"
properly, it means the Controller PWB is faulty. On the other
hand, if neither test runs abnormally, it means the fault is on the n FIP-3.6 "Black/Color Spots"
engine side.
n FIP-3.7 "Toner Smearing"
If “a fault on the Controller PWB side” is assumed, replace the
n FIP-3.8 "Skew"
Controller PWB and the interface; and check the performance. If
the same trouble occurs after replacement, check the host n FIP-3.9 "Creased paper"
computer and perform troubleshooting efficiently using the
n FIP-3.10 "Improper fusing"
following print quality FIPs.
NOTE: Refer to the table below which shows the circumference (=
When you find a print quality problem, output an image on a A4 or A3 printed cycle) of each roll that is related in the print quality
paper to grasp and understand the troubled condition well and apply the troubleshooting.
appropriate solution.

If the problem is not solved using the FIP, repeat the FIP again, and Table 5-24. Roller Circumferences
replace the parts listed in the “Preliminary inspection” one by one to Parts (Higher Assembly) Cycle
troubleshoot. Magnet Roll (DEVELOPER ASSY.) 28 mm
Drum (DRUM CARTRIDGE) 264 mm
BCR (DRUM CARTRIDGE) 44 mm
1ST BTR (TRANSFER ASSY) 59 mm
BACK UP ROLL (TRANSFER ASSY) 88 mm
2ND BTR (2ND BTR ASSY) 88 mm
HEAT ROLL (MAIN FUSER ASSY) 117 mm
PRESSURE ROLL (MAIN FUSER ASSY) 117 mm
OIL ROLL (OIL ROLL ASSY) 107 mm
FEED ROLL 90 mm

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-107


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-3.1 Low image density

Phenomenon: Overall Image density is lower than normally.

Perform the preliminary inspection.


Parts to inspect:
Toner Cartridge, DRUM CARTRIDGE, HVPS, ROS ASSY, MCU PWB

Item Check Points Remedy (When abnormal)

Toner Cartridge for its toner level


1 Replace the Toner Cartridge.
l Does the Toner Cartridge have enough toner?
Laser beam path condition Remove the foreign matter / smear
2 l Is there any foreign matter or smear along the along the laser beam transmission path
laser beam transmission path between the between the ROS ASSEMBLY and the
ROS ASSEMBLY and the Drum? DRUM.

Improper Charging/Development
During the image transfer, turn the printer off and
examine the toner image on the drum surface Refer to “FIP-2.38 "HVPS is
3 (point before the transfer) visually. Defective"”.
l Is the toner image on the drum developed
properly?

Improper 1st transfer


During the image transfer, turn the printer off and
examine the image on the TRANSFER BELT Refer to “FIP-2.38 "HVPS is SER576X
4 ASSY visually. Defective"”.
l Is the image on the drum properly transferred
to the TRANSFER BELT ASSY?

Improper 2nd transfer


During the image transfer, turn the printer off and
Refer to “FIP-2.38 "HVPS is
5 examine the image on the paper visually.
Defective"”.
l Is the image on the TRANSFER BELT ASSY
properly transferred to the paper?

DRUM CARTRIDGE malfunction


6 Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE with a new one. Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE.
l Has the problem been solved?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-108


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-3.2 Blank prints

Phenomenon: The entire print is blank.

Perform the preliminary inspection.


Parts to inspect:
DRUM CARTRIDGE, Toner Cartridge, HVPS, ROS ASSY, MCU PWB

Item Check Points Remedy (When abnormal)

Toner Cartridge for its toner level


1 Replace the Toner Cartridge.
l Does the Toner Cartridge have enough toner?
Laser beam path condition Remove the foreign matter / smear
2 l Is there any foreign matter or smear along the along the laser beam transmission path
laser beam transmission path between the ROS between the ROS ASSEMBLY and the
ASSEMBLY and the Drum? DRUM.

Improper Charging/Development
During the image transfer, turn the printer off and
examine the toner image on the drum surface Refer to “FIP-2.38 "HVPS is
3 (point before the transfer) visually. Defective"”.
l Is the toner image on the drum developed
properly?

Improper 1st transfer


During the image transfer, turn the printer off and
examine the image on the TRANSFER BELT ASSY Refer to “FIP-2.38 "HVPS is
4 visually. Defective"”.
l Is the image on the drum properly transferred to
the TRANSFER BELT ASSY?

Improper 2nd transfer


During the image transfer, turn the printer off and
Refer to “FIP-2.38 "HVPS is
5 examine the image on the paper visually.
Defective"”.
l Is the image on the TRANSFER BELT ASSY
properly transferred to the paper?

DRUM CARTRIDGE malfunction


6 Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE with a new one. Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE.
l Has the problem been solved?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-109


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-3.3 Black prints

Phenomenon: Entire page is completely black.

Perform the preliminary inspection.


Parts to inspect:
DRUM CARTRIDGE, HVPS, ROS ASSY, MCU PWB

Item Check Points Remedy (When abnormal)

Improper charging
Using a sheet of paper, cover the laser beam
1 emission window and run a print.
Refer to “FIP-2.38 "HVPS is Defective"”.

l Does the problem still occur?


ROS ASSY malfunction
Using a sheet of paper, cover the laser beam Refer to “FIP-1.22 "ROS ASSY Related
2 emission window half way and run a print. Error"”.
l Does the problem still occurs?
DRUM CARTRIDGE malfunction
3 Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE with a new one. Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE.
l Has the problem been solved?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-110


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-3.4 White/light deletion along the Paper Feed Direction

Phenomenon:
White/light bands run along the direction of paper feeding.
Paper Feeding Direction

Perform the preliminary inspection.


Parts to inspect:
DRUM CARTRIDGE, HVPS, ROS ASSY, MCU PWB, FUSER ASSY, MAIN FUSER ASSY

Item Check Points Remedy (When abnormal)

Improper charging
1 Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE. Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE.
l Has the problem been solved?
ROS ASSY malfunction
Using a sheet of paper, cover the laser beam Refer to “FIP-1.22 "ROS ASSY Related
2 emission window half way and run a print. Error"”.
l Does the problem still occurs?
FUSER ASSY malfunction
Is the HEAT ROLL/PRESSURE ROLL in the
3 Replace the FUSER ASSY.
FUSER ASSY damaged, smeared, or lodged with
any foreign matter?

Developer Assy malfunction


4 Is the trimmer gap in the Developer Assy of the Replace the relevant Developer Assy.
SER577X
relevant color clogged?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-111


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-3.5 White/Shady deletion lines appear vertically to the paper feeding direction

Phenomenon:
White/light deletion lines run vertically to the paper feeding direction.
Paper Feeding Direction
Perform the preliminary inspection.
Parts to inspect:
Developer ASSY, DRUM CARTRIDGE, BELT TRANSFER ASSY, 2ND BTR, HEAT ROLL, PRESSURE
ROLL, OIL ROLL ASSY, FEED ROLL ASSY

Item Check Points Remedy (When abnormal)

Replace the faulty part.


Periodicity Note: You can find the faulty part based
1
l Do the lines appear periodically? on the periodicity and the roller
circumference.

Controller PWB malfunction


2 Replace the Controller PWB with a new one. Replace the Controller PWB.
l Has the problem been solved?

SER578X

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-112


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-3.6 Black/Color Spots

Phenomenon: Black/Color spots appear in the output.

Perform the preliminary inspection.


Parts to inspect:
DRUM CARTRIDGE, HVPS, 2ND BTR ASSY, FUSER ASSY, (HEAT ROLL/PRESSURE ROLL)

Item Check Points Remedy (When abnormal)

Damp paper
Replace the paper. (Instruct the
1 Replace the paper with new one.
customer to store paper in a dry place.)
l Has the problem been solved?
Improper Charging/Development
During the image transfer, turn the printer off and
examine the toner image on the drum surface Refer to “FIP-2.38 "HVPS is
2 (point before the transfer) visually. Defective"”.
l Is the toner image on the drum developed
properly?

Improper 1st transfer


During the image transfer, turn the printer off and
examine the image on the TRANSFER BELT ASSY Refer to “FIP-2.38 "HVPS is
3 visually. Defective"”.
l Is the image on the drum properly transferred to
the TRANSFER BELT ASSY?

HEAT ROLL, PRESSURE ROLL malfunction


Clean or replace the HEAT ROLL / SER582X
4 l Is the HEAT ROLL/PRESSURE ROLL in the PRESSURE ROLL in the FUSER
FUSER ASSY damaged, smeared, or lodged
ASSY.
with any foreign matter?

DRUM CARTRIDGE malfunction


5 Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE with a new one. Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE.
l Has the problem been solved?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-113


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-3.7 Toner Smearing

Phenomenon: Non-printed area on the paper is smeared with toner.

Perform the preliminary inspection.


Parts to inspect:
DRUM CARTRIDGE, HVPS, Developer ASSY, DEVE. CONTACT ASSY

Item Check Points Remedy (When abnormal)

Deteriorated carrier
Replace the relevant Developer assy with a new
1 one.
Replace the Developer assy.

l Has the problem been solved?


DEVE. CONTACT ASSY installation
Install the DEVE. CONTACT ASSY
2 l Is the DEVE. CONTACT ASSY properly properly.
installed?

HVPS malfunction
3 Replace the HVPS. Replace the HVPS.
l Has the problem been solved?
DRUM CARTRIDGE malfunction
4 Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE with a new one. Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE.
l Has the problem been solved?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-114


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-3.8 Skew

Phenomenon: The printed image is skewed.

Perform the preliminary inspection.


Parts to inspect:
MAIN FUSER ASSY, PICK UP ROLL, FEED ROLL ASSY, TURN ROLL ASSY, MAIN P/H ASSY

Item Check Points Remedy (When abnormal)

Set paper or paper cassette properly.


Improper paper setting
1 (Instruct the customer to set paper and
l Is paper or paper cassette set properly? paper cassette properly.)

Bad paper path condition


2 l Is the paper path damage, smeared, or lodged Clean the defective part or replace it.
with any foreign matter?

Defective Paper loading rollers


3 Clean or replace the defective roll.
l Do the paper loading rollers load paper?
Defective paper feeding rollers
l Is any of the paper feeding rollers deformed,
4 smeared, or lodged with any foreign matter? Clean or replace the defective roll.
l Are the paper feeding rollers operating
improperly?

ROS ASSY installation


5 Reinstall the ROS ASSY.
l Is the ROS ASSY positioned properly?
DRUM CARTRIDGE malfunction SER585X
6 Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE with a new one. Replace the DRUM CARTRIDGE.
l Has the problem been solved?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-115


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-3.9 Creased paper

Phenomenon: The image is printed on a creased paper.

Perform the preliminary inspection.


Parts to inspect:
MAIN FUSER ASSY, HEAT ROLL, PRESSURE ROLL, MCU PWB, DRUM CARTRIDGE, RETARD
PAD ASSY, TURN ROLL ASSY, FEED ROLL ASSY, Paper cassettes

Item Check Points Remedy (When abnormal)

Damp paper
Replace the Paper. (Instruct the
1 Replace the paper with new ones.
customer to store paper in a dry place.)
l Does the problem still occur?
HEAT ROLL/PRESSURE ROLL in the FUSER
ASSY malfunction Clean or replace the HEAT ROLL/
2 l Is the HEAT ROLL/PRESSURE ROLL in the PRESSURE ROLL in the FUSER
FUSER ASSY damaged, smeared, lodged with ASSY.
any foreign matter?

Paper skew
3 Refer to FIP-3.8 "Skew".
l Is paper fed aslant?
Bad paper path condition
4 l Is the paper path damaged, smeared, or lodged Clean or replace the defective part.
with any foreign matter?

Paper path rolls malfunction SER586X


5 l Is any roll in the paper path deformed, smeared, Clean or replace the defective part.
lodged with any foreign matter, or functioning
improperly?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-116


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

FIP-3.10 Improper fusing

Phenomenon:
Output image is easily rubbed off the paper.

Perform the preliminary inspection.


Parts to inspect:
TEMP. SENSOR ASSY, MAIN FUSER ASSY, HEAT ROLL, PRESSURE ROLL, MCU PWB

Item Check Points Remedy (When abnormal)

Damp paper
Replace the Paper. (Instruct the
1 Replace the paper with new one.
customer to store paper in a dry place.)
l Has the problem been solved?
TEMP. SENSOR ASSY Clean or replace the TEMP. SENSOR
2
l Is the TEMP. SENSOR ASSY surface dirty? ASSY.

HEAT ROLL, PRESSURE ROLL malfunction


Clean or replace the HEAT ROLL/
3 l Is the HEAT ROLL/PRESSURE ROLL in the PRESSURE ROLL in the FUSER
FUSER ASSY damaged, smeared, or lodged
ASSY.
with any foreign matter?

MAIN FUSER ASSY malfunction


Make adjustment described in Chapter
5 l Are the HEAT ROLL and PRESSURE ROLL in 3/Section 3.3.
the FUSER ASSY pressing paper with proper SER587X
Replace the MAIN FUSER ASSY.
pressure?

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-117


CHAPTER

6
MAINTENANCE
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

Contents
ABOUT ON-SITE SERVICING ...................................................................... 1
On-site Service Flow ................................................................................. 2
Description of the On-site Service............................................................. 3
MAINTENANCE MENU ................................................................................. 5
Entry to the Maintenance Menu ................................................................ 5
Engine Status Sheet.................................................................................. 6
CONSUMABLE REPLACEMENT ................................................................. 8
TONER CARTRIDGE Replacement ......................................................... 9
OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY Replacement...................................................... 11
DRUM CARTRIDGE Replacement ......................................................... 12
WASTE TONER BOX Replacement ....................................................... 14
REGULARLY REPLACED PART REPLACEMENT ................................... 15
INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 15
EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

6.1 About On-Site Servicing


W A R N IN G - Do not catch your hands and clothes in the rotating
This section contains information you need when visiting your customer parts such as rollers and fans.
for on-site servicing including preventive maintenance required to - Keep your hands off the electrical terminals and high
prevent any potential printer malfunction as well as normal voltage components such as HVPS and LVPS.
maintenance. To prevent accident during servicing, observe the
“WARNING” and “CAUTION” carefully and avoid servicing in a n Be aware that this printer emits laser beam when the
dangerous situation. printer is under the both of the following conditions.
- The printer power switch is on and the printer is in
W A R N IN G n Before servicing, be sure to turn the printer off and
“Ready” status.
unplug the power code from the wall outlet before to
prevent injury, burnt, and electrification. If you must - Interlock switches are off (The TOP COVER and the
keep the power applied to measure voltage, be aware FRONT COVER are closed.)
of the potential for electrical shock and do all tasks
with the most care. C A U T IO N n Be careful of sharp edges of the metal frames used in
n Never inspect any motor, sprocket, and gear while the many parts of this printer.
printer is operating. n Do not disassembly the TONER CARTRIDGE.
n Weight n Do not leave the DRUM CARTRIDGE in direct sun
This printer weighs quite heavily (about 69Kg). Be light.
sure to carry it by 4 people or more and take a good n Do not disassembly the ROS ASSEMBLY.
posture keeping your back low. n Avoid touching IC and other electrical element with
n Safety Components your bare hands to protect them from static
Make sure the safety components function properly. electricity.
The safety devices include fuses, interlock switches n Do not turn off the power until all motors stop.
and others such as panels and covers for protecting n In case you need to transport the printer:
users. 1. Remove the DRUM CARTRIDGE from the printer.
n Do not touch the FUSER ASSEMBLY (Fusing unit) 2. Pack the printer using the exclusive packing
while it is still very hot shortly after operation. After materials and on a pallet.
servicing, note the following points when turning on n Do not dispose of any replaced parts and
the printer for operation. cousumabels at your customer’s place.
(Continues to the next page.)
n Once color toner gets on a floor, it is hardly cleaned
out. Therefore, be sure to place a sheet or cloth inside
the printer so that the floor is protected.

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-1


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

6.1.1 On-site Service Flow

P r e lim in a r y C h e c k
1 . C h e c k th e p r in te r c o n d itio n w ith th e u s e r .
2 . E n s u re s a fe ty .
3 . P r in t a s ta tu s s h e e t to c h e c k th e p r in te r c o n d itio n .
4 . P r in t a n e n g in e s ta tu s s h e e t to c h e c k th e e n g in e h is to r y .

P u r p o s e o f v is itin g
R e p a ir M a in te n a n c e

R e a p p e a r a n c e o f th e tr o u b le
G o to C h a p te r 5 " T o u b le s h o o tin g " .

< P r in it q u a lity c h e c k >

< C le a n in g >

< P r e v e n tiv e m a in te n a n c e >

< R e p la c e m e n t o f c o n s u m a b le s a n d
r e g u la r r e p la c e d p a r t>

C h e c k in g t h e p r in t e r 's o v e r a ll o p e r a t io n .

F in a l c h e c k o u t
1 . E x te r io r c h e c k o f th e p r itn e r
2 . In s tr u c tin g th e u s e r , if n e c e s s a r y .

Figure 6-1. On-site Service Flowchart

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-2


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

6.1.2 Description of the On-site Service 2. If any abnormality is found in the listed check points:

This section gives instruction on the on-site service in detail. n Check the life counters of the consumables and regularly
replaced parts. (See Section 6.2.)
o Preliminary Check
n Perform the adjustment. (See Chapter 3.)
1. Ask the users the following: o Cleaning
n How often paper feed malfunction occurs.
1. Remove any foreign matter lodged in the 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY,
n What the printer is used like. (paper, volume, environment, etc.) MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY, FUSER ASSEMBLY, and rollers in the
n Output quality paper paths and so on. Then clean the dirt using a brush or dry soft
cloth.
o Reappearance of the trouble
NOTE:To remove severe dirt, remove it with a moistened cloth then
Perform troubleshooting described in Chapter 5. wipe with a dry cloth. Be sure not to mar the dirty part during
cleaning.
1. Using diagnostic function, identify the trouble and perform
necessary troubleshooting. 2. Using a soft cloth, clean out the spilt toner in the following parts:
DEVELOPER, TONER CARTRIDGE (including their installing
2. If necessary, proceed to “Level 1 FIP” and “Level 2 FIP”. positions), inside of the FRONT COVER, WASTE TONER BOX
installation point and its adjacent parts, BELT CLEANER
3. If a print quality problem (completely blank/black page), a fatal
ASSEMBLY and its adjacent parts.
problem, due to engine malfunction is identified, go to “Print quality
troubleshooting”. 3. Clean the fan ducts. Remove the REAR COVER and remove the
o Print quality check dust adhered to the DEVE. FAN, FUSER FAN, and REAR COVER
with a brush. Also, remove the dust accumulated on the
1. Print several pages of monochrome and color status sheet to check CONTROLLER FAN and the TOP COVER by removing the TOP
print quality. COVER.
<Points to check> NOTE:Clogged dust around the fan ducts and fans can heat up the
air inside of the printer, which may cause a printer
n Color balance
malfunction.
n Improper color position
n Too dark/light printing
n Abnormal reappearance at low density
n Others

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-3


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o Preventive maintenance (Checking the consumables and regularly o Final checkout


replaced parts)
1. Check exterior view of the printer.
In addition to repair and maintenance of the printer, preventive
maintenance is required to maintain the printer’s good operation and to 2. If necessary, give an instruction to the users.
prevent any potential problem in other parts that the serviced parts. n How to clear the paper jam error

1. After repairing or maintenance, output several status sheets and n How to replace the consumables
check that the printer operates normally.
n What kind of paper can be used for the printer.
2. After repairing or maintenance, output an engine status sheet.
NOTE:Referring the total number of the printed pages, determine if
any regularly replaced part needs replacing, and replace it if
necessary.

o Replacing the consumables and regularly replaced parts

Replace any regularly replaced part if necessary. (See Section 6.3


“Consumable Replacement” and Section 6.4 “Regularly Replaced Part
Replacement”.)

o Checking overall printer operation

After servicing, give an overall checking to the printer. Print a few status
sheets and a test prints with data sent from the host computer. Check
the following:
n Print quality: Check that print quality is good.
n Operation: Check that paper is fed properly and there is no
abnormal noise.

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-4


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

6.2 Maintenance Menu 2. Referring to the flowchart below, activate the desirable function
throughout the panel operation.
Maintenance Menu contains the following functions:
n Shows life counter values for consumables and regularly R e a d y
replaced parts and total number of printed pages and color print S e le c T y p e b u tto n
pages
n Resets the counter values for the regularly replaced parts T e s t M e n u
n Resets the counter values for total printed page number and M e n u b u tto n
total color print pages.
M a in te n a n c e M e n u
Ite m b u tto n E n te r b u tto n
6.2.1 Entry to the Maintenance Menu
2 n d B T R R e s e t C le a r e d th e c o u n te r
C A U T IO N n Check the following before entering the Maintenance
menu: C le a r e d th e c o u n te r
IB T C le a n e r R e s e t
-All interface cables are disconnected.
F u s e r U n it R e s e t C le a r e d th e c o u n te r
-“Service Call Error” is not indicated.
P a g e C o u n t R e s e t C le a r e d th e c o u n te r
n Before exiting the menu, ensure the engine is not live.
If not, you can turn the printer off. E n g in g e S ta tu s S h e e t P r in ts th e E n g in e S ta tu s S h e e t

1. Turn the printer on while pressing the “On Line”, “Form Feed”, and
Figure 6-2. Maintenance Menu Operation
“Continue”. All LED lamps and the LCD come on and the following
messages appears consequently in the LCD. (Keep the buttons
down until instructed to do so.)
RAMCHECK **.*MB
Note: **.* above represents numeric which counts up.
Note: Release the buttons as the next message appears.
MAINTENANCE MODE
Ready
(The printer is in a usual ready status.)

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-5


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

6.2.2 Engine Status Sheet


The figure below shows a sample of status sheet.
Ite m U n it C o n te r v a lu e L ife v a lu e W a r n in g v a lu e

T O N E R C A R T R ID G E

D R U M C A R T R ID G E
2 N D B T R A S S Y
B E L T C L E A N E R A S S Y
O IL R O L L A S S Y
M A IN F U S E R A S S Y
X X X
Z Z Z
Y Y Y

Note: The limit and warning values vary


depending on the product specifications.
M C U P W B V e r s io n

Figure 6-3. Engine Status Sheet Sample

o Item description
TONER CARTRIDGE:
Shows accumulated operation time of the Toner Dispense
Mechanism. The value is converted into the total page number as
shown below:
Total page number (approximately) = Counter value/Life value ×
4500 for K toner, × 6000 for Y, M, C toners.
Individual counter value for each color of toner cartridge is stored in
the EEPROM on the MCU PWB. When a new cartridge is detected,
the counter for the appropriate counter is automatically reset.

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-6


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

DRUM CARTRIDGE: MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY:


Shows the accumulated number of the drum rotation. One Shows Toner dispense time (total of Y, M, C, and K) and The value
increment for 1 page of A4/Letter is 2. of this counter is stored in the EEPROM on the MCU PWB. When a
relevant “Maintenance service-call error” or “Service-cal error
The counter value is stored in CRUM of the DRUM CARTRIDGE
E0003” is indicated, replace the MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY with a
and is reset when a new DRUM CARTRIDGE is installed.
new one, and perform “Fuser Unit Rest” in the Maintenance menu.
Generally, the life of the WASTE TONER BOX is the same as for
Page Count
the DRUM CARTRIDGE, however, it might reaches its end of life
earlier according to the condition such as color/ monochrome print, Shows the total number of printed pages (converted in A4/Letter
print duty, paper jam and so on. size). If “Page Count Reset” is performed in the Main menu, the
following 3 canters are reset.
OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY:
n Printer 1: Total number of printed pages
Shows the total number of printed pages (converted in A4/Letter
size). The counter value is stored in the EEPROM on the MCU PWB n Printer 2:
and is reset when a new OIL ROLL is detected. The counter increments 1 for 1 page of monochrome print and 4
for 1 page of color print.
2ND BTR ASSEMBLY:
n Printer (Color)
Shows the total number of printed pages (Converted in A4/Letter
Shows the total number of color print pages. To figure out the
size). The counter value is stored in the EEPROM on the MCU
total number of monochrome print pages, reduce the value of
PWB. When a relevant “Maintenance service-call error” or “Service-
this counter from the value of the counter “Printer 1”.
cal error E0024” is indicated, replace the 2ND BTR ASSEMBLY with
a new one, and perform “2ND BTR Reset” in the Maintenance
menu.
BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY:
Shows the total number of printed pages (converted in A4/Letter
size). The counter value is stored in the EEPROM on the MCU
PWB. When a relevant “Maintenance service-call error” or “Service-
cal error E0023” is indicated, replace the BELT CLEANER
ASSEMBLY with a new one, and perform “IBT CLEANER Reset” in
the Maintenance menu.

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-7


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

6.3 Consumable Replacement


This printer allow the users to replace the cunsumables. The
consumables includes the following 4 items:
a) TONER CARTRIDGE b) OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY
c) DRUM CARTRIDGE d) WASTE TONER BOX

a) TONER CARTRIDGE b) OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY

c) DRUM CARTRIDGE d) WASTE TONER BOX

Figure 6-4. Consumables

Life information on these consumables is informed as follows:


Step 1: Warning indication (near end) on the LCD
Step 2: Life end indication on the LCD

As for toner level, users can check by printing a status sheet or panel
operation.

Servicers, on the other hand, can access to all the detailed information
through out each cousumabels life using the maintenance mode.

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-8


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

6.3.1 TONER CARTRIDGE Replacement 3. If you can see the color that you need to replace at the installation
window, go to Step 4. If you the cartridge to be replaced is not in the
There are Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and K (Black) Toner cartridges installation window, move it into the window by repeating the
available for TONER CARTRIDGE. operation described in the figure below.

C A U T IO N n Ensure that the colors of the TONER CARTRIDGE to


be installed and the toner cartridge installation 1 . P u s h u p th e s w itc h .
position are the same.
2 . T u rn th e k n o b in th e
n Never use the TONER CARTRIDGE once taken out. d ir e c tio n o f th e a r r o w s u n til
n If you have moved the TONER CARTRIDGE from a it s to p s , a n d th e n e x t c a r tr id g e
warm place into a cold place, leave it in a room s lo t a p p e a r s in th e in s ta lla tio n
w in d o w .
temperature for 1 hour or more. Otherwise, the printer
may produce abnormal printing due to condensation.
n If toner gets on your hands or cloth, wash it off with
water. Toner is harmless to human body but hard to
come off once left on skin or clothes. Figure 6-6. TONER CARTRIDGE Replacement 1
n You must put used TONER CARTRIDGEs in a plastic
bag and disposed of them as inflammable, strictly 4. Remove the cartridge following the steps below:
following the local regulation.
1) Turn the cartridge knob counterclockwise 90 degrees so that the
1. Referring to the LCD message, check the color of the TONER l symbol on the knob is aligned with the unlocking symbol.
CARTRIDGE which needs to be replaced. 2) Pull the cartridge horizontally out of the slot.
NOTE:Put the cartridge in a plastic bag and dispose of it as
2. Open the FRONT COVER. inflammable.

L o c k in g p o s itio n

Y e llo w Y e llo w
M a g e n ta M a g e n ta
C y a n C y a n
B la c k B la c k

U n lo c k in g p o s itio n

Figure 6-5. FRONT COVER Open Figure 6-7. TONER CARTRIDGE Replacement 2

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-9


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 6-10. TONER CARTRIDGE Replacement 5

Figure 6-8. TONER CARTRIDGE Replacement 3 L o c k in g p o s itio n

5. Hold a new TONER CARTRIDGE by the right and left ends and Y e llo w Y e llo w
gently shake it up and down to distribute toner evenly. M a g e n t M a g e n t
C y a n C y a n
B la c k B la c k

U n lo c k in g p o s itio n

Figure 6-11. TONER CARTRIDGE Replacement 6

7. To replace the TONER CARTRIDGEs of other colors, perform the


same operations described step 3 to 6.

8. Close the FRONT COVER and check that the LCD is indicating
“Ready”.
Figure 6-9. TONER CARTRIDGE Replacement 4 NOTE: The TONER CARTRIDGE counter is automatically reset when a
new TONER CARTRIDGE is detected.
6. Hold the cartridge arrow side up. Insert it all the way into the
cartridge slot. Then turn the cartridge knob clockwise 90 degrees so
that the l symbol on the knob is aligned with the locking symbol.
NOTE:If the TONER CARTRIDGE is not properly positioned, it may
cause toner to spill inside the printer and brings out low print
quality and printer malfunction and errors.

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-10


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

6.3.2 OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY Replacement 3. Remove the cover from a new OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY.

OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY is equipped to fix toner image exactly on a 4. Remove 2 shipping pins from both sides of the OIL ROLL
paper with oil, without sticking a paper to the heat roll. ASSEMBLY.

C A U T IO N n Never touch the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY directly. Oil on


the roll surface is harmless but should be washed
away immediately if it gets on skin or clothes.
n Do not touch or mar the roll surface. Doing so may
cause abnormal printing.
n Do not lean the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY against
anything.
n You must put the used OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY in a
plastic bag and disposed of it as inflammable, strictly
Figure 6-13. OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY Replacement 2
following the local regulation.
n Be sure to avoid touching the fuser and nearby parts,
5. Inert the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY into the printer body.
since you may get burnt if it if is still very hot.

1. Draw out the FUSER ASSEMBLY all the way.

2. Hold the handle on the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY and remove it.

Figure 6-14. OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY Replacement 3

6. Close the FUSER ASSEMBLY.

Figure 6-12. OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY Replacement 1

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-11


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

6.3.3 DRUM CARTRIDGE Replacement 3. Turn the TENSION LEVER in the direction indicated with the arrow.
(See the figure on the left.)
The photoconductor of the DRUM CARTRIDGE is exposed by the ROS
ASSEMBLY and developed by the DEVELOPER ASSEMBLY, and 4. Turn the DRUM CARTRIDGE LEVER in the direction indicated with
transmits images onto the IBT. the arrow. (See the figure on the right.)
A consumable DRUM CARTRIDGE ASSEMBLY contains the WASTE
TONER BOX.

C A U T IO N n Never touch the surface of the photoconductor (a


blue cylindrical part) with your hands. Also handle it
with a care since scratches and oil from your skin can
damage its surface and may affect print quality.
n Avoid exposing the DRUM CARTRIDGE to direct
sunlight and strong light. Even in room light, do not
leave it for more than 5 minutes.
n To avoid mar the photo conductor surface, work with
it on a flat table.
Figure 6-16. DRUM CARTRIDGE Replacement 2
n Never use toner in the WASTE TONER BOX again.
n Be sure to put the used DRUM CARTRIDGE in a 5. Hold the handle in the DRUM CARTRIDGE and draw the DRAM
plastic bag and disposed of it as inflammable, strictly CARTRIDGE out half way.
following the local regulation.
6. Hold the handle at the top of the DRUM CARTRIDGE and draw the
1. Turn the printer power on.
DRUM CARTRIDGE all the way out carefully.
2. Open the FRONT COVER.

Figure 6-17. DRUM CARTRIDGE Replacement 3


Figure 6-15. DRUM CARTRIDGE Replacement 1

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-12


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

7. Remove the protective sheet on a new DRUM CARTRIDGE. 9. Turn the lever on the DRUM CARTRIDGE in the direction indicated
with the arrow.

Figure 6-18. DRUM CARTRIDGE Replacement 4

8. Hold the handle of the top of the DRUM CARTRIDGE and place the
right and left guide edges on the rails in the printer, and insert the Figure 6-20. DRUM CARTRIDGE Replacement 6
DRUM CARTRIDGE straight into the printer. Be sure to push it
10. Turn the TENSION LEVER in the direction indicated with the arrow
enough to feel resistance.
to align it with the l symbol.
NOTE:Ensure that the photo conductor (a blue cyrindrical part) is
not in contact with any parts inside the printer during its
installation.

Figure 6-21. DRUM CARTRIDGE Replacement 6


M a k e s u re th a t th e d ru m s u rfa c e
is n o t in c o n ta c t w ith a n y p a r ts 11. Close the FRONT COVER.
in s id e th e p r in te r .

Figure 6-19. DRUM CARTRIDGE Replacement 5

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-13


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

6.3.4 WASTE TONER BOX Replacement 3. Pull the WASTE TONER BOX straight out.

WASTE TONER BOX is used to collect toner that was not used for
printing. It is not necessary to change the WASTE TONER BOX when
the DRUM CARTRIDGE is also replaced, because a consumable
DRUM CARTRIDGE contains a WASTE TONER BOX.

C A U T IO N n Never reuse the toner in the WASTE TONER BOX.


n Be sure to put the used WASTE TONER BOX in a
plastic bag and disposed of it as inflammable, strictly
following the local regulation.

Figure 6-23. WASTE TONER BOX Replacement 2


1. Open the FRONT COVER.

2. Hold the lever and push down the tab of the WASTE TONER BOX. 4. Hold the handle on a new WASTE TONER BOX and insert it into
the printer all the way until the tab clicks.

Figure 6-24. WASTE TONER BOX Replacement 3


Figure 6-22. WASTE TONER BOX Replacement 1

5. Close the FRONT COVER. The printer automatically return to a


ready status.

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-14


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

6.4 Regularly Replaced Part Replacement 6.5 Installation


Table below list the regularly replaced parts and the corresponding This section describes provides a guideline for installing the printer on
reference sections. its place.

If you have replaced any of the regularly replaced parts, perform the o Power
relevant counter reset in the Maintenance Menu. Connect the printer power cable to a dedicated wall outlet. Do not
share the outlet power with other extension cords. Make sure the
Table 6-1. Regularly Replaced Part power meets the power specifications defined for this printer. (The
Unit Reference Section
maximum power consumption of this printer is 1100W.))
2ND BTR ASSEMBLY Section 3.2.11.5
W A R N IN G Plug the cord directly into the wall outlet which can
MAIN FUSER ASSEMBLY Section 3.2.12.3
provide more than the maximum demand power for
the printer.

o Ground
The printer must be properly grounded.

W A R N IN G Ground the printer by one of the following methods:


n Wall outlet ground terminal
n Buried conductive material such as copper in the
ground 650mm or deeper
n Grounded terminal (Type 3).

NOTE:Do not ground the printer to the following:


-Gas pipes
-Telephone line grounding terminal
-Water pipes partially made of plastic

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-15


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

o Location o Installation Procedure


n To operate properly, a certain amount of space around the The following describes the installation procedures. For details, see
printer is required. (For details, see Chapter 1/Section 1.2.4.) the User’s Guide.
n The printer is located in an area where the temperature and n The printer weighs about 69 kg. To prevent injury,
C A U T IO N
humidity are moderate and stable. the printer should be carried by four persons.
n The printer is located in an area away from water outlets, n Lift the printer with both hands putting into the
steamers, heaters, air conditioners or open flame. dented holds. If you hold on to any other parts, you
may drop or damage the printer.
n The printer is located in an area that is free of dust, volatile
n Lift the printer with your knees bent to prevent
gases or flammable gases.
back injuries.
n The printer is shielded from the direct ray of the sun.
NOTE:Keep the protection sheet, spacers and packing materials in
n The printer has recommended space around all sides for proper
case of moving the printer in future.
ventilation.
1) Open the carton and remove the packing materials. Place the
n The printer is sitting on a level and stable surface.
printer where it is to be installed.
o Unpacking
2) Remove the protective tapes securing the printer.
When unpacking the printer from the carton, make sure the packed
3) Check the items that are packed with the printer.
items listed below and that they are not damaged.
4) Install the MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY on the MSI ASSEMBLY.
1) Printer (Including the DRUM CARTRIDGE and the
UNIVERSALLY TRAY) 5) Install the EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY on the FUSER ASSEMBLY.
2) DRUM CARTRIDGE
6) Open the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY.
3) TONER CARTRIDGE Y
4) TONER CARTRIDGE M NOTE:Do not touch the drum surface of the Drum Cartridge.
5) TONER CARTRIDGE C
7) Unpack the Drum Cartridge.
6) TONER CARTRIDGE BK
7) OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY 8) Install the DRUM CARTRIDGE in the printer.
8) MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY
9) Remove the spacer from the area where the toner cartridges are
9) EXIT TRAY ASSEMBLY
installed. (The spacer prevents the toner cartridges from rotating.)
10) Power Cord
11) Accessory box

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-16


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

10) Remove a total of 4 spacers from where the toner cartridges are 18) Install the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY above the FUSER
inserted. ASSEMBLY.
11) Unpack the TONER CARTRIDGEs. Hold both ends of each 19) Close the FUSER ASSEMBLY.
cartridge and shake several times.
20) Draw out the UNIVERSAL TRAY. Remove the packing material
12) Rotate the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY and install the (expanded polystyrene) from the UNIVERSAL TRAY.
TONER CARTRIDGEs.
21) Press down the BOTTOM PLATE ASSEMBLY in the
NOTE:Install each TONER CARTRIDGE by matching the toner UNIVERSAL TRAY and lock it at the bottom.
color with the color of the installation window.
22) Put paper in the UNIVERSAL TRAY.
NOTE:To rotate the ROTARY FRAME ASSEMBLY, press up the
ROTARY LATCH LEVER and rotate the ROTARY KNOB NOTE:When putting paper in the tray, be sure to:
ASSEMBLY clockwise.
- Align the four corners of the paper before putting it in the tray.
13) Close the FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY. - Place all paper under the pawls at the front right corner of the
tray.
14) Open the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY. Remove the two spacers from
- Set the paper guide corresponding to the paper size.
the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
23) Push in the UNIVERSAL TRAY.
15) Close the MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY.
24) Put paper in the MSI ASSEMBLY.
16) Open the FUSER ASSEMBLY. Remove the packing materials
(expanded polystyrene). NOTE:When putting paper in the tray, be sure to:
17) Open the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY. Remove the protective cover - Align the four corners of the paper before putting it in the tray.
and locking pins.
- Set a stack of paper under the stopper in the front right corner
NOTE:Keep the OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY on a level position as it is of the tray.
installed in the printer. The internal fuser oil may leak if the - Set the paper guide corresponding to the paper size.
OIL ROLL ASSEMBLY is in a vertical or inclined position.
25) Connect the power cord.
NOTE:Do not touch the surface of the white roll in the OIL ROLL
ASSEMBLY because the white roll is filled with fuser oil. 26) Turn on the printer by the power switch.
27) Run a test print from each paper cassette to confirm that the
printer works fine.
28) Connect the printer to the PC and send print data to the printer.

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE 6-17





APPENDIX
EPSON EPL-C8000 Revision B

Contents
PART LIST ..................................................................................................... 1 Applicable Standards ..........................................................................70
How to Use the Part List.............................................................................1 Installation ................................................................................................70
Part List Table ............................................................................................2 Part List (Large Capacity Paper Unit) ......................................................71
Exploded Diagrams ....................................................................................6 Exploded Diagrams ..................................................................................72
WIRING DIAGRAMS.................................................................................... 20 Wiring Diagrams.......................................................................................74
P/J Locations............................................................................................20
Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table..........................................................24
WIRING DIAGRAMS AND SIGNA LNFORMATION................................... 28
Master Wiring Diagram.............................................................................28
Wiring and Signal Description Between Components..............................30
Organization ........................................................................................30
Notations on the Diagrams for the Wiring and
Signal Descriptions between Components ......................................32
Wiring Diagram - §1 ............................................................................33
Wiring Diagram - §2 ............................................................................35
Wiring Diagram - §3 ............................................................................37
Wiring Diagram - §4 ............................................................................39
Wiring Diagram - §5 ............................................................................41
Wiring Diagram - §6 ............................................................................43
Wiring Diagram - §7 ............................................................................45
Wiring Diagram - §8 ............................................................................47
Wiring Diagram - §9 ............................................................................49
Wiring Diagram - §10 ..........................................................................51
Wiring Diagram - §11 ..........................................................................53
Wiring Diagram - §12 ..........................................................................55
Wiring Diagram - §13 ..........................................................................57
COMPONENT LAYOUT .............................................................................. 59
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS .................................................................................. 61
LARGE CAPACITY PAPER UNIT............................................................... 69
Product Specifications..............................................................................69
Basic Specifications ............................................................................69
Paper Specifications ............................................................................69
Environmental Condition .....................................................................69
Reliability and Durability ......................................................................70
Electrical Specifications .......................................................................70
EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.1 Parts List A.1.1 How to Use the Part List


Followings are the points to note when using the part list and exploded
This chapter describes the printer parts. The parts are grouped into 14
diagrams.
major plates. These plates are divided further into the following 27
smaller plates. Each plate has an illustration and a corresponding parts • The numbers in each illustration correspond to the parts list number for
list. that illustration.
• PL “X.Y.Z” indicates part Z in Plate “X.Y.”
* PL1.1 Cover * PL8.3 IBT III • The capital letters shown in the illustrations stand for the following:
* PL2.1 Paper Tray I * PL8.4 IBT IV
* PL2.2 Paper Tray II * PL9.1 Fusing I S: screw
* PL3.1 Paper Feeder * PL9.2 Fusing II E: E ring
* PL4.1 Multi Sheet Inserter I * PL9.3 Fusing III
KL: KL clip
* PL4.2 Multi Sheet Inserter II * PL9.4 Fusing IV
* PL4.3 Multi Sheet Inserter III * PL10.1 Paper Exit I C: C ring
* PL5.1 Paper Transportation I * PL10.2 Paper Exit II N: nut
* PL5.2 Paper Transportation II * PL11.1 Drive
* PL6.1 Xerographics * PL12.1 Frame • The arrowheads in the illustrations indicate assemblies made up of
* PL7.1 Development I * PL13.1 Electrical I lower parts with their numbers.
* PL7.2 Development II * PL13.2 Electrical II • A circled capital letter is connected to the same circled capital letter in
* PL8.1 IBT I * PL14.1 Controller the illustration.
* PL8.2 IBT II • A “with 2-5” in the illustrations or list shows that the part includes items
2, 3, 4 and 5. A “with 2-5, PL6.1.1” shows that the part includes items 2,
3, 4 and 5 of the plate and also includes item 1 of plate 6.1.
• An asterisk (*) indicates that there is a note about the part on the same
page.

NOTE: For spare parts, see the Spare Parts List (published separately).

NOTE: For harness and wire connectors (P/J), see Section A.3 “Wiring
Diagrams”.

Chapter A APPENDIX A-1


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.1.2 Part List Table


Table A-1. Part List (1/9) Table A-2. Part List (2/9)
No. PL No. Part Name Reference No. PL No. Part Name Reference
1 PL 1.1.1 FRONT COVER ASSY 3.2.4.1 31 PL 3.1.7 FEED GEAR 3.2.6.4/5
2 PL 1.1.4 HINGE PLATE 32 PL 3.1.8 FEED SPRING 3.2.6.5
3 PL 1.1.5 FRONT LOWER COVER 3.2.4.2 33 PL 3.1.9 FEED SOLENOID 3.2.6.4
4 PL 1.1.10 INNER COVER ASSY (With 11-13) 3.2.4.4 34 PL 3.1.10 FEED IDLER GEAR
5 PL 1.1.12 ROTARY LATCH LEVER 35 PL 3.1.11 TURN ROLL ASSY 3.2.6.2
6 PL 1.1.13 ROTARY LATCH SPRING 36 PL 3.1.12 BEARING
7 PL 1.1.20 TOP COVER ASSY (With 21, 22) 3.2.4.3 37 PL 3.1.13 TURN REAR BEARING
8 PL 1.1.22 STOPPER COVER 38 PL 3.1.14 TURN GEAR
9 PL 1.1.30 REAR COVER ASSY 3.2.4.5 39 PL 3.1.15 TURN ARM ASSY
10 PL 1.1.32 FILTER ASSY 3.2.4.6 40 PL 3.1.16 TURN ARM SPRING 3.2.6.2
11 PL 1.1.33 O/H COVER 3.2.4.5 41 PL 3.1.17 TURN CHUTE 3.2.6.2
12 PL 1.1.40 LEFT LOWER COVER 3.2.4.7 42 PL 3.1.18 TURN IN CHUTE 3.2.6.1
13 PL 1.1.50 RIGHT COVER ASSY 3.2.4.8 43 PL 3.1.19 FEED SHAFT GUIDE 3.2.6.2/5
14 PL 1.1.60 OPERATION PANEL 3.2.4.9 44 PL 3.1.20 TRAY STOPPER 3.2.6.2
15 PL 2.1.1 UNIVERSAL TRAY 3.2.5.1 45 PL 3.1.23 SIZE SWITCH ASSY 3.2.6.6
16 PL 2.2.3 PLATE LINK SPRING 46 PL 3.1.30 TRAY N/P SENSOR ASSY (With 31-35) 3.2.6.7
17 PL 2.2.4 PLATE LINK 47 PL 3.1.32 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR 3.2.6.9
18 PL 2.2.5 BOTTOM PLATE ASSY 3.2.5.3 48 PL 4.1.1 MSI ASSY (With 2-5) 3.2.7.2
19 PL 2.2.6 TRAY N/F SPRING 3.2.5.3 49 PL 4.1.3 MSI FRONT COVER 3.2.7.3
20 PL 2.2.8 FRONT GUIDE 3.2.5.2 50 PL 4.1.4 MSI REAR COVER 3.2.7.4
21 PL 2.2.9 FRONT SNUBBER 3.2.5.2 51 PL 4.1.5 MSI HOLDER 3.2.7.11
22 PL 2.2.10 SNUBBER STOPPER 52 PL 4.1.10 MSI TRAY ASSY 3.2.7.1
23 PL 2.2.11 REAR GUIDE ASSY 3.2.5.3 53 PL 4.2.3 MSI HARNESS COVER 3.2.7.5
24 PL 2.2.12 REAR GUIDE SPRING 54 PL 4.2.4 MSI TOP COVER ASSY (With 5-8) 3.2.7.5
25 PL 2.2.16 END GUIDE 3.2.5.3 55 PL 4.2.5 MSI TOP COVER
26 PL 2.2.17 SECTOR GEAR 3.2.5.3 56 PL 4.2.6 MSI EDGE SENSOR 3.2.7.6
27 PL 2.2.18 TRAY SIZE ACTUATOR 3.2.5.3 57 PL 4.2.7 MSI SHORT N/P SENSOR 3.2.7.7
28 PL 3.1.1 FEED ROLL ASSY (With 2-5) 3.2.6.5 58 PL4.2.8 MSI N/P ACTUATOR
29 PL 3.1.3 FEED ROLL 3.2.6.3 59 PL4.2.9 MSI ROLL ASSY (With 10-14) 3.2.7.12
30 PL 3.1.6 BEARING 3.2.6.5

Chapter A APPENDIX A-2


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table A-3. Part List (3/9) Table A-4. Part List (4/9)
No. PL No. Part Name Reference No. PL No. Part Name Reference
60 PL 4.2.11 PICK UP ROLL 3.2.7.8 89 PL 4.3.16 SENSOR 3.2.7.14
61 PL 4.2.15 BEARING 3.2.7.12 90 PL 5.1.1 MAIN P/H ASSY (With 2-20) 3.2.8.1
62 PL 4.2.16 LEVER STOPPER 91 PL 5.1.4 P/H TURN CHUTE ASSY 3.2.8.3
63 PL 4.2.17 PICK UP CAM GEAR 3.2.7.10/12 92 PL 5.1.5 PRE-REGI. CHUTE ASSY 3.2.8.6
64 PL 4.2.18 CAM GEAR SPRING 93 PL 5.1.6 REGI. CHUTE ASSY 3.2.8.4
65 PL 4.2.19 PICK UP GEAR 3.2.7.11/12 94 PL 5.1.7 P/H FRONT RAIL-S 3.2.8.1
66 PL 4.2.20 PICK UP SPRING 3.2.7.11/12 95 PL 5.1.8 P/H FRONT RAIL-L 3.2.8.1
67 PL 4.2.21 PICK UP SOLENOID 3.2.7.10 96 PL 5.1.9 P/H REAR RAIL-S 3.2.8.1
68 PL 4.2.22 GEAR LEVER 97 PL 5.1.10 P/H REAR RAIL-L 3.2.8.1
69 PL 4.2.23 GEAR LEVER SPRING 98 PL 5.1.20 MAIN P/H COVER 3.2.7.2
70 PL 4.2.24 BEARING 99 PL 5.1.30 LATCH ARM ASSY
71 PL 4.2.25 MSI SHAFT 3.2.7.11 100 PL 5.2.3 PRE-REGI. KNOB ASSY 3.2.8.6
72 PL 4.2.26 MSI CLUTCH 3.2.7.11 101 PL 5.2.4 PRE-REGI. ROLL ASSY 3.2.8.6
73 PL 4.2.27 MSI GEAR 3.2.7.11 102 PL 5.2.5 PRE-REGI. BEARING 3.2.8.6
74 PL 4.2.28 MSI REAR BEARING 103 PL 5.2.6 PRE-REGI. GEAR2 3.2.8.6
75 PL 4.2.29 CLUTCH BRACKET 3.2.7.11/12 104 PL 5.2.7 TURN IDLER GEAR 3.2.8.6
76 PL 4.3.3 RETARD PAD ASSY 3.2.7.9 105 PL 5.2.8 PRE-REGI. CLUTCH 3.2.8.5
77 PL 4.3.4 RETARD SPRING 3.2.7.9 106 PL 5.2.10 PRE-REGI. GEAR 1 3.2.8.5
78 PL 4.3.5 OIL DAMPER GEAR 107 PL 5.2.11 PRE-REGI. GEAR ASSY 3.2.8.5
79 PL 4.3.6 MSI HARNESS ASSY 108 PL 5.2.12 PRE-REGI. GEAR 3
80 PL 4.3.7 MSI N/F FRONT SPRING 3.2.7.13 109 PL 5.2.13 PRE-REGI. GEAR 5
81 PL 4.3.8 MSI N/F REAR SPRING 3.2.7.13 110 PL 5.2.14 PRE-REGI. GEAR 6
82 PL 4.3.9 MSI BOTTOM ASSY (With 10-20) 3.2.7.13 111 PL 5.2.15 CLUTCH 3.2.8.7
83 PL 4.3.10 MSI BOTTOM PLATE 112 PL 5.2.16 REGI. METAL ROLL 3.2.8.9
84 PL 4.3.11 MSI BASE TRAY 3.2.7.14 113 PL 5.2.17 REGI. UPPER BEARING 3.2.8.7/9
85 PL 4.3.12 MSI FRONT GUIDE 114 PL 5.2.18 REGI. OUT GEAR 3.2.8.9
86 PL 4.3.13 MSI GUIDE SPRING 115 PL 5.2.19 REGI. BRAKE ASSY (With 20-22) 3.2.8.8/9/10
87 PL 4.3.14 MSI REAR GUIDE 116 PL 5.2.20 CLUTCH 3.2.8.8
117 PL 5.2.21 REGI. BRAKE GEAR 3.2.8.8
88 PL 4.3.15 GUIDE BLOCK
118 PL 5.2.23 REGI. GEAR 3.2.8.10
119 PL 5.2.24 REGI. RUBBER ROLL 3.2.8.10

Chapter A APPENDIX A-3


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table A-5. Part List (5/9) Table A-6. Part List (6/9)
No. PL No. Part Name Reference No. PL No. Part Name Reference
120 PL 5.2.25 REGI. LOWER BEARING 3.2.8.10 150 PL 7.2.4 ROTARY REAR BEARING 3.2.10.5
121 PL 5.2.26 REGI. FRONT SPRING 3.2.8.10 151 PL 7.2.5 ROTARY LATCH ASSY 3.2.10.7/2
122 PL 5.2.27 REGI. REAR SPRING 3.2.8.10 152 PL 7.2.10 DEVE. DISCHARGE ASSY
123 PL 5.2.28 REGI. SENSOR 3.2.8.11 153 PL 7.2.11 DEVE. CONTACT ASSY
124 PL 5.2.31 FRONT OHP SENSOR 3.2.8.12 154 PL 7.2.22 ROTARY SENSOR 3.2.10.4
125 PL 5.2.32 REAR OHP SENSOR 3.2.8.13 155 PL 7.2.26 CARTRIDGE SENSOR (With 29, 30) 3.2.10.6
126 PL 5.2.33 REGI. HARNESS ASSY 156 PL 7.2.27 CART. SENSOR HARNESS 3.2.10.6
127 PL 6.1.1 ROS ASSY 3.2.9.3 157 PL 7.2.30 USED CART. SENSOR 3.2.10.7
128 PL 6.1.10 DRUM CARTRIDGE *1 3.2.9.1 158 PL 8.1.3 TRANSFER ASSY 3.2.11.2
129 PL 6.1.12 WASTE TONER BOX (With 11-13)*1 3.2.9.2 159 PL 8.1.4 TENSION LEVER 3.2.11.1
130 PL 6.1.20 ADC SENSOR ASSY 3.2.9.4 160 PL8.1.10 2ND BTR CAM ASSY 3.2.11.6
131 PL 6.1.30 ERASE LAMP ASSY 3.2.9.8 161 PL 8.1.11 2ND BTR GEAR B3
132 PL 6.1.40 XL RAIL ASSY (With 41-46) 3.2.9.5 162 PL 8.1.12 BTR BEARING-4 3.2.11.6
133 PL 6.1.42 WASTE TONER SENSOR 3.2.9.6 163 PL 8.1.13 BTR BEARING-6 3.2.11.6
134 PL 6.1.43 TONER BOX SENSOR 3.2.9.7 164 PL 8.1.15 SOLENOID 3.2.11.3
135 PL 6.1.44 TONER BOX HARNESS 165 PL 8.1.20 2ND BTR ASSY *2 3.2.11.5
136 PL 6.1.50 BCR CONNECTOR ASSY 166 PL 8.1.30 BELT CLEANER ASSY *2 3.2.11.4
137 PL 6.1.70 CRUM CONNECTOR ASSY 3.2.11.7 167 PL 8.1.31 CLEANER SUPPORT ASSY
138 PL 7.1.1 TONER CARTRIDGE Y *1 3.2.10.1 168 PL 8.1.40 AUGER HIGH ASSY 3.2.11.7
139 PL 7.1.2 TONER CARTRIDGE M *1 3.2.10.1 169 PL 8.2.2 IBT BELT ASSY 3.2.11.8
140 PL 7.1.3 TONER CARTRIDGE C *1 3.2.10.1 170 PL 8.2.12 TRO SENSOR 3.2.11.9
141 PL 7.1.4 TONER CARTRIDGE BK *1 3.2.10.1 171 PL 8.3.5 TORQUE GEAR ASSY
142 PL 7.1.10 DEVELOPER ASSY Y (With 11-13, 50) 3.2.10.2 172 PL 9.1.1 FUSER ASSY (With 2,3) 3.2.12.2
143 PL 7.1.13 DEVELOPER Y 3.2.10.3 173 PL 9.1.2 MAIN FUSER ASSY *2 3.2.12.3
144 PL 7.1.20 DEVELOPER ASSY M (With 21-23, 50) 3.2.10.2 174 PL 9.1.3 FUSER TRAY ASSY
145 PL 7.1.23 DEVELOPER M 3.2.10.3 175 PL 9.2.9 PRESSURE ROLL 3.2.12.11
146 PL 7.1.30 DEVELOPER ASSY C (With 31-33, 50) 3.2.10.2 176 PL 9.1.10 OIL ROLL ASSY *1 3.2.12.1
147 PL 7.1.33 DEVELOPER C 3.2.10.3 *1: Consumables
148 PL 7.1.40 DEVELOPER ASSY BK (With 41-43, 50) 3.2.10.2 *2: Part requires periodical replacement
149 PL 7.1.44 DEVELOPER BK 3.2.10.3
*1: Consumables

Chapter A APPENDIX A-4


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table A-7. Part List (7/9) Table A-8. Part List (8/9)
No. PL No. Part Name Reference No. PL No. Part Name Reference
177 PL 9.2.10 BEARING 3.2.12.14/17/ 207 PL 9.4.4 SENSOR
18/20 208 PL 9.4.5 FUSER IN HARNESS
178 PL 9.2.12 HEAT ROLL 3.2.12.10 209 PL 9.4.6 FUSER IN HOLDER
179 PL 9.2.13 BEARING 3.2.12.10 210 PL 9.4.14 FUSER COLLAR
180 PL 9.2.14 H/R GEAR 3.2.12.10 211 PL 9.4.15 INPUT GEAR FT1 3.3.1
181 PL 9.2.15 H/R RING 3.2.12.10 212 PL 9.4.16 INPUT GEAR FT2
182 PL 9.2.19 P/R HEATER 3.2.12.6 213 PL 9.4.17 INPUT STUD
183 PL 9.2.20 H/R HEATER 3.2.12.5 214 PL 9.4.18 BEARING
184 PL 9.2.23 FUSER UPPER ASSY 3.2.12.4 215 PL 9.4.22 CLEANER CAM GEAR
185 PL 9.2.24 TEMP. SENSOR ASSY 3.2.12.12 216 PL 9.4.23 SOLENOID 3.2.12.17
186 PL 9.2.25 SENSOR 3.2.12.8 217 PL 9.4.24 BEARING 3.2.12.18
187 PL 9.2.26 LOWER GUIDE ASSY (With 27-31) 3.2.12.7 218 PL 9.4.25 BEARING
188 PL 9.2.32 UPPER GUIDE ASSY (With 33-37) 3.2.12.9 219 PL 9.4.26 CLEANER CAM ASSY 3.2.12.18
189 PL 9.2.33 EXIT UPPER GUIDE 3.2.12.9 220 PL 9.4.27 CLEANER CAM PIN 3.2.12.18
190 PL 9.3.3 FUSER TRAY LEVER 3.2.12.16/20 221 PL 9.4.28 CLEANER CAM 3.2.12.18
191 PL 9.3.4 FUSER TRAY CAP-B 222 PL 9.4.29 CLN CAM GUIDE
192 PL 9.3.7 EXIT-1 ROLL ASSY 3.2.12.19 223 PL 9.4.30 CLN CAM GUIDE HOLDER
193 PL 9.3.8 EXIT-1 GEAR 3.2.12.19 224 PL 10.1.1 EXIT LOWER ASSY 3.2.13.3
194 PL 9.3.9 BEARING 3.2.12.19 225 PL 10.1.2 EXIT UPPER ASSY 3.2.13.2
195 PL 9.3.10 EXCHANGE CHUTE 3.2.12.13 226 PL 10.1.10 EXIT TRAY ASSY (With 11-15) 3.2.13.1
196 PL 9.3.11 EXCHANGE SPRING 227 PL 10.2.5 EXIT-2 ROLL ASSY 3.2.13.4
197 PL 9.3.12 F/U EXIT ELIMINATOR 228 PL 10.2.6 BEARING 3.2.13.5
198 PL 9.3.16 EXCHANGE SOLENOID 3.2.12.15 229 PL 10.2.7 EXIT-3 ROLL ASSY 3.2.13.5
199 PL 9.3.17 IDLER GEAR FT1 230 PL 10.2.8 BEARING 3.2.13.5
200 PL 9.3.18 IDLER GEAR FT2 231 PL 10.2.9 SPUR GEAR 3.2.13.4/5
201 PL 9.3.19 BEARING 232 PL 10.2.10 EXIT IDLER GEAR
202 PL 9.3.21 SOLENOID 3.2.12.14 233 PL 10.2.12 TOP EXIT SENSOR 3.2.13.7
203 PL 9.3.22 OIL CAM ASSY 3.2.12.16 234 PL 10.2.13 EXIT CHUTE SWITCH 3.2.13.8
204 PL 9.3.25 CRU SWITCH ASSY 3.2.12.20 235 PL 10.2.14 EXIT HARNESS
205 PL 9.3.26 FUSER HARNESS ASSY 236 PL 10.2.15 FUSER FAN 3.2.13.6
206 PL 9.4.3 FUSER TRAY CAP-A 237 PL 11.1.1 P/H DRIVE ASSY 3.2.14.1

Chapter A APPENDIX A-5


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table A-9. Part List (9/9) A.1.3 Exploded Diagrams


No. PL No. Part Name Reference
238 PL 11.1.20 ROTARY MOTOR ASSY 3.2.14.4
239 PL 11.1.21 ROTARY MOTOR PWB 3.2.14.3
240 PL 11.1.22 DISPENSE MOTOR ASSY 3.2.14.5
241 PL 11.1.23 DEVE. CLUTCH ASSY 3.2.14.9
242 PL 12.1.3 FRAME FOOT
243 PL 12.1.4 DEVE. TIE PLATE 3.2.15.1
244 PL 13.1.1 LVPS 3.2.16.1
245 PL 13.1.2 HVPS 3.2.16.2
246 PL 13.1.3 TOP COVER SWITCH 3.2.16.3
247 PL 13.1.5 DEVE. FAN 3.2.16.4
248 PL 13.1.13 FUSER CONNECTOR
249 PL 13.1.22 MAIN HARNESS ASSY
250 PL 13.1.30 POWER CODE
251 PL 13.2.1 MCU PWB 3.2.16.5
252 PL 13.2.1.1 MCU ROM
253 PL 13.2.2 COMMUNICATION ASSY
254 PL 13.2.3 FRONT COVER SWITCH R 3.2.16.6
255 PL 13.2.4 FRONT COVER SWITCH L 3.2.16.7
256 PL 13.2.5 ENVIRONMENT SENSOR 3.2.16.8
257 PL 13.2.20 P/H HARNESS ASSY
258 PL 13.2.21 VIDEO HARNESS
259 PL 13.2.22 ROS HARNESS
260 PL 14.1.1 CONT. CHASSIS ASSY 3.2.17.3
261 PL 14.1.2 CONTROLLER FAN 3.2.17.2
262 PL 14.1.10 CONTROLLER PWB 3.2.17.1
263 PL 14.1.32 OPTION PANEL

Figure A-1. PL1.1 Cover

Chapter A APPENDIX A-6


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-2. PL2.1 Paper Tray I

Figure A-3. PL2.2 Paper Tray II

Chapter A APPENDIX A-7


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-4. PL3.1 Paper Feeder

Figure A-5. PL4.1 Multi Sheet Insert I

Chapter A APPENDIX A-8


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-6. PL4.2 Multi Sheet Insert II


Figure A-7. PL4.3 Multi Sheet Insert III

Chapter A APPENDIX A-9


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-9. PL5.2 Paper Transportation II


Figure A-8. PL5.1 Paper Transportation I

Chapter A APPENDIX A-10


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-10. PL6.1 Xerographics Figure A-11. PL7.1 Development I

Chapter A APPENDIX A-11


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-13. PL8.1 IBT I


Figure A-12. PL7.2 Development II

Chapter A APPENDIX A-12


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-15. PL8.3 IBT III


Figure A-14. PL8.2 IBT II

Chapter A APPENDIX A-13


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-17. PL9.1 Fusing I

Figure A-16. PL8.4 IBT IV

Chapter A APPENDIX A-14


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-18. PL9.2 Fusing II Figure A-19. PL9.3 Fusing III

Chapter A APPENDIX A-15


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-20. PL9.4 Fusing IV Figure A-21. PL10.1 Paper Exit I

Chapter A APPENDIX A-16


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-23. PL11.1 Drive


Figure A-22. PL10.2 Paper Exit II

Chapter A APPENDIX A-17


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-24. PL12.1 Frame Figure A-25. PL 13.1 Electrical I

Chapter A APPENDIX A-18


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-26. PL13.2 Electrical II

Figure A-27. PL14.1 Controller

Chapter A APPENDIX A-19


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.2 Wiring Diagrams A.2.1 P/J Locations

This section describes the connector locations.


"P" and "J" stand for "Plug" and "Jack", respectively.

Figure A-28. P/J Location (1)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-20


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-29. P/J Location (2) Figure A-30. P/J Location (3)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-21


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-31. P/J Location (4) Figure A-32. P/J Location (5)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-22


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-33. P/J Location (6) Figure A-34. P/J Location (7)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-23


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.2.2 Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table


The following lists the coordinates of the connectors (P/J) described in
1.1 P/J Locations. (
Table A-10. Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table (1/7)
P/J Coordinate Notes
11 E-205 Connects MCU PWB and Controller PWB.
12 D-205 Connects MCU PWB and Main Harness Assembly.
13 D-205 Connects MCU PWB and Video Harness.
14 D-204 Connects MCU PWB and ROS Harness.
16 D-204 Connects MCU PWB and Main Harness Assembly.
17 E-203 Connects MCU PWB and Main Harness Assembly.
18 E-203 Connects MCU PWB and Main Harness Assembly.
19 F-203 Connects MCU PWB and Main Harness Assembly.
20 F-204 Connects MCU PWB and P/H Harness Assembly.
21 F-204 Connects MCU PWB and Main Harness Assembly.
Connects Communication Assembly and Main Harness
22 C-204
Assembly.
22A C-204 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
32 D-609 Connects LVPS and Main Harness Assembly.
33 D-610 Connects LVPS and Main Harness Assembly.
35 G-609 Connects LVPS and Fuser Connector.
41 C-609 Connects HVPS and Main Harness Assembly.
42 C-609 Connects HVPS and Main Harness Assembly.
49 Connects P/H Motor Assembly and Main Harness
E-609
(CN1) Assembly.
50 Connects P/H Motor Assembly and Main Harness
E-608
(CN2) Assembly.
Connector in P/H Motor Assembly (directly mounted on the
(CN3) E-609
PWB).
Connector in P/H Motor Assembly (directly mounted on the
(CN4) F-608
PWB).
Connects Process Motor Assembly and Main Harness
51 D-608
Assembly.

Figure A-35. P/J Location (8)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-24


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table A-11. Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table (2/7) Table A-12. Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table (3/7)
P/J Coordinate Notes P/J Coordinate Notes
Connects Process Motor Assembly and Main Harness 76A F-813 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly.
52 D-607
Assembly. Connects CRU Switch Assembly and Fuser Harness
77 G-808
Connects Dispense Motor Assembly and Main Harness Assembly.
55 E-708
Assembly. 77A G-808 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly.
Connects Developer Clutch Assembly and Main Harness 78A I-813 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly.
56 F-708
Assembly.
78B I-813 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly.
56A F-708 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
79 E-812 Connects Heater Wire and Fuser Harness Assembly.
57 C-509 Connects TR0 Sensor and Main Harness Assembly.
80 D-813 Connects Fuser Chute Fan and Fuser Harness Assembly.
58 F-708 Connects Rotary Sensor and Main Harness Assembly.
80A D-813 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly.
Connects Cleaner Cam Solenoid and Fuser Harness
62 E-812 Connects ADC Sensor Assembly and Main Harness
Assembly. 81 C-110
Assembly.
62A E-812 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly.
81A C-110 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
63 C-710 Connects BTR Cam Solenoid and Main Harness Assembly.
82 G-608 Connects Developer Fan and Main Harness Assembly.
63A C-710 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
82A G-608 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
68 B-610 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Option.
83 G-106 Connects Toner Box Sensor and Toner Box Harness.
68A B-610 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
83A G-106 Connector in Toner Box Harness.
Connects Fuser Harness Assembly and Fuser Rear Rail
69A G-814 Connects Main Harness Assembly and CRUM Connector
Relay Connector. 84 I-107
Assembly.
69B G-814 Connects Fuser Rear Rail Relay Connector and Option.
84A I-107 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
70 F-711 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Fuser Connector.
Connects CRUM Connector Assembly and CRUM
71 F-710 Connects Fuser Harness Assembly and Fuser Connector. 85 H-107
Assembly.
71A F-710 Connects Fuser Connector and Main Harness Assembly. Connects Erase Lamp Assembly and Main Harness
86 I-105
72A G-812 Connects Fuser Harness Assembly and Connector-5PW. Assembly.
Connects Connector-5PW and Temperature Sensor 86A I-105 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
72B G-812
Assembly. Connects Used Cartridge Sensor and Main Harness
87 I-506
73 I-812 Connects Oil Cam Solenoid and Fuser Harness Assembly. Assembly.
73A I-812 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly. 88 F-106 Connects Waste Toner Sensor and Toner Box Harness.
Connects Exchange Solenoid and Fuser Harness 89 D-805 Connects Cartridge Sensor Harness and Exit Harness.
74 I-813
Assembly. 89A D-805 Connector in Exit Harness.
74A I-813 Connector in Fuser Harness Assembly. 90A G-409 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly.
Connects Fuser Exit Sensor and Temperature Sensor 90B G-409 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly.
75 H-808
Assembly.
76 F-813 Connects Fuser In Harness and Fuser Harness Assembly.

Chapter A APPENDIX A-25


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table A-13. Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table (4/7) Table A-14. Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table (5/7)
P/J Coordinate Notes P/J Coordinate Notes
Registration Harness Assembly and P/H Harness 106 E-211 Connects Low Paper Sensor and P/H Harness Assembly.
D-211 Assembly. 106A E-211 Connector in P/H Harness Assembly.
(P/H Harness Assembly side)
91 107 E-213 Connects Tray N/P Sensor and Tray N/P Harness.
Registration Harness Assembly and P/H Harness
Connects Registration Brake Clutch and Registration
E-408 Assembly. 109 D-409
Harness Assembly.
(Registration Harness Assembly side)
109A D-409 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly.
Connects Registration Harness Assembly and Connector-
92A E-409 110A G-408 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly.
6PW.
92B E-409 Connects MSI Harness Assembly and Connector-6PW. 110B G-408 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly.
Connects Registration Sensor and Registration Har- G-708 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Exit Connector-3P.
93 D-408 111A
ness Assembly. D-805
Connects Registration Clutch and Registration Har- 111B D-806 Connects Fuser Fan and Exit Connector-3P.
94 F-408
ness Assembly. Connects Registration Harness Assembly and Connector-
113A E-410
94A F-408 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly. 7PW.
Connects Pre-Registration Clutch and Registration 113B E-410 Connects MSI Harness Assembly and Connector-7PW.
95 G-408
Harness Assembly. 115 H-408 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly.
95A G-408 Connector in Registration Harness Assembly. 116 H-106 Connects Toner Box Harness and Main Harness Assembly.
Connects MSI Harness Assembly and P/H Harness 116A H-106 Connector in Toner Box Harness.
97 F-204
Assembly. 117 H-807 Connects Fuser In Sensor and Fuser In Harness.
Connects Front OHP Sensor and Registration Harness Connects ROS Assembly (LD Assembly) and ROS
98 D-409 121 D-507
Assembly. Harness.
Connects Rear OHP Sensor and Registration Harness Connects ROS Assembly (LD Assembly) and Video
99 E-408 122 D-506
Assembly. Harness.
101 D-212 Connects Tray N/P Harness and P/H Harness Assembly. Connects ROS Assembly (Scanner Assembly) and ROS
123 E-506
101A D-212 Connector in P/H Harness Assembly. Harness.
Connects Size Switch Assembly and Main Harness 124 C-506 Connects ROS Assembly (SOS PWB) and ROS Harness.
102 D-711
Assembly. 131 B-610 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Option.
Connects Main Harness Assembly and Feeder Connector- 131A B-610 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
103A F-206
2P.
132 B-610 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Option.
103B F-206 Connects Feed Solenoid and Feeder Connector-2P.
132A B-610 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
104 D-212 Empty Connector in P/H Harness Assembly.
G-707 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Exit Connector-8P.
104A D-212 Connector in P/H Harness Assembly. 161A
D-805
105 D-205 Connects Environment Sensor and P/H Harness Assembly.
161B D-805 Connects Exit Harness and Exit Connector-8P.
105A D-205 Connector in P/H Harness Assembly.

Chapter A APPENDIX A-26


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Table A-15. Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table (6/7) Table A-16. Plug and Jack (P/J) Location Table (7/7)
P/J Coordinate Notes P/J Coordinate Notes
163A G-707 Connects Main Harness Assembly and Exit Connector-4P. 245 F-608 Connects Rotary Motor PWB and Main Harness Assembly.
D-805 246 F-607 Connects Rotary Motor PWB and Main Harness Assembly .
163B D-805 Connects Full Stack Harness and Exit Connector-4P. 247 E-607 Connects Rotary Motor PWB and Rotary Motor Assembly.
165 G-804 Connects Top Exit Sensor and Exit Harness. F421 D-508 Connects BCR Wire and BCR Connector Assembly.
166 E-805 Connects Exit Chute Switch and Exit Harness. F422 B-108 Connects Developer Wire and Developer Contact
167 G-305 Connects Full Stack Sensor and Full Stack Harness. Assembly.
168 J-802 Connects Cartridge Sensor and Cartridge Sensor Harness. F423 D-511 Connects DTS Wire and DTS Plate.
191 E-109 Connects Front Cover Switch R and Main Harness F791 F-808 Connects H/R Heater and P/R Heater.
Assembly. A B-606 Connects HVPS and BCR Wire.
192 E-109 Connects Front Cover Switch R and Main Harness C C-607 Connects HVPS and Developer Wire.
Assembly. D B-609 Connects HVPS and 1st BTR Wire.
193 E-109 Connects Front Cover Switch R and Main Harness F B-608 Connects HVPS and Contact Roll Wire.
Assembly.
G B-608 Connects HVPS and DTS Wire.
194 E-109 Connects Front Cover SwitcH R and Main Harness
T1 F-811 Connects Heater Wire and Fuser Upper Assembly.
Assembly.
T2 I-807 Connects P/R Heater and Heater Wire.
195 H-607 Connects Top Cover Switch and Main Harness Assembly.
T3 D-510 Connects 1st BTR Wire and 1st BTR Bias Plate.
195A H-607 Connector in Main Harness Assembly.
T4 E-510 Connects Contact Roll Wire and Contact Plate.
196 F-203 Connects ROS Harness and Main Harness Assembly.
T5 I-806 Connects H/R Heater and Fuser Upper Assembly.
197 H-506 Connects Front Cover Switch L and Main Harness
Assembly. 310 F-306 Connects Panel Harness and Controller PWB.
197A H-506 Connector in Main Harness Assembly. 314 G-306 Connects Controller Fan and Controller PWB.
201A I-408 Connects MSI Harness Assembly and Connector-2PB. 317 C-306 Connects Operation Panel and Panel Harness.
201B I-408 Connects Pick Up Solenoid and Connector-2PB.
202A H-408 Connects MSI Harness Assembly and Connector-2PW.
202B H-408 Connects MSI Clutch and Connector-2PW.
203 G-409 Connects MSI Short N/P Sensor and MSI Harness
Assembly.
204 G-408 Connects MSI Edge Sensor and MSI Harness Assembly.
205 H-409 Connects MSI OHP Sensor and MSI Harness Assembly.
206 G-409 Connects MSI Long N/P Sensor and MSI Harness
Assembly.
207 F-409 Connector in MSI Harness Assembly.

Chapter A APPENDIX A-27


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3 Wiring Diagrams and Signa lnformation NOTE: On the following pages, the Developer Assembly Y, Developer
Assembly M, Developer Assembly C, Developer Assembly Bk are
called the Developer Assembly.
A.3.1 Master Wiring Diagram
The following table gives the notations used in th wiring diagrams on the
next page.

Table A-17. Notation Used

Chapter A APPENDIX A-28


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-36. Master Wiring Diagram

Chapter A APPENDIX A-29


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.2 Wiring and Signal Description Between Components

A.3.2.1 Organization
§ 3. MCU PWB, HVPS, LVPS, BCR Connector Assembly, Developer Contact
Assembly, Transfer Assembly, 2nd BTR Cam Assembly, Drum Cartridge,
The wiring diagram is divided into the following 13 sections. The signal 2nd BTR Assembly
names, pin numbers and other information are given in detailed Connection between: • MCU PWB and HVPS
diagrams by sections. • LVPS and HVPS
§1 . MCU PWB, LVPS, ROS Assembly, Fuser Assembly, Main P/H Assembly, Front • HVPS and BCR Connector Assembly
Cover Switch R, Front Cover Switch L, Top Cover Switch • HVPS and Developer Contact Assembly
Connection between: • MCU PWB and LVPSMCU • HVPS and Transfer Assembly
• PWB and ROS Assembly • HVPS and 2nd BTR Cam Assembly
• MCU PWB and Front Cover Switch L • BCR Connector Assembly and Drum Cartridge
• LVPS and Fuser Assembly • Transfer Assembly and 2nd BTR Assembly
• LVPS and Main P/H Assembly
• LVPS and Front Cover Switch R § 4. MCU PWB, Used Cartridge Sensor, Cartridge Sensor, Rotary Sensor
• LVPS and Top Cover Switch
Connection between: • Developer Clutch, Developer Fan, Dispense
• LVPS and ROS Assembly Motor Assembly
• MCU PWB and Used Cartridge Sensor
• MCU PWB and Cartridge Sensor
§2 . MCU PWB, ADC Sensor Assembly, Erase Lamp Assembly, Waste Toner
Sensor, Toner Box Sensor, Communication Assembly, CRUM Assembly • MCU PWB and Rotary Sensor
• MCU PWB and Developer Clutch
Connection between: • MCU PWB and ADC Sensor Assembly
• MCU PWB and Developer Fan
• MCU PWB and Erase Lamp Assembly
• MCU PWB and Dispense Motor Assembly
• MCU PWB and Waste Toner Sensor
• MCU PWB and Toner Box Sensor
• MCU PWB and CRUM Connector Assembly § 5. MCU PWB, LVPS, Rotary Motor PWB, Rotary Motor Assembly
• MCU PWB and CRUM Assembly Connection between: • MCU PWB and Rotary Motor PWB
• LVPS and Rotary Motor PWB
• Rotary Motor PWB and Rotary Motor Assembly

Chapter A APPENDIX A-30


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

§6 . MCU PWB, LVPS, BTR Cam Solenoid, TR0 Sensor, P/H Motor § 12. MCU PWB, Top Exit Sensor, Exit Chute Switch, Full Stack Sensor,
Assembly, Process Motor Assembly Fuser Fan
Connection between: • MCU PWB and BTR Cam Solenoid Connection between: • MCU PWB and Top Exit Sensor
• MCU PWB and TR0 Sensor • MCU PWB and Exit Chute Switch
• MCU PWB and P/H Motor Assembly • MCU PWB and Full Stack Sensor
• MCU PWB and Process Motor Assembly • MCU PWB and Fuser Fan
• LVPS and P/H Motor Assembly
• LVPS and Process Motor Assembly
§ 13. MCU PWB, Controller PWB, Operation Panel, Controller Fan
Connection between: • MCU PWB and Controller PWB
§7 . MCU PWB, LVPS, Main Fuser Assembly, CRU Switch Assembly, Oil Roll • Controller PWB and Operation Panel
Assembly
• Controller PWB and Controller Fan
Connection between: • LVPS and Main Fuser Assembly
• MCU PWB and Main Fuser Assembly
• MCU PWB and CRU Switch Assembly
• CRU Switch Assembly and Oil Roll Assembly

§8 . MCU PWB, Fuser Tray Assembly, Environment Sensor


Connection between: • MCU PWB and Fuser Tray Assembly
• MCU PWB and Environment Sensor

§9 . MCU PWB, Size Switch Assembly, Feed Solenoid, Tray N/P Sensor,
Low Paper Sensor
Connection between: • MCU PWB and Size Switch Assembly
• MCU PWB and Feed Solenoid
• MCU PWB and Tray N/P Sensor
• MCU PWB and Low Paper Sensor

§1 0. MCU PWB, Main P/H Assembly


Connection between: • MCU PWB and Main P/H Assembly

§1 1. MCU PWB, Main P/H Assembly, MSI Assembly


Connection between: • MCU PWB and Main P/H Assembly
• Main P/H Assembly and MSI Assembly

Chapter A APPENDIX A-31


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3 Notations on the Diagrams for the Wiring and


Table A-19. Notations in Use (2/2)
Signal Descriptions between Components
The following table gives the notations used in the wiring diagrams on
the following pages.

NOTE: Standard and common symbols are not described.

Table A-18. Notaions in Use (1/2)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-32


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3.1 Wiring Diagram - §1  LVPS overcurrent protection circuit


If the power voltage (24VDC/5VDC) is shorted, all power is turned
Table A-20. Signal Description - §1 off. After the shorted state is canceled, the system recovers by
Signal Name Description
turning off the power and by turning on again after 2 or 3 minutes
HEATER ON (L) 5VDC Control signal to turn the P/R Heater and H/R Heater
later.

24VDC-I/L
ON/OFF.
Relay control signal to detect the interlock switches
 LVPS overvoltage protection circuit
If the power voltage (24VDC/5VDC) becomes overvoltage, all power
and interlock connectors. Relay control signal in the
LVPS. is turned off. The operating point is 7VDC or less for 5VDC and
5VDC-LD Power source voltage for the LD Assembly in the ROS 27~36VDC (reference) for 24VDC. The system recovers by turning
Assembly. off the power and by turning on again after 2 or 3 minutes later.
SOS Scan start reference signal based on the light input to
the SOS Sensor in the SOS PWB.  Power off by Front Cover Switch R
VREF Reference voltage for the target light quantity. When the Front Cover Switch R is turned off, the 24VDC-I/L circuit
LD ENB Control signal that enables the LD to turn on or forces is shut off, and the power supply to the MCU PWB (24VDC) and the
it to turn off. (High: OFF/Low: ON) ROS Assembly (LD Assembly) (5VDC-LD) is turned off. If the Front
SCANNER MOTOR ON (L) Control signal to turn the Scanner Motor in the ROS Cover Switch R is turned on, the 24VDC-I/L is input to the LVPS
5V Assembly ON/OFF. Relay circuit and the 24VDC and 5VDC-LD are output from the
PCONT Mode control signal to control the LD light quantity LVPS. The Front Cover Switch R is also an interlock switch for the
(APC). (Low: Sample mode/High: Hold mode)
5VDC-LD circuit.
VDATA Pixel data signal to turn the LD ON/OFF. (High: ON/
Low: OFF)
FRONT COVER SWITCH Signal to detect the Front Cover open (OFF)/close
ON (L) 5VDC (ON) from the Front Cover Switch L. W A R N IN G The Front Cover Switch R and Top Cover Switch are
interlock switches that prevent exposure to the laser
beam. Never tamper with these switches. Direct eye
exposure to the laser beam may cause eye injury or
blindness. For any operation involving these switches,
follow the instructions in this manual.

Chapter A APPENDIX A-33


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-37. Wiring Diagram - §1

Chapter A APPENDIX A-34


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3.2 Wiring Diagram - §2

Table A-21. Signal Description - §2


Signal Name Description
LED ON (L) 5VDC Control signal to turn the LED ON/OFF in the ADC
Sensor (ADC Sensor Assembly).
ADC SIG Measurement signal from the ADC Sensor (ADC
Sensor Assembly). (Analog)
ADC SOLENOID ON (L) Control signal to turn the ADC Solenoid (ADC Sensor
24VDC Assembly) ON/OFF.
ERASE LAMP ON (H) 5VDC Control signal to turn the LED ON/OFF in the Erase
Lamp Assembly.
WASTE TONER SENSED Signal from the Waste Toner Sensor to detect the full
(H) 5VDC Waste Toner Box.
TONER BOX SENSED (L) Signal from the Toner Box Sensor to detect the Waste
5VDC Toner Box (Low: Waste Toner Box/High: No Waste
Toner Box).
CRUM DATA Write/read data to/from the Crum Assembly (Drum
Cartridge).
CRUM CLOCK Clock signal in the Crum Assembly (Drum Cartridge).

 ADC SIG signal


The voltage on the normal drum surface without a toner image is
about 3.5VDC.
 ADC Solenoid coil resistance: 36Ω ±10% (20°C)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-35


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-38. Wiring Diagram - §2

Chapter A APPENDIX A-36


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3.3 Wiring Diagram - §3

Table A-22. Wiring Diagram - §3


Signal Name Description
DTS CONT Output control signal for the DTS output. (Analog)
DTS ON (L) 24VDC Control signal to turn the DTS output ON/OFF.
2BTR MONI Current monitor signal for the 2nd BTR output. (Analog)
2BTR CONT Output control signal for the 2nd BTR output. (Analog)
2BTR ON (L) 24VDC Control signal to turn the 2nd BTR output ON/OFF.
1BTR MONI Voltage monitor signal for the 1st BTR output. (Analog)
1BTR CONT Output control signal for the 1st BTR output. (Analog)
1BTR ON (L) 24VDC Control signal to turn the 1st BTR output ON/OFF.
DB DC CONT Output control signal for the DB output (DC component). (Analog)
DB DC ON (L) 24VDC Control signal to turn the DB output (DC component) ON/OFF.
DB AC ON (L) 24VDC Control signal to turn the DB output (AC component) ON/OFF.
BCR DC CONT Output control signal for the BCR output (DC component). (Analog)
BCR ON (L) 24VDC Control signal turn the BCR output ON/OFF.
BCR Charging output to the BCR (Drum Cartridge) from HVPS.
• This is output in response to the BCR DC CONT signal when the BCR ON(L) 24VDC signal is
turned on.
DB Output from the HVPS to the Developer Contact Assembly (Magnet Roll in the Developer
Assembly).
• This signal is output after overlaying the AC component (DB AC) on the DC component.
• This is output in response to the DB DC CONT signal when the DB DC ON(L) 24VDC signal is
turned on.
1st BTR Output for the 1st transfer from the HVPS to the 1st BTR (Transfer Assembly)
• This signal is output in response to the 1BTR CONT signal when the 1BTR ON(L) 24VDC signal
is turned on.
2nd BTR Output for the 2nd transfer from the HVPS to the Contact Roll (Back Up Roll) (Transfer Assembly).
• This signal is output in response to the 2BTR CONT signal when the 2BTR ON(L) 24VDC signal
is turned on.
DTS Output from the HVPS to discharge the electricity on the Detack Saw (2nd BTR Assembly).
• This signal is output in response to the DTS CONT signal when the DTS ON(L) 24VDC signal is
turned on.

Chapter A APPENDIX A-37


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-39. Wiring Diagram - §3

Chapter A APPENDIX A-38


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3.4 Wiring Diagram - §4

Table A-23. Signal Description - §4


Signal Name Description
USED CARTRIDGE Signal to detect new/old Toner cartridge (Low: New/
SENSED (H) 5VDC High: Old).
SENSOR ON (H) 5VDC Sensor power ON/OFF signal for the Used Cartridge
Sensor and Cartridge Sensor (High: ON/Low: OFF).
CARTRIDGE SENSED (L) Toner Cartridge detection signal (Low: Toner
5VDC Cartridge/High: No Toner Cartridge).
ROTARY HOME SENSED Signal from the Rotary Sensor to detect the Rotary
(H) 5VDC Frame Assembly protrusion.
DEVELOPER CLUTCH ON Control signal to turn the Developer Clutch ON/OFF.
(L) 24VDC
DEVELOPER FAN HALF- Signal to detect the rotation of the Developer Fan
SPEED (H) 24VDC (Low: Fast/High: Slow).
DEVELOPER FAN ON (H) Control signal to turn the Developer Fan ON/OFF.
24VDC
DISPENSE MOTOR ON( L) Control signal to turn the Dispense Motor Assembly
24VDC ON/OFF.

 Developer Clutch coil resistance: 150Ω ±10% (20°C)


 Developer Fan
 Number of polarities: 4
 Number of rotations: 3400 ±200rpm (Fast) / 2500 ±250rpm
(Slow)
 Dispense Motor Assembly
 Motor type: DC synchronous motor
 Number of polarities: 8
 Number of rotations (motor controlled): 113.9 ±11.4rpm
 Rotation direction: Counterclockwise (viewed from the rear)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-39


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-40. Wiring Diagram - §4

Chapter A APPENDIX A-40


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3.5 Wiring Diagram - §5  Rotation/Hold by the signals


See the table below:
Table A-24. Wiring Diagram - §5 Table A-26. Rotation/Hold by the signals
Signal Name Description ROTARY Rotary Motor
ROTARY MOTOR HOLD (L) Signal to control the hold current for the Rotary MOTOR ON (L) Hold (L) Status
5VDC Motor Assembly. 5VDC 5VDC
ROTARY MOTOR ON (L) Control signal to turn ON/OFF the driving power for The Rotary Motor Assembly rotates.
5VDC the Rotary Motor Assembly. Low High (Actual rotation is controlled by the Rotary
Motor Clock signal.)
ROTARY MOTOR CLOCK Clock signal for the Rotary Motor Assembly.
The Rotary Motor Assembly is in the hold
A, /A, B, /B Excitation signal for the Rotary Motor Assembly. Low Low
state.
 Rotary Motor Assembly High Low or High
The Rotary Motor Assembly does not rotate
and is not in the hold state.
 Motor type: Hybrid stepping motor
 Rotation direction: Clockwise (viewed the rear)
 Step angle: 1.8°±0.18°
 Coil resistance: 0.9~0.95Ω ±10% (25°C)
 Excitation sequence : See the table below. (*: Excitation)

Table A-25. Excitation Sequence


Step (2-phase excitation)
Phase
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

/B * * * *

B * * * *

A * * * *

/A * * * *

Chapter A APPENDIX A-41


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-41. Wiring Diagram - §5

Chapter A APPENDIX A-42


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3.6 Wiring Diagram - §6  Process Motor Assembly


 Motor type: Permanent magnet field DC servo motor
Table A-27. Wiring Diagram - §6
Signal Name Description
 Number of polarities: 3-phase/12 polarities
BTR CAM SOLENOID ON (L)
24VDC
Control signal to turn the BTR Cam Solenoid ON/
OFF.
 Number of rotations (motor controlled): 1735.358rpm ±0.5%
(Standard speed) / 867.679rpm ±0.5% (Half speed)

TR0-M SENSED( L) 5VDC Signal from the TR0 Sensor to detect the TR0 mark
on the IBT Belt Assembly. Rotation direction: Counterclockwise (viewed from the rear)
P/H MOTOR ON (L) 5VDC Control signal to turn the P/H Motor Assembly ON/
OFF.  Abnormal rotation detection: When the number of rotations
P/H MOTOR HALF-SPEED (L) Signal to control the speed of the P/H Motor (motor controlled) changes 6.25% or more.
5VDC
P/H MOTOR FAIL (H) 5VDC
Assembly (High: Standard speed/Low: Half speed).
Fail detection signal for the P/H Motor Assembly
 P/H Motor Assembly
(High: Abnormal/Low: Normal)  Motor type: Permanent magnet field DC servo motor
PROCESS MOTOR ON (L)
5VDC
Control signal to turn the Process Motor Assembly
ON/OFF.  Number of polarities: 3-phase/8 polarities or 3-phase/12
PROCESS MOTOR HALF- Signal to control the speed of the Process Motor polarities
SPEED (L) 5VDC
PROCESS MOTOR CLOCK
Assembly (High: Standard speed/Low: Half speed).
Clock output signal for the Process Motor
 Number of rotations (motor controlled): 1667rpm ±0.5%
Assembly. (Standard speed) / 833.5rpm ±0.5% (Half speed)
 Rotation direction: Counterclockwise (viewed from the rear)
 Abnormal rotation detection: When the number of rotations
(motor controlled) changes 6.25% or more. (The P/H Motor FAIL
signal becomes High.)
 BTR Cam Solenoid coil resistance: 220Ω ±10% (20°C)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-43


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-42. Wiring Diagram - §6

Chapter A APPENDIX A-44


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3.7 Wiring Diagram - §7

Table A-28. Wiring Diagram - §7


Signal Name Description
AC N Neutral signal in the AC input from the power
supply (Heater power supply voltage).
AC L Line signal in the AC input from the power supply
(Heater power supply voltage).
TEMP. Signal that holds the Heat Roll surface
temperature. (Analog) (The temperature is
measured by the Thermistor in the Temperature
Sensor Assembly. The temperature is used to
determine the Fuser control temperature.)
FUSER EXIT PAPER SENSED Signal from the Fuser Exit Sensor to detect the
(L) 5VDC paper in the Fuser.
FUSER ASSEMBLY SENSED Signal to detect the Fuser Assembly connection.
(L) 5VDC
OIL ROLL SENSED (L) 5VDC Signal to detect the Oil Roll Assembly.
NEW OIL ROLL SENSED (L) Signal to detect New/Old of the Oil Roll Assembly.
5VDC • When the power is turned on, a conductivity
check is performed to detect New/Old of the Oil
Roll Assembly.

 Thermal Fuse fusion temperature: 141°C (+0°C/-6°C)


 Thermostat contact opening temperature: 150°C ±5.6°C
 Heater rated power
- P/R Heater: 480 ±24W (50V)
- H/R Heater: 360 ±18W (50V)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-45


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-43. Wiring Diagram - §7

Chapter A APPENDIX A-46


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3.8 Wiring Diagram - §8

Table A-29. Wiring Diagram - §8


Signal Name Description
OIL CAM SOLENOID ON (L) Control signal to turn the Oil Cam Solenoid ON/
24VDC OFF.
EXCHANGE SOLENOID PUSH Control signal to turn ON/OFF the Exchange
ON ( L) 24VDC Solenoid in the push direction (Face-Up ejection).
EXCHANGE SOLENOID PULL Control signal to turn ON/OFF the Exchange
ON (L) 24VDC Solenoid in the pull direction (Face-Down ejection).
CLEANER CAM SOLENOID Control signal to turn the Cleaner Cam Solenoid
ON (L) 24VDC ON/OFF.
FUSER CHUTE FAN ON (H) Control signal to turn the Fuser Chute Fan ON/
24VDC OFF.
FUSER IN PAPER SENSED (L) Signal from the Fuser In Sensor to detect the paper
5VDC in the Fuser.
ENVIRONMENT TEMP. Signal that holds the environment temperature
data. (Analog) (The temperature is measured by
the Thermistor in the Environment Sensor.)

 Oil Cam Solenoid coil resistance: 220Ω ±10% (20°C)


 Exchange Solenoid coil resistance: 45Ω ±10% (20°C)
[24VDC↔signals]
 Cleaner Cam Solenoid coil resistance: 220Ω ±10% (20°C)
 Fuser Chute Fan
 Number of polarities: 4
 Number of rotations: 5000 ±1000rpm

Chapter A APPENDIX A-47


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-44. Wiring Diagram - §8

Chapter A APPENDIX A-48


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3.9 Wiring Diagram - §9


Table A-31. Size Switch Signal
Table A-30. Wiring Diagram - §9 Paper Size Switch Voltage
Paper size
Signal Name Description SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 (Unit: V DC)
[1] SIZE SWITCH Signal to detect the size of the paper in Tray 1. No paper tray 0 0 0 0 0.275~0.293
(Analog)
B5 (LEF) *1
[1] FEED SOLENOID ON (L) Control signal to turn the Feed Solenoid ON/OFF in 1 1 0 0 3.671~3.715
EXECUTIVE (LEF) *2
24VDC Tray 1.
A4 (LEF) 0 1 0 0 1.396~1.445
[1] TRAY PAPER SENSED (L) Signal from the Tray No Paper Sensor to detect the
LETTER (LEF) 1 0 1 0 3.098~3.152
5VDC paper in Tray 1. (High: No paper/Low: Paper in the
tray) A4 (SEF) *1
0 1 1 1 2.248~2.298
[1] LOW PAPER SENSED (L) Signal from the Low Paper Sensor to detect low LETTER (SEF) *2
5VDC paper level in Tray 1. (High: Enough paper/Low: LEGAL 14” (SEF) 1 1 1 0 4.247~4.276
Low paper level) B4 (SEF) 0 1 0 1 1.680~1.730

 Feed Solenoid coil resistance: 90Ω ±10% (20°C)


A3 (SEF)
LEDGER (SEF)
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0.834~0.871
1.116~1.157
 Size Switch signal 12” x 8” (SEF)
Irregular
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0.554~0.583
4.537~4.554
The paper size in the paper tray is determined by the Paper Size
<Not used> 1 0 0 0 -
Switch ON/OFF. (The Paper Size Switch is on the Size Switch
<Not used> 1 0 0 1 -
Assembly). The following table gives the paper sizes, Paper Size <Not used> 0 1 1 0 -
Switch states (ON/OFF) and the switch voltages. <Not used> 1 0 1 1 -
NOTE:The Paper Size Switches are defined as SW1, SW2, <Not used> 1 1 0 1 -
SW3 and SW4 (viewed from the front of the printer). It is
NOTE: If the ON/OFF state is the same for the Paper Size Switches,
defined that ON: 1 and OFF:0.
one of the following is selected depending on the specifications
of the printer.
*1: The mm (millimeter) unit specification
*2: The inch unit specification

Chapter A APPENDIX A-49


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-45. Wiring Diagram - §9

Chapter A APPENDIX A-50


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3.10 Wiring Diagram - §10

Table A-32. Wiring Diagram - §10


Signal Name Description
REGISTRATION PAPER Signal from the Registration Sensor to detect the
SENSED (L) 5VDC paper on the Main P/H Assembly.
FRONT OHP WHITE SENSED Signal from the Front OHP Sensor to detect the
(L) 5VDC white band on the OHP film (for color).
• To detect the front/back of an OHP film, see
“Section 10: 7.3 OHP Side Detection Control”.
REAR OHP WHITE SENSED Signal from the Rear OHP Sensor to detect the
(L) 5VDC white band on the OHP film (for color).
• To detect the front/back of an OHP film, see
“Section 10: 7.3 OHP Side Detection”
PRE-REGISTRATION Control signal to turn the Pre-Registration Clutch
CLUTCH ON (L) 24VDC ON/OFF.
REGISTRATION CLUTCH ON Control signal to turn the Registration Clutch ON/
(L) 24VDC OFF.
REGISTRATION BRAKE Control signal to turn the Registration Brake Clutch
CLUTCH ON (L) 24VDC ON/OFF.
MAIN P/H ASSEMBLY Signal to detection the Main P/H Assembly
SENSED (L) 5VDC connection.

 Pre-Registration Clutch coil resistance: 172Ω ±10% (20°C)


 Registration Clutch coil resistance: 172Ω ±10% (20°C)
 Registration Brake Clutch coil resistance: 172Ω ±10% (20°C)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-51


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-46. Wiring Diagram - §10

Chapter A APPENDIX A-52


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3.11 Wiring Diagram - §11

Table A-33. Wiring Diagram - §11


Signal Name Description
MSI EDGE PAPER SENSED Signal from the MSI Edge Sensor to detect the
(L) 5VDC paper in the MSI paper feeder. (High: No paper/
Low: Paper in the feeder)
• This signal controls the paper feed interval in the
2UP mode.
MSI OHP SENSED (L) 5VDC Signal from the MSI OPH Sensor to detect the OHP
film on the MSI Assembly.
MSI LONG PAPER SENSED Signal from the MSI Long N/P Sensor to detect the
(L) 5VDC paper on the MSI Assembly. (High: No paper/Low:
Paper on the MSI Assembly)
• This signal is valid only when the print control
specifies the paper size 150mm or longer in the
transportation direction.
MSI SHORT PAPER SENSED Signal from the MSI Short N/P Sensor to detect the
(L) 5VDC paper on the MSI Assembly. (High: No paper/Low:
Paper on the MIS Assembly)
• This signal is valid only when the print control
specifies the paper size shorter than 150mm in
the transportation direction.
MSI CLUTCH ON (L) 24VDC Control signal to turn the MSI Clutch ON/OF.
PICK UP SOLENOID ON (L) Control signal to turn the Pick Up Solenoid ON/
24VDC OFF.

 MSI Clutch coil resistance: 172Ω ±10% (20°C)


 Pick Up Solenoid coil resistance: 90Ω ±10% (20°C)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-53


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-47. Wiring Diagram - §11

Chapter A APPENDIX A-54


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3.12 Wiring Diagram - §12

Table A-34. Wiring Diagram - §12


Signal Name Description
TOP EXIT PAPER SENSED (L) Signal from the Top Exit Sensor to detect the paper
5VDC on the Exit Lower Assembly.
EXIT CHUTE SWITCH ON (L) Signal from the Exit Chute Switch to detect open/
5VDC close of the Exit Upper Assembly. (OFF: Open/ON:
Close)
FULL STACK SENSED (L) Signal from the Full Stack Sensor to detect the Full
5VDC Stack state in the Top Cover. (High: Not Full Stack/
Low: Full Stack)
FUSER FAN HALF-SPEED (H) Signal to control the rotation of the Fuser Fan.
24VDC (Low: Fast/High: Slow)
FUSER FAN ON (H) 24VDC Control signal to turn the Fuser Fan ON/OFF.

 Fuser Fan
 Number of polarities: 4
 Number of rotations: 3400 ±200rpm (Fast) / 1900 ±250rpm
(Slow)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-55


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-48. Wiring Diagram - §12

Chapter A APPENDIX A-56


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.3.3.13 Wiring Diagram - §13

Table A-35. Wiring Diagram - §13


Signal Name Description
TEST PRINT ON (L) 5VDC Setting this signal to LOW (connecting to SG)
activates the internal test print.

Chapter A APPENDIX A-57


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-49. Wiring Diagram - §13

Chapter A APPENDIX A-58


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.4 Component Layout

Figure 1-50. C235MAIN (1)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-59


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure 1-51. C235MAIN (2)

Chapter A APPENDIX A-60


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.5 Circuit Diagrams


See the following pages for the circuit diagrams for the EPL-C8000.

Chapter A APPENDIX A-61


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.6 Large Capacity Paper Unit  Feeding speed: B/W = 16 ppm (A4, LEF, 2UP*)
Color= 4 ppm (A4, LEF, 2UP*)
This section provides information on the optional Large Capacity Paper NOTE:2UP mode enables the printer to run 2 pages at a time. It
Unit. is available with the A4/LETTER sizes or smaller.

The Large Capacity Paper Unit is installed beneath the printer. It  Paper Handling: Same as for the standard
consists of the 3 paper cassettes (250 sheets x 3) and also universal cassette.
accommodates the standard universal cassette. (Standard A3W
cassette can not be used.) The printer and the Large Capacity Paper
 Power source: DC24V and DC5V supplied from the printer
Maximum =DC24V / 0.6A, DC5V / 0.3A
Unit are electrically connected with connectors, and when the printer is
turned on, the printer detects the Large Capacity Paper Unit and also  Dimensions: 560 mm (W) x 556 mm (D) x 426 mm (H)
the paper sizes and paper presence/absence condition in the cassettes. (Unpacked)
Power is supplied to the Large Capacity Paper Unit via the printer.  Weight (Unpacked):

A.6.1 Product Specifications


 Large Capacity Paper Unit with 3
standard universal cassettes installed: 24.2 kg

A.6.1.1 Basic Specifications  Standard universal cassette: 2.8 kg

 Product name: Large Capacity Paper Unit  Noise: Same as for the printer.

 Feeding method: Single-sided separator and roller system


(Automatic operation) A.6.1.2 Paper Specifications

 Installation: Beneath the printer The specifications for the standard universal paper cassette for the

 Driving method: Integrated motor drive system


printer are applicable.

 Interface: Performs the following: A.6.1.3 Environmental Condition


 Sends the signals below to the printer:  Operating: Same as for the printer.
- Large Capacity Paper Unit detection signal
- Paper presence/absence detection signal
 Storage: Same as for the printer.
- Paper near end detection signal  Transportation:
- Paper size detection signal - Drop test: 460 mm (H) (1 corner, 6 surfaces, 3 sides)
 Receives the feeding start signal
- Others: Same as for the printer.

Chapter A APPENDIX A-68


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.6.1.4 Reliability and Durability A.6.2 Installation


NOTE: Specifications given here are applicable when the Large Follow the steps below when installing the Large Capacity Paper Unit.
Capacity Paper Unit is connected to the printer.
1. Turn the printer off and disconnect the power cable and earth cable.
 MPBF: 32,000 pages (80,000 images or more *1)
 Paper feed reliability: See Table A-36.
2. Lock the 4 casters on the Large Capacity Paper Unit.

Table A-36. Paper Feed Reliability NOTE: In the following step, be sure to carry the printer by 4 people or
Recommended paper General paper more.
Paper jam rate 1/3000 or less 1/2000 or less
Multiple feeding rate 1/800 or less 1/500 or less
3. Lift up the printer, keeping it level, and lower it carefully so the pegs
on the top of the La rge C ap acity P a per U nit fit in th e so ckets in th e
 Life: 135 kpv (45 kpv / cassette) *2 prin ter bo ttom .

 Print position accuracy: Same as for the printer. 4. Draw out the top cassette and lift it up to remove.
 Paper skew: Same as for the printer. 5. Turn the 2 screws above the area where the cassettes was to install
*1: Converted to 80,000 images when the job ratio between the the L arge C ap acity P a per U nit to th e printer. T h en p ut th e ca ssette b ack
monochrome and color modes is asummed 1:1, since one page is to the p osition .
composed of 4 images (YMCK) in the color mode.
6. Open the covers at the upper left of the L arge C a pacity P a per U nit
*2: 135 kpv = 180 kpv x 75% back a nd low er le ft of the printe r back. T hen con nect 2 cables to th e
(180 kpv: printer life, 75%: estimated usage rate of the Large co nnectors at the b ack of the p rinte r, and clo se the covers.
Capacity Paper Unit.)

A.6.1.5 Electrical Specifications


Electrical specifications for the Large Capacity Paper Unit are the same
as for the printer when the Large Capacity Paper Unit is connected to
the printer.

A.6.1.6 Applicable Standards


Applicable standards for the Large Capacity Paper Unit are the same as
for the printer when the unit is connected to the printer.

Chapter A APPENDIX A-69


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.6.3 Part List (Large Capacity Paper Unit) Table A-38. Part List (Large Capacity Paper Unit) (2/2)
No. PL No. Part Name
Table A-37. Part List (Large Capacity Paper Unit) (1/2) 31 PL22.1.31 FRONT COVER BRACKET
No. PL No. Part Name 32 PL22.1.32 SHEET CLAMP
1 PL20.1.1 FEEDER UNIT (with 2, 3) 33 PL22.1.33 3TRAY FEEDER CLAMP
2 PL20.1.2 4TRAY FEEDER ASSEMBLY 34 PL22.1.34 FEEDER EME SPRING
3 PL20.1.3 UNIVERSAL TRAY 35 PL22.2.1 FEEDER HIGH ASSEMBLY (with 10-34, 40)
4 PL21.1.1 FEEDER FRONT COVER 36 PL22.2.10 FEEDER DRIVE ASSEMBLY (with 10-34)
5 PL21.1.2 FEEDER REAR COVER 37 PL22.2.11 FEEDER BRACKET
6 PL21.1.3 FEEDER HARNESS COVER 38 PL22.2.12 3TRAY IDLER GEAR-1
7 PL21.1.4 COVER BRACKET 39 PL22.2.13 FEED ROLL ASSEMBLY-3T (with 14-17)
8 PL21.1.5 FEEDER HARNESS CLAMP 40 PL22.2.14 FEED SHAFT-3T
9 PL21.1.10 FEEDER LEFT COVER 41 PL22.2.15 FEED ROLL-3T
10 PL21.1.20 FEEDER RIGHT COVER 42 PL22.2.16 FEED CORE ROLL-3T
11 PL21.1.30 FEEDER CHUTE ASSEMBLY 43 PL22.2.17 FEED ROLL GUIDE-3T
12 PL21.1.31 FEEDER CHUTE SUPPORT 44 PL22.2.18 FEED BEARING-3T
13 PL21.1.40 DOUBLE CASTER 45 PL22.2.19 FEED GEAR-3T
14 PL22.1.1 FEEDER HIGH ASSEMBLY 46 PL22.2.20 FEED SPRING-3T
15 PL22.1.2 TRAY STOPPER-3T 47 PL22.2.21 FEED SOLENOID-3T
16 PL22.1.3 TURN IN CHUTE-3T 48 PL22.2.22 3TRAY IDLER GEAR-2
17 PL22.1.4 FEEDER TOP CHUTE 49 PL22.2.23 3TRAY IDLER GEAR-3
18 PL22.1.5 FEEDER MOTOR ASSEMBLY (with 6, 7) 50 PL22.2.24 TURN ROLL ASSEMBLY-3T
19 PL22.1.6 FEEDER MOTOR 51 PL22.2.25 TURN BEARING-3T
20 PL22.1.7 FEEDER GEAR ASSEMBLY 52 PL22.2.26 TURN CLUTCH-3T
21 PL22.1.8 FEEDER PWB 53 PL22.2.27 TURN CHUTE-3T
22 PL22.1.9 FEEDER HARNESS 54 PL22.2.28 FEED SHAFT GUIDE-3T
23 PL22.1.10 MOTOR HARNESS 55 PL22.2.29 TRAY SENSOR ASSEMBLY-3T (with 30-32)
24 PL22.1.11 SIZE HARNESS 56 PL22.2.30 TRAY N/P BRACKET-3T
25 PL22.1.12 SWITCH HARNESS 57 PL22.2.31 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR
26 PL22.1.13 SIZE BRACKET ASSEMBLY-3T (with 14, 15) 58 PL22.2.32 TRAY N/P ACTUATOR
27 PL22.1.14 SIZE BRACKET-3T 59 PL22.2.33 TRAY HARNESS-3T
28 PL22.1.15 SIZE SWITCH ASSEMBLY 60 PL22.2.34 FEEDER DRIVE CLAMP
29 PL22.1.16 FEEDER CHUTE SWITCH 61 PL22.2.4 LOW PAPER SENSOR (Factory setting option)
30 PL22.1.30 3TRAY FEEDER FRAME

Chapter A APPENDIX A-70


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.6.4 Exploded Diagrams

Figure A-53. PL21.1 Feeder 2

Figure A-52. PL20.1 Feeder 1

Chapter A APPENDIX A-71


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

Figure A-54. PL22.1 Feeder 3 Figure A-55. PL22.2 Feeder 4

Chapter A APPENDIX A-72


EPSON EPL-C8000 Rev. B

A.6.5 Wiring Diagrams

Figure 1-56. Master Wiring Diagram

Chapter A APPENDIX A-73

You might also like